www.sciencefiction.org.

rs sf baza: Udruenje Fanovi naune fantastike SCI&FI Beograd-Srbija

2012!!!!
Engleski-razni dokumenti Kljune rei: Kali Yuga 2012 countdown clock - 2012 - Another Anunnaki Hoax - 2012 - Ascension, Rebirth and the Dimensional Shift - 2012 - Bright Side - 2012 - Cataclysmic Breakdown or Y2K makeover? ET/UFO Contact? DNA/Consciousness Transformation? - 2012 - Doom Isn't What It Used to Be - 2012 - Doomsday & The Omega Point - 2012 - Doom - The Rest of The Story - 2012 - Hoagland & Wilcock on Coast to Coast - 2012 May Bring The Perfect Storm - Solar Slares, Systems Sollapse - 2012 - Nexus Event and The Gathering - Astralwalker - 2012 - Stargate of The Gods - 2012 - The Astronomy Connection - 2012 - What's New? - 2012 and The Ascension - From Cosmic Awareness Channeled Readings - An Occult Translation of the Roswell Event - Count Down to 2012 - Are You On a 2012-13 Catastrophic Timeline? Or Are You On a 2012-13 Positive Future Timeline? - Countdown to 2012 - Reflections on Kali Yuga, The Maya Endtime, and The Western Narrative Spell - Dan Burisch and 2012 - DCTP - The Doctrine of The Convergent Timeline Paradox - Doomsday in 2012? - Dr. Michael Salla Comments on Mt. Adams Statement - 2012 & A Golden Age - Forget Doomsday 2012 Forecasts - They're Already Here, But The Shift Is Up To Us - Has the Galactic Superwave of 2012 Begun? - Exopolitics and A Galactic Superwave - Imploding Cycle of Energy Increase Culminating in 2012-13 AD - Is 2012 Earth's Real Golden Age?

- Izapa - The Origin Place of the 2012 Calendar and the 2012 Prophecy - Mayan Endtime - 2012 - Zodiacal Ages - Mayas Actuales Hablan Sobre el 2012 y Desmitifican La Versin Occidental - Might 2012 Mean Something? - End of Mayan Calendar 2012 - Physics of The Ascension - The 2012 Apocalypse - And How to Stop It - The 2012 Nexus Event - Book One - An Unknown Form Of Energy Is Coming Our Way - The 2012 Nexus Event - Book Two - The Future and Beyond - Main File - The Physics of 2012 - The Real Doomsday? - December 2012 - The Risks of Believing That The Mayan Calendar Ends December 21, 2012! - The World Cataclysm in 2012 - Project Camelot Interviews Patrick Geryl - UFO-ET Message of Dimensional Shift in 2012 - Brought by Dr. Martin Luther King Relative and Contactee - What is The Galactic Alignment in 2012? - Why December 21, 2012? Additional Information - 2009 to 2012 - ET Contact - The Galactic Underworld - Discovery of Life on Mars - A Conversation With Barbara Hand Clow - 2012 Earth Timelines and The Secret Mars Agenda - Afirmaciones Mayas y Creencias acerca del 2012 - Evidencias - All Life on Earth is United - An Electrical Engineer on 2012-2013 - Whistleblower Testimony - rmate Para Los Tiempos Venideros! - Atrayendo el Maana - Conciencia Mas Alta se Expande Entre la Humanidad - Attracting Tomorrow - Higher Awareness Unfolding Among Mankind - Back From The Future - Gold in January 2012 - Becoming a Multidimensional Being - C14, Pole Shift, Noodle Soup - Cost of Electric Grid Failure From 2012 Solar Storms Avoidable - Cycles of Precession - Cyclology - The Mathematics of History - Decoding The Past - Doomsday 2012 - Electrical Power Grid to Be Blasted by 2012 Solar Storms - Emerging From Denial - Final Mayan Calendar Steps to 2012 - The Beginning of The Sixth Night - Global Warming, The War on Terrorism, and The Extraterrestrial Link to "Planet X" - Holes in Earth's Magnetic Cloak Let The Sun In - Hyperdimensional Nebulae - Cubes in Space and the 2012 Case - Implosion Point - In the Roots of the Milky Way Tree - The Mayan Lord of Creation and 2012 - Link to Sun Spot 2012 Cataclysm Material - Mega Sun Spot Cycle - Looking Ahead - 2010-2015 - Magnetic Tips - Mayan Prophecies and Calendar

- Mayans Predicted The End of An Era in 2012 - Not Necessarily of The World - Mayan Statements and Beliefs About 2012 - The Evidence - Obama Release of UFO Files Will Prepare Humanity For 2012 Solar Waves - On The Mayan Calendar - Out From Under Majestic - Dan Burisch Uncensored - A Video Interview with Dan Burisch - Pole Shift & Pole Reversal in 2012 - Predicted Mass UFO Sighting - Will it Force Disclosure to Occur? - Prophecies of Mother Shipton for The Future - Safe Locations - Dialog with the Zetas on the Relative Safety of Locations around the World... - Secret Plan To Kill Internet by 2012 Leaked? - Shift of Ages - Solar System Entering Dangerous Interstellar Energy Cloud - Stargate: 2004-2012 - Venus Transit - Sun and Earth 2012 Polar Shifts - Talking to Bill Ryan and Kerry Cassidy - Paranexus Radio Interview Transcript - The 33 Arks of Soul Resonance - Investment Futures - The Ascension Process - The Atlantean Conspiracy - Exposing the Illuminati - from Atlantis to 2012 - The Biggest World Change Secret - Jake Simpson - The Complete WebBot ALTA 1309 Report 2009 - INCLUDING PART 6 - The Crossroads of Planetary Destiny - Introduction to The Tree Most Significant Channeling Sources Published - The Earth Changes of 2012 Through 2016 Are Fast Approaching - The Eschaton - The Four Yugas - The Great Solar Cycle and Beyond - The How And Why Of The Mayan End Date In 2012 A.D. - The Institute for Human Continuity a Hoax! - The Killshot - Solar Flares Heading Towards Earth - The Mayan Calendar Ends on December 21, 2012 - What does this mean? - The Mayan Calendar: Prophecy The Sun The Millennium And Man's Future - The Message of the Stargates - The Photon-Belt Encounter - The Return of The Nine - 2012 - The Road to Ascension - A Video Interview With D. Wilcock - The Science Behind 2012 - Interview with Gregg Braden - The Solstice Gateways and the Polar-to-Solar Shift - The Tablet of Destiny - Omens in The Skywriting for 2012 - The Web Bot Project and 2012 - The Writing on The Wall - Ultimate Secret of The Mayan Calendar - Un Ingeniero Elctrico Sobre el 2012-2013 - Testimonio de un Denunciante - Universal Law Supports Collapse of Economy in 2011, Ascension in 2012 - Scientist Says - What is the Galactic Alignment? - Will Extraterrestrial Disclosure or Contact Happen in 2012?

- Zero Sunspots - Global Consciousness, Solar Activity and 2012 Books - The Healing Sun Code - The Secret Science And Religion of The Galactic Core and The Rebirth of Earth In 2012 - by William Henry - 2012 - Project Camelot interviews Patrick Geryl - 2012 Revolution - World Awakening - 2012 - The Future of Mankind - Conspiracy Theory - 2012 - Jesse Ventura - Cosmic and Earth Changes - LaViolette's Theory of Galactic Superwave - Earth Under Fire - Decoding The Past - Doomsday 2012 - End of The Web Bot?! - Everything 2012 - Earth Changes - Exopolitics EarthTransformation Conference 2008 - Alex Collier - Galactic Alignment in 2012 Feared to Cause Pole Shift 2008-2015 - Hopi Prophecy Rock - 2012 The End of Times - It's The End Of The World As We Know It - How 2012 "Enlightenment" Could Lead To Genocide - Jaque Mate - El Peridico Que Slo Saldr Una Vez - Jerry Wills, Council of World's Extraterrestrial From Tau Ceti, Speaks His Truth on 2012 - Kokopelli ... And the End of Time - The 2012 Conference & Futurism Summit - Last News From Bill Deagle - Phone Interview - Lost Books of Nostradamus - 2012 and Ophiuchus - Major Solar Storms in 2012 - Scientists Said - New NASA South Pole Telescope Images of Nibiru Planet X 2012 - Nibiru-Planet X Photos Taken January 2008 - Study Findings - Nostradamus - 2012 - Planet X-Nibiru 2012 Flyby Scenarios - February 2009 Report - Pyramid Power and 2012 - Valery Uvarov - Surviving 2012 and Planet X - SuperWave Theory - 2012 Earth Changes - The 2012 Enigma - The Hyperdimensional Election of Barack Obama and 2012 - The Killshot - Solar Flares Heading Towards Earth - The Secret of Vatican 2012 - U.S. Covers Up Ancient Info Detailing End of Times! - What's So Special About 2012? - Graham Hancock Interviewed by Art Bell Related Reports - ALTA Process Predictions - HalfPastHuman and Clif High - Area 51 Microbiologist Dr. Dan Burisch - Main File - Astrosciences - Exploring The Mysteries of The Universe - Bringers of The Dawn - Mensajeros del Alba - CoEVOLUTION - An Interplanetary Adventure - Consciousness And The Conscious Universe - Denver International Airport and Its Murals - Dramatic Changes in Our Sun - Earth Changes The Photon Belt

- Galactic Superwave - Paul LaViolette - Nibiru - Planeta X - Nostradamus - Popol Vuh - Profecias - RA - The Material and The Law of One - The Cassiopaeans Logs - Cassiopaeans Transcripts from 1994 to 2002 - The End of Our Century - William Henry - Zeitgeist Return to Hyperdimensions End 1 The origins of many things on this planet do not always begin on this world.

Some theorize that astrology developed as humans observed the patterns of stars in the night skies and the movements of celestial bodies. Others believe that languages developed from usage over a long period of time, aided by the advancement in methods of recording the respective languages via pictures and/or symbols. In truth, most of what humans call knowledge comes from aliens, and this knowledge is not justly distributed on the planet. Humans have a history of marking time, breaking it down into years, parts of years, seasons, days, parts of days etc. It is believed by many that calendars were invented by humans to keep track of time.

There are many extant calendars, including the Gregorian, Chinese, Muslim, Jewish, Freemason, Mayan etc. Each of them measures time differently. Some of them are based on lunar movements, others on earthly movements, whilst still others are based on perceived solar movements. Basically, they are all measuring celestial activities, including the rotation and the orbit of the earth. The introduction of calendars was one of many dramatic influences on human culture; the concept of calendars was introduced by off-world ruling elite.

These aliens have interfered with human affairs for a long, long time. They are not humans. However, they impress upon humans on Earth to do various things that humans believe are useful and will lead to cultural and technological advancements.

Whilst calendars have many uses for humans, the concept of calendars, like many other of the concepts imprinted on human minds, have dire and subtle consequences. Of the many surviving calendars, a considerable focus for divining has been on the Aztec/Mayan calendar, which many have interpreted as an indicator of the end of time in the year 2012.

As 2012 approaches, more and more interest is drawn to its ominous consequences. Books, movies, articles are being distributed that focus on the idea of predictions that are attached to the year 2012. Many people have interpreted this to be the date for the end of time, hence, the end of the world. As I have previously written, the Mayan/Aztec calendar was an imposition on the planet that originated from the Anunnaki Elite, who had escaped from their future into the past, which is where they left the Anunnaki Remnants. That is, the Anunnaki Remnants were left on the Earth to fend for themselves and await the return of the Anunnaki Elite, whom the Remnants believed would return to Earth and re-start time. Long ago, the Anunnaki Elite were responsible for the creation of the Aztec/Mayan calendar, which gave the false postulation that 2012 could well be the end of this planet.

Millennia ago, at the time the calendar was manufactured, the Anunnaki Elite thought that they could come back to Earth and re-visit the past to reset the Atu-waa before 2012, but they have failed, and time has run out for them because the Atu-waa had to be re-started before the end of 2008. The prediction of 2012 as the end of the world is not only wrong, it is a cruel and deliberate hoax.

The world will not end in 2012, despite all the fear-mongering propaganda that is being distributed at the behest of the ruling elite on Earth. Many of the people are innocently participating in the distribution of the message because they have been hoodwinked by the ruling elite.

The 2012 calendar threat is similar to the Y2K panic and the nuclear holocaust horror that the ruling elite have instigated and implemented. All three of the events are hoaxes that were designed by the Anunnaki and impressed on people to spread about the planet. Obviously, the 2012 hoax is a longer-standing deception than the nuclear horror threat and the Y2K panic.

The 2012 hoax is also akin to the save the planet message because of greenhouse gases.

From the save the planet message, laws were implemented to, * prohibit incandescent light bulbs * mandate carbon-trading schemes * force ethanol-blend petrol on motorists, ...among other things.

The ideals behind the green movement were initially well intended, but the ruling elite have seized control of the save the planet issue, and it has now become another powerful tool of the One World Government.

The consistent theme throughout the 2012 hoax, the Y2K scare and the greenhouse gas deceptive policies is that all of these weapons were designed by Anunnaki to be used against humans. As I have written previously, the world does not have that much time before it expires, but its due date is NOT 2012!

Even though the physical world will not be extinguished in 2012, the ruling elite will keep frightening people with fallacious information concerning the end of the world message. Things will deteriorate considerably over the next few years, with more severe storms, earthquakes, floods, droughts, heat waves etc, many of which will be artificially induced and compound the fear of the ominous approach of 2012.

Interestingly, by 2012, the consciousnesses of many of the beings on the Earth (regardless of the physical forms they reside in) will have been evacuated or removed from their physical bodies. The replacement consciousnesses will predominantly be of a new strand of artificial consciousness, which will suit the ruling elites plans for world control.

Already, things are changing rapidly. World politics is going through revolutionary change, where many voices are being compressed into a single voice on various issues. It is as though the minds of the world leaders are beginning to express as one. In the midst of these developments and consolidations, there remains conflict among the ruling elite over just whose voice will be the power behind the One World Order. Many things in the world appear to be normal progressions of events. When discussing political events, a twentieth-century U.S. president reportedly stated that nothing in politics happens by chance.

This is another way of saying that things are not always what they appear to be. In reality, nothing on Earth happens by chance alone. The major developments are based on strategies that have been carefully planned and acted upon. The Internet is hailed as an awesome technological advancement, but it is also a powerful tool of the ruling elite.

It is used for prying into personal lives as well as spying on corporate, government and religious affairs around the world. By using the Internet, anyone, including the agents of the ruling elite, can effectively sponsor or destroy individuals, groups, states, nations and entire regions by spreading exaggerations or outright lies about others.

This makes the takeover of world politics a reality.

Anyone or any group that is a threat to the ruling elite or who dares to expose the ruling elite is subjected to, * electronic stalking * ridicule * abuse * humiliation *

threats * character assassinations * slander * outright lies * other coercion to silence or discredit them... When these internet-type tactics are ineffective, then the more conventional media are used to spread lies and false evidence to discredit and punish individuals, groups and even nation states that dare to resist the ruling elite. And, there also remains the terrorizing tactics of subjecting those who resist to physical torture and executions when deemed necessary. The human condition is indelibly stained with blood, including human sacrifices, which Darkness has demanded since time immemorial. Blood from humans and animals has also been demanded by the so-called gods of various cultures. In modern times, blood-thirsty desires are still being played out and forced upon humans.

Even those who would opt for peace are forced into killing sprees, by means of one deception or another. Still others are impressed to kill in the name of righteousness, peace, duty, or justice.

When human sacrifices are restrained for various reasons, animal blood is often substituted. The insatiable thirst of the gods cannot be tamed. They must have their cravings quenched as they quaff blood and more blood. The Anunnaki gods are very unjust in their meting out of punishments and rewards on the planet.

Those who are favored are granted cultural advances, religious insights, written languages, military weapons, power etc. whilst others struggle with rudimentary technology and tools, limited weaponry, and are very vulnerable to the favored ones should the latter decide to colonize the land of those estranged from the Anunnaki gods. Part and parcel with physical killing is Darkness unquenchable thirst for violent behavior, in humans and animals. Darkness has programmed people to participate in violent activities.

Many have attributed violent behavior to what they have identified as the survival instinct. What have been accepted to be instincts are really programmed behaviors that are fed into biological organisms. These instincts can originate from genetic programming, be environmentally assumed, or they can be a combination of genetic and environmental programming. Whilst many wars are fought primarily for economic reasons, there are other reasons for waging war. Wars stem from programmed desires to destroy things and to spill blood. The Anunnaki gods are blood-thirsty; they demand sacrifices from humans who are forced to do their biddings. The horror of nuclear holocaust is not likely to be started by a deranged leader or a rogue nation, as the current propaganda indicates.

The ruling elite have much more control of the situation than to allow such an occurrence.

However, when the ultimate struggle for world control is waged by the most influential alien groups, then a nuclear holocaust is a very likely scenario in determining which group of Anunnaki Remnants will hold control over the One World Government, which will therefore be founded upon bloodlust. As I have written many times in the past, the infighting amongst the ruling elite is primarily within the Reptilian groups. Ultimately, it is the alliance formed by the Secular Reptilians and that of the Religious Reptilians which will battle each other for control of the world. Underpinning this struggle for planetary domination is the powerful Vulturite resistance, which is a force that the Reptilians realize must not be taken lightly.

The united Reptilian front is currently disemboweling the Vulturite powerbase via many means. Two of the primary forces of worldwide colonization over the last millennia were the British Empire and the Roman Catholic Empire. These joined forces in 1492 and presented the original protocols that were later revised and given the name of The Protocols of the Elders of Zion.

But there are many other less powerful ruling elite groups.

Many ancient cultures believe in blood sacrifice to the gods or as offerings to the Earth in return for peace, power, abundance of harvest, fertility. The Old Testament mentions burnt offerings many times, referring to animal sacrifices, a practice that Jesus abhorred. He stressed that the stench of burnt sacrifices should be stripped from the temples of worship. Killing is embedded in human history, and as one would expect given the fickle nature of the Anunnaki gods, it is glorified when done for honourable purposes, yet it is strictly taboo for dishonourable reasons. A lone killer, acting for his or her own purposes is branded a criminal. Twelve jurors can legally order the punishment of this type of killer without raising a whiff of hypocrisy.

A band of killers can also be criminals, and punished for their acts. However, an army of killers can be honourable in its efforts, and individual soldiers from such an army often receive the highest honors for killing enemies.

Such an army and its leaders would not be subjected to criminal allegations unless the army loses the war in which case the military and civilian leaders responsible for the army can then face justice for their activities. * The Lockerbie bomber is a murderous terrorist to most in the West, yet a profound insurgent hero to some in the Muslim world. * Baron von Richthofen was a courageous hero to World War I era Germans, yet an arch villain to the Anglo alliance in that same war. * John Wilkes Booth was considered a hero to some but deemed to be a villain by most for assassinating U.S. President Abraham Lincoln. * The same holds true for Lee Harvey Oswald, who allegedly assassinated U.S. President John F. Kennedy a century later. * Saddam Hussein was a villain to most people in the West, yet a hero to many in the Arab world. When Hussein was convicted and publicly executed on the orders of an official court assembled by the winning side, many in the West were made heroes for their part in killing Hussein, yet they remain vilified to many of the vanquished.

The gleeful cheering of Saddam Husseins public execution is a form of blood-thirsty expression by mobs who were programmed to scream for blood! This same programming was especially witnessed during the French Revolution, when the mobs cheered as each victim was publicly beheaded by the guillotine. Killing is promoted in this world. In fact, the world thrives on blood. What else could be expected in a world that has been under bloodthirsty Anunnaki domination for such a long, long time? And, the killing and violence is not limited to warfare.

It happens in cultural, political and religious achievements, as it does in civilian and military structural manufactures. The Anunnaki have played many cruel tricks on humans, and driven them to excessively violent behavior. The Anunnaki thrive on watching humans kill one another. The construction of the Great Wall of China claimed many human lives, all in the name of defense of the nation.

There is a cultural belief that things that are stained with human sacrifices and blood will be strengthened and fortified. The basic premise of this belief stems from trying to appease the gods and Earth itself. Thus, it is believed that the Great Wall of China has been reinforced and strengthened because people gave their lives constructing it. Legend has it that many human corpses were encased into Chinas Great Wall to strengthen it.

These so-called superstitious beliefs that demand human blood are widespread, and quite common in many cultures throughout the world. The source of this type of thinking comes from the Anunnaki gods, who have deceived people into offering them human sacrifices.

These events are not limited to the ritualistic tossing of virgins into volcanoes. They continue to exist in the world, clothed in many different disguises. Human sacrifice is not only extant, it is prevalent, albeit often cloaked in culturally palatable forms. A very obvious example of human sacrifice is found in wars. Those who are not so nave can readily list many other forms.

So,

* Why do people still pay homage to these bloodthirsty Anunnaki pseudo-gods? * Why do humans fall for Anunnaki deception? * Why are people tricked by insidious Anunnaki hoaxes? * Why does society still honor human sacrifice? 2. 2012 is NOT about doom, disaster or cataclysm.

Real changes are affecting us in body, mind and spirit. New scientific breakthroughs prove that consciousness is not a dead, isolated spark of electrical activity in our nervous system, but rather part of an energetic field throughout the entire Universe. Mainstream Western scientists are only beginning to understand that they missed out on one of the most basic energy fields of the Universe a field that can be scientifically measured, and also has direct effects on how we think and feel, each moment of the day. Evidence proves that a "global brain" is forming on Earth where our thoughts are increasingly affecting the behaviors of others around us. Ultimately this consciousness field appears to be a living, intelligent energy source throughout the entire Cosmos. Many peoples idea of "God" is a preliminary step towards understanding that this Field really does exist.

DNA IS CREATED BY A WAVE This field appears to be responsible for the creation of physical matter AND biological life. It is the chicken AND the egg. Both already exist, in potential, in the Field! The DNA molecule appears to originate as an energetic wave in this Field. These waves, loaded with information, surround you right now as you read these words just like radio, satellite TV and cell-phone signals.

When water runs down the side of a mountain, it captures loose rocks and rolls them into the bottom of the stream bed. Similarly, waves in the Field may be gathering up whatever atoms and molecules they find in a given area particularly where there is liquid water and then push and nudge those little pieces into forming DNA molecules. Little living critters have already been generated spontaneously, in an utterly sterilized environment, from nothing more than distilled water and beach sand that had been super-heated to white-hot levels, where no living thing could possibly have survived within any conventional scientific models. Furthermore, Russian scientists have already proven that plants, animals and amphibians can be completely re-arranged into other species particularly if you catch them in embryonic form. This has nothing to do with cloning or gene splicing. All they do is zap the DNA in the embryo with a beam of light. The light beam carries the wave of another organism in it. In one example, a frog embryo was completely re-arranged, with nothing more than a beam of light, into a salamander. The salamander grew to full adulthood and showed no signs of ever having started as a frog. Its babies emerged as salamanders, not frogs. Our little friend never got sick or died prematurely like normal clones would. How could a solid, real DNA molecule shift around enough to create the codes to build an entirely different body?

The key is that DNA is not a fixed, hard structure. There are indeed many small pieces that can break off from one part of a DNA molecule and move around to another part. Scientists call these little pieces retrotransposons. If you energize a creature like a salamander with a beam of light (or other forms of energy), and then re-direct the beam into the embryo of a frog, the wave will re-arrange the frogs DNA to create a salamander. This is somewhat akin to how rocks will gather in a new area if the stream of water shifts on its way down the mountainside. This mechanism drives life to evolve on Earth spontaneously, in very short periods of time. All the clues to explain this process already exist in the fossil record and in groundbreaking Russian laboratory experiments with DNA. Darwin was wrong. Evolution is not random.

Evolution is part of an Intelligent Design, and we have not seen the end of the story on Earth yet by any means.

GALACTIC ENERGY FIELDS In our presentations we also lay out comprehensive evidence that each galaxy is naturally divided up into regions with different levels of energy "charge", and our entire Solar System is now moving into a more energetic area. We can visibly measure this change by what is already happening throughout the entire Solar System. Various whistleblowers have said the Soviet and American governments knew about this since at least the 1950s, and decided not to share it with the public in order to avoid panic. Just like the frog embryo is zapped by the laser beam that has the salamander code in it, each planet and moon in our Solar System is now being zapped with a higher intensity of energy that is creating measurable changes in temperature, brightness, magnetic field strength, storms and even the speed of rotation in the case of Saturn. All the evidence to prove this already exists in NASA studies it just has never been put all together until now. It explains, for example, why Pluto is getting hotter and hotter even as it drifts farther and farther away from the Sun. We have gathered well over 100 different mainstream scientific references to make the case. Global Warming on Earth is certainly being made worse by our widespread industrial pollution but there are greater energetic causes at work that are creating "global warming" on the Earth AND on all the other planets, where no SUVs (sunlight-ultraviolet) exist. This same instreaming energy is also affecting and changing our DNA, as it has in many other periods of Earths history. This can be measured in the fossil record. This new energetic influence is awakening dormant brain potentials and abilities we would never have dreamed of including the "Law of Attraction". Real scientific evidence shows that all of this is building up to a stunning conclusion in the year 2012 as the Mayan Calendar and other sources predicted. 3. As a designated year of interest, 2012 has been front-loaded with end of the world memes. Will 2012 be a year of cataclysmic breakdown as science, oracle-driven, governmental, and media-created memes suggest? Will 2012 be - like Y2K - an anti-climax in which humanity muddles through? Or will a new, golden age timeline begin for conscious humankind in 2012? How will consciousness transformation and extraterrestrial contact impact humanity, starting in 2012?

Key data addressing this 'Examiner' examination of the possible future shape of: 1. A NASA reports and updates on the 2012 perfect storm, solar flares and power grid systems collapse 2. Opposite data that we may be headed toward a solar Maunder minimum and new ice age 3. ALTA and Web Bot reports on a data gap found between early 2012 running through May 2013, possibly due to solar flare activity 4. Reports supporting a hypothesis that large scale wild card event(s), involving mass extraterrestrial (UFO) sightings or landings in the period leading up to 2012 or beyond 5. The Calleman-Clow time acceleration matrix of the Mayan calendar, which suggests that the alternating sign-wave universe core energy phenomenon ceases after Oct. 28, 2011, and Earth will be set on a gradual setting of a potential to reach advanced utopian planet status - a virtual Garden of Eden. This 'Examiner' series examines objective, empirical evidence for cataclysm on Earth in 2012. The year 2012 may also manifest for individuals as breakdown, breakthrough, or business as usual, depending on an individuals perceptual modality and Exopolitics - Solar cycle 24 & a golden age An introduction to the multi-dimensional factors shaping 2012 entitled Exopolitics: Solar cycle 24 (2009 - 2020) & A Golden Age can be seen in the below video of a presentation by A.L. Webre at Project Camelots Awake and Aware conference.

2012 - Solar flares & the cataclysm meme Will 2012 bring the perfect storm and systems collapse? - The solar flare Carrington event boogeyman Let us examine the spectrum of science-based opinion on the possible impacts of solar storms during the coming solar maximum of solar cycle 24 (2009-2020), which NASA in its latest solar forecast expects in May 2013. At one extreme, a January 2009 report by the National Academy of Sciences funded by NASA warned that solar flares during the solar maximum could cause up to $2 trillion (or more) in damage in the U.S., with millions of potential deaths. As 'Examiner' reported, Mainstream scientific concern about 2012 has grown since a recent National Research Council report funded by NASA and issued by the National Academy of Sciences, entitled Severe Space Weather Events: Understanding Economic and Societal Impact which details the potential devastation of 2012 solar storms on the current planetary energy grid and because of the inter-linkages of a cybernetic society, on our entire human civilization. According to New Scientist, sciences concern is a repetition of the 8-day 1859 Carrington event, a large solar flare accompanied by a coronal mass ejection (CME) that flung billions of tons of solar plasma onto the earths magnetosphere and disrupted Victorian-era magnetometers and the world telegraph system. The New Scientist states, The report outlines the worst case scenario for the U.S. The perfect storm is most likely on a spring or autumn night in a year of heightened solar activity - something like 2012. Around the equinoxes, the orientation of the Earth's field to the sun makes us particularly vulnerable to a plasma strike. The next solar maximum is expected to occur in [2013]. New Scientist reports that Mike Hapgood, head of the European Space Agency's space weather team states, We're in the equivalent of an idyllic summer's day. The sun is quiet and benign, the quietest it has been for 100 years, but it could turn the other way. The modern electrical high-power grid magnifies the impact of solar flares. Since the grid is linked into major aspects of modern society, the effects of another Carrington event would be devastating. The National Academy of Sciences report states: A severe space weather event in the US could induce ground currents that would knock out 300 key transformers within about 90 seconds, cutting off the power for more than 130 million people. The New Scientist states: According to the NAS report, the impact of what it terms a "severe geomagnetic storm scenario" could be as high as $2 trillion. And that's just the first year after the storm. The NAS puts the recovery time at four to 10 years. It is questionable whether the US would ever bounce back.' A more perfect storm? The hole in the earths magnetic field

According to a December 16, 2008 report, NASAs THEMIS spacecraft has discovered a hole in earths magnetic field that is 10 times as large as previously thought. The magnetosphere, which is designed to protect earth from the plasma of solar flares, now has a hole in it four times the size of the earth. According to the NASA report, Northern IMF events don't actually trigger geomagnetic storms but they do set the stage for storms by loading the magnetosphere with plasma. A loaded magnetosphere is primed for auroras, power outages, and other disturbances that can result when, say, a CME (coronal mass ejection) hits. The solar maximum is expected in 2012. University of New Hampshire scientist Jimmy Raeder states, We're entering Solar Cycle 24. For reasons not fully understood, CMEs in even-numbered solar cycles (like 24) tend to hit Earth with a leading edge that is magnetized north. Such a CME should open a breach and load the magnetosphere with plasma just before the storm gets underway. It's the perfect sequence for a really big event." 2012 - Fire or ice? The maunder minimum extremists At the other extreme, some scientists are forecasting not solar storms, but the return of a new ice age for the 2012 year range. As 'Examiner' has reported, in an April 2, 2009 article, retired U.S. Navy physicist and engineer James A. Marusek writes: The sun has gone very quiet as it transitions to Solar Cycle 24. We are now at a crossroad. Two paths lie before us. Both are marked with a signpost that reads Danger! Down one path lie monstrous solar storms. Down the other path lie several decades of crushing cold temperatures and global famine. A quiet sun will cause temperatures globally to take a nose-dive. We will experience temperatures that we have not seen in over 200 years, during the time of the early pioneers. (2) The Sun slipping quietly towards a Dalton Minimum or even a Grand Minima such as a Maunder Minimum. Climate change is primarily driven by nature. It has been true in the days of my father and his father and all those that came before us. Because of science, not junk science, we have slowly uncovered some of the fundamental mysteries of nature. Our Milky Way galaxy is awash with cosmic rays. These are high-speed charged particles that originate from exploding stars. Because they are charged, their travel is strongly influenced by magnetic fields. Our sun produces a magnetic field wrapped in the solar winds that extends to the edges of our solar system. This field deflects many of the cosmic rays away from Earth. But when the sun goes quiet

(minimal sunspots), this field collapses inward allowing high-energy cosmic rays to penetrate deeper into our solar system. As a result, far greater numbers collide with Earth and penetrate down into the lower atmosphere where they ionize small particles of moisture (humidity) forming them into water droplets that become clouds. Low-level clouds reflect sunlight back into space. "An increase in Earth's cloud cover produce a global drop in temperature. If the sun becomes quieter than the old solar cycles, producing more than 1028 spotless days, then we might slip into a Dalton Minimum or maybe even a Grand Minima such as the Maunder Minimum. This solar state will last for decades. Several solar scientists have predicted this will begin in Solar Cycle 25, about a decade from now. But a few have predicted this will occur now in Solar Cycle 24. A quiet sun will cause temperatures globally to take a nose-dive. We will experience temperatures that we have not seen in over 200 years, during the time of the early pioneers. Temperatures are already falling. Satellites provide generally the most accurate atmospheric temperature measurements covering the entire globe. From the peak year 1998, the lower Troposphere temperatures globally have fallen around 1/2 degree Celsius due to the quiet sun. This is despite the fact that during that same time period, atmospheric carbon dioxide (at Mauna Loa) has risen 5% from 367 ppm to 386 ppm. The main threat from a Dalton Minimum or Maunder Minimum event is famine and starvation (affecting millions or hundreds of millions worldwide) due to shortened growing seasons and harsher weather. In the past, in addition to great famines, this cold harsh weather has also lead to major epidemics. A taste of the cold weather due to a quiet sun. Evidence of the Mississippi River, Ohio River, Allegheny River, Delaware River and Hudson River at the New York Harbor freezing and of very harsh winters. Recent periods of quiet sun were the Dalton Minimum (1790-1830 A.D.), the Maunder Minimum (1645-1715 A.D.) and the Sprer Minimum (1420 to 1570 A.D.). The Maunder Minimum and Sprer Minimum were solar Grand Minima and each were individually referred to as the Little Ice Age. 2012 - Solar Cycle 24 will peak in May 2013 with a below-average number of sunspots There is uncertainty and published misinformation about solar cycle 24. One unofficial source who charges his readers money for his articles - Mitch Battros - states, "Solar Cycle 24 has begun - and it has been predicted by NASA, NOAA and ESA to be up to 50% stronger than its 'record breaking' predecessor Cycle 23 which produced the largest solar flare ever recorded. The Sun will reach its 'apex' (maximum) in late 2011 into 2012." A recent prediction by NASA contradicts Mitch Battros and Earthchangesmedia.com and

states that the solar maximum will be in May 2013, "with a below-average number of sunspots." On May 29, 2009, NASA reported that an international panel of experts led by NOAA and sponsored by NASA has released a new prediction for the next solar cycle. Solar Cycle 24 will peak, they say, in May 2013 with a below-average number of sunspots. If our prediction is correct, Solar Cycle 24 will have a peak sunspot number of 90, the lowest of any cycle since 1928 when Solar Cycle 16 peaked at 78, says panel chairman Doug Biesecker of the NOAA Space Weather Prediction Center. In the same report, NASA also noted that, It is tempting to describe such a cycle as weak or mild, but that could give the wrong impression. "Even a below-average cycle is capable of producing severe space weather, points out Biesecker. The great geomagnetic storm of 1859, for instance, occurred during a solar cycle of about the same size were predicting for 2013." Note that NASA cannot resist highlighting the Carrington event boogeyman to frighten us all about 2012. The 1859 storm - known as the "Carrington Event" after astronomer Richard Carrington who witnessed the instigating solar flare - electrified transmission cables, set fires in telegraph offices, and produced Northern Lights so bright that people could read newspapers by their red and green glow. A recent report by the National Academy of Sciences found that if a similar storm occurred today, it could cause $1 to 2 trillion in damages to society's high-tech infrastructure and require four to ten years for complete recovery. For comparison, Hurricane Katrina caused only $80 to 125 billion in damage. NASA, then, is still promoting the plausibility of Carrington event scenario. A Carrington-like event last took place in 1859, 153 years from 2012. The operant question is: Do Carrington event-like solar flares occur as often as every 153 years? Although another Carrington event-like solar flare is possible, leading edge scientific analysis appears to conclude that, the probabilities of occurrence cannot be assigned with any reasonable accuracy. In The extreme magnetic storm of 12 September 1859, B. T. Tsurutani, Jet Propulsion Laboratory, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California, USA W. D. Gonzalez, Instituto Nacional de Pesquisas Espaciais, Sao Paulo, Brazil G. S. Lakhina and S. Alex, Indian Institute of Geomagnetism, Mumbai/Bombay, India, ...explore the issue of how often 1859 Carrington event-like solar flares occur. They write, It is found that both the 12 September 1859 solar flare energy and the associated coronal mass ejection speed were extremely high but not unique. Other events with more intense properties have been detected; thus a storm of this or even greater intensity may occur again.

Because the data for the high-energy tails of solar flares and magnetic storms are extremely sparse, the tail distributions and therefore the probabilities of occurrence cannot be assigned with any reasonable accuracy. How rare was the 12 September 1859 solar flare/ solar ejecta event? Is it possible that an event of this intensity could happen again in the near future? Since the early measurements of visible white light flares, scientists have determined that there is radiation at a variety of other wavelengths as well. Using general scalings, Lin and Hudson [1976] have estimated the August 1972 flare to have had a total energy ranging from 1032 to 1033 ergs. Kane et al. [1995] have estimated the more recent 1 June 1991 flare to have had an extreme energy of 1034 ergs. For comparison, D. Neidig (private communication, 2001) has calculated the 1859 white light flare energy based on the Carrington [1859] report. The assumptions made are the peak flux is equal to the brightest white light flares measured thus far ( 100% enhancement over the background photospheric intensities), duration of 5 min, area 7 1017 cm2. Assuming a typical flare photometric spectrum (up to 300% brighter in the near-UV), Neidi derived a total optical output of 2 1030 ergs. K. Harvey (private communication, 2001) has estimated that this [1859] flare was most probably 1032 ergs. The recent Kane et al. [1995] results have shown that the previously thought upper limit of 1032 ergs for the energy of a flare can be broken by a wide margin. Our time span of observations has been quite limited (only hundreds of years), and it is therefore doubtful that we have detected events at the saturation limit (either flares or magnetic storms). Can the Sun have flares at superflare energy (10381039 ergs) levels? Most probably not [see Lingenfelter and Hudson, 1980], but perhaps 1035 ergs is feasible for our Sun. The effects of an accompanying perfect magnetic storm might be catastrophic. The methodology of Web Bot and ALTA reports Clif High, a developer of the Web Bot predictive technology has stated, It is worth noting that almost invariably, accurate future predictive behavior is related to threat conditions. As with our [Web Bot] software, it would appear that humans and animals can much more easily feel a threat coming than a blessing. It is likely very true that humans in general owe continued species existence to accurate future predictive behavior. The Web Bot project on which the ALTA reports are based uses software to, search the Internet for about 300,000 keywords with emotional context and record the preceding and following words to create a snapshot. Through this, the technology is claimed to be able to examine the collective unconscious of the world as a whole. It is thus said to be able to predict catastrophic [and other] events 60 to 90 days in advance. The Web Bot is claimed to have accurately predicted the September 11, 2001 terror attacks in June 2001, as well as the blackout of the Northeastern United States in 2003. The project was unsuccessful in predicting a Vancouver, B.C. and Pacific Northwest earthquake for December 12, 2008.

The Web Bot 2009 prediction "dumping of the US dollar" came true on October 23, 2009, with reports of China's initial efforts to make the Yuan an international currency.

2012 & the Web Bot-ALTA reports Recent ALTA and Web Bot reports have found a, data gap has been found between early 2012 running through May 2013. One explanation is that our civilization gets knocked back to a pre-electronic state, such as brought about by devastating solar activity. This possible data gap would be an artifact of the worst case scenario predicted by the January 2009 NAS report as to the devastation caused by a repetition of a Carrington-type event during the 2012-13 solar maximum. As we have seen, mainstream scientists have concluded that, the probabilities of occurrence [of another Carrington event] cannot be assigned with any reasonable accuracy. There are at least two possible 2012 futures, based on the current Web Bot: 1. 2012 meme - One possibility is that the Web Bot technology may be detecting the presence on the Internet of an escalating meme regarding a repetition of a Carringtontype event during the 2012-13 solar maximum, rather than an actual future event. 2. 2012 Carrington-type event solar flare - Another possibility is that the Web Bot technology has done what mainstream science now says cannot be assigned with any reasonable accuracy, and Web Bot is accurately predicting a repetition of a Carringtontype solar flare or related event for 2012-13.

2012 - Pole shift, super-cataclysm meme and catastrophobia Web Bot developer Clif High at halfpasthuman.com also points us in the direction of Patrick Geryl, whose predictions for 2012 include a perfect magnetic storm of the sort that mainstream science considers at the outer boundaries of what our Sun is capable of, presumably as high as 1035 ergs. "The Pole Shift in 2012" meme Patrick Geryl, who now dedicates himself fulltime to 2012 survival activities, believes that 2012 will bring a repetition of a cataclysm on Earth that took place in 9792 B.C. His website states, "Patrick Geryl came to the staggering conclusion that the Earth will soon be subjected to an immense disaster. The cause: upheavals in the sun's magnetic fields will generate gigantic solar flares that will affect the polarity of the entire Earth. The result: our magnetic field will reverse all at once, with catastrophic consequences for humanity.

Massive earthquakes will demolish all buildings on the planet, and instigate colossal tsunamis and intense volcanic activity. In fact, the Earth's crust will shift, sweeping continents thousands of miles away from their present positions. There is ample evidence in the literature of ancient civilizations that such disasters have occurred in the past and also clues that they knew when another such calamity would occur. The Dresden Codex of the Maya for instance, contains the secrets of the sunspot cycle, about which our modern astronomers know almost nothing! In his books, Patrick Geryl continues his scientific analysis of the millennia-old codes of the Maya and Egyptians that refer to the coming super-disaster. He determines that both cultures arose from an antediluvian civilization which was able to calculate the previous polar shifts and that we should take very seriously their calculations that place the next reversal in 2012! Mr. Geryl states, I launch this world-shattering message after having cracked several ancient codes of crucial importance to civilization as we approach the year 2012. The Dresden Codex of the Maya, for instance, contains the secrets of the sunspot cycle. The conclusions that follow, are even more staggering. At a certain moment, when the sun's magnetism reaches a crucial point, the sun's surface will be subjected to immense storms. Enormous electro-magnetic forces will then be liberated with unknown strength - from the interior of the sun. Giant sun-flames will send a gigantic wave of particles to the earth. Recently this phenomenon has been observed and confirmed in several suns. During several hours and days they exhibited an explosive activity, after which they returned to their normal state. Astronomers were wondering if this were one-time event or if it could occur more often. They can be sure it will occur again! Our sun is also showing this kind of pattern. The particles that are spewed out will put the earth's atmosphere into flames and have a real destructive effect on the Van Allen belts. Because of the continuous stream of electromagnetism, the magnetic field of the earth will get overcharged. Trillions of particles will reach the poles. Unknown electric forces will be generated, a nightmare for everybody involved. When the poles are filled with auroras from the falling particles, the inevitable will happen: the earth's inner electromagnetic field will get overcharged and will crash. A mega short-circuit with super lethal effects. The planet's entire atmosphere, without magnetic protection, will be bombarded by falling particles. The earths magnetic field functions to protect us by directing the electromagnetic particles to the poles, but this would become impossible. The particles would penetrate the earth from all sides and generate intensive radiation, in luminosity as well as in radioactivity. Burning, intensely burning is how you can describe the entire sky. Or, as the holy scriptures say: "the light of the light is around the world now". And that is the prelude to the cataclysm.

The iron core of the earth is magnetic. Because of the switching of the magnetic core, the earth will start to move to the other side! Because of this, the outer earths crust will break off! In other words the outer layer is floating. It's on the loose, no longer attached to its master. The planet will tilt some thousands of miles in a couple of hours. Looking up in the sky it will seem as if the sky is coming down, as it is described in the old scriptures! Giant quakes will occur. Earth plates are moving, mountains are rising where first there was nothing, land parts break open and collapse, mountains collapse, land is sinking into the ocean, volcanoes erupt in many places. In short, the most terrible nightmare cannot be terrible enough to describe this world's destruction. Many number series and codes of their myths seem to have been converted into their monuments. I have to remark here that the word monument comes from Latin. Literally translated it means warning. In other words, the pyramids, the Sphinx and many other miraculous buildings from a distant past are standing here to warn us and arouse our curiosity, so that we start the search for the why. In his book "The Orion Mystery", Bauval proved that the pyramids were built according to the Orion constellation of 12,000 years ago. Together with Gino Ratinckx and with the help of a recently developed astronomical software program, I could prove that the construction of the pyramids is related to the precession of the Orion constellation in 9792 BC, the year of the previous catastrophe. In those times the Sphinx was looking at its celestial counterpart. As you know from my previous book, the last pole reversal took place in the age of the Lion. Therefore we are here confronted with a sky-earth dualism, a serious warning about what happened then and what is awaiting us now. Even worse, the precession of those days is identical to the one of 2012, the year of the next pole reversal. This is not the only similarity. Venus meant everything for the Maya. Just like it did in 9792 BC, Venus will make in 2012 a perfect circular retrograde loop above the Orion constellation behind Gemini. In the Egyptian Book of the Dead this code is denoted as the movement that anticipates the end. Galactic superwaves, the prior solar system cataclysm and catastrophobia In her book Catastophobia, author Barbara Hand Clow examines the near destruction of Earth in 9500 B.C. Ms. Clow concludes that this event has left humanity's collective psyche deeply scarred, which Clow says afflicts humanity with catastrophobia. She examines the insidious global elite forces that have used this unprocessed fear to control humanity for thousands of years. Most importantly, she offers guidance for achieving the creative evolutionary leap that is unfolding now.

The prior solar system cataclysm was the result of a celestial debris entering the solar system. It was not the result of a super solar flare event, such as alleged will occur again in 2012. Figure A above shows the Great Cataclysm (from "Catastrophobia") in 9500 B.C. is a schemata of the great disaster, which shows fragments from the Vela supernova - Phaeton/Marduk in Greek/Babylonian records - blasting into our solar system and disturbing all the planets except Jupiter.

Mars and Earth were especially damaged because the fragments of the supernova destroyed a planet located in the current asteroid belt, and then all this debris afflicted Earth and Mars. This drawing is based on ancient records and the current condition of the planetary orbits in this solar system. According to physicist Paul LaViolette, a galactic superwave (a great wave of energy sent out from the galactic center, which is 26,000 light years from Earth) occurring 14,200 years ago triggered the Vela supernova a fragment of which caused the solar system catastrophe of 11,500 years ago. As set out in her book The Mayan Code, Barbara Hand Clow does not expect another galactic superwave in 2012.

Planet X, Nibiru and catastrophobia According to NASA, Nibiru and other stories about wayward planets are an Internet hoax. There is no factual basis for these claims. If Nibiru or Planet X were real and headed for an encounter with the Earth in 2012, astronomers would have been tracking it for at least the past decade, and it would be visible by now to the naked eye. Obviously, it does not exist.

Eris is real, but it is a dwarf planet similar to Pluto that will remain in the outer solar system; the closest it can come to Earth is about 4 billion miles.

2012: NASA Frequently Asked Questions Q: Is the Earth in danger of being hit by a meteor in 2012? A: The Earth has always been subject to impacts by comets and asteroids, although big hits are very rare. The last big impact was 65 million years ago, and that led to the extinction of the dinosaurs. Today NASA astronomers are carrying out a survey called the Spaceguard Survey to find any large near-Earth asteroids long before they hit. We have already determined that there are no threatening asteroids as large as the one that killed the dinosaurs. All this work is done

openly with the discoveries posted every day on the NASA NEO Program Office website, so you can see for yourself that nothing is predicted to hit in 2012. Q: How do NASA scientists feel about claims of pending doomsday? A: For any claims of disaster or dramatic changes in 2012, where is the science? Where is the evidence? There is none, and for all the fictional assertions, whether they are made in books, movies, documentaries or over the Internet, we cannot change that simple fact. There is no credible evidence for any of the assertions made in support of unusual events taking place in December 2012. Q: Is there a danger from giant solar storms predicted for 2012? A: Solar activity has a regular cycle, with peaks approximately every 11 years. Near these activity peaks, solar flares can cause some interruption of satellite communications, although engineers are learning how to build electronics that are protected against most solar storms. But there is no special risk associated with 2012. The next solar maximum will occur in the 20122014 time frame and is predicted to be an average solar cycle, no different than previous cycles throughout history. How can one evaluate the possibility for physical cataclysm in 2012?

1. 2012 & Catastrophobia There appears to be a collective fear of earth changes and cataclysm in human society based on the historical prior cataclysm of 11,500 years ago triggered by a galactic superwave that triggered the Vela supernova, a fragment of which entered the solar system. For a variety of reasons, the year 2012 has been front-loaded with memes that trigger humanitys catastrophobia.

2. 2012 Solar flare Carrington event There are at least two possible 2012 futures, based on the current Web Bot: 1. 2012 meme - One possibility is that the Web Bot technology may be detecting the presence on the Internet of an escalating meme regarding a repetition of a Carrington-type event during the 2012-13 solar maximum, rather than an actual future event. This is the more probable 2012 reality. 2.

2012 Carrington-type event solar flare - Another possibility is that the Web Bot technology has done what mainstream science now says cannot be assigned with any reasonable accuracy, and Web Bot is accurately predicting a repetition of a Carrington-type solar flare or related event for 2012-13. This appears to be a very unlikely possibility

3. 2012 Super-cataclysm memes 2012 Pole shift, super solar flare, galactic super wave-caused super nova fragments appear to be memes propagated by catastrophobia, and are extremely unlikely to materialize in 2012.

4. 2012 cataclysm memes and social manipulation 2012 cataclysm memes appear to be used by a variety of institutions, ranging from covert military-intelligence, governmental and other agencies to organized religion for purposes of social control. See, for example, Basiago and Eisenhower reveal Marsgate and make case for Alternative 4 5. 2012 & A Golden Age As will be explored in Part 2 of this series on 2012, the Calleman-Clow time acceleration matrix of the Mayan calendar, which suggests that the alternating sign-wave universe core energy phenomenon ceases after Oct. 28, 2011, and Earth will be set on a gradual setting of a potential to reach advanced utopian planet status - a virtual Garden of Eden. Patrick Geryl is space focused and correct about the conclusions that he presents on solar system activity.

His understanding of earth is not as detailed, in my opinion, and it has led to some incorrect conclusions. First, much of his understanding of how a pole flip occurs, as well as how a crustal slip may occur, is dependent upon the idea of the center of the earth having a rotating mass of molten iron, that is creating the planet earth's magnetic field by virtue of its spin.

Now note that Patrick Geryl's information about the magnetic field itself is correct. The earth's magnetic field, humanities shield, is failing, and has a period that is about 11,800 years between re-charges.

But, in my opinion, the idea of a molten iron mass spinning in the middle of the earth is false. * First, molten metals cannot hold a magnetic charge, nor can they create one, no matter how fast they may spin. * Second, even if molten iron could hold a magnetized state, it would take a mass of iron approximately half again as big as the whole of the earth to generate the level of magnetic field we can measure now, let alone at its peak. * Further, in order for such an iron core to lose its magnetic field, assuming it could generate one at all, would be logically in the process of slowing down in its rotation. The whole 'iron core' theory relies on thinking of the core of the earth as a dynamo. So in following with that, the only way that earth could have a weakening magnetic field would be if the 'iron core' were to be slowing down.

IF THAT were the case, we would know about it. Further, what we laughingly refer to as 'mainstream science' has recently determined that the core of the earth is not only spinning faster than the crust, but has recently begun to accelerate its spin rate. So much for the iron core idea. Further, if the earth did have an iron core at its center, then this core would cool over the billions of years, and would solidify, thus altering our planet's active state into more of a dead state insofar as the tectonic plates are concerned. So that does not work logically either. Further, Patrick Geryl's conclusions about how the earth will react to the upcoming solar catastrophe are based on academic mainstream thinking about planet earth, such as the 'iron core idea', that are not consistent with today's knowledge. Patrick's conclusion that the sun will expel vast quantities of south charged, high energy particles is likely correct.

BUT the idea that, as with small iron magnets, our core will flip, is not correct. He uses the analogy of the core, being a giant iron magnet, being pushed over as one can push over one magnet with another. This is likely not going to happen.

There are inherent physical problems with the idea of the planetary equatorial bulge 'relaxing' to allow for crustal shifts as described. Further the theory does not say how the relaxing of the bulge would impact the 'iron core' and the rest of the planetary structure. Nor does it account for the reconstructing of the planet over the 11,800 years between these events to its present, bulged out shape (equatorial bulge, look it up).

Also note that the academic view that the equatorial bulge is due to centrifugal force is wrong. Yet another article there. However, that said, it is clear that periodic cataclysmic (for humans) catastrophes happen.

Repeat that: catastrophe happens. Periodically.

So how to account for it?

Necessary thinking since we are due to live through it in the next few years. And the evidence is that these periodic catastrophes can nearly finish off humans as a species. Other aspects of Patrick's justified concern for humanity during 2012 are based on evidence that the tops of mountains all over the planet once had sea water and ocean critters on top of them. Thus he concludes that waves of terrible height once over topped the various tall mountain ranges. There are other explanations for this fact that do not include waves washing over the Rockies, Andes, nor Himalaya's.

There are also problems with the idea that sloshing oceans deposited the material. Some of these problems involve benthic organisms that had to have been living at that point when killed, so they were not merely dropped off at the top of the mountain by the wave as it passed. They are part of the mountain structure itself and speak to water covering the area. However, let us not forget that Patrick is space and Sun focused, has decoded the Mayan mega sun spot theory, and is likely quite correct about what the Sun will do, as well as what the ancient Maya knew, though not necessarily correct in how the earth will react. So my conclusion is that the 2012 cataclysm will not include the world traversing waves that Patrick thinks may result from a crustal shift. Indeed, and in spite of the work of Hapgood et al, it is my thinking that crustal shifts have never happened as described.

As will be explained below, it is also my thinking that tectonic plates theory does not present an adequate understanding about the structure of our planet at all. All of the evidence for crustal shifts presented by Hapgood et al, are, in my opinion, accurately described, but can be accounted for by mechanisms other than a crustal shift.

Yes magnetic pole shifts have and do and will occur (one in 2012), and yes they are devastating. Yes, instant freezing of large areas of the planet have occurred, but not (in my thinking) as a result of that area rotating under the pole.

Expando Planet model The Expando Planet model is a sub set of the Expando Universe model of reality to which we will return in a bit.

We start with Einstein and the much discussed, debated, and hated, E = MC2 equation. In Einstein, and Newtonian understanding of physics, energy transforms into matter and vice versa, so if you twist on uranium in just the right way with energy, it will transform a bunch of its own matter into energy very rapidly and thus we have nuclear plants and bombs based on this principle of 'exciting' the matter of uranium (and other radioactive elements) to convert to energy.

Well... in this universe, equations work both ways, so theoretically we could take a bunch of energy and 'condense' it into matter (assuming we knew how). This matter could be as dense as version as we desired given that we are condensing it out of energy. So we would initially get simple molecules such as hydrogen and helium, but if we persisted, we could continue to coagulate the energy into denser molecules like oil, or iron, or gold.

And thus is explained how the whole alchemy transmutation thing works. By condensation. So, in the Expando Planet model, the continuous stream of energy from the Sun goes not only to the surface of the planets, but also to the center of the planets, where, given the correct conditions, and the existence of an active plasma core (Mars, as an aside, has none, and is therefore, a 'dead' planet), this energy is transmuted into matter. Note also that plasma is a great

form of an 'energetic antenna' and actually (in laboratories) seems to draw energy to it via sympathetic resonance. So some of the energies of the Sun hit the surface of the earth, but energy at levels we cannot detect without really really working at it, go to the center of the planet where they are condensed by that plasma environment into matter. By the way, the plasma model would allow for a faster spinning core, AND a reducing magnetic field as the field strength is not dependent on size nor spin rate. And further the plasma core idea does fit with observable fluctuations in magnetic field strength over these nearly 12,000 year cycles.

And again, plasma core idea works with heat levels internal to the earth (lower you go, hotter it gets), as well as abiotic oil, and the creation of minerals as well as their location of deposits. So, since magic likely is not how the core of the earth generates the magnetic field that we observe, it would seem more likely that the explanation is that the core of the earth is plasma. Plasma is highly excited energy, and does develop prodigious magnetic fields all out of proportion to its size. All of the observable magnetic effects on earth can be explained with the plasma core idea.

Also, human experience with plasma fields and forms in laboratories provides observable evidence of the electro magnetic effects every bit as variant as seen on earth. So, in the Expando Planet model of thinking about Earth, the plasma core gets energy steadily from the Sun and as a necessity, must convert this steady stream of energy into matter. Thus if the Expando Planet model is correct, one of the predictable effects would be that the planet would pretty much continuously grow. And that is also what observable, manifesting reality demonstrates.

The Earth is slowly growing. Even mainstream science and mainstream media acknowledge this, though they never say why it should grow continuously if the core of the earth was actually iron.

Oh well... anyway, the plasma receives energy from the Sun at the core of the Earth, converts it to matter (e=mc2) and so then two logical questions then arise... *

If energy is being transformed into matter in the middle of the earth, then where does it go? * And... what happens to this whole matter creation mechanism if there is a sudden burst of energy from the Sun? Mainstream science has always maintained that the planet grows slowly over time even without addressing why this should be the case.

Further the whole point of the plate tectonic theory is 'propelled' by this idea of slow movement of the plates creeping about on liquid magma. Though against the idea of entropy, the cooling of the planet over time, and the rotation of the supposed iron core, the whole of the plate tectonic theory fails to hold up.

Further, the presence of vast, previously unknown levels, of active volcanoes all across the planet does not support plate tectonics. Indeed, volcanoes are found even in places that the plate tectonic theory say should be subduction zones.

So, to address the question of where does the continuously created matter go, we need only look around us. The matter quite actually 'bubbles' up out of, or as, the earth. And further, since it is created in the middle of an enclosed sphere (more or less, the earth is actually an oblate spheroid), the effects of matter created in the middle of a closed planet are naturally predictable.

Imagine pumping water into an orange with a syringe.

East is east, and West is west, and never the twain shall meet If the Expando Planet model is correct, there are some predictable effects that should be visible.

One is that the 'skin' of our orange (planet earth) will rupture in specific ways that should form 'crinkly bits' for coast line on the anterior side of the tearing. These would be expected to be

rough, ragged, vertically exposing of interior skin features, and not evenly spaced. In fact, we do see these in the form of the fiords observable on the western coasts of all continents.

Further, if one obtains a reasonably accurate topological globe, it can be seen that no eastern coast of any continent resembles the western coast of that same continent. And all western coasts of all continents resemble each other, as do all eastern coasts of all continents. Further, even large islands such as Greenland, Iceland, Britain, et al show the same conditions. That the western coasts are alike all across the planet, seems to be evidence of NO rotational change of direction.

The idea being that a spinning planet always going the same direction, for millions of years, would naturally sculpt itself differently on the leading, or eastern coasts, over the trailing, or western coasts. And we do indeed see this at all levels, macroscopically, geologically, geomorphologically, topologically, and even biologically (different habitats supporting different species).

And conversely, if that same planet had periodically changed rotation, there would be evidence for that on the coasts. Indeed, the giant, 2 kilometers high waves from the oceans sloshing out of their basins would be expected to have carved and eroded most distinguishing features from the coasts of all continents.

If that had occurred even twice then effects would still be visible even 26,000 years later. No evidence of that is found. We would expect to see the western coasts very torn down, and not the sharp, ragged, torn appearance actually present. Further, it is on the eastern side of the continents that we find the sunken cities and other ancient signs of habitation.

Further, the western sides of the continents are the more geologically active, which should not be the case if there were not expansion occurring continuously in the absence of crustal rotation. Indeed, the total absence of any expected degradation of the western, southern, or northern coasts of any continent (Antarctica excepted due to its location) is a very key point of evidence against rotation in any other direction than current.

Repeating this for clarity.

If the earth had ever had rotation problems that caused the oceans to leave their basins, we would see the evidence on some coast other than east. In fact, the eastern coasts of all the continents show continuous effects from the east to west rotation of our planet, and can be used as a model for searching for such evidence of rotation. None exists. As an aside, if the plate tectonic theory was accurate, there would be more volcanoes along the eastern seaboard of the American continents, as well as along the western coast of Europe. Many more volcanoes.

In fact, it should resemble the ring of fire in the Pacific.

Speaking of volcanoes and magma, mainstream academic understanding of the earth and its formative history, would maintain that subduction zones should exist at all plate boundaries, and yet, there is no evidence of a subduction zone anywhere on earth. And, if the plate tectonic theory were correct, there should be NO mid Atlantic Ridge, nor the deep fissure valleys of the Pacific Basin.

These are both predictable effects of planetary expansion. In the case of the Mid Atlantic Ridge, this ridge is specifically and exactly described as a necessary part of the Expando Planet theory, and is not at all explained by any variant of plate tectonics. In the Expando Planet model it is required that the 'skin' of the planet rupture at some point, at that this point is where the denser forms of matter (minerals, newly formed rocks, et al) will emerge.

Unlike the gas and liquid matter being created in the earth, the solid condensates require at least one specific point of exit to the surface. Where the gasses and liquids can percolate up to the surface as we observe petroleum to do, minerals, specifically molten material that will crystallize as it cools, must force open a fissure to release the pressures behind it. The deep ocean valleys of the Marianas and other Pacific Basin fissures are expected within the Expando Planet model as the 'skin' of the planet is forced apart in the Atlantic, where the new matter is coming up so thick as to form a ridge, it must necessarily 'thin' out over other areas since the whole of the sphere is expanding. The Expando Planet model would also necessarily have the skin of the planet get crinkly as pressures of new matter forcing their way to the surface worked themselves out. So ridges would be expected to form.

These would necessarily also be affected by the direction of rotation of the planet during the time that they formed and existed. So if the planet had ever rotated any other direction, there would be evidence, left over from gradual erosion, as well as 'spin direction resonance' found on the coasts, specifically the west coasts.

The 'spin direction resonance' effect is what we see happening when, as an instance, a tornado deposits debris, it has a tendency to only be on specific sides of buildings or other objects. Similar effects show up in where the dust and things collect in parking lots. Basically the same principle.

We see no such effects indicating anything other than east direction rotation. Also if the Expando Planet theory is correct, then it is expected that the ruptured surface of the planet should resemble a picture puzzle in that the various sections should fit exactly back together when the 'new parts' are removed. Anyone who has ever looked at a globe gets the idea that ALL the continents were once connected along all the edges.

The standard explanation for this offered by academics is the idea of one giant continent called Pangaea in one giant ocean on the earth at the same size as it is now. This explanation is clearly wrong as it defies math in the form of the spherical trigonometry expressed in the coasts of the continents. In other words. It is not possible, on a globe that is the size of today's earth, to fit the continents back together.

The curvature of the earth gets in the way. The edges do not fit when this is tried. But clearly, the coasts of the continents, just as with the edges of a torn piece of paper, look like they fit together. Indeed they do. Simply not at the current size of the earth. For the edges of the continents to snug together (at the continental shelves), the earth would have had to be only about one third its present size. Would that size of earth work for dinosaurs? Well... not surprisingly, yes.

Obviously dinosaurs existed as we have their remains. Further, while the dinosaur fossil distribution itself supports the Expando Planet model, we need only examine the blood pressure issue to satisfy ourselves that this is a valid example.

Basically the 'dinosaur conundrum' is as follows: how is it possible that dinosaurs could live on earth at such great size (height and girth), when we know that the tallest animals now (giraffes) are at the far limit of blood pressure versus gravity. At less than 17 feet in height, a giraffe is safe and happy, but let is grow only another foot, and it will die as the pressure on the heart becomes too much as it tries to pump blood up that height.

However, dinosaurs were seriously taller than 17 feet. If the earth did not have much reduced gravity during the time of the dinosaurs, then their vascular system could never have handled the blood pressures required to raise blood the great distance to their brains. The same applies for the really big dinosaurs with tremendous girth.

Other issues as to how their 'bird bones' could have supported such great weights are also related to the gravity of earth issue. Various theories have been proposed that include gravity as a variable in earth's past. This is my assumption, and the mechanism that is favorable is the Expando Planet model. Dinosaurs could not live on earth today.

They far exceed the limits of what current levels of gravity will allow for pumping blood via biological means. So? If the gravity was less during their day, what could account for it? One postulate that makes sense, is that the gravity was less, and it was due to earth being significantly smaller.

As cited in the previous example of the continents as jigsaw puzzle. As an aside, at some point, expansion of the earth will reach levels which make it impossible for humans to exist for the same reason. We will all be too tall to pump blood to our brains.

So look to your local politician, and take that as a warning as to humanities future... life without blood in the brain. There is also evidence in human works that the earth of today is not the earth of our ancestors. Since our species is periodically kicked to near extinction by catastrophe that the Expando Planet theory attempts to explain, it is understandable that there would not be many signs within our own work. This is due to most civilizations rising between the cycles of expansions.

The problems encountered during the expansions wipe us out to really insignificant levels, and fundamentally reset the whole civilization to zero. But, there are some monuments, in fact thousands of them which may be evidence of the Expando Planet cycles.

One point is the 'mystery' of the megaliths (giant stone buildings) which are all over the planet. A great many of which are so large, and involve stones that are so large, that our current civilization could not duplicate the work. Further some of these megaliths are so large, that we humans have mistaken them for generations as part of the natural landscape. But, here is an interesting point.

In a smaller version of earth, just as with the dinosaurs, gravity is less, and these stones would have weighed far less, thus presenting less of an issue in construction. Other evidence of expanding earth is found in the design of some of the megaliths, which can be decoded to produce hints toward this idea. This subject is too voluminous to approach here. But, even absent any attempt by the makers of the megaliths to communicate ideas across time to future generations, there are physical effects on the megalithic monuments themselves which support the idea of an expanding planet model.

Without getting into too much of debates about design ideas in ancient structures, we can at least note that such desert ruins as the Great Pyramids at Giza have boat docks at their base, and they and the Sphinx, show damage from centuries of ocean water exposure. While there are many theories as to how these structures could have spent centuries with their bases in water, one explanation is that as the earth expands, water levels are significantly affected.

Not as Patrick Geryl suggests, nor as in the bible myths of a planet covering flood, but rather as a result of shifting (rising) matter entering the oceans and displacing water.

Further, the actual mechanism from the expansion would be thought to produce neither tidal style flooding, nor tsunami flooding, but rather something entirely different. Perhaps best described as 'persistent flooding', there are many descriptions of such in many ancient texts including those in Sanskrit.

Graham Hancock's work, Underworld, in which he visits many of the sunken cities around the planet actually highlights the mechanism of 'persistent flooding' without using that label.

He refers to ancient accounts of 'flood waters' that 'just kept coming'. Unlike the tide, these did not retreat. And unlike tsunami, these floods were not particularly violent. Just water levels

rising, and continuing to rise without stopping. Fast enough to swallow your coastal city over a week, but not so fast that humans and animals cannot stay ahead of it.

And these waters were noted to still be supporting tidal actions. So it was as though two separate forces were at work on the ocean, each affecting its volume in different ways. Further, we have direct, experiential evidence of Expando Planet model on a small scale being demonstrated on the moons that our various spacecraft have seen in their journeys. Frequently (especially these last few years of increased Sun activity) these will present expansion in the form of giant geysers of material shooting out into space.

Hmmmm... where did that stuff being thrown into space come from if not from the pressures of new matter being created in plasma balls at the center of these fellow solar system occupants? How is it that a small moon is able to spew geysers of material into space repeatedly? Would it not exhaust itself over the course of millions or billions of years? The Expando Planet model can explain many of the various enigmas present in our solar system.

As the Expando Planet theory is fractally based, then it must appear as a design pattern in other parts of universe to be a valid concept (in my opinion). This is just what is observable from the very large with the Expando Universe model (for another article), and down to the very small with how insect shells (skin) grows, how human skin alters itself to cover burns, and other scarring features on all animals.

The basic design pattern is also present in plants from their root growth methods to how their skin coverings accommodate internal growth. And note that the whole Altantis going beneath the waves concept needs to be reconsidered in light of this theory. Plate tectonics cannot explain how whole continents would just sink, and rapidly. The Expando Planet model allows for the edges of the continents to subside, as we see around India, and Japan, and throughout Asia, as well as in the Caribbean, and Mediterranean seas.

It also allows that such events could happen quickly, as in essence, the low lying coastal plains will 'slide down as the continental shelves supporting them slide down into the crevasse' created by the expansion of the planet. But, the Expando Planet model does not allow for whole continents to just 'sink'. However, in the Expando Planet model, Atlantis and other civilizations

can easily be on coastal plains that sink as the cracks widen and the skin of the earth 'thins out' in areas.

Further, the new matter rising both as solid minerals in the Mid Atlantic, and as magma from all over the planet, both will cause the ocean level fluctuations as land forms change near the cracks in the earth's skin. Further, it can be expected that a large proportion of the new matter being created will be water. This will also affect the ocean levels. The Expando Planet model is also supported by the evidence of large areas of the planet going into an 'instant freeze' such that animals are flash frozen while munching on grass or pies.

The Expando Planet model has at its core (pun intended) the plasma core which can become very chaotic, and is expected to produce huge 'toroidal imbalances' which will result in a bunch of 'magnetic field anomalies' that will resemble 'magnetic tornadoes'.

These will reach out into deep space and will funnel down not only huge levels of highly charged particles, but also, vast quantities of very very very cold cold from space. The air will freeze as it is. So will anything under one of these toroidal vortexes.

And since many of them will be associated with where the new magnetic pole will reside (after a bit of a walk-about), it is understandable that many of these flash frozen areas will stay frozen.

Predictable signs of pending expansion of the planet Less sea ice... planet expanding, larger sea area, ice spreads out. Weather changes are to be expected due to changes in the planet size, the surface area of the oceans, and the heights of mountains (more on this in another article). Other impacts will show up in ocean currents as new (and mostly hot) matter is pumped into the planet skin (crustal complex).

There are also expected electric and magnetic effects as the expansions are concurrent with solar system wide changes affecting energies at all levels. The sum total is screwy weather for the entire time of the expansion event. One very predictable, and noticeable effect of the Expando Planet model, if accurate, would be that cracks in the planet would open up in a variety of areas. Is there evidence for such... yes, and it is rapidly increasing.

Planet Earth has recently (last ten years) created a huge new crack, called a 'future sea' by mainstream science, that will at some point, separate Africa from the Arabian peninsula. This crack appeared suddenly. Further, there are new cracks these last two years across all continents excepting Antarctica (may be some there, but news does not come out easily from those environs). Also, some of these cracks are gigantic and appear almost instantly.

The speed of their appearance is just the kind of thing that plate tectonic theory does NOT support, and just the sort of activity we would expect from the Expando Planet model. Another certain sign will be the rapid increase in large, damaging sinkholes. Again, skin stretches and things 'give way' below our feet, or foundations.

Predictable problems Though the problem referenced below is USA centric, it does not mean that such effects will be limited to North American continent.

New Madrid is a particular fear point for many people at the moment, and the federal government of the US seems to be sharing that fear if the reports of tens of millions of emergency meals, multiple person plastic coffins, relocation camps, and federal emergency preparedness exercises are any indicator. It would seem that their fear would be well placed given the Expando Planet model of things.

If one examines a topologically accurate globe that includes sea bed contours, it can be observed that a 'natural' fault line seemingly runs from Lake Michigan through the Mississippi River valley to the Gulf of Mexico. It would be expected that such areas at this will crack further as the next expansion event occurs.

Thus the idea that the Great Lakes may one day drain into the Gulf of Mexico is plausible. An interesting observation is that topologically accurate globes may be able to be used to search for likely ruptures and stretching points across the planet. And if the Expando Planet model is accurate, then both underseas heat patterns and earthquake activity need to be examined in a new light.

Take, as an example, all the earthquakes and separate them not by geographic location, but rather by depth, then magnitude. This new picture, when pasted back onto a sphere will indicate the points of the next 'ripping events'. When we consider the Expando Planet model in abstract, holding the planet earth in our mental hands and rotating it about, we notice that if the planet is expanding from internal pressures, then certain predictable behaviors should present themselves.

First, the locations of sinkholes and tears should be between the tropics (in the main) due to the equatorial bulge. In fact, note that in the Expando Planet model, the equatorial bulge is a sign of planetary health, and internal matter creation pressures. So earth bulges around the middle not due to centrifugal forces, but due to internal pressures. Thus the idea that the equatorial bulge can 'relax' either slowly or rapidly is not supported.

Further, the Expando Planet model with an equatorial bulge due to internal pressures would account for movement of continents relative to each other as well as gradual creep of the continents over the continuously stretching spherical surface. Note that this last is very important.

Referring back to earthquake for a moment, and specifically the very shallow, and very damaging earthquake recently seen at ChristChurch, New Zealand. Such quakes are predictable on land masses on both poles. Further, the Expando Planet model suggests that likely sites for shallow, high amplitude wave, damaging quakes will be at just those places where humans like to live... i.e. in the inland points of the 'crinkly bits' or natural harbors along coasts.

As with the late 1950s shallow, damaging earthquakes in Alaska, the nature of the quake is forecasting the emergence of a rupture in the region. ChristChurch is likely situated at the 'head'

of a natural 'tear' in the coast line. These kinds of quakes are expected because of where New Zealand is on the globe relative to the pressures created on the crust by the equatorial bulge.

These pressures will tend to produce different types of quakes at different points on the sphere. Further, the theory can be used to predict both relative frequency and depth of large quakes during the expansion event. Unfortunately for New Zealand, the theory clearly points toward more 'tearing forces' to be manifesting from 45s by 180 degrees as indicated by both topology and hyper-dimensional (hyper-spatial) maths.

These 'tearing forces' in the ocean on the other side of the Chatham Rise will be presenting to New Zealand further earthquakes over the rest of 2011 and certainly through 2012. In looking at potential and predictable problems arising in 2012 as a result of the energy burst from the sun causing lots of material creation and thus expansion pressures from within the earth, as humans, we need to also focus our attention on human creations. These will not only include buildings, but also dams, and reservoirs, and the real nasties.

Before moving on to the latter, let us note that mega earth projects such as the Hoover, Grand Coulee, and Three Gorges dams, among others, are at risk for catastrophic and cataclysmic failure as the planet actually pulls apart around them, or, alternatively, as the surface crinkles up underneath them. Train derailments, and other impacts on human infrastructure. Including worries about dams. Sinkholes, in fact many of the problems claimed as issues of the approach of the planet X would be expected in the Expando Planet model. Magnetic Field is recharged. This sounds good in theory, but living through the process may not be easy, or even likely. Noting that this is one of the many areas in which Patrick Geryl is correct, we proceed to the idea that we are basically fringen doomed. The sun will spew out huge volumes of energy and material in 2012. Much of it directed right towards earth. As we know, it is our magnetosphere that protects us from much of this radiation.

Well, the magnetosphere is failing, and seriously needs a recharge, but to do so we have to live through the energy exchange from the sun to the earth necessary to the task.

So Patrick Geryl is correct, and we can expect a very large burst of south/negative charged particles to hit our South Pole. This will be absorbed by the planet, and a good deal of the

energy will be sucked into the plasma core, thus providing for both the recharge of the magnetic strength of our magnetosphere, and the flip of the magnetic poles, north for south.

This will be a very messy, and dangerous process for life here on earth. As the magnetic poles flip, the charge of the magnetosphere will go to zero and dangerous radiation will pour down upon the planet and us guys, its inhabitants. Not good. Terminal sunburns in minutes. Burning of anything directly in the path of the sun's output. Cook your dinner in a pot outside in minutes. That sort of thing. But not good for life.

Noting that Patrick is likely also correct, and the radiation danger period is probably brief, on the order of few days. He is also correct in that the magnetic poles will flip as the plasma core absorbs the south/negative charged particles and becomes dominated by them, a side effect of which recharges our magnetosphere later in the process.

The plasma core will actually flip physically, but as it has virtually no mass relative to the planetary crust, and will 'flip' by going 'inside out' relative to polarity means that only the magnetics will change here on the crust of earth, but this also allows for both chaotic polarity points, and very rapid magnetic changes.

Unlike the 'molten mass of iron core' theory which presents lots of issues about altering its rotation, physical constraints and magnetic charge. It can be imagined as to the dangers presented to life by this part of the 2012 events. Further problems for humans will include the direct effect on our consciousness of the solar radiations once the magnetosphere has collapsed. Other issues include physical burns, radiation burns, destruction of crops, loss of life as animals en masse on land, in the air, and under water, are killed by both magnetic waves and radiation from space.

Further issues will present themselves in the form of mental problems for those who do survive by hiding from the radiation exposure. The total infrastructure of humans that is in any way bound to electricity is likely to fail, and probably spectacularly so. Predictable electrical and magnetic problems are already observable as has been noted on many 'conspiracy fact' sites. The predictable biological effects are already happening as the 2012 expansion event ramps up under our feet.

The mass die off of birds, and ocean life already seen is very likely the early edges of what will occur in 2012. We also face the problems inherent in nuclear reactors deprived of an electrical grid, as well as the expected severe increase in earthquakes globally. Bearing in mind evidence exists that can be interpreted as the earth having had 30 degree crustal shifts. The Expando Planet model also can explain this evidence, but still must deal with the issues of sudden, and violent expansion rates of the earth.

As part of this expansion process, the number of shallow, and significant earthquakes is expected to rise dramatically. This will not be good for nuclear reactors, biochemical weapons storage areas, and fuel ports, pipelines, storage facilities, port facilities, airplane travel (radiations)... which pretty much gives you the way to consider what we face.

Ancient Sanskrit descriptions of oral tradition have previous periods being filled with what we would consider to be 7.+ earthquakes. Some records speak of times when they were happening multiple times a day after having ramped up over the course of a single lifetime.

The earthquakes grew to the point that whole villages relocated to escape the daily damage.

The Good News The good news about the Expando Planet model is that as each expansion occurs, the earth grows.

Both in mass and size, and thus each subsequent release of energy in the next cycle by the Sun, will be impacting a larger planet and will be proportionally smaller. Thus the expansion event that occurred 11,500 years ago had more impact on earth as earth was smaller then. Just as the expansion events during the days of the dinosaurs were hugely impacting of the planet due to earth being about a third of its present size.

So the good news is that as the expansions continue, the effects diminish over time. Not that this will help us much during our up coming cataclysmic catastrophe.

The good news includes the thought that no continent crossing waves of 2+ kilometers height are likely to occur. However, as the expansion occurs, there will be huge waves probably as high as 800 meters or so, or near the theoretic maximum limit in wave height rising into land. So... still waves on the order of 2600 feet or more, but none that will cross the great mountain ranges.

Also the good news would include only limited continental penetration by waves. And these should be predictably larger and more devastating, and flood further inland on the eastern coasts of the continents than on the west. On the other hand, the western coasts will have to deal with significant winds, and torrential amounts of water both from rains, and from tsunamis.

As the ocean floors tear and thin, waves from ruptures and landform shifts will assault the coasts. For reasons too detailed to pursue here, they will be more of a problem for west coasts than east. Also volcanic eruptions, and large scale heating of the waters will result in increasing evaporation causing the 'atmospheric rivers' to grow in orders of magnitude. Additionally, wind patterns of west to east flows will accelerate as the mass and moment of the atmosphere increases due to new volumes from the oceans.

So the good news is that the new moment will produce faster winds which should aid in scrubbing out the horrific amounts of dust and ash from all the volcanoes and earthquakes.

Conclusion This understanding is the result of a lot of gnawing on universe. It is merely encapsulated in this effort as there are ramifications and twisty side effects going out in all directions from this gnawing. We are still facing civilization doom in 2011 and 2012. The doom starts the day that the Sun takes out the planetary electrical grid. Patrick Geryl is remarkably correct in all his space and sun focused reasoning, and his worry that October 11, 2011 will be that day is well taken.

It can happen at any time now.

Given the rapid increase in solar intensity values that Patrick shares at his website, it would seem most likely to occur between October 11, 2011 and May of 2012. That NASA is also concerned about solar problems through this period acts as yet more fuel for the necessary paranoia. Further paranoia flares up thinking about the trillions of dollars put into underground shelters by government for the elite. That does not bode well. We still face species doom in 2011 and 2012, but given this new understanding and the context of the Expando Planet model, that doom isn't what it used to be. Now we must go off and gnaw on universe more intently. If Patrick is correct, we have until October 11, 2011 to make our peace with people (most, perhaps 90%, will still perish), and complete our preparations. Good luck to all humans, and remember, if the Expansion shit hits the fan, the elites will find themselves as 'spam in a can'.

This gives new meaning to the old French peasant retort, of, 'one day, we will all eat the rich' ...hmmmmm. There are many more predictable problems and challenges that flow from this idea. They may be reported here if we all have time. My personal schedule will be to get preparations complete by July 15th. One cycle early is way better than one cycle late. Be sure and visit Patrick Geryl's site for updates on the Maya Solar intensity strength numbers. This level of awareness will be a key survival factor going forward. Given opportunity and motivation, I may provide graphics later.

2012 - Doom The Rest of The Story by Clif High March 10, 2011 from HalfPastHuman Website Spanish version Skeptics: dont waste your time fighting with me about the views expressed herein. Instead go to YouTube, and search for the video's produced by Neal Adams. Watch a few of these and then debate the issue with your own lying eyes before getting raspy with me.

Postulate That the Expando Planet cycle is dualistic in nature, showing both steady, continuous growth, and periodic pulses of very rapid (and from the inhabitant's view point, violent) growth.

The idea is that the Sun, operating on the Precessional cycle clock would send out giant waves of energy for perhaps a hundred years or more (this would lengthen as the sun itself grows also part of theory) at the points of 'opposition' (these are affected by our relationship to the galactic plane) on the cycle.

The energy waves ramp up and peak, then wane to steady output, as we see happening with other energy sources in universe.

The 'pulse' (from human viewpoint) of energy waves at the end of each Precessional cycle would cause the relatively rapid, and violent growth of the planet. Then as side effects of the pulses hitting the planet, two effects would be expected; the magnetosphere would be recharged due to the plasma core being over excited (effects of this are much higher magnetic levels

which would tend to resist or moderate future inputs from the Sun; and the thinning of the 'skin' of the earth taken as a whole.

These pulses would seem to be THE necessary energetic component to cause the whole process to function.

That is to say that the steady outpouring of energy from the Sun, even absorbed into Earth's plasma core where some level of it is converted to matter, would not likely be the cause for the first ripping of the crust into the continental plates we see today. Yes, the steady outpouring is the cause of the continuous growth (and continental spread) seen here on earth, and could be expected to eventually cause enough pressures to rupture the crust, but the behavior of the solar system would suggest not.

Rather, since we can observe the Sun to be variable and exhibiting periods of great excitement itself as over these recent years, and as there yet remains pockets of evidence for extreme outpouring of energy from the Sun, we can postulate that the growth of planets (and presumably stars) is dualistic in nature, consisting of brief, violent outbursts, and long steady periods of continuous activity. This postulate could be used to explain why planetary crust would rupture the way it is observed here on earth, as well as explain why we have such violent disasters as the Banda Ache (Sumatra) tsunami. In fact, the dualistic nature of rapid and violent growth working its way out from the core of the planet fits our observations and predictions of what must occur. It is logical that if the sphere of the earth is covered with a rigid crust, that the crust must crack as the sphere expands.

The Banda Ache tsunami was caused by the cracking of the sea floor very rapidly at the northern point of the Ninety East Ridge. This ridge is one of the many spreading points on the ocean floors on the planet. Effects to be expected if the Expando Planet model is correct, include a more or less continuously lengthening orbit. Some of the scant few surviving human records show that the most recent increase was from 360 day period out to our present 365.24 days as earth slows down due to bulking up.

Also note that even the academic view of earth's orbit is that it gradually lengths, though they put it down to a 'slowing effect' as though friction from space were the cause. Further the

expansion will also impact by slowing our rotation as well as orbit. Though curiously, it can be expected that the plasma core will spin more rapidly as it is flooded with energy from the Sun.

While it will consume some of the extra spin in creating new matter (the 'core' of the expanding planet experience), it can be expected to maintain a higher rate of spin over time, even as it grows due to the extra excitement coming from the Sun over these next few decades.

Growth patterns All mountain ranges will be originating as north to south structures, that are then twisted by the movement of the continental plate upon which they rest.

So those mountain ranges that are other than north south are indications of shifting. Those which are north to south may be sites of future cracking as they have not moved off the seams which fed their growth. Mountain ranges create by rips in the earth under the crust which then have accretion of new matter under them thus 'wrinkling' up the crust and forming mountain ranges. If we examine the history of the planet we can conclude that no new mountain ranges have formed since the split of the continents excepting those individual mountains created by volcanic forces. This make sense.

What probably occurs is that the planet creates matter from energy in the plasma core which then is expelled upward, pressuring the crusts, and at some point, small ruptures appear underneath the crust, and the resulting pressured material being forced through the cracks created the mountain ranges. Each mountain range creation was likely the result of an expansion episode. Then, as each mountain range was created, it took the pressure off the planetary crust. This probably occurred repeatedly during the early part of terrestrial history as the earth reacted to each episodic solar energy inundation with a new mountain range.

This reaction worked until the level of the plasma core was exceeded in one expansion episode.

This 'failure' of the mountain range building response to solar radiation storm was likely due to a combination of the plasma core growth itself which increases the amount of new matter being produced as the core was larger and therefore could process more of the solar radiation into

matter, as well as the crust of the planet being 'reinforced' by the mountain ranges to the point that no upward expansion of the crust could take place, and it necessarily had to part and thin in order to accommodate the latest expansion episode.

This rupture of the continents also was likely as a direct result of the solar radiation flood during one of these periodic, precession related, expansion episodes rather than the accumulation of continuous matter creation. So the mountain building period of earth is over. Such areas as Lake Titicaca in the Andes, in which we find a salt water port and formerly salt water lake at the great height of 11,000+ feet, is probably due to there being shallow oceans over the area prior to the creation of the Andes mountain range.

Also the city near by the port on the lake was most likely created after the lake had been raised to that height. Recent examination of its layout and orientation now make this more apparent. Therefore the death of approximately half of its inhabitants 11,800 years ago (m/l) probably resulted from the earthquakes at that time that were the result of that expansion event.

But were not likely linked to the rise of the lake to that height.

This would seem to be supported by the current levels of activity in that region as we approach this next expansion episode.

Observations Earth expands at the middle, just like humans. Tearing takes place at the poles. The north pole is more stable (at this particular period) due to the much larger continental mass though at some future cycle when this mass cracks.... However, the equatorial bulge is causing larger tears, and greater depth, and greater length to rips near the equator. This is also where we see the largest rift valleys on the planet. As may be expected with an Expando Planet model, the continents that span the equatorial bulge should show the greatest examples of tearing.

That is just what is seen with the Great Rift Valley in Africa where the equator crosses the continent as well as in the location of the Amazon River and its associated valleys in South America. Other geo-active areas include Indonesia which also has its larger islands sitting at the top of the equatorial bulge. Lacking the stability provided to both Africa and South America by their masses, the region of Indonesia is likely to experience much increased earthquakes and volcanoes as we go forward into this next decade. The structure of the major mountain ranges on the planet, Himalayas, Andes, Rockies, et al, are visually similar to the growth ridges in the oceans near by the mountains.

This is evidenced by the parallel nature of the Rocky mountain range to the angle of the continental slope of north America. This is evidenced most strikingly in the complex shaping of the Himalayan mountain range which is repeated on the ocean floor. The same forces created both. Given the Expando Planet model, it is unlikely that water could be a real problem at the level of a global flood. While it is probable that water levels will initially be quite variable, based on land heaving up underneath, these episodes should be not too violent and transitory. Water levels might even go down hugely if a major tear opens up, thus draining water....a'la Africa and its developing new sea.

This would lower water levels globally, and wreak havoc on ocean currents. May even alter weather if the in rushing water reaches molten magma. Other water observations are that the Expando Planet model does not support the idea of global flooding on the earth as it is now. As the earth grows, it does so with expansion due to new material from deep in the core as well as by shoving the existing continental plates further apart.

So, absent any new major crack opening up that would drain a significant portion of the ocean mass, the Expando Planet model suggests that each expansion period raises water levels by spreading them out further over the planet as the ocean basins get filled in from below by new rocky material, usually in the form of magma.

Basically lots of volcanoes spewing out extra large amounts of magma as the planet adjusts to the flood of energy from the Sun will displace water and thus raise water levels globally over time. Further all the volcanoes under the oceans will increase the water temperatures and cause some small level of expansion of the water. While it is probable that much of the new matter being created *will* be of more simple molecule construction such as hydrogen and oxygen, and thus the planet may provide more water as part of its growth process., it is not likely to create enough new water during any future

expansion event to significantly alter the ratio of ocean to land in any individual expansion period/event, however over time, the growth of water volume could be considerable. Stated for clarity, given the Expando Planet model as the explanation for the planetary trauma observable here on earth, it is not possible that we will have a crustal shift in 2012. While we will have a magnetic pole shift, with its attendant problems, and we will also experience a solar expansion event, we will not have the oceans of the planet crawling out of their basins to wash over the continents. However, it is predictable that various solar effects (such as have taken place in recent years) will impact humans as a species at multiple levels from mutations through to larger infrastructure issues that may include failing dams, or nuclear plants. There are some points of evidence that half of all growth has been in the last third of planetary life. Or so it would appear.

The more growth in more recent times design pattern would explain a lot in both planetary and human history. Machu Picchu showing a rebuild period once more modern locals took it over is indicative of the cyclic survival of the megaliths. First, in a previous cycle (pre 11,800 years ago) some culture creates megaliths, then gets wiped out at one of the cycle peaks.

Some time passes. Modern humans rise up after the last cycle peak (11,800 years ago) and knowing a good thing when they see it, set about repairing the earthquake damage to Machu Picchu and other sites. We are building on top of the evidence of previous cycles. It is undeniable that some process impacts life here on earth periodically that knocks civilization back to the starting point. We have this process associated with the precession of equinoxes, but that may be erroneous judgment about what happens to our civilization. But we cannot know for sure, due to the trauma that has caused us to have to 'start over' in this last half of the current precession cycle.

If one examines the out of place artifacts, and what is known as 'forbidden archeology', evidence will be found that supports humans having been on earth for millions of years, yet we do not have a million year old civilization. In fact, our civilization does not go back past half of one precession period. Further, given the evidence of other, past, civilizations, it would appear that we are indeed, as a species, subjected to periodic catastrophe that resets our civilization back to the barely tribal level.

Ominously for us humans now alive, it appears that the civilization reset happens in a rapid way, and we are now in it. This is to say that the acceleration of earth changes and solar system

changes these last few years are clearly arguing that a cycle peak is approaching or is now underway. The expansion of earth seems to have been in the Pacific basin mostly causing the ocean to grow on this side of the planet via ruptures and sudden tears in the ocean floor (think Banda Ache earthquake and tsunami).

While along the other side of the ring of fire the event will produce up-thrust along west coast of the America's due to the expansion along the continental slope, the Middle America trench, and the Peru trench. The expansion along the Peru trench is likely the cause for the recent escalation of major, damaging earthquakes along the western South American coast.

This can be expected to continue. As can the volcanic activity. As can the sinkholes, and land slips/slides.

In fact, the land slides should also be expected to escalate to 'long run out slides' that may move mountain soils dozens of miles in minutes in sort of a dry version of a lahar. We further postulate that the sun instability grows each cycle, as does the earth. This is due to the increasing size of the planets having that much more impact on the Sun as their angular momentum alters the solar rotation. We can even hypothesize that an early solar system, with commensurately smaller planets would have had a longer period between expansion events.

This is due to the long time it takes for the angular momentum of the orbiting planets to affect the solar tensions by pulling the solar equator around faster than the solar pole. Then over time, as the planets grow, the periods involve decrease. This is due to the creeping impact of planetary mass on collected angular momentum. This would allow for the period of expansion events to be irregular, and to decrease in length over time.

Further, this same mechanism of increasing planet size causing increasing distortion in solar rotation via greater angular momentum in the solar system may also explain why the evidence seems to suggest that recent expansion events have had increasingly greater impact on humans. Indeed, the previous event almost made humans extinct. This then means that each subsequent expansion of planetary growth is bigger than last one, in spite of the earth being larger, and theoretically able to resist the change more each time.

The evidence we find all over the planet is supporting the idea of an increasing expansion effect each time, and an increasingly disruptive impact on the human social order. This theory would therefore support the idea that Atlantis and Mu may have been able to flourish due to length of time between catastrophes and due to the catastrophe 'intensity' value being lower the further that one goes back in earth's history. Then, fat planets and angular momentum caught up with them. No, their continents did not sink below the ocean, but their civilization may well have as what had been large coastal plains became flooded, and those cities were lost to the ocean both in the Atlantic and Pacific.

Further the reports of Atlantis being lost beneath the oceans may well also be interpreted as being lost beneath the ice. It is my opinion that Atlantis is what we now call Antarctica. Leaving aside Atlantis and myths for a moment, we can see that the theory of increasing planets causing increasing distress in the Sun due to increasing angular momentum at the Sun's equator would necessarily imply that the 2012 precession cycle peak will be worse than our ancient ancestors experienced.

Hmmmmm... not a good sign for life here on earth. BUT not necessarily any planetary floods or such as that. However, we will get earth impacts, as we are seeing now, and as will escalate to probable volcanic and earthquake hell, including flooding locally... but not major 800 meter floods. The evidence for that kind of flooding in Alaska and Norway was local only due to tearing in local arctic sea floors. Not an all over effect. An examination of the Arctic ocean floor shows the why both Alaska and Scandinavia (mostly Norway and Finland) received the very large 'scrubbing waves' that drove up over 800 meters into the fjords, depositing all manner of animal carcasses as the water washed clean areas that had formerly been the coastal plains of Norway.

This also occurred in Alaska, but the evidence there is distributed across a broader area of flat lands just under the permafrost. In both instances the same proximate cause would appear to be the rapid enlarging of the Arctic Mid Ocean Ridge and its subsequent separation into 3/three sections by an expansion event in the past which moved the 2/two primary sections nearly 600 miles apart.

If the ocean floor near Norway (as an example) is examined, features such as the Voring Plateau in the Norwegian Sea suggest that local reaction of the Scandinavian coast during the

last expansion event may have been quite violent. The fjords themselves are perhaps the best example, as they are actual 'rips' in continental edges.

The characteristics seen in Norwegian fjords are identical to fjords in other land masses surrounding the Arctic ocean, and more recently are seen in the new rift (tear) in Africa excepting that it has no sea in it yet, and is bare of trees, but the underlying earth disposition patterns are the same as fjords in the far north or south. Of course, we need to also note that such tearing in the earth is clearly seen when the ocean floors of the planet are viewed on a sphere.

The Arctic Mid Ocean Ridge, clearly, was part of the Mid Atlantic Ridge at one point in earth's distant past. Expansion events have shifted continental masses about over the millennia leaving behind evidence of the 'flow' of planetary growth the way that trees (and all life for that matter) record the patterns of their lives in the rings of new growth. Staying with the Arctic Ocean region for an example, we can postulate that the Arctic Mid Ocean Ridge was broken into two large pieces and one small piece at a past expansion event. This was likely many such events in the past. The rip of the mid ocean ridge at the Nansen Fracture Zone was likely quite violent, and also likely has been recently repeated in the fracturing of the Indo-Australian plate during the Sumatran earthquake and tsunami.

As with that incident, when the Nansen fracture occurred, it most likely sent a very powerful tsunami aimed directly at Norway. This tsunami crossed the sea quickly, and moved large amounts of ocean life into a debris filled wave that then scrubbed off the coastal regions of Norway. Due to the steep angles of the land, both above and below the ocean waters, these waves were able to rush up into the fjords many hundreds of meters carrying the bodies of all manner of critters high into the surrounding hills. Given the experience of tsunami waves in recent years, we can note that the primary controlling factor for wave height is how the land form directs the pressures of the waves. In areas such as Banda Ache, India, Sri Lanka, the undersea contours, as well as lower rising above water land surfaces could only support waves of less than 100 feet in height.

This is good news, depending on where one may live. If the design patterns seemingly emerging are correct then the expansion events do not cause more ocean action than the kind of tsunami we have already seen in Banda Ache, excepting when islands, volcanoes, or mountains slide into the ocean and thus create displacement waves.

Displacement waves are not like other tsunami events in that they are complex shifting of water mass rather than an energy waveform running through water. In the case of tsunamis, the actual wave height on land is determined by the land contours during the wave run-up.

Displacement waves are not so constrained and can rise quite in excess of 'normal' limitations on tsunami wave height as they are a 'stacked mass' of water. However, unlike tsunamis, the displacement wave lacks the continuing propulsive force behind it. AND in both cases there are finite limits on wave height that, while varying locally, will not have 'self standing waves' much over 180 feet.

Some of the largest of the 'self standing waves' ever recorded occurred in the open ocean off the Philippines during the eruption/explosion of Krakatoa in 1883. American naval officers on survey duty both on land and on ships off shore north of the Philippines recorded self sustaining wave heights in the open ocean of 176 feet.

Note that this wave height when reaching any land is also constrained by the same physical height issues as 'regular' tsunami waves and so is not going to rise much taller than its maximum height at sea, plus the height of rise of the ground across which it will travel.

Of course a wave of this height is very seldom capable of even crossing the continental shelf as they 'break' due to the first impact of rising height as the 'foot' of the wave phenomenon encounters the jump upward. So, whew... for a minute there.... The radiation hazard, like with most disasters, is also not globally affective in the sense of an even distribution. By that I mean that the radiation will only affect those parts of earth that are directly exposed to it. There are many issues involved. First the state of the magnetosphere Bearing in mind that the magnetosphere is created (in my opinion) by the dynamo effect of the plasma in the center of the earth. So it will not totally disappear.

It will be overwhelmed by the south/negative particles hitting the south pole of the planet, but will not instantly disappear everywhere. Note that today it is under continued stress and over the last 2+ decades has had perpetual 'holes' in it. But it still persists.

Yes sheep and goats and birds in Patagonia are blinded and die during a minor solar event when the hole is over their area, but the rest of the planet's surface life is relatively unscathed.

There are issues of absorption of radiation, and the duration of the sun's own expansion event (for part three) to consider, as well as the fact that the rotation of earth will take us all 'under the sun' so to speak over that period, but, again, the effects will not be felt ubiquitously nor evenly around the planet. * First we can reason that as the planet will be tilted south towards the sun, that the southern hemisphere will have the worst of it. There is already evidence to this point in the ramp up, depth, and location of earthquakes since 1996. * Second, the magnetosphere will be continuously attempting to rebuild itself even as the plasma core is being overwhelmed and likely pulsing and flipping from the inward rush of charged particles from the sun. * As an aside, remember that Hollywood, the 'majic staff' of the power elite has already hinted as such with neutrino's being the cause of crustal slip in the movie "2012". But, pictures aside, the core will react and change, but due to the processes involved, will continue to generate magnetic fields.

The issue is that the magnetic fields will themselves likely be erratic beyond our understanding. But, the magnetosphere, holed, and torn, will still both exist and be trying as a result of the forces of physics, to reconstitute itself.

So this is good for humans and pie lovers of all species. Other considerations are that the Sun will be expanding outward rapidly and the radiation will directly related to the factors which propel the solar expansion. These will include the state of magnetic disorder on the sun, as well as the alignment of the planets. Now, bad for us humans (at least those on this planet), it appears that Earth will have gas giants on the other side of it relative to the sun on December 21, 2012.

The solar system barycenter will be completing its near 12 year cycle (below video - hmmmm, related to the sun spot cycle?) and that seems to be in a position (still looking for more accurate

solar system modeling software to plot this out) of being closer to earth, and more importantly, being pulled by the mass of the planetary alignment in the direction of earth.

Further the barycenter of the earth moon system will also be contributing as it seems to be also in alignment with the sun and the planetary alignment on that day.

The manner, and where, and how intense the cracking/expanding hits us here on earth is directly related to the combination of the barycenter of the earth/moon system as it participates in the barycenter formation of the solar system. Not only will the sun blast us, but forces will tug on earth as the barycenters synchronize.

Oh, and "co-incidentally" the barycenter rotation of the solar system is on a "nearly 12 year" cycle that just so happens to jibe with the sun spot cycle. Hmmmm. Which is also what Patrick Geryl (and Maurice Cotterell) have decoded from the Maya artifacts.

And also the barycenter location is expected to change over time as the earth grows? But will it? Or will the forces controlling the moon adjust it outward to compensate for earth's growth? Should there be large expulsions of materials from the Sun in 2012 as now appears to be the case (especially given the huge level of solar activity increase so far in 2011), we can expect that the position of the barycenter of the earth/moon system, as well as the barycenter of the solar system as whole will not aid the earth. The observations also include the idea that a variant sized earth and other planets would go a long way toward explaining the evidence toward variant cycles such as orbits, and even the variations in the precession of the equinoxes. Further, these variations in length of the precession would be expected to become shorter over time even as the orbit and days on the planets lengthen. It also naturally follows that the variant sized planets will, as they grow in mass over the course of many millennia, shorten the period between expansions, as well as increase the intensity of each episode.

This is due to increasing mass in the Sun's ecliptic causes more rapid, and more violent distortions in the sun spot cycle by torquing the solar equatorial plane faster and faster over time. This explains why most of the growth of the planet has occurred in more recent times, rather than earlier in its history.

Thus more ancient species such as the dinosaurs (and presumably ancient civilizations) had more time between solar initiated catastrophe here on earth, and thus were able to provide very long fossil records. This also explains the evidence for many periods of a very stable earth seemingly persisting for hundreds of thousands of years.

This is opposed to our much more recent experience with earth where thirteen thousand years, more or less, seems to be about the limit between bouts of planetary crustal instability. And weather stability? Forget about it... recent, or modern humans only think they have had 'weather stability' as we were able to measure 'warm periods' in multiple human generations.

Unfortunately for all us guys here now, this last warm period was likely it for a while. The current Maya Long Count is not a calendar per se, but rather is simply the count of days since it started 5114 years ago. When it ends next year, the long count will have spanned 5115 years which is a harmonic fifth of the current precession cycle.

If we examine the conditions on earth when the Long Count began, we note that it was a time of fantastic levels of weather upheaval. A previously long period of climatic stability (more or less) ended so abruptly that agriculture and other food sources were affected globally triggering many migrations of populations.

And... guess what, there is every indication that our current agricultural system is also failing due to earth changes. Also coincidentally just at a Long Count boundary. Weather stability here on earth is obviously under direct solar control. Evidence would seem to suggest that the Maya were using a harmonic fifth of the 26 thousand year precession cycle with good reason. While it is not yet understandable why the fifth harmonic is the most active, there is still climate evidence that over at least this last precession cycle, the climate has undergone very large, and dramatic shifts that correspond to the Maya Long Count of 5115 years.

This then would explain the Maya thinking in Great Ages span of time, as well as accounting for their oral traditions of five great ages, each ending in a different sort of climate related cataclysm.

It is also not yet clear as to what made the ancient Maya think that this age, the Fifth was the 'end of days (time ceases to be)'.

It may be all the humans alive in December of 2012 will find out what has been hidden from us. Or it may be that our solar system goes through an expansion event which will dramatically alter life here on earth due to impacts on the climate and the shape of the planet beneath our feet. What will an Expando Planet feel like here on earth?

Well... probably, in a general sense, we can expect: * increasing earthquakes * increasing magnitude of earthquakes * decreasing depth to earthquakes (dangerous part as shallow quakes cause damage to surface features including human infrastructure) * increasing volcano activity * more volcanoes creating themselves in new spots * new forms of eruptions that are caused by volcanoes splitting open from cracking * large cracks or new ground fissures... some should be spectacularly large and deep and long and featuring magma *

new steam vents. And other magma related phenomena * new ocean currents due to ocean heating. And the formation of new land under the ocean, as well as new volcanoes, and rifts and cracks (fractures) * other myriad of oceanic problems such as: o new sea mount volcanoes manifesting causing new contours and altering habitats o new material shoving itself to the surface at all the rips around the planet under the oceans. This may cause local chemical issues in the ocean which, while dissipating over time, will nonetheless cause many problems to various marine ecosystems.

Wild ass speculation It would seem logical that the expansion events are different at each half of the precession cycle. In 2012, the precession cycle will culminate with an alignment with the dark rift of the Milky Way galaxy on December 21.

As the December solstices have the southern pole of the planet inclined toward the Sun, it would be logical to expect that the southern polar region will get most of the expansion activity. So far in the process, at least as I am able to observe, there are both more incidents in the far southern regions than the north, and these events have more of an intensity than those seen north of the equator.

During the precession cycle culmination 11,900 years from now, the event will take place on the June solstice and thus the northern hemisphere will be more directly impacted. Of course we note that ANY expansion event anywhere on earth affects everywhere on earth, but having said that, it still would seem logical that the spread of the intensity of the expansion will radiate out from the far southern regions from 2012 onward. Again, noting a growing deviance in both numbers and intensity between the northern and southern hemispheres in what can be termed as 'expansion event symptoms', the wild ass speculation is that the southern hemisphere will see continuing growth in intensity and numbers as the planet moves closer toward the December 2012 solstice.

The northern hemisphere will also react, but as the primary energetic focus is toward the south pole, the effects that will present themselves north of the equator will be of less intensity, though probably of longer duration. Further, the northern hemisphere logically will continue to show ruptures and tearing behavior across the continental land masses, however there also logically should be two distinct types of tearing.

These should be able to be separated into long run out tears such as is seen in Pakistan and across northern Africa, and the deep, sudden, and short cracking observed now in the far north of north America and in Siberia. An example of the 'long run out tear' in the America's would be the San Andreas fault line. Further if the cracking in Pakistan is examined on a globe, it can be observed that a great circle line joins these cracks with the enlarging tear in northern Africa. Then, should that great circle line be extended, it will reach all the way into Siberia where it runs through the length of Lake Baykal. One of the largest freshwater lakes in the region, Russian geophysics has recorded the origin of the lake as forming due to a very long fissure in the crust which caused subsidence over a very large, and previously relatively flat area.

Lake Baykal is the connection point for a twisting fissure that runs from near Tiksi far north of the Arctic circle, through Lake Baykal and heading off to the south west ultimately to terminate in the new rift in northern Africa.

This fissure will probably, some time in the far distant future, form the new coast line of a split Eurasian continent. The reason that both Pakistan and Africa are exhibiting cracks is due to their being within the area of the equatorial bulge.

This part of earth is 13 miles higher than the poles, and thus has increased complexity to the underlying tensions on the crust. It is their location on the southern side of the equatorial bulge that accounts for similar cracking showing up in Peru and Chile. And, in both places, this also explains the large number (and increasing) of earthquakes as well as the reason they are so damaging. The Gulf of California, again taking a long great circle route view, leads right up to the San Andreas fault. From the northern tip of the fault a series of not-yet-connected observable fault lines extend parallel to the coast all the way to the Columbia River separating Oregon from Washington.

Other smaller faults continue on the other side of the mighty Columbia (itself riding in the depression made by a crack in the plate) north to the southern most edge of Puget Sound (where Halfpasthuman is located). We note that California, and the Gulf thereof, are also on the equatorial bulge where the tears can be expected to be the most active, and most dramatically separated.

It is likely that the native Californian's fear of The Big One is realistic given that the process involved is a tearing of the earth's crust such that at some point California will be part of a long string of islands separated from the nearby mainland much as is Vancouver Island now. The fear of The Big One may not be misplaced these days as it is quite clear that earthquakes are escalating in numbers all across the planet and have been for a number of years. Further the trends continue to point to larger earthquakes as well as more earthquakes.

The Expando Planet model does explain this observable global phenomenon well, and further also provides some insight into the likely locations for large scale earthquakes going forward into the current expansion process. Such places obviously include Pakistan, and California. Though, as a side note, California, while it may break off from the mainland, will not go under the oceans. It will be a very large island.

Still, California going walk about will be a messy event for all concerned. Staying on the subject of earthquakes for a moment, we need to examine the idea that on a sphere such as earth, undergoing both continuous, and pulsed growth or expansion, it can be logically expected that in areas of tearing, or fracturing, the earthquakes would increase in both frequency, and intensity. Further, and something not initially obvious, is that the earthquakes will 'climb' upward, which is to say, become more shallow over time.

This is due to the expansion forces acting on earth initially within the center of the planet and then working their way to the surface during the event. This trend should progress at a steady rate as the earth continues into its expansion 'pulse' phase.

The earthquakes will continue to rise to ever more shallow earthquakes, though unfortunately for us lifeforms here on earth, these quakes will probably also increase in magnitude as they move upward. The result is likely to be much more damage from earthquakes globally, and some rather spectacularly damaging earthquakes will happen over the next few years as the fissure impacts human habitation.

In regions that would support the phenomenon, liquefaction will cause large areas of ground to actually 'soften beneath your feet'. This is not good for buildings depending on 'solid ground' for support. Other areas, including mountainous regions will suffer large, and suddenly occurring sinkholes, which may produce horrific landslides.

Where the sinkholes are near the terminal ends of an 'active' tear, it can be expected that earthquakes will also produce what are known as 'long run out slides'. These can be devastating as the sides of mountains are shaken so violently that the soils become a colloidal suspension of air/water/rock/grits that will flow like a lahar and can scour down a valley so far as to run out over 40/forty kilometers if the land form allows; or can run up the sides of opposing mountains to reach nearly the starting height of the slide.

Further issues for humans will include all manner of below ground structures, and infrastructure such as piping to be disturbed.

Though not ubiquitous across the planet, those regions so affected will likely be greatly affected. There are areas around the planet where ancient irrigation systems, some spectacularly long, have been 'ripped' into several pieces by ground movement over time. In one example in what is now western China, the channel has been broken nearly at its 13 kilometers mid point, and the two halves of the break are now separated by 20/twenty kilometers. Indeed, this irrigation channel now even appears to be in two separate valleys. New cracks in Peru, and now major mudslides in Bolivia, large earthquakes off the coast of Japan... we all need to pay attention; planetary change is upon us.

In the up coming months, the progression of the solar cycle will let us know if and how these new levels of solar radiation will affect human life here on earth. We can expect that more earthquakes will also be associated with more volcanic activity.

This could be very bad. It may be that we get all kinds of volcanic ash in air affect air travel, plants, and breathing... all vital things... but then, guess what, volcanic ash suspended in the air is almost as good as a magnetosphere for shedding radiation. It is predictable that large areas of open ocean would occur as the planet expands, and having far less mass than continents, it is also predictable that the ocean floor would develop holes in the sub sea crust where new material can rise. This is necessary to even out the planetary mass

due to centrifugal forces affecting the planet as we both rotate, and orbit (within a complex of barycenters).

It is a must that the earth have new lands in middle of Pacific plate, or we would have planetary water redistribution trying to balance out the mass during our daily rotation. This, predictably leads toward the idea that Hawaii may see a disproportionate amount of activity during expansion events now and into the future due to its position. Already the hole in the crust is creating new islands yet to break the ocean surface that are nonetheless pushing the existing Hawaiian islands off to the northwest. It is further predictable that Antarctica will split as the planet grows. Since the continent will be lifted at its edges by the expansion of the planet, it can be expected that the glaciers will crack first (more acute angle involved), providing clues as to stresses affecting the underlying rock.

Again, as the forces affecting the continent are to be lifting forces at the edges of the continental shelf, it could also follow that some glacier movements may cease, or even reverse. It would also seem logical that fissures will develop both within the glaciers, and on the surface in such numbers as to resemble 'crazing' on pottery.

It can be expected that very large levels of glacier disturbance will occur, including movement of much more floating ice than has been usual over the last century. This may include extraordinary amounts of newly floating glaciers of staggering proportions. As these enter the oceans, waves will spread out and affect coastal communities around the planet.

However, please note it will be waves, and NOT increased water levels... at least not from the glaciers and not for some time. It has been estimated that it may take as long as 20/twenty years for large ice masses to increase global ocean levels. This is due to the same forces that create and hold the waters at the equatorial bulge.

Additionally the mass of the ice entering the water pushes the water away in all possible directions not constrained by land or other ice. So the effects of glacier slide are more of a slow motion disaster. Even if new sea ice was to raise the water by several hundreds of feet globally, the displacement is not instant, and will be tracked over the course of years, not days. Also North America separates further from South America... probably not at the Panama Canal.

Rather the separation will most likely occur as a result of a 'pulling' motion from South America as the continent attempts to adjust its position relative to the new equator. Please note that as earth grows, the position of the equator will shift slightly, relative to the continents. In both South America and Africa, the continents span the equator, and thus are 'arched' across the equatorial bulge as well.

The result of this positioning will be very large, deep, and violent cracks as those parts of the continents which are north of the equator try to continue moving north, while those parts south of the peak of the bulge refuse to 'climb' up north. It can be observed both from the new rift in Africa, as well as the shape and position of the Amazon River valley, that both continents are already responding to these equatorial bulge forces. It can be expected that side effects of very large increases in volcanoes and eruptions of all kinds will produce atmosphere problems. These will extend from no-fly zones due to large volumes of corrosive ash, perhaps nearly global in scope at times, to dangerous gas levels producing 'no breathe' zones as more or less 'local' phenomenon. Further, it can be speculated that the significant increase in volcano activity over a relatively short period will boost the probability of a new ice age.

Additional impetus toward colder days (for a few decades) comes from magnetic pole reversals as well, so it may make sense to start knitting those long and thick woolen underwear. Of course, let us not forget the good news from all of this that a volcanic ash filled sky is very good at reflecting solar radiation. Thus providing some 'cover' for life on earth while the magnetosphere is repairing. Of course, there is no airplane flying during such atmospheric events. This will impact shipments of all kinds of goods.

Further, a significant mass of volcanic ash in the atmosphere will alter wind patterns at all altitudes. Our atmosphere problems also will include the unseen, in the form of increased radiation that will make it dangerous to fly. Further, that same trend toward more energies from the Sun will raise the concentrations and locations of high energy particles in the upper atmosphere. This will predictably increase storm activity on the surface as these charged particles attempt to ground out.

Noting that hurricanes and cyclones are NOT dependent on 'warm water', and instead are the result of charged particle storms in the upper atmosphere trying to ground themselves, it would seem likely that the 2011 and 2012 storm 'seasons' will be both erratic, and extraordinarily

destructive. Further, it seems likely that these next two years will produce much more major cyclonic storm activity in the southern hemisphere than the north. It is highly doubtful that the ancient Maya knew of the Planet X speculation, nor could they have had knowledge of the idea of a crustal shift. Yet the surviving Maya writings are clearly warning of 'something wicked' coming at the end of this current Long Count.

The warnings, including what is known as the Dresden Codex, do support Terrance McKenna's eschaton in that it says, 'time ceases (to be)', and 'great harvest of souls (begins)'. IF the translations are anywhere near correct.

Thanks to the rapacious, malicious, and evil conquistadors, and their master, the morally twisted pope of the catholics, who supposedly burned all of the Maya and Aztec codex excepting 3/three, we are not likely to be able decipher just what had the Maya alarmed, in spite of our having to live through it.

According to the Dresden Codex, the end of the current long count due on December 21, 2012, will bring a 'blue flood dragon from the sky', and abundance of loose spirits. Presumably they were NOT referring to boat races and party barges. Considering that the Long Counts themselves are harmonic fifths of the precession of the equinoxes, as well as harmonic fifths (more exactly) of two mega sun spot cycles, it then is understandable that the Mayan Fifth Great Age should begin on December 22, 2012, excepting that there are a few scrolls kicking about indicating that we are due a visit by the 'blue flood dragon' just as 'time ceases', and 'great harvest (of) spirits' starts. In so far as can be ascertained, none of the surviving Maya codex have been examined for evidence of encoded displays within them, yet as Maurice Cotterell has demonstrated, the Maya were masters of placing layers of information all within a single image... merely a matter of knowing the offsets and reference points.

It would seemingly follow that if they did so within funerary lids made of great slabs of stone, that they may also have done so with their 'lesser' documents just as a matter of efficiency and cultural tendencies. Therefore there may yet remain information and additional clues to ancient Maya thinking by a close examination of the surviving codex.

Of course, access to the hidden rooms under the vatican would also probably settle the issue in short order as it seems most likely that the 'burning' of the Mayan codex is probably a cover story for their removal and sequestering in the deep holes under the palace of the sorcerers (vatica = sorcerer) in Rome. The real major fear amongst the elite, and those who have considered the issue, is that a Carrington event from the sun will destroy the electrical grid in the northern hemisphere. Should this occur, and absent heroic efforts on the part of most of the species, a tragic level of deaths will occur over the next three years following the loss of the electrical grid as the various supporting infrastructure systems, including healthcare and food shipments, fail.

So, while a brief Carrington event would not be particularly bad for global agriculture, it could remove the ability to transport foods, or perform any task requiring electricity.

And since it would likely be accompanied by increasing problems with flying (from magnetic disruption to volcanic ash to moving runways due to earthquake damage), the loss of electrical power would doom many people to starvation and death by lack of medicines across the northern hemisphere since any aid would necessarily have to be delivered by boat. Note that the nasty bastards (tptb and their minions) have their agenda as well during these chaotic times.

So amidst all the global fundament crises, it seems probable that we can expect a whole lot of bad behavior from those humans who style themselves as 'the elites'. Thus we can expect that they will facilitate the crashing of the Global Boom engineered by the master criminal against humanity, Al 'The Briefcase' Greenspan.

This will (and is) inevitably produce a massive global unemployment wave during the crashing of the global currencies, them selves a ponzi scheme to put humanity into slavery to those who control the ultimate weapon... compounding interest (aka, DEBT). These 'elites' can be counted upon to act crazy just as the world is hitting this major transition in its own process of going crazy.

Not only has our planetary climate left stability behind, the earth under our civilization is growing and changing at levels that will affect the infrastructure from the ground up.

It seems evident that the Expando Planet model would favor a self perpetuating and self increasing cycle. As the planets get larger, their impact on the Sun is greater, and the sun therefore reacts more which in turn throws more energy out which allows the planets to grow more. This self regulating, and continuously shortening cycle also has an in built trend, from the view point of humanity, toward more violent expansion events.

However, it is also evident that the continental mass distribution on earth favors less actual movement in the northern hemisphere. Due to there being less constraint by mass on movements in the south. This will likely also be the case during this period, and may already be demonstrated by the geophysical events of the last 20 years. It also seems evident that the last time humanity went through a one-half mega sun spot cycle period, 11,800 years ago, it damn near wiped us out.

Soooo... it would seem prudent to take all the instability expressing now from universe as sign to be extra sensitive and aware, and to take such precautions as may be indicated by our local environment.

Conclusions... or Things we can do Firstly, examine your daily surroundings very damn carefully.

What will survive earthquakes?

These are increasingly likely to intrude on your life. Examine the buildings where you spend your time. Go and read about the 'triangle of life' and then seek out these vital survival places in EVERY building you enter. Do it by habit as when destructive earthquakes hit, you will not have the time to analyze, only react.

Try to tell friends and family about the whole 'triangle of life' thing. Recognize that everyone's karma is their own, so don't beat them up over it, but where receptive, gently provide knowledge. And assist in becoming an 'anti earthquake' expert. Run around securing things to walls and other supports as may be warranted.

Recognize that other environmental and climate issues also will be escalating. Start growing your own food. Our agricultural system is already showing failures as it continues under extreme stress.

Further, traitors to humanity such as the devious Monsanto corporation and its stooges, and Obama (who blithely removed restrictions on Monsanto), are intent on destroying your foods with genetic modifications.

Sooo... bearing in mind that old adage that you are what you eat, be very wary of 'Frankenfoods'. And by extension, curse the names and energies of those who promote them. You needn't put much energy into it, just the occasional utterance of 'curse Monsanto and all who sail in it' will suffice. Pretty soon the accumulated mass negative energy will build up and overwhelm the bastards.

As an aside, mass shunning, cursing, and ridicule are great asymmetric ways of ratcheting down on the minions and the stooges. * Would people really work at producing GMO foods if their personal identities were attached to the work via public condemnation? * And how about if they knew that every day several tens of thousands of people were cursing their personal life force? Hmmmm, my guess is... probably not. As one may prepare for earthquakes, there are other precautions that can be taken. Invest some time in thinking about the circumstances of your life a year from now. And share your results with others. In any case, the future will take care of itself as long as we take care of ourselves... which must mean a pie cannot be far away. 6.

by Jonathan McGregor Bethel Spanish version Mar 7, 2007 from JonathanMcGregorBethelsBlog Website

End-Times It must be stated at the outset of this article that the expectation in 2012 of any singular event could very well lead to complete disappointment. None of us know for certain what will happen in the years to come, especially the specific date of 12-21-2012, as the future is yet to occur. I try to approach this great mystery of 2012 with an open yet discriminating mind, open to possible scenarios yet discriminating and requiring evidence.

That being said, it is obvious that right now is a time of radical transformation, and society is subconsciously gearing up for a "Shift of the Ages," a moment when the Zeitgeist, the spirit of our time, shifts to a higher pattern. Many are coming forward to proclaim "The End of the World," and they point to the Maya themselves as stating the end is coming. But the fact remains that the Maya encoded the ending of one 13baktun calendar cycle and a new beginning, what they called "Creation Day."

This is not the "End of the World" being solicited in the main stream media, a guarantee that doom, tumultuous changes, and a turmoil ridden future lies ahead; they are using the tried and true application of fear to make money, and it is very reasonable that this fear is in place, for events could be very dire, yet we have to approach this moment in history with the poise and watchfulness of the spiritual warrior. Although mankind has traversed the evolutionary gap between the savage rain forest and the modern civilized city, it now sits in a very alarming situation; it now faces a bifurcation point in the evolutionary path it has trod thus far. This unavoidable fork in the road will lead us either down the path of destruction and decimation, or we will be impelled down the evolutionary channels toward enlightenment and liberation, freeing ourselves from the entropic grip of materiality and the thralldom of our everyday world.

This is a very novel predicament for humanity, one it has never seen before, a moment a planet brings forth only once in its' lifetime. This razor's edge that we are teetering on is fast becoming a slippery slope, and the global operational systems are careening out of control.

* On the one hand, we have reached a monumental moment in which all indicators point to the fact that we are approaching a quantum leap in our evolutionary trek, a rapturous instant in which our species' evolution shifts to a higher, unimaginable level of functionality * On the other hand, the global situation looks very grim, and certain actualities could create a situation where our existential being is subjected to harsh realities, realities that are the consequence of what we started long ago in history. This situation is building up more and more pressure and is working its' way toward a breaking point. Because of humanity's selfish and disharmonious behavior, we have created a situation that looks fairly dire and dreadful for our species, yet the contradictory is also true; never before has the human race been so perfectly poised so as to initiate a whole series of evolutionary steps that could precede a Utopian civilization. Mankind has never found himself at a crossroads of such magnitude, a bifurcation point that will change the course of history. Nevertheless, that is no excuse for a botched job in the grave matter at hand; it is crucial to our survival that we get it right! That sounds like a paramount amount of pressure and will require an impeccable discipline; indeed, this is intense pressure, and this rite of passage requires utilizing a higher more disciplined order for quelling the more primitive behaviors that will only guarantee our demise.

An immense amount of cooperation and compassion is required to get us passed the inhospitable situation before us. It is vital that we quickly get a clue and start doing what we know we need to do, yesterday and not tomorrow, before our tenuous grip on reality quickly slips away, and we tumble erroneously down the path of failed attempts.

No, this will not do! If we really want to make it through this perilous passageway in the hallway of history, then we need to quickly wake up, come to our senses, and merge our scientific world view and know-how with a true ecumenical spiritual paradigm founded upon ethics, thereby placing well meaning attention and focus on the problems at hand. A merging of these two worlds could help create the impetus for us to form a true global community where the "Good of the All" is sought out for the "Good of the All" by all our individual talents. Modern man throughout the twentieth century was coming to terms with his theological and scientific paradigms, and in the last decade of that century s/he saw an intensification of the integration of these two worlds; the true philosopher's stone, the stone of the wise, was condensing from the merging of these two paradigmatic systems.

This new paradigm of thought was synthesized in a dialectical process where the thesis and antithesis were merged, the worlds of theology and science, and it is now informing the morphogenetic fields that rule social behavior all over our planet. These fields order our behavior through the process of morphic resonance, whereby our thoughts and emotions are in sync with the planetary mind, and our mind then follows suit.

These global morphogenetic fields of humanity have been called many names: * the collective unconscious * the genetic archives * the akashic records * the phylogenetic unconscious At any rate, this morphogenetic field that humanity resonates with is a sphere of thought surrounding the planet, and the synergistic tendencies of the information couplings within those fields are gearing up for and catalyzing a transformational shift to a whole new order of being.

In the notions of the French priest and paleontologist, Pierre Teilhard de Chardin, the biosphere, nature, will give rise to and exude the noosphere, a global layer of thought, the informational synergy of which will actualize the Omega Point into being. This will usher in a new paradigm, a transcendence for all of humanity.

It is interesting to note that Teilhard came to his realizations long before the global network of the Internet; therefore, many philosophers consider the internet to be the hardwiring of the noosphere. The unrelenting questions of what will happen consistently assail the mind. * Will we make it through the turmoil to see ourselves basking in the sunlight of enlightenment? *

Or will we destroy ourselves in some apparent need for defense or through retaliation? * Will the Biosphere continue supporting our species when it is being decimated daily? * Will we experience some major geological changes as a consequence of our relationship with the sun? * Will our technology birth the next level of our evolution? * Will the Gaian Mind, which appears to be the source of crop circles, bring us a further revelation of our place in the cosmos? * Can a multitude of these events occur? This intense inquisitiveness will not be abated within me, and sadly, I'm afraid that the answers that have presented themselves are both appealing and disturbing, creating further vexing enigmas. So, what we are facing is manifold and many-sided; one singular event does not take the whole happening into consideration.

Does this time of devastation and/or enlightenment have anything to do with 2012 as many have foretold? What we are facing is both good and bad, in my opinion; one model of our future does not contain the entirety of that happenstance. It is multifaceted and diverse, but our mammalian brain seeks to create black and white scenarios out of the mysteries before us, seeking to simplify the unknown and fearful into nice little models of what we are moving into. But there is no way that what we are facing could be all black or all white; it is indeed both.

The concrescence of novelty, the eschaton, will be an infinitely novel situation and contain both the good and the bad!

As the universe becomes more complex and ramified, as more novelty accrues, then we can expect the intensity of those novel forms and events to increase; the novelty of both the black and the white will intensify in its' influence upon our lives.

Therefore, it is understandable that the most horrid will occur alongside of the most divine in our shared, global future. So, what kind of things could we be facing in 2012 or beyond? What are the tenable possibilities on our global horizon?

Let's first look at the negative occurrences facing our global civilization, and then we will discuss the positive effects which also appear to be breaking through into our society. These doom ridden scenarios are things that, if they were to occur, would affect our global future and life as we know it in a radical way. These possibilities are things we definitely need to be considering as we move ahead. Humanity is in a very precarious situation; never before have so many mounting crisis points been converging together. I'm no doomsayer, but if you remove yourself from the group mind with its aversion to the facts at hand, and you take a good look at what is about to transpire, then you can't help but be white-knuckled and fearful of the future. But this fear is not at all what we need, if reality is truly affected by our minds as scientific studies are beginning to bear out.

The following situations "Could" transpire in the years to decades ahead; they are not necessarily slated to occur in 2012! The increased complexity and convoluted nature of our global civilization has made the threat of a pandemic a much more conceivable situation. A virus could be transferred to many areas of the world through our transportation grid in a very short period of time, and an all out pandemic could be actualized in a matter of weeks. When asked about a near future, foreseeable pandemic, doctors say it's a matter of "when" not "if" one breaks out.

In the last 30 years we saw the introduction of many new biological threats: AIDS, SARS, West Nile, and now the Avian Flu, and these are threats that we must take seriously.

When will this speculative disaster occur?

It is uncertain, but scientists are very concerned about the possibility of a major unstoppable pandemic in the near future. A pandemic is just one possibility on the shelf of global, future threats. In addition, we have the Geo-Political environment, a motley crew of a makeup with each component striving for

dominance on the world stage. It is one thing to agree to disagree with the other parties in the global arena; however, we now have radical terrorists, self proclaimed servants of God, who believe it is their God given duty to kill all those that will not convert to their way of thinking.

It is hard to deal with these people in a rational manner, as their behavior elicits the very primitive instinct of seeking their utter destruction.

In addition, we now have the proliferation of nuclear weapons, and they are now in the hands of some very fanatical and tyrannical leaders. It is easy to foresee and imagine that if the terrorists ignited a nuclear bomb in one of our cities due to their ideological insanity, then the civilized world could very easily retaliate, thereby sparking a nuclear tit-for-tat of all the countries involved. This is a very real possibility and something that MUST be avoided at all costs.

Does that mean we should not retaliate if we were ever to be attacked with a nuclear bomb?

Well, I am a warrior, and anyone trying to kill me, my family, my friends, or any of the citizens of my country should be very aware that there are many of us who will stand up and seek to destroy them utterly. But that being said, we need to be exceedingly careful not to spark a nuclear catastrophe, if that were to ever happen.

Therefore, our retaliatory nature could pose a big problem as we move ahead, as we now live in a world where radical mentalities and terrorism exist. Our global society is also facing major economic collapse as we move forward into subsequent periods of time. Our economic markets are so reliant on what occurs globally now, and the countries of the world have created such a deficit that some financial specialists say what we are facing is insurmountable; we are operating on borrowed time, and a huge spiral into economic collapse looks like an extremely conceivable scenario. If those realistic threats weren't bad enough, the biosphere is being destroyed in so many aspects that it is barely possible to imagine. Researchers believe that the biosphere may become completely uninhabitable in just a couple centuries. The facts of man's destruction of the habitat that brought him forth are truly appalling and ghastly. We are decimating the rain forest by miles daily, the main source of the oxygen we breathe.

Climate is changing as both the jet stream in the atmosphere and the gulf stream in the Atlantic are shifting. Our oceans are dying from pollution and over fishing, and many species are being wiped into extinction.

Is this insanity? What are we doing to ourselves?

The planet was never intended to support life for 6.5 billion people, and that population is only increasing daily. The facts of the matter make one wince when looking at all the details, creating a nauseating feeling in the pit of the stomach. The melting of the ice caps is occurring from a multitude of sources that are causing Global Warming. It is not just our fuel use causing global warming; it also has to do with natural cycles that revolve around the earth-sun connection. The melted ice will cause the sea levels to rise, obliterating the coastline and inundating us with water.

This biosphere issue is definitely not something that will cause a global catastrophe in 2012, but it is an indication of where we find ourselves and the nature of our shared predicament. The operative word is "Shared," and we need to realize that all of us on the planet are in this boat together, and it has now begun to traverse the rapids and dangerous currents ahead. Additionally, we have the sun-earth connection to be concerned about.

The Sun's Coronal magnetic flux has increased 100% in the last century. Global Warming is partly caused by man and is also caused by the earth's relationship with the sun, and scientists say the sun has steadily become more active in the past several hundred years. It must be understood that when a Solar Flare or Coronal Mass Ejection occurs a wave of energy moves out in all directions, and when it impinges with a planet's magnetic field, the field contorts in reaction.

This contortion shifts the Jet Stream creating climate change, and it also puts stress on the system of plate tectonics, causing an increased number of earthquakes and volcanoes. The last sunspot cycle ended with the two largest flares on record and the next major cycle is scheduled for 2012. Now that we have discussed some of the sobering bad news about our future, and because I like to be the optimist even in the most drastic and horrid of situations, I think it is essential to relay the whole picture. Yes, things look very dire, but they also look most promising. Strides in science, medicine, government and technology are making major advances in ridding our

species of the undesired effects of bad health, famine, poverty, or lack of any name. So, like I said, what we are moving into is both wonderful and horrid.

It is a double-edged sword! Science is making great progress, and a G.U.T. A Grand Unified Theory or a T.O.E. Theory Of Everything, is within the grasp of humanity, giving us a true understanding of Space-Time and harnessing that understanding for benevolent and beneficial technologies, which we will use to find solutions to our present predicaments.

A quantum leap in our evolution is apparently directly in front of us, if you consider the exponential explosion of technology. A technological singularity is going to occur; it cannot be avoided. Only one of the previously mentioned catastrophes could remove us from the course with the Technological Singularity. This Singularity will bring us technologies that will give us immense longevity and possible immortality! That was a fairly welcome surprise as we entered a new millennium, discovering we were facing this event.

The exponential explosion of technology will remove many of the problems we have dealt with for thousands of years. For instance, nanotechnology will be used to control cholesterol and plaque within our arteries, thereby alleviating one of the major causes of death. The A.I. mind will know all our problems, and it will use intelligence a million times greater than man to find solutions and implement them in the moment. Researchers are learning how much our mind is inextricably linked to the physical reality surrounding us, and with the advent of nanotechnology we will be able to create materially whatever we are visualizing mentally. Our science and spirituality are also no longer exclusive to each other, and the age old conflicts between the facts of science and our theological perspectives are dissolving and fading away.

Our scientific investigations are showing us that the quantum vacuum, the zero-point-field, contains the informational blueprint for the way our reality forms itself. It is the reservoir for every occurrence that has ever happened in previous universes, universes that are iterations of the one multiverse.

The zero-point-field is a non-local vacuum containing zero matter or energy but immense information that our universe uses as a guide to shape itself.

This zero-point-field can be considered the mind of God, and now even most atheistic scientists realize that there is a higher dimensional information template from which our universe is formed. Also, our world's religions are beginning to loosen the constricting belt of literalism, and they are seeing the truths of both science and other faiths; a convergence between disparities is taking place, and integration is occurring on many levels. So, we live in a time full of radical changes of both a qualitatively good and bad nature.

The ancient seers knew that this exact period in time represented a period of catastrophic changes preceding a golden age. Most cultural traditions have some intimation of the times we are living in, whether it is Hindu, Hopi, Mayan, or many, many others, and they are all in basic agreement that a great purging, a cataclysmic time of change, will precede a golden age of enlightenment. The Mayans encoded 12-21-2012 into their calendrical system, and they pointed to that day for some reason.

Hundreds of years later in the 1970s a hippie botanist, Terence McKenna, had a vision under the influence of Shamanic Power Plants, and he saw how to distill a timewave from the Ken Wa sequence of the I-Ching. This Timewave mapped the ingression of novelty into the universe, an organizing principle of ever increasing complexity upon which all of our reality is ordered.

At any rate, he saw on the timewave that this nature of novelty hits a moment of infinite novelty, what is called the concrescence of novelty, at the same exact time that the Mayan Calendar cycle ends, December 21, 2012!

So, this date has given itself over to the minds of a culture of people over a thousand years ago and then to a hippie botanist in the 1970s, a very strange synchronicity indeed! Then along comes Ervin Laszlo in 2006 stipulating that Chaos and Complexity Theory has shown how a huge bifurcation point in humanity's evolutionary trek occurs in late 2012.

At the fork in the road, we either go the route of self destruction or the high road of enlightenment and liberation. Noting that Terence derived his timewave from the 64 hexagrams of the I Ching, and also noting the congruency of those 64 Hexagrams with the 64 codons of DNA, the 64 bit structure of computer code, and the central 64 squares of a Tzolkin grid of the Mayan Calendar, then it can be surmised that a universal organizing principle is being perceived.

No one knows what will happen on December 21, 2012.

Will it be Doomsday or the Omega Point, or both, or neither?

One thing is for certain; now is a time of radical change, and both problems and innovations are creating a novel situation for a planet of 6.5 billion people. The biosphere is more decimated than it ever has been. The Sun more is active than in recent time and may cause some major geological changes. Our Technology has moved deep into exponential growth and is about to birth a singularity.

Whatever happens, I am sure it will be a ride we will never forget!

Return to 2012 Return to The Tzolkin Maya

7.

by Clif High February 28, 2011 from HalfPastHuman Website Spanish version

Preface about baldly bold statements This article is written for the cognoscenti... those in the know.

There will be many statements that are made in this document that will require you to validate either the facts, or the conclusions derived from them on your own. Too many theories of too intricate or expansive (future joke here) a nature are involved for me to take time and space in this article to bring out all of their supporting details.

So certain statements and observations will be made with no supporting material supplied as it is expected that motivated reader will explore the ideas in question on their own and reach conclusions that they find appropriate.

Still a Solar Cataclysm in 2012 In spite of the title, 2012 is still ALL about catastrophe, and cataclysm.

To reach any other conclusion is to not be aware of manifesting circumstances. These include the many features of the planet that show scarring from past catastrophe as well as the amnesiac nature of our own species and the lack of any real history before 11,800 years ago.

These facts include the earth, and all human history, all the realstory behind the 'history that ThePowerElites want you to believe. The facts pointing toward catastrophe, cataclysm, and extinctions here on earth over this next year and into 2012 are detailed now in hundreds of volumes; some of the best of these have been produced by Patrick Geryl and are available from his web site.

Disagreements with some of Patrick Geryl's conclusions Interview by webbotforum guys with Patrick:

Time Monk Radio Network Interviews Presents: Patrick Geryl On TMRN Radio February 26, 2011

Patrick Geryl is space focused and correct about the conclusions that he presents on solar system activity.

His understanding of earth is not as detailed, in my opinion, and it has led to some incorrect conclusions. First, much of his understanding of how a pole flip occurs, as well as how a crustal slip may occur, is dependent upon the idea of the center of the earth having a rotating mass of molten iron, that is creating the planet earth's magnetic field by virtue of its spin.

Now note that Patrick Geryl's information about the magnetic field itself is correct. The earth's magnetic field, humanities shield, is failing, and has a period that is about 11,800 years between re-charges.

But, in my opinion, the idea of a molten iron mass spinning in the middle of the earth is false. * First, molten metals cannot hold a magnetic charge, nor can they create one, no matter how fast they may spin. * Second, even if molten iron could hold a magnetized state, it would take a mass of iron approximately half again as big as the whole of the earth to generate the level of magnetic field we can measure now, let alone at its peak.

* Further, in order for such an iron core to lose its magnetic field, assuming it could generate one at all, would be logically in the process of slowing down in its rotation. The whole 'iron core' theory relies on thinking of the core of the earth as a dynamo. So in following with that, the only way that earth could have a weakening magnetic field would be if the 'iron core' were to be slowing down.

IF THAT were the case, we would know about it. Further, what we laughingly refer to as 'mainstream science' has recently determined that the core of the earth is not only spinning faster than the crust, but has recently begun to accelerate its spin rate. So much for the iron core idea. Further, if the earth did have an iron core at its center, then this core would cool over the billions of years, and would solidify, thus altering our planet's active state into more of a dead state insofar as the tectonic plates are concerned. So that does not work logically either. Further, Patrick Geryl's conclusions about how the earth will react to the upcoming solar catastrophe are based on academic mainstream thinking about planet earth, such as the 'iron core idea', that are not consistent with today's knowledge. Patrick's conclusion that the sun will expel vast quantities of south charged, high energy particles is likely correct.

BUT the idea that, as with small iron magnets, our core will flip, is not correct. He uses the analogy of the core, being a giant iron magnet, being pushed over as one can push over one magnet with another. This is likely not going to happen. There are inherent physical problems with the idea of the planetary equatorial bulge 'relaxing' to allow for crustal shifts as described. Further the theory does not say how the relaxing of the bulge would impact the 'iron core' and the rest of the planetary structure. Nor does it account for the reconstructing of the planet over the 11,800 years between these events to its present, bulged out shape (equatorial bulge, look it up).

Also note that the academic view that the equatorial bulge is due to centrifugal force is wrong. Yet another article there. However, that said, it is clear that periodic cataclysmic (for humans) catastrophes happen.

Repeat that: catastrophe happens. Periodically.

So how to account for it?

Necessary thinking since we are due to live through it in the next few years. And the evidence is that these periodic catastrophes can nearly finish off humans as a species. Other aspects of Patrick's justified concern for humanity during 2012 are based on evidence that the tops of mountains all over the planet once had sea water and ocean critters on top of them. Thus he concludes that waves of terrible height once over topped the various tall mountain ranges. There are other explanations for this fact that do not include waves washing over the Rockies, Andes, nor Himalaya's.

There are also problems with the idea that sloshing oceans deposited the material. Some of these problems involve benthic organisms that had to have been living at that point when killed, so they were not merely dropped off at the top of the mountain by the wave as it passed. They are part of the mountain structure itself and speak to water covering the area. However, let us not forget that Patrick is space and Sun focused, has decoded the Mayan mega sun spot theory, and is likely quite correct about what the Sun will do, as well as what the ancient Maya knew, though not necessarily correct in how the earth will react. So my conclusion is that the 2012 cataclysm will not include the world traversing waves that Patrick thinks may result from a crustal shift. Indeed, and in spite of the work of Hapgood et al, it is my thinking that crustal shifts have never happened as described.

As will be explained below, it is also my thinking that tectonic plates theory does not present an adequate understanding about the structure of our planet at all. All of the evidence for crustal shifts presented by Hapgood et al, are, in my opinion, accurately described, but can be accounted for by mechanisms other than a crustal shift.

Yes magnetic pole shifts have and do and will occur (one in 2012), and yes they are devastating. Yes, instant freezing of large areas of the planet have occurred, but not (in my thinking) as a result of that area rotating under the pole.

Expando Planet model The Expando Planet model is a sub set of the Expando Universe model of reality to which we will return in a bit.

We start with Einstein and the much discussed, debated, and hated, E = MC2 equation. In Einstein, and Newtonian understanding of physics, energy transforms into matter and vice versa, so if you twist on uranium in just the right way with energy, it will transform a bunch of its own matter into energy very rapidly and thus we have nuclear plants and bombs based on this principle of 'exciting' the matter of uranium (and other radioactive elements) to convert to energy.

Well... in this universe, equations work both ways, so theoretically we could take a bunch of energy and 'condense' it into matter (assuming we knew how). This matter could be as dense as version as we desired given that we are condensing it out of energy. So we would initially get simple molecules such as hydrogen and helium, but if we persisted, we could continue to coagulate the energy into denser molecules like oil, or iron, or gold.

And thus is explained how the whole alchemy transmutation thing works. By condensation. So, in the Expando Planet model, the continuous stream of energy from the Sun goes not only to the surface of the planets, but also to the center of the planets, where, given the correct conditions, and the existence of an active plasma core (Mars, as an aside, has none, and is therefore, a 'dead' planet), this energy is transmuted into matter. Note also that plasma is a great form of an 'energetic antenna' and actually (in laboratories) seems to draw energy to it via sympathetic resonance. So some of the energies of the Sun hit the surface of the earth, but energy at levels we cannot detect without really really working at it, go to the center of the planet where they are condensed by that plasma environment into matter. By the way, the plasma model would allow for a faster spinning core, AND a reducing magnetic field as the field strength is not dependent on size nor spin rate. And further the plasma core idea does fit with observable fluctuations in magnetic field strength over these nearly 12,000 year cycles.

And again, plasma core idea works with heat levels internal to the earth (lower you go, hotter it gets), as well as abiotic oil, and the creation of minerals as well as their location of deposits. So, since magic likely is not how the core of the earth generates the magnetic field that we observe, it would seem more likely that the explanation is that the core of the earth is plasma. Plasma is highly excited energy, and does develop prodigious magnetic fields all out of proportion to its size. All of the observable magnetic effects on earth can be explained with the plasma core idea.

Also, human experience with plasma fields and forms in laboratories provides observable evidence of the electro magnetic effects every bit as variant as seen on earth. So, in the Expando Planet model of thinking about Earth, the plasma core gets energy steadily from the Sun and as a necessity, must convert this steady stream of energy into matter. Thus if the Expando Planet model is correct, one of the predictable effects would be that the planet would pretty much continuously grow. And that is also what observable, manifesting reality demonstrates.

The Earth is slowly growing. Even mainstream science and mainstream media acknowledge this, though they never say why it should grow continuously if the core of the earth was actually iron.

Oh well... anyway, the plasma receives energy from the Sun at the core of the Earth, converts it to matter (e=mc2) and so then two logical questions then arise... * If energy is being transformed into matter in the middle of the earth, then where does it go? * And... what happens to this whole matter creation mechanism if there is a sudden burst of energy from the Sun? Mainstream science has always maintained that the planet grows slowly over time even without addressing why this should be the case.

Further the whole point of the plate tectonic theory is 'propelled' by this idea of slow movement of the plates creeping about on liquid magma. Though against the idea of

entropy, the cooling of the planet over time, and the rotation of the supposed iron core, the whole of the plate tectonic theory fails to hold up.

Further, the presence of vast, previously unknown levels, of active volcanoes all across the planet does not support plate tectonics. Indeed, volcanoes are found even in places that the plate tectonic theory say should be subduction zones.

So, to address the question of where does the continuously created matter go, we need only look around us. The matter quite actually 'bubbles' up out of, or as, the earth. And further, since it is created in the middle of an enclosed sphere (more or less, the earth is actually an oblate spheroid), the effects of matter created in the middle of a closed planet are naturally predictable.

Imagine pumping water into an orange with a syringe.

East is east, and West is west, and never the twain shall meet If the Expando Planet model is correct, there are some predictable effects that should be visible.

One is that the 'skin' of our orange (planet earth) will rupture in specific ways that should form 'crinkly bits' for coast line on the anterior side of the tearing. These would be expected to be rough, ragged, vertically exposing of interior skin features, and not evenly spaced. In fact, we do see these in the form of the fiords observable on the western coasts of all continents.

Further, if one obtains a reasonably accurate topological globe, it can be seen that no eastern coast of any continent resembles the western coast of that same continent. And all western coasts of all continents resemble each other, as do all eastern coasts of all continents. Further, even large islands such as Greenland, Iceland, Britain, et al show the same conditions.

That the western coasts are alike all across the planet, seems to be evidence of NO rotational change of direction.

The idea being that a spinning planet always going the same direction, for millions of years, would naturally sculpt itself differently on the leading, or eastern coasts, over the trailing, or western coasts. And we do indeed see this at all levels, macroscopically, geologically, geomorphologically, topologically, and even biologically (different habitats supporting different species).

And conversely, if that same planet had periodically changed rotation, there would be evidence for that on the coasts. Indeed, the giant, 2 kilometers high waves from the oceans sloshing out of their basins would be expected to have carved and eroded most distinguishing features from the coasts of all continents.

If that had occurred even twice then effects would still be visible even 26,000 years later. No evidence of that is found. We would expect to see the western coasts very torn down, and not the sharp, ragged, torn appearance actually present. Further, it is on the eastern side of the continents that we find the sunken cities and other ancient signs of habitation.

Further, the western sides of the continents are the more geologically active, which should not be the case if there were not expansion occurring continuously in the absence of crustal rotation. Indeed, the total absence of any expected degradation of the western, southern, or northern coasts of any continent (Antarctica excepted due to its location) is a very key point of evidence against rotation in any other direction than current.

Repeating this for clarity. If the earth had ever had rotation problems that caused the oceans to leave their basins, we would see the evidence on some coast other than east. In fact, the eastern coasts of all the continents show continuous effects from the east to west rotation of our planet, and can be used as a model for searching for such evidence of rotation. None exists. As an aside, if the plate tectonic theory was accurate, there would be more volcanoes along the eastern seaboard of the American continents, as well as along the western coast of Europe. Many more volcanoes.

In fact, it should resemble the ring of fire in the Pacific.

Speaking of volcanoes and magma, mainstream academic understanding of the earth and its formative history, would maintain that subduction zones should exist at all plate boundaries, and yet, there is no evidence of a subduction zone anywhere on earth. And, if the plate tectonic theory were correct, there should be NO mid Atlantic Ridge, nor the deep fissure valleys of the Pacific Basin.

These are both predictable effects of planetary expansion. In the case of the Mid Atlantic Ridge, this ridge is specifically and exactly described as a necessary part of the Expando Planet theory, and is not at all explained by any variant of plate tectonics. In the Expando Planet model it is required that the 'skin' of the planet rupture at some point, at that this point is where the denser forms of matter (minerals, newly formed rocks, et al) will emerge.

Unlike the gas and liquid matter being created in the earth, the solid condensates require at least one specific point of exit to the surface. Where the gasses and liquids can percolate up to the surface as we observe petroleum to do, minerals, specifically molten material that will crystallize as it cools, must force open a fissure to release the pressures behind it. The deep ocean valleys of the Marianas and other Pacific Basin fissures are expected within the Expando Planet model as the 'skin' of the planet is forced apart in the Atlantic, where the new matter is coming up so thick as to form a ridge, it must necessarily 'thin' out over other areas since the whole of the sphere is expanding. The Expando Planet model would also necessarily have the skin of the planet get crinkly as pressures of new matter forcing their way to the surface worked themselves out. So ridges would be expected to form.

These would necessarily also be affected by the direction of rotation of the planet during the time that they formed and existed. So if the planet had ever rotated any other direction, there would be evidence, left over from gradual erosion, as well as 'spin direction resonance' found on the coasts, specifically the west coasts.

The 'spin direction resonance' effect is what we see happening when, as an instance, a tornado deposits debris, it has a tendency to only be on specific sides of buildings or other objects. Similar effects show up in where the dust and things collect in parking lots. Basically the same principle.

We see no such effects indicating anything other than east direction rotation. Also if the Expando Planet theory is correct, then it is expected that the ruptured surface of the planet should resemble a picture puzzle in that the various sections should fit exactly back together when the 'new parts' are removed. Anyone who has ever looked at a globe gets the idea that ALL the continents were once connected along all the edges.

The standard explanation for this offered by academics is the idea of one giant continent called Pangaea in one giant ocean on the earth at the same size as it is now. This explanation is clearly wrong as it defies math in the form of the spherical trigonometry expressed in the coasts of the continents. In other words. It is not possible, on a globe that is the size of today's earth, to fit the continents back together.

The curvature of the earth gets in the way. The edges do not fit when this is tried. But clearly, the coasts of the continents, just as with the edges of a torn piece of paper, look like they fit together. Indeed they do. Simply not at the current size of the earth. For the edges of the continents to snug together (at the continental shelves), the earth would have had to be only about one third its present size. Would that size of earth work for dinosaurs? Well... not surprisingly, yes.

Obviously dinosaurs existed as we have their remains. Further, while the dinosaur fossil distribution itself supports the Expando Planet model, we need only examine the blood pressure issue to satisfy ourselves that this is a valid example.

Basically the 'dinosaur conundrum' is as follows: how is it possible that dinosaurs could live on earth at such great size (height and girth), when we know that the tallest animals now (giraffes) are at the far limit of blood pressure versus gravity. At less than 17 feet in height, a giraffe is safe and happy, but let is grow only another foot, and it will die as the pressure on the heart becomes too much as it tries to pump blood up that height.

However, dinosaurs were seriously taller than 17 feet. If the earth did not have much reduced gravity during the time of the dinosaurs, then their vascular system could never have handled the blood pressures required to raise blood the great distance to their brains. The same applies for the really big dinosaurs with tremendous girth.

Other issues as to how their 'bird bones' could have supported such great weights are also related to the gravity of earth issue. Various theories have been proposed that include gravity as a variable in earth's past. This is my assumption, and the mechanism that is favorable is the Expando Planet model. Dinosaurs could not live on earth today.

They far exceed the limits of what current levels of gravity will allow for pumping blood via biological means. So? If the gravity was less during their day, what could account for it? One postulate that makes sense, is that the gravity was less, and it was due to earth being significantly smaller.

As cited in the previous example of the continents as jigsaw puzzle. As an aside, at some point, expansion of the earth will reach levels which make it impossible for humans to exist for the same reason. We will all be too tall to pump blood to our brains.

So look to your local politician, and take that as a warning as to humanities future... life without blood in the brain. There is also evidence in human works that the earth of today is not the earth of our ancestors. Since our species is periodically kicked to near extinction by catastrophe that the Expando Planet theory attempts to explain, it is understandable that there would not be many signs within our own work. This is due to most civilizations rising between the cycles of expansions.

The problems encountered during the expansions wipe us out to really insignificant levels, and fundamentally reset the whole civilization to zero. But, there are some monuments, in fact thousands of them which may be evidence of the Expando Planet cycles. One point is the 'mystery' of the megaliths (giant stone buildings) which are all over the planet. A great many of which are so large, and involve stones that are so large, that our current civilization could not duplicate the work. Further some of these megaliths are so large, that we humans have mistaken them for generations as part of the natural landscape. But, here is an interesting point.

In a smaller version of earth, just as with the dinosaurs, gravity is less, and these stones would have weighed far less, thus presenting less of an issue in construction. Other evidence of expanding earth is found in the design of some of the megaliths, which can be decoded to produce hints toward this idea. This subject is too voluminous to approach here. But, even absent any attempt by the makers of the megaliths to communicate ideas across time to future generations, there are physical effects on the megalithic monuments themselves which support the idea of an expanding planet model.

Without getting into too much of debates about design ideas in ancient structures, we can at least note that such desert ruins as the Great Pyramids at Giza have boat docks at their base, and they and the Sphinx, show damage from centuries of ocean water exposure. While there are many theories as to how these structures could have spent centuries with their bases in water, one explanation is that as the earth expands, water levels are significantly affected.

Not as Patrick Geryl suggests, nor as in the bible myths of a planet covering flood, but rather as a result of shifting (rising) matter entering the oceans and displacing water.

Further, the actual mechanism from the expansion would be thought to produce neither tidal style flooding, nor tsunami flooding, but rather something entirely different. Perhaps best described as 'persistent flooding', there are many descriptions of such in many ancient texts including those in Sanskrit.

Graham Hancock's work, Underworld, in which he visits many of the sunken cities around the planet actually highlights the mechanism of 'persistent flooding' without using that label.

He refers to ancient accounts of 'flood waters' that 'just kept coming'. Unlike the tide, these did not retreat. And unlike tsunami, these floods were not particularly violent. Just water levels rising, and continuing to rise without stopping. Fast enough to swallow your coastal city over a week, but not so fast that humans and animals cannot stay ahead of it.

And these waters were noted to still be supporting tidal actions. So it was as though two separate forces were at work on the ocean, each affecting its volume in different ways.

Further, we have direct, experiential evidence of Expando Planet model on a small scale being demonstrated on the moons that our various spacecraft have seen in their journeys. Frequently (especially these last few years of increased Sun activity) these will present expansion in the form of giant geysers of material shooting out into space.

Hmmmm... where did that stuff being thrown into space come from if not from the pressures of new matter being created in plasma balls at the center of these fellow solar system occupants? How is it that a small moon is able to spew geysers of material into space repeatedly? Would it not exhaust itself over the course of millions or billions of years? The Expando Planet model can explain many of the various enigmas present in our solar system.

As the Expando Planet theory is fractally based, then it must appear as a design pattern in other parts of universe to be a valid concept (in my opinion). This is just what is observable from the very large with the Expando Universe model (for another article), and down to the very small with how insect shells (skin) grows, how human skin alters itself to cover burns, and other scarring features on all animals.

The basic design pattern is also present in plants from their root growth methods to how their skin coverings accommodate internal growth. And note that the whole Altantis going beneath the waves concept needs to be reconsidered in light of this theory. Plate tectonics cannot explain how whole continents would just sink, and rapidly. The Expando Planet model allows for the edges of the continents to subside, as we see around India, and Japan, and throughout Asia, as well as in the Caribbean, and Mediterranean seas.

It also allows that such events could happen quickly, as in essence, the low lying coastal plains will 'slide down as the continental shelves supporting them slide down into the crevasse' created by the expansion of the planet. But, the Expando Planet model does not allow for whole continents to just 'sink'. However, in the Expando Planet model, Atlantis and other civilizations can easily be on coastal plains that sink as the cracks widen and the skin of the earth 'thins out' in areas.

Further, the new matter rising both as solid minerals in the Mid Atlantic, and as magma from all over the planet, both will cause the ocean level fluctuations as land forms change

near the cracks in the earth's skin. Further, it can be expected that a large proportion of the new matter being created will be water. This will also affect the ocean levels. The Expando Planet model is also supported by the evidence of large areas of the planet going into an 'instant freeze' such that animals are flash frozen while munching on grass or pies.

The Expando Planet model has at its core (pun intended) the plasma core which can become very chaotic, and is expected to produce huge 'toroidal imbalances' which will result in a bunch of 'magnetic field anomalies' that will resemble 'magnetic tornadoes'.

These will reach out into deep space and will funnel down not only huge levels of highly charged particles, but also, vast quantities of very very very cold cold from space. The air will freeze as it is. So will anything under one of these toroidal vortexes.

And since many of them will be associated with where the new magnetic pole will reside (after a bit of a walk-about), it is understandable that many of these flash frozen areas will stay frozen.

Predictable signs of pending expansion of the planet Less sea ice... planet expanding, larger sea area, ice spreads out. Weather changes are to be expected due to changes in the planet size, the surface area of the oceans, and the heights of mountains (more on this in another article). Other impacts will show up in ocean currents as new (and mostly hot) matter is pumped into the planet skin (crustal complex).

There are also expected electric and magnetic effects as the expansions are concurrent with solar system wide changes affecting energies at all levels. The sum total is screwy weather for the entire time of the expansion event. One very predictable, and noticeable effect of the Expando Planet model, if accurate, would be that cracks in the planet would open up in a variety of areas. Is there evidence for such... yes, and it is rapidly increasing.

Planet Earth has recently (last ten years) created a huge new crack, called a 'future sea' by mainstream science, that will at some point, separate Africa from the Arabian peninsula. This crack appeared suddenly. Further, there are new cracks these last two years across all continents excepting Antarctica (may be some there, but news does not come out easily from those environs). Also, some of these cracks are gigantic and appear almost instantly.

The speed of their appearance is just the kind of thing that plate tectonic theory does NOT support, and just the sort of activity we would expect from the Expando Planet model. Another certain sign will be the rapid increase in large, damaging sinkholes. Again, skin stretches and things 'give way' below our feet, or foundations.

Predictable problems Though the problem referenced below is USA centric, it does not mean that such effects will be limited to North American continent.

New Madrid is a particular fear point for many people at the moment, and the federal government of the US seems to be sharing that fear if the reports of tens of millions of emergency meals, multiple person plastic coffins, relocation camps, and federal emergency preparedness exercises are any indicator. It would seem that their fear would be well placed given the Expando Planet model of things.

If one examines a topologically accurate globe that includes sea bed contours, it can be observed that a 'natural' fault line seemingly runs from Lake Michigan through the Mississippi River valley to the Gulf of Mexico. It would be expected that such areas at this will crack further as the next expansion event occurs.

Thus the idea that the Great Lakes may one day drain into the Gulf of Mexico is plausible.

An interesting observation is that topologically accurate globes may be able to be used to search for likely ruptures and stretching points across the planet. And if the Expando Planet model is accurate, then both underseas heat patterns and earthquake activity need to be examined in a new light.

Take, as an example, all the earthquakes and separate them not by geographic location, but rather by depth, then magnitude. This new picture, when pasted back onto a sphere will indicate the points of the next 'ripping events'. When we consider the Expando Planet model in abstract, holding the planet earth in our mental hands and rotating it about, we notice that if the planet is expanding from internal pressures, then certain predictable behaviors should present themselves.

First, the locations of sinkholes and tears should be between the tropics (in the main) due to the equatorial bulge. In fact, note that in the Expando Planet model, the equatorial bulge is a sign of planetary health, and internal matter creation pressures. So earth bulges around the middle not due to centrifugal forces, but due to internal pressures. Thus the idea that the equatorial bulge can 'relax' either slowly or rapidly is not supported.

Further, the Expando Planet model with an equatorial bulge due to internal pressures would account for movement of continents relative to each other as well as gradual creep of the continents over the continuously stretching spherical surface. Note that this last is very important.

Referring back to earthquake for a moment, and specifically the very shallow, and very damaging earthquake recently seen at ChristChurch, New Zealand. Such quakes are predictable on land masses on both poles. Further, the Expando Planet model suggests that likely sites for shallow, high amplitude wave, damaging quakes will be at just those places where humans like to live... i.e. in the inland points of the 'crinkly bits' or natural harbors along coasts.

As with the late 1950s shallow, damaging earthquakes in Alaska, the nature of the quake is forecasting the emergence of a rupture in the region. ChristChurch is likely situated at the 'head' of a natural 'tear' in the coast line. These kinds of quakes are expected because of where New Zealand is on the globe relative to the pressures created on the crust by the equatorial bulge.

These pressures will tend to produce different types of quakes at different points on the sphere. Further, the theory can be used to predict both relative frequency and depth of large quakes during the expansion event. Unfortunately for New Zealand, the theory clearly points toward more 'tearing forces' to be manifesting from 45s by 180 degrees as indicated by both topology and hyper-dimensional (hyper-spatial) maths.

These 'tearing forces' in the ocean on the other side of the Chatham Rise will be presenting to New Zealand further earthquakes over the rest of 2011 and certainly through 2012. In looking at potential and predictable problems arising in 2012 as a result of the energy burst from the sun causing lots of material creation and thus expansion pressures from within the earth, as humans, we need to also focus our attention on human creations. These will not only include buildings, but also dams, and reservoirs, and the real nasties.

Before moving on to the latter, let us note that mega earth projects such as the Hoover, Grand Coulee, and Three Gorges dams, among others, are at risk for catastrophic and cataclysmic failure as the planet actually pulls apart around them, or, alternatively, as the surface crinkles up underneath them. Train derailments, and other impacts on human infrastructure. Including worries about dams. Sinkholes, in fact many of the problems claimed as issues of the approach of the planet X would be expected in the Expando Planet model. Magnetic Field is recharged. This sounds good in theory, but living through the process may not be easy, or even likely. Noting that this is one of the many areas in which Patrick Geryl is correct, we proceed to the idea that we are basically fringen doomed. The sun will spew out huge volumes of energy and material in 2012. Much of it directed right towards earth. As we know, it is our magnetosphere that protects us from much of this radiation.

Well, the magnetosphere is failing, and seriously needs a recharge, but to do so we have to live through the energy exchange from the sun to the earth necessary to the task.

So Patrick Geryl is correct, and we can expect a very large burst of south/negative charged particles to hit our South Pole. This will be absorbed by the planet, and a good deal of the energy will be sucked into the plasma core, thus providing for both the recharge of the magnetic strength of our magnetosphere, and the flip of the magnetic poles, north for south.

This will be a very messy, and dangerous process for life here on earth. As the magnetic poles flip, the charge of the magnetosphere will go to zero and dangerous radiation will pour down upon the planet and us guys, its inhabitants. Not good. Terminal sunburns in minutes. Burning of anything directly in the path of the sun's output. Cook your dinner in a pot outside in minutes. That sort of thing. But not good for life.

Noting that Patrick is likely also correct, and the radiation danger period is probably brief, on the order of few days. He is also correct in that the magnetic poles will flip as the plasma core absorbs the south/negative charged particles and becomes dominated by them, a side effect of which recharges our magnetosphere later in the process.

The plasma core will actually flip physically, but as it has virtually no mass relative to the planetary crust, and will 'flip' by going 'inside out' relative to polarity means that only the magnetics will change here on the crust of earth, but this also allows for both chaotic polarity points, and very rapid magnetic changes.

Unlike the 'molten mass of iron core' theory which presents lots of issues about altering its rotation, physical constraints and magnetic charge. It can be imagined as to the dangers presented to life by this part of the 2012 events. Further problems for humans will include the direct effect on our consciousness of the solar radiations once the magnetosphere has collapsed. Other issues include physical burns, radiation burns, destruction of crops, loss of life as animals en masse on land, in the air, and under water, are killed by both magnetic waves and radiation from space.

Further issues will present themselves in the form of mental problems for those who do survive by hiding from the radiation exposure. The total infrastructure of humans that is in any way bound to electricity is likely to fail, and probably spectacularly so. Predictable electrical and magnetic problems are already observable as has been noted on many 'conspiracy fact' sites. The predictable biological effects are already happening as the 2012 expansion event ramps up under our feet.

The mass die off of birds, and ocean life already seen is very likely the early edges of what will occur in 2012.

We also face the problems inherent in nuclear reactors deprived of an electrical grid, as well as the expected severe increase in earthquakes globally. Bearing in mind evidence exists that can be interpreted as the earth having had 30 degree crustal shifts. The Expando Planet model also can explain this evidence, but still must deal with the issues of sudden, and violent expansion rates of the earth.

As part of this expansion process, the number of shallow, and significant earthquakes is expected to rise dramatically. This will not be good for nuclear reactors, biochemical weapons storage areas, and fuel ports, pipelines, storage facilities, port facilities, airplane travel (radiations)... which pretty much gives you the way to consider what we face.

Ancient Sanskrit descriptions of oral tradition have previous periods being filled with what we would consider to be 7.+ earthquakes. Some records speak of times when they were happening multiple times a day after having ramped up over the course of a single lifetime.

The earthquakes grew to the point that whole villages relocated to escape the daily damage.

The Good News The good news about the Expando Planet model is that as each expansion occurs, the earth grows.

Both in mass and size, and thus each subsequent release of energy in the next cycle by the Sun, will be impacting a larger planet and will be proportionally smaller. Thus the expansion event that occurred 11,500 years ago had more impact on earth as earth was smaller then. Just as the expansion events during the days of the dinosaurs were hugely impacting of the planet due to earth being about a third of its present size.

So the good news is that as the expansions continue, the effects diminish over time. Not that this will help us much during our up coming cataclysmic catastrophe.

The good news includes the thought that no continent crossing waves of 2+ kilometers height are likely to occur. However, as the expansion occurs, there will be huge waves probably as high as 800 meters or so, or near the theoretic maximum limit in wave height rising into land. So... still waves on the order of 2600 feet or more, but none that will cross the great mountain ranges.

Also the good news would include only limited continental penetration by waves. And these should be predictably larger and more devastating, and flood further inland on the eastern coasts of the continents than on the west. On the other hand, the western coasts will have to deal with significant winds, and torrential amounts of water both from rains, and from tsunamis.

As the ocean floors tear and thin, waves from ruptures and landform shifts will assault the coasts. For reasons too detailed to pursue here, they will be more of a problem for west coasts than east. Also volcanic eruptions, and large scale heating of the waters will result in increasing evaporation causing the 'atmospheric rivers' to grow in orders of magnitude. Additionally, wind patterns of west to east flows will accelerate as the mass and moment of the atmosphere increases due to new volumes from the oceans.

So the good news is that the new moment will produce faster winds which should aid in scrubbing out the horrific amounts of dust and ash from all the volcanoes and earthquakes.

Conclusion This understanding is the result of a lot of gnawing on universe. It is merely encapsulated in this effort as there are ramifications and twisty side effects going out in all directions from this gnawing. We are still facing civilization doom in 2011 and 2012. The doom starts the day that the Sun takes out the planetary electrical grid. Patrick Geryl is remarkably correct in all his space and sun focused reasoning, and his worry that October 11, 2011 will be that day is well taken.

It can happen at any time now.

Given the rapid increase in solar intensity values that Patrick shares at his website, it would seem most likely to occur between October 11, 2011 and May of 2012. That NASA is also concerned about solar problems through this period acts as yet more fuel for the necessary paranoia. Further paranoia flares up thinking about the trillions of dollars put into underground shelters by government for the elite. That does not bode well. We still face species doom in 2011 and 2012, but given this new understanding and the context of the Expando Planet model, that doom isn't what it used to be. Now we must go off and gnaw on universe more intently. If Patrick is correct, we have until October 11, 2011 to make our peace with people (most, perhaps 90%, will still perish), and complete our preparations. Good luck to all humans, and remember, if the Expansion shit hits the fan, the elites will find themselves as 'spam in a can'.

This gives new meaning to the old French peasant retort, of, 'one day, we will all eat the rich' ...hmmmmm. There are many more predictable problems and challenges that flow from this idea. They may be reported here if we all have time. My personal schedule will be to get preparations complete by July 15th. One cycle early is way better than one cycle late. Be sure and visit Patrick Geryl's site for updates on the Maya Solar intensity strength numbers. This level of awareness will be a key survival factor going forward. Given opportunity and motivation, I may provide graphics later.

2012 - Doom The Rest of The Story by Clif High March 10, 2011 from HalfPastHuman Website Spanish version Skeptics: dont waste your time fighting with me about the views expressed herein. Instead go to YouTube, and search for the video's produced by Neal Adams. Watch a few of these and then debate the issue with your own lying eyes before getting raspy with me.

Postulate That the Expando Planet cycle is dualistic in nature, showing both steady, continuous growth, and periodic pulses of very rapid (and from the inhabitant's view point, violent) growth.

The idea is that the Sun, operating on the Precessional cycle clock would send out giant waves of energy for perhaps a hundred years or more (this would lengthen as the sun itself grows - also part of theory) at the points of 'opposition' (these are affected by our relationship to the galactic plane) on the cycle.

The energy waves ramp up and peak, then wane to steady output, as we see happening with other energy sources in universe.

The 'pulse' (from human viewpoint) of energy waves at the end of each Precessional cycle would cause the relatively rapid, and violent growth of the planet. Then as side effects of the pulses hitting the planet, two effects would be expected; the magnetosphere would be recharged due to the plasma core being over excited (effects of this are much higher magnetic levels which would tend to resist or moderate future inputs from the Sun; and the thinning of the 'skin' of the earth taken as a whole.

These pulses would seem to be THE necessary energetic component to cause the whole process to function.

That is to say that the steady outpouring of energy from the Sun, even absorbed into Earth's plasma core where some level of it is converted to matter, would not likely be the cause for the first ripping of the crust into the continental plates we see today. Yes, the steady outpouring is the cause of the continuous growth (and continental spread) seen here on earth, and could be expected to eventually cause enough pressures to rupture the crust, but the behavior of the solar system would suggest not.

Rather, since we can observe the Sun to be variable and exhibiting periods of great excitement itself as over these recent years, and as there yet remains pockets of evidence for extreme outpouring of energy from the Sun, we can postulate that the growth of planets (and presumably stars) is dualistic in nature, consisting of brief, violent outbursts, and long steady periods of continuous activity. This postulate could be used to explain why planetary crust would rupture the way it is observed here on earth, as well as explain why we have such violent disasters as the Banda Ache (Sumatra) tsunami. In fact, the dualistic nature of rapid and violent growth working its way out from the core of the planet fits our observations and predictions of what must occur. It is logical that if the sphere of the earth is covered with a rigid crust, that the crust must crack as the sphere expands.

The Banda Ache tsunami was caused by the cracking of the sea floor very rapidly at the northern point of the Ninety East Ridge. This ridge is one of the many spreading points on the ocean floors on the planet. Effects to be expected if the Expando Planet model is correct, include a more or less continuously lengthening orbit. Some of the scant few surviving human records show that the most recent increase was from 360 day period out to our present 365.24 days as earth slows down due to bulking up.

Also note that even the academic view of earth's orbit is that it gradually lengths, though they put it down to a 'slowing effect' as though friction from space were the cause. Further the expansion will also impact by slowing our rotation as well as orbit. Though curiously, it can be expected that the plasma core will spin more rapidly as it is flooded with energy from the Sun.

While it will consume some of the extra spin in creating new matter (the 'core' of the expanding planet experience), it can be expected to maintain a higher rate of spin over time, even as it grows due to the extra excitement coming from the Sun over these next few decades.

Growth patterns All mountain ranges will be originating as north to south structures, that are then twisted by the movement of the continental plate upon which they rest.

So those mountain ranges that are other than north south are indications of shifting. Those which are north to south may be sites of future cracking as they have not moved off the seams which fed their growth. Mountain ranges create by rips in the earth under the crust which then have accretion of new matter under them thus 'wrinkling' up the crust and forming mountain ranges. If we examine the history of the planet we can conclude that no new mountain ranges have formed since the split of the continents excepting those individual mountains created by volcanic forces. This make sense.

What probably occurs is that the planet creates matter from energy in the plasma core which then is expelled upward, pressuring the crusts, and at some point, small ruptures appear underneath the crust, and the resulting pressured material being forced through the cracks created the mountain ranges. Each mountain range creation was likely the result of an expansion episode. Then, as each mountain range was created, it took the pressure off the planetary crust. This probably occurred repeatedly during the early part of terrestrial history as the earth reacted to each episodic solar energy inundation with a new mountain range.

This reaction worked until the level of the plasma core was exceeded in one expansion episode.

This 'failure' of the mountain range building response to solar radiation storm was likely due to a combination of the plasma core growth itself which increases the amount of new matter being produced as the core was larger and therefore could process more of the solar radiation into matter, as well as the crust of the planet being 'reinforced' by the mountain ranges to the point that no upward expansion of the crust could take place, and it necessarily had to part and thin in order to accommodate the latest expansion episode.

This rupture of the continents also was likely as a direct result of the solar radiation flood during one of these periodic, precession related, expansion episodes rather than the accumulation of continuous matter creation. So the mountain building period of earth is over. Such areas as Lake Titicaca in the Andes, in which we find a salt water port and formerly salt water lake at the great height of 11,000+ feet, is probably due to there being shallow oceans over the area prior to the creation of the Andes mountain range.

Also the city near by the port on the lake was most likely created after the lake had been raised to that height. Recent examination of its layout and orientation now make this more apparent. Therefore the death of approximately half of its inhabitants 11,800 years ago (m/l) probably resulted from the earthquakes at that time that were the result of that expansion event.

But were not likely linked to the rise of the lake to that height.

This would seem to be supported by the current levels of activity in that region as we approach this next expansion episode.

Observations Earth expands at the middle, just like humans. Tearing takes place at the poles. The north pole is more stable (at this particular period) due to the much larger continental mass though at some future cycle when this mass cracks....

However, the equatorial bulge is causing larger tears, and greater depth, and greater length to rips near the equator. This is also where we see the largest rift valleys on the planet. As may be expected with an Expando Planet model, the continents that span the equatorial bulge should show the greatest examples of tearing.

That is just what is seen with the Great Rift Valley in Africa where the equator crosses the continent as well as in the location of the Amazon River and its associated valleys in South America. Other geo-active areas include Indonesia which also has its larger islands sitting at the top of the equatorial bulge. Lacking the stability provided to both Africa and South America by their masses, the region of Indonesia is likely to experience much increased earthquakes and volcanoes as we go forward into this next decade. The structure of the major mountain ranges on the planet, Himalayas, Andes, Rockies, et al, are visually similar to the growth ridges in the oceans near by the mountains.

This is evidenced by the parallel nature of the Rocky mountain range to the angle of the continental slope of north America. This is evidenced most strikingly in the complex shaping of the Himalayan mountain range which is repeated on the ocean floor. The same forces created both. Given the Expando Planet model, it is unlikely that water could be a real problem at the level of a global flood. While it is probable that water levels will initially be quite variable, based on land heaving up underneath, these episodes should be not too violent and transitory. Water levels might even go down hugely if a major tear opens up, thus draining water....a'la Africa and its developing new sea.

This would lower water levels globally, and wreak havoc on ocean currents. May even alter weather if the in rushing water reaches molten magma. Other water observations are that the Expando Planet model does not support the idea of global flooding on the earth as it is now. As the earth grows, it does so with expansion due to new material from deep in the core as well as by shoving the existing continental plates further apart.

So, absent any new major crack opening up that would drain a significant portion of the ocean mass, the Expando Planet model suggests that each expansion period raises water levels by spreading them out further over the planet as the ocean basins get filled in from below by new rocky material, usually in the form of magma.

Basically lots of volcanoes spewing out extra large amounts of magma as the planet adjusts to the flood of energy from the Sun will displace water and thus raise water levels globally over time. Further all the volcanoes under the oceans will increase the water temperatures and cause some small level of expansion of the water. While it is probable that much of the new matter being created *will* be of more simple molecule construction such as hydrogen and oxygen, and thus the planet may provide more water as part of its growth process., it is not likely to create enough new water during any future expansion event to significantly alter the ratio of ocean to land in any individual expansion period/event, however over time, the growth of water volume could be considerable. Stated for clarity, given the Expando Planet model as the explanation for the planetary trauma observable here on earth, it is not possible that we will have a crustal shift in 2012. While we will have a magnetic pole shift, with its attendant problems, and we will also experience a solar expansion event, we will not have the oceans of the planet crawling out of their basins to wash over the continents. However, it is predictable that various solar effects (such as have taken place in recent years) will impact humans as a species at multiple levels from mutations through to larger infrastructure issues that may include failing dams, or nuclear plants. There are some points of evidence that half of all growth has been in the last third of planetary life. Or so it would appear.

The more growth in more recent times design pattern would explain a lot in both planetary and human history. Machu Picchu showing a rebuild period once more modern locals took it over is indicative of the cyclic survival of the megaliths. First, in a previous cycle (pre 11,800 years ago) some culture creates megaliths, then gets wiped out at one of the cycle peaks.

Some time passes. Modern humans rise up after the last cycle peak (11,800 years ago) and knowing a good thing when they see it, set about repairing the earthquake damage to Machu Picchu and other sites. We are building on top of the evidence of previous cycles. It is undeniable that some process impacts life here on earth periodically that knocks civilization back to the starting point. We have this process associated with the precession of equinoxes, but that may be erroneous judgment about what happens to our civilization. But we cannot know for sure, due to the trauma that has caused us to have to 'start over' in this last half of the current precession cycle.

If one examines the out of place artifacts, and what is known as 'forbidden archeology', evidence will be found that supports humans having been on earth for millions of years, yet we do not have a million year old civilization. In fact, our civilization does not go back past half of one precession period. Further, given the evidence of other, past, civilizations, it would appear that we are indeed, as a species, subjected to periodic catastrophe that resets our civilization back to the barely tribal level.

Ominously for us humans now alive, it appears that the civilization reset happens in a rapid way, and we are now in it. This is to say that the acceleration of earth changes and solar system changes these last few years are clearly arguing that a cycle peak is approaching or is now underway. The expansion of earth seems to have been in the Pacific basin mostly causing the ocean to grow on this side of the planet via ruptures and sudden tears in the ocean floor (think Banda Ache earthquake and tsunami).

While along the other side of the ring of fire the event will produce up-thrust along west coast of the America's due to the expansion along the continental slope, the Middle America trench, and the Peru trench. The expansion along the Peru trench is likely the cause for the recent escalation of major, damaging earthquakes along the western South American coast.

This can be expected to continue. As can the volcanic activity. As can the sinkholes, and land slips/slides.

In fact, the land slides should also be expected to escalate to 'long run out slides' that may move mountain soils dozens of miles in minutes in sort of a dry version of a lahar. We further postulate that the sun instability grows each cycle, as does the earth. This is due to the increasing size of the planets having that much more impact on the Sun as their angular momentum alters the solar rotation. We can even hypothesize that an early solar system, with commensurately smaller planets would have had a longer period between expansion events.

This is due to the long time it takes for the angular momentum of the orbiting planets to affect the solar tensions by pulling the solar equator around faster than the solar pole. Then over time, as the planets grow, the periods involve decrease. This is due to the

creeping impact of planetary mass on collected angular momentum. This would allow for the period of expansion events to be irregular, and to decrease in length over time.

Further, this same mechanism of increasing planet size causing increasing distortion in solar rotation via greater angular momentum in the solar system may also explain why the evidence seems to suggest that recent expansion events have had increasingly greater impact on humans. Indeed, the previous event almost made humans extinct. This then means that each subsequent expansion of planetary growth is bigger than last one, in spite of the earth being larger, and theoretically able to resist the change more each time.

The evidence we find all over the planet is supporting the idea of an increasing expansion effect each time, and an increasingly disruptive impact on the human social order. This theory would therefore support the idea that Atlantis and Mu may have been able to flourish due to length of time between catastrophes and due to the catastrophe 'intensity' value being lower the further that one goes back in earth's history. Then, fat planets and angular momentum caught up with them. No, their continents did not sink below the ocean, but their civilization may well have as what had been large coastal plains became flooded, and those cities were lost to the ocean both in the Atlantic and Pacific.

Further the reports of Atlantis being lost beneath the oceans may well also be interpreted as being lost beneath the ice. It is my opinion that Atlantis is what we now call Antarctica. Leaving aside Atlantis and myths for a moment, we can see that the theory of increasing planets causing increasing distress in the Sun due to increasing angular momentum at the Sun's equator would necessarily imply that the 2012 precession cycle peak will be worse than our ancient ancestors experienced.

Hmmmmm... not a good sign for life here on earth. BUT not necessarily any planetary floods or such as that. However, we will get earth impacts, as we are seeing now, and as will escalate to probable volcanic and earthquake hell, including flooding locally... but not major 800 meter floods. The evidence for that kind of flooding in Alaska and Norway was local only due to tearing in local arctic sea floors. Not an all over effect. An examination of the Arctic ocean floor shows the why both Alaska and Scandinavia (mostly Norway and Finland) received the

very large 'scrubbing waves' that drove up over 800 meters into the fjords, depositing all manner of animal carcasses as the water washed clean areas that had formerly been the coastal plains of Norway.

This also occurred in Alaska, but the evidence there is distributed across a broader area of flat lands just under the permafrost. In both instances the same proximate cause would appear to be the rapid enlarging of the Arctic Mid Ocean Ridge and its subsequent separation into 3/three sections by an expansion event in the past which moved the 2/two primary sections nearly 600 miles apart.

If the ocean floor near Norway (as an example) is examined, features such as the Voring Plateau in the Norwegian Sea suggest that local reaction of the Scandinavian coast during the last expansion event may have been quite violent. The fjords themselves are perhaps the best example, as they are actual 'rips' in continental edges.

The characteristics seen in Norwegian fjords are identical to fjords in other land masses surrounding the Arctic ocean, and more recently are seen in the new rift (tear) in Africa excepting that it has no sea in it yet, and is bare of trees, but the underlying earth disposition patterns are the same as fjords in the far north or south. Of course, we need to also note that such tearing in the earth is clearly seen when the ocean floors of the planet are viewed on a sphere.

The Arctic Mid Ocean Ridge, clearly, was part of the Mid Atlantic Ridge at one point in earth's distant past. Expansion events have shifted continental masses about over the millennia leaving behind evidence of the 'flow' of planetary growth the way that trees (and all life for that matter) record the patterns of their lives in the rings of new growth. Staying with the Arctic Ocean region for an example, we can postulate that the Arctic Mid Ocean Ridge was broken into two large pieces and one small piece at a past expansion event. This was likely many such events in the past. The rip of the mid ocean ridge at the Nansen Fracture Zone was likely quite violent, and also likely has been recently repeated in the fracturing of the Indo-Australian plate during the Sumatran earthquake and tsunami.

As with that incident, when the Nansen fracture occurred, it most likely sent a very powerful tsunami aimed directly at Norway. This tsunami crossed the sea quickly, and moved large amounts of ocean life into a debris filled wave that then scrubbed off the

coastal regions of Norway. Due to the steep angles of the land, both above and below the ocean waters, these waves were able to rush up into the fjords many hundreds of meters carrying the bodies of all manner of critters high into the surrounding hills. Given the experience of tsunami waves in recent years, we can note that the primary controlling factor for wave height is how the land form directs the pressures of the waves. In areas such as Banda Ache, India, Sri Lanka, the undersea contours, as well as lower rising above water land surfaces could only support waves of less than 100 feet in height.

This is good news, depending on where one may live. If the design patterns seemingly emerging are correct then the expansion events do not cause more ocean action than the kind of tsunami we have already seen in Banda Ache, excepting when islands, volcanoes, or mountains slide into the ocean and thus create displacement waves. Displacement waves are not like other tsunami events in that they are complex shifting of water mass rather than an energy waveform running through water. In the case of tsunamis, the actual wave height on land is determined by the land contours during the wave run-up.

Displacement waves are not so constrained and can rise quite in excess of 'normal' limitations on tsunami wave height as they are a 'stacked mass' of water. However, unlike tsunamis, the displacement wave lacks the continuing propulsive force behind it. AND in both cases there are finite limits on wave height that, while varying locally, will not have 'self standing waves' much over 180 feet.

Some of the largest of the 'self standing waves' ever recorded occurred in the open ocean off the Philippines during the eruption/explosion of Krakatoa in 1883. American naval officers on survey duty both on land and on ships off shore north of the Philippines recorded self sustaining wave heights in the open ocean of 176 feet.

Note that this wave height when reaching any land is also constrained by the same physical height issues as 'regular' tsunami waves and so is not going to rise much taller than its maximum height at sea, plus the height of rise of the ground across which it will travel.

Of course a wave of this height is very seldom capable of even crossing the continental shelf as they 'break' due to the first impact of rising height as the 'foot' of the wave phenomenon encounters the jump upward. So, whew... for a minute there.... The radiation hazard, like with most disasters, is also not globally affective in the sense of an even distribution. By that I mean that the radiation will only affect those parts of earth that are directly exposed to it. There are many issues involved. First the state of the magnetosphere Bearing in mind that the magnetosphere is created (in my opinion) by the dynamo effect of the plasma in the center of the earth. So it will not totally disappear.

It will be overwhelmed by the south/negative particles hitting the south pole of the planet, but will not instantly disappear everywhere. Note that today it is under continued stress and over the last 2+ decades has had perpetual 'holes' in it. But it still persists.

Yes sheep and goats and birds in Patagonia are blinded and die during a minor solar event when the hole is over their area, but the rest of the planet's surface life is relatively unscathed.

There are issues of absorption of radiation, and the duration of the sun's own expansion event (for part three) to consider, as well as the fact that the rotation of earth will take us all 'under the sun' so to speak over that period, but, again, the effects will not be felt ubiquitously nor evenly around the planet. * First we can reason that as the planet will be tilted south towards the sun, that the southern hemisphere will have the worst of it. There is already evidence to this point in the ramp up, depth, and location of earthquakes since 1996. * Second, the magnetosphere will be continuously attempting to rebuild itself even as the plasma core is being overwhelmed and likely pulsing and flipping from the inward rush of charged particles from the sun. * As an aside, remember that Hollywood, the 'majic staff' of the power elite has already hinted as such with neutrino's being the cause of crustal slip in the movie "2012". But, pictures aside, the core will react and change, but due to the processes involved, will continue to generate magnetic fields.

The issue is that the magnetic fields will themselves likely be erratic beyond our understanding. But, the magnetosphere, holed, and torn, will still both exist and be trying as a result of the forces of physics, to reconstitute itself.

So this is good for humans and pie lovers of all species. Other considerations are that the Sun will be expanding outward rapidly and the radiation will directly related to the factors which propel the solar expansion. These will include the state of magnetic disorder on the sun, as well as the alignment of the planets. Now, bad for us humans (at least those on this planet), it appears that Earth will have gas giants on the other side of it relative to the sun on December 21, 2012.

The solar system barycenter will be completing its near 12 year cycle (below video hmmmm, related to the sun spot cycle?) and that seems to be in a position (still looking for more accurate solar system modeling software to plot this out) of being closer to earth, and more importantly, being pulled by the mass of the planetary alignment in the direction of earth.

Further the barycenter of the earth moon system will also be contributing as it seems to be also in alignment with the sun and the planetary alignment on that day.

The manner, and where, and how intense the cracking/expanding hits us here on earth is directly related to the combination of the barycenter of the earth/moon system as it participates in the barycenter formation of the solar system. Not only will the sun blast us, but forces will tug on earth as the barycenters synchronize.

Oh, and "co-incidentally" the barycenter rotation of the solar system is on a "nearly 12 year" cycle that just so happens to jibe with the sun spot cycle. Hmmmm. Which is also what Patrick Geryl (and Maurice Cotterell) have decoded from the Maya artifacts.

And also the barycenter location is expected to change over time as the earth grows? But will it? Or will the forces controlling the moon adjust it outward to compensate for earth's growth? Should there be large expulsions of materials from the Sun in 2012 as now appears to be the case (especially given the huge level of solar activity increase so far in 2011), we can expect that the position of the barycenter of the earth/moon system, as well as the barycenter of the solar system as whole will not aid the earth. The observations also include the idea that a variant sized earth and other planets would go a long way toward explaining the evidence toward variant cycles such as orbits, and even the variations in the precession of the equinoxes. Further, these variations in length of the precession would be expected to become shorter over time even as the orbit and days on the planets lengthen. It also naturally follows that the variant sized planets will, as they grow in mass over the course of many millennia, shorten the period between expansions, as well as increase the intensity of each episode.

This is due to increasing mass in the Sun's ecliptic causes more rapid, and more violent distortions in the sun spot cycle by torquing the solar equatorial plane faster and faster over time. This explains why most of the growth of the planet has occurred in more recent times, rather than earlier in its history.

Thus more ancient species such as the dinosaurs (and presumably ancient civilizations) had more time between solar initiated catastrophe here on earth, and thus were able to provide very long fossil records. This also explains the evidence for many periods of a very stable earth seemingly persisting for hundreds of thousands of years.

This is opposed to our much more recent experience with earth where thirteen thousand years, more or less, seems to be about the limit between bouts of planetary crustal instability. And weather stability? Forget about it... recent, or modern humans only think they have had 'weather stability' as we were able to measure 'warm periods' in multiple human generations.

Unfortunately for all us guys here now, this last warm period was likely it for a while. The current Maya Long Count is not a calendar per se, but rather is simply the count of days since it started 5114 years ago. When it ends next year, the long count will have spanned 5115 years which is a harmonic fifth of the current precession cycle.

If we examine the conditions on earth when the Long Count began, we note that it was a time of fantastic levels of weather upheaval. A previously long period of climatic stability (more or less) ended so abruptly that agriculture and other food sources were affected globally triggering many migrations of populations.

And... guess what, there is every indication that our current agricultural system is also failing due to earth changes. Also coincidentally just at a Long Count boundary. Weather stability here on earth is obviously under direct solar control. Evidence would seem to suggest that the Maya were using a harmonic fifth of the 26 thousand year precession cycle with good reason. While it is not yet understandable why the fifth harmonic is the most active, there is still climate evidence that over at least this last precession cycle, the climate has undergone very large, and dramatic shifts that correspond to the Maya Long Count of 5115 years.

This then would explain the Maya thinking in Great Ages span of time, as well as accounting for their oral traditions of five great ages, each ending in a different sort of climate related cataclysm.

It is also not yet clear as to what made the ancient Maya think that this age, the Fifth was the 'end of days (time ceases to be)'.

It may be all the humans alive in December of 2012 will find out what has been hidden from us. Or it may be that our solar system goes through an expansion event which will dramatically alter life here on earth due to impacts on the climate and the shape of the planet beneath our feet. What will an Expando Planet feel like here on earth?

Well... probably, in a general sense, we can expect:

* increasing earthquakes * increasing magnitude of earthquakes * decreasing depth to earthquakes (dangerous part as shallow quakes cause damage to surface features including human infrastructure) * increasing volcano activity * more volcanoes creating themselves in new spots * new forms of eruptions that are caused by volcanoes splitting open from cracking * large cracks or new ground fissures... some should be spectacularly large and deep and long and featuring magma * new steam vents. And other magma related phenomena * new ocean currents due to ocean heating. And the formation of new land under the ocean, as well as new volcanoes, and rifts and cracks (fractures) * other myriad of oceanic problems such as: o new sea mount volcanoes manifesting causing new contours and altering habitats o new material shoving itself to the surface at all the rips around the planet under the oceans. This may cause local chemical issues in the ocean which, while dissipating over time, will nonetheless cause many problems to various marine ecosystems.

Wild ass speculation It would seem logical that the expansion events are different at each half of the precession cycle. In 2012, the precession cycle will culminate with an alignment with the dark rift of the Milky Way galaxy on December 21.

As the December solstices have the southern pole of the planet inclined toward the Sun, it would be logical to expect that the southern polar region will get most of the expansion activity. So far in the process, at least as I am able to observe, there are both more incidents in the far southern regions than the north, and these events have more of an intensity than those seen north of the equator.

During the precession cycle culmination 11,900 years from now, the event will take place on the June solstice and thus the northern hemisphere will be more directly impacted. Of course we note that ANY expansion event anywhere on earth affects everywhere on earth, but having said that, it still would seem logical that the spread of the intensity of the expansion will radiate out from the far southern regions from 2012 onward. Again, noting a growing deviance in both numbers and intensity between the northern and southern hemispheres in what can be termed as 'expansion event symptoms', the wild ass speculation is that the southern hemisphere will see continuing growth in intensity and numbers as the planet moves closer toward the December 2012 solstice.

The northern hemisphere will also react, but as the primary energetic focus is toward the south pole, the effects that will present themselves north of the equator will be of less intensity, though probably of longer duration. Further, the northern hemisphere logically will continue to show ruptures and tearing behavior across the continental land masses, however there also logically should be two distinct types of tearing.

These should be able to be separated into long run out tears such as is seen in Pakistan and across northern Africa, and the deep, sudden, and short cracking observed now in the far north of north America and in Siberia. An example of the 'long run out tear' in the America's would be the San Andreas fault line. Further if the cracking in Pakistan is examined on a globe, it can be observed that a great circle line joins these cracks with the enlarging tear in northern Africa. Then, should that great circle line be extended, it will reach all the way into Siberia where it runs through the length of Lake Baykal. One of the largest freshwater lakes in the region, Russian

geophysics has recorded the origin of the lake as forming due to a very long fissure in the crust which caused subsidence over a very large, and previously relatively flat area.

Lake Baykal is the connection point for a twisting fissure that runs from near Tiksi far north of the Arctic circle, through Lake Baykal and heading off to the south west ultimately to terminate in the new rift in northern Africa.

This fissure will probably, some time in the far distant future, form the new coast line of a split Eurasian continent. The reason that both Pakistan and Africa are exhibiting cracks is due to their being within the area of the equatorial bulge.

This part of earth is 13 miles higher than the poles, and thus has increased complexity to the underlying tensions on the crust. It is their location on the southern side of the equatorial bulge that accounts for similar cracking showing up in Peru and Chile. And, in both places, this also explains the large number (and increasing) of earthquakes as well as the reason they are so damaging. The Gulf of California, again taking a long great circle route view, leads right up to the San Andreas fault. From the northern tip of the fault a series of not-yet-connected observable fault lines extend parallel to the coast all the way to the Columbia River separating Oregon from Washington.

Other smaller faults continue on the other side of the mighty Columbia (itself riding in the depression made by a crack in the plate) north to the southern most edge of Puget Sound (where Halfpasthuman is located). We note that California, and the Gulf thereof, are also on the equatorial bulge where the tears can be expected to be the most active, and most dramatically separated.

It is likely that the native Californian's fear of The Big One is realistic given that the process involved is a tearing of the earth's crust such that at some point California will be part of a long string of islands separated from the nearby mainland much as is Vancouver Island now. The fear of The Big One may not be misplaced these days as it is quite clear that earthquakes are escalating in numbers all across the planet and have been for a number of years. Further the trends continue to point to larger earthquakes as well as more earthquakes.

The Expando Planet model does explain this observable global phenomenon well, and further also provides some insight into the likely locations for large scale earthquakes going forward into the current expansion process. Such places obviously include Pakistan, and California. Though, as a side note, California, while it may break off from the mainland, will not go under the oceans. It will be a very large island.

Still, California going walk about will be a messy event for all concerned. Staying on the subject of earthquakes for a moment, we need to examine the idea that on a sphere such as earth, undergoing both continuous, and pulsed growth or expansion, it can be logically expected that in areas of tearing, or fracturing, the earthquakes would increase in both frequency, and intensity. Further, and something not initially obvious, is that the earthquakes will 'climb' upward, which is to say, become more shallow over time.

This is due to the expansion forces acting on earth initially within the center of the planet and then working their way to the surface during the event. This trend should progress at a steady rate as the earth continues into its expansion 'pulse' phase.

The earthquakes will continue to rise to ever more shallow earthquakes, though unfortunately for us lifeforms here on earth, these quakes will probably also increase in magnitude as they move upward. The result is likely to be much more damage from earthquakes globally, and some rather spectacularly damaging earthquakes will happen over the next few years as the fissure impacts human habitation. In regions that would support the phenomenon, liquefaction will cause large areas of ground to actually 'soften beneath your feet'. This is not good for buildings depending on 'solid ground' for support. Other areas, including mountainous regions will suffer large, and suddenly occurring sinkholes, which may produce horrific landslides.

Where the sinkholes are near the terminal ends of an 'active' tear, it can be expected that earthquakes will also produce what are known as 'long run out slides'. These can be devastating as the sides of mountains are shaken so violently that the soils become a colloidal suspension of air/water/rock/grits that will flow like a lahar and can scour down a valley so far as to run out over 40/forty kilometers if the land form allows; or can run up the sides of opposing mountains to reach nearly the starting height of the slide.

Further issues for humans will include all manner of below ground structures, and infrastructure such as piping to be disturbed.

Though not ubiquitous across the planet, those regions so affected will likely be greatly affected. There are areas around the planet where ancient irrigation systems, some spectacularly long, have been 'ripped' into several pieces by ground movement over time. In one example in what is now western China, the channel has been broken nearly at its 13 kilometers mid point, and the two halves of the break are now separated by 20/twenty kilometers. Indeed, this irrigation channel now even appears to be in two separate valleys. New cracks in Peru, and now major mudslides in Bolivia, large earthquakes off the coast of Japan... we all need to pay attention; planetary change is upon us.

In the up coming months, the progression of the solar cycle will let us know if and how these new levels of solar radiation will affect human life here on earth. We can expect that more earthquakes will also be associated with more volcanic activity.

This could be very bad. It may be that we get all kinds of volcanic ash in air affect air travel, plants, and breathing... all vital things... but then, guess what, volcanic ash suspended in the air is almost as good as a magnetosphere for shedding radiation. It is predictable that large areas of open ocean would occur as the planet expands, and having far less mass than continents, it is also predictable that the ocean floor would develop holes in the sub sea crust where new material can rise. This is necessary to even out the planetary mass due to centrifugal forces affecting the planet as we both rotate, and orbit (within a complex of barycenters).

It is a must that the earth have new lands in middle of Pacific plate, or we would have planetary water redistribution trying to balance out the mass during our daily rotation. This, predictably leads toward the idea that Hawaii may see a disproportionate amount of activity during expansion events now and into the future due to its position. Already the hole in the crust is creating new islands yet to break the ocean surface that are nonetheless pushing the existing Hawaiian islands off to the northwest. It is further predictable that Antarctica will split as the planet grows. Since the continent will be lifted at its edges by the expansion of the planet, it can be expected that the glaciers will crack first (more acute angle involved), providing clues as to stresses affecting the underlying rock.

Again, as the forces affecting the continent are to be lifting forces at the edges of the continental shelf, it could also follow that some glacier movements may cease, or even reverse. It would also seem logical that fissures will develop both within the glaciers, and on the surface in such numbers as to resemble 'crazing' on pottery.

It can be expected that very large levels of glacier disturbance will occur, including movement of much more floating ice than has been usual over the last century. This may include extraordinary amounts of newly floating glaciers of staggering proportions. As these enter the oceans, waves will spread out and affect coastal communities around the planet.

However, please note it will be waves, and NOT increased water levels... at least not from the glaciers and not for some time. It has been estimated that it may take as long as 20/twenty years for large ice masses to increase global ocean levels. This is due to the same forces that create and hold the waters at the equatorial bulge.

Additionally the mass of the ice entering the water pushes the water away in all possible directions not constrained by land or other ice. So the effects of glacier slide are more of a slow motion disaster. Even if new sea ice was to raise the water by several hundreds of feet globally, the displacement is not instant, and will be tracked over the course of years, not days. Also North America separates further from South America... probably not at the Panama Canal.

Rather the separation will most likely occur as a result of a 'pulling' motion from South America as the continent attempts to adjust its position relative to the new equator. Please note that as earth grows, the position of the equator will shift slightly, relative to the continents. In both South America and Africa, the continents span the equator, and thus are 'arched' across the equatorial bulge as well.

The result of this positioning will be very large, deep, and violent cracks as those parts of the continents which are north of the equator try to continue moving north, while those parts south of the peak of the bulge refuse to 'climb' up north. It can be observed both from the new rift in Africa, as well as the shape and position of the Amazon River valley, that both continents are already responding to these equatorial bulge forces.

It can be expected that side effects of very large increases in volcanoes and eruptions of all kinds will produce atmosphere problems. These will extend from no-fly zones due to large volumes of corrosive ash, perhaps nearly global in scope at times, to dangerous gas levels producing 'no breathe' zones as more or less 'local' phenomenon. Further, it can be speculated that the significant increase in volcano activity over a relatively short period will boost the probability of a new ice age.

Additional impetus toward colder days (for a few decades) comes from magnetic pole reversals as well, so it may make sense to start knitting those long and thick woolen underwear. Of course, let us not forget the good news from all of this that a volcanic ash filled sky is very good at reflecting solar radiation. Thus providing some 'cover' for life on earth while the magnetosphere is repairing. Of course, there is no airplane flying during such atmospheric events. This will impact shipments of all kinds of goods.

Further, a significant mass of volcanic ash in the atmosphere will alter wind patterns at all altitudes. Our atmosphere problems also will include the unseen, in the form of increased radiation that will make it dangerous to fly. Further, that same trend toward more energies from the Sun will raise the concentrations and locations of high energy particles in the upper atmosphere. This will predictably increase storm activity on the surface as these charged particles attempt to ground out.

Noting that hurricanes and cyclones are NOT dependent on 'warm water', and instead are the result of charged particle storms in the upper atmosphere trying to ground themselves, it would seem likely that the 2011 and 2012 storm 'seasons' will be both erratic, and extraordinarily destructive. Further, it seems likely that these next two years will produce much more major cyclonic storm activity in the southern hemisphere than the north. It is highly doubtful that the ancient Maya knew of the Planet X speculation, nor could they have had knowledge of the idea of a crustal shift. Yet the surviving Maya writings are clearly warning of 'something wicked' coming at the end of this current Long Count.

The warnings, including what is known as the Dresden Codex, do support Terrance McKenna's eschaton in that it says, 'time ceases (to be)', and 'great harvest of souls (begins)'.

IF the translations are anywhere near correct.

Thanks to the rapacious, malicious, and evil conquistadors, and their master, the morally twisted pope of the catholics, who supposedly burned all of the Maya and Aztec codex excepting 3/three, we are not likely to be able decipher just what had the Maya alarmed, in spite of our having to live through it.

According to the Dresden Codex, the end of the current long count due on December 21, 2012, will bring a 'blue flood dragon from the sky', and abundance of loose spirits. Presumably they were NOT referring to boat races and party barges. Considering that the Long Counts themselves are harmonic fifths of the precession of the equinoxes, as well as harmonic fifths (more exactly) of two mega sun spot cycles, it then is understandable that the Mayan Fifth Great Age should begin on December 22, 2012, excepting that there are a few scrolls kicking about indicating that we are due a visit by the 'blue flood dragon' just as 'time ceases', and 'great harvest (of) spirits' starts. In so far as can be ascertained, none of the surviving Maya codex have been examined for evidence of encoded displays within them, yet as Maurice Cotterell has demonstrated, the Maya were masters of placing layers of information all within a single image... merely a matter of knowing the offsets and reference points.

It would seemingly follow that if they did so within funerary lids made of great slabs of stone, that they may also have done so with their 'lesser' documents just as a matter of efficiency and cultural tendencies. Therefore there may yet remain information and additional clues to ancient Maya thinking by a close examination of the surviving codex.

Of course, access to the hidden rooms under the vatican would also probably settle the issue in short order as it seems most likely that the 'burning' of the Mayan codex is probably a cover story for their removal and sequestering in the deep holes under the palace of the sorcerers (vatica = sorcerer) in Rome. The real major fear amongst the elite, and those who have considered the issue, is that a Carrington event from the sun will destroy the electrical grid in the northern hemisphere. Should this occur, and absent heroic efforts on the part of most of the species, a tragic level of deaths will occur over the next three years following the loss of the electrical grid as the various supporting infrastructure systems, including healthcare and food shipments, fail.

So, while a brief Carrington event would not be particularly bad for global agriculture, it could remove the ability to transport foods, or perform any task requiring electricity.

And since it would likely be accompanied by increasing problems with flying (from magnetic disruption to volcanic ash to moving runways due to earthquake damage), the loss of electrical power would doom many people to starvation and death by lack of medicines across the northern hemisphere since any aid would necessarily have to be delivered by boat. Note that the nasty bastards (tptb and their minions) have their agenda as well during these chaotic times.

So amidst all the global fundament crises, it seems probable that we can expect a whole lot of bad behavior from those humans who style themselves as 'the elites'. Thus we can expect that they will facilitate the crashing of the Global Boom engineered by the master criminal against humanity, Al 'The Briefcase' Greenspan.

This will (and is) inevitably produce a massive global unemployment wave during the crashing of the global currencies, them selves a ponzi scheme to put humanity into slavery to those who control the ultimate weapon... compounding interest (aka, DEBT). These 'elites' can be counted upon to act crazy just as the world is hitting this major transition in its own process of going crazy.

Not only has our planetary climate left stability behind, the earth under our civilization is growing and changing at levels that will affect the infrastructure from the ground up. It seems evident that the Expando Planet model would favor a self perpetuating and self increasing cycle. As the planets get larger, their impact on the Sun is greater, and the sun therefore reacts more which in turn throws more energy out which allows the planets to grow more. This self regulating, and continuously shortening cycle also has an in built trend, from the view point of humanity, toward more violent expansion events.

However, it is also evident that the continental mass distribution on earth favors less actual movement in the northern hemisphere. Due to there being less constraint by mass on movements in the south. This will likely also be the case during this period, and may already be demonstrated by the geophysical events of the last 20 years.

It also seems evident that the last time humanity went through a one-half mega sun spot cycle period, 11,800 years ago, it damn near wiped us out.

Soooo... it would seem prudent to take all the instability expressing now from universe as sign to be extra sensitive and aware, and to take such precautions as may be indicated by our local environment.

Conclusions... or Things we can do Firstly, examine your daily surroundings very damn carefully.

What will survive earthquakes?

These are increasingly likely to intrude on your life. Examine the buildings where you spend your time. Go and read about the 'triangle of life' and then seek out these vital survival places in EVERY building you enter. Do it by habit as when destructive earthquakes hit, you will not have the time to analyze, only react.

Try to tell friends and family about the whole 'triangle of life' thing. Recognize that everyone's karma is their own, so don't beat them up over it, but where receptive, gently provide knowledge. And assist in becoming an 'anti earthquake' expert. Run around securing things to walls and other supports as may be warranted. Recognize that other environmental and climate issues also will be escalating. Start growing your own food. Our agricultural system is already showing failures as it continues under extreme stress.

Further, traitors to humanity such as the devious Monsanto corporation and its stooges, and Obama (who blithely removed restrictions on Monsanto), are intent on destroying your foods with genetic modifications.

Sooo... bearing in mind that old adage that you are what you eat, be very wary of 'Frankenfoods'. And by extension, curse the names and energies of those who promote them. You needn't put much energy into it, just the occasional utterance of 'curse Monsanto and all who sail in it' will suffice. Pretty soon the accumulated mass negative energy will build up and overwhelm the bastards.

As an aside, mass shunning, cursing, and ridicule are great asymmetric ways of ratcheting down on the minions and the stooges. * Would people really work at producing GMO foods if their personal identities were attached to the work via public condemnation? * And how about if they knew that every day several tens of thousands of people were cursing their personal life force? Hmmmm, my guess is... probably not. As one may prepare for earthquakes, there are other precautions that can be taken. Invest some time in thinking about the circumstances of your life a year from now. And share your results with others. In any case, the future will take care of itself as long as we take care of ourselves... which must mean a pie cannot be far away. Return to 2012 Return to Earth Changes Return to ALTA Process Predictions - HalfPastHuman and Clif High

8.

by Alfred Lambremont Webre Seattle Exopolitics Examiner from Examiner Website Spanish version

Part One April 1, 2009

SOHO/ESA/NASA Solar flares Long scorned as mysticism and parascience, concern about the year 2012 has now surfaced in a mainstream NASA report on the potential impacts on human society of solar flares anticipated to peak in 2012.

The Obama administration and other national governments are not aggressively focused on contingency preparations for the 2012 solar flare impacts, or on introducing available antigravitic, new energy sources that would transform centralized high-power electrical grid systems into de-centralized, anti-gravitic and quantum process energy sources.

These new energy sources are less vulnerable to destructive solar storms, have no negative environmental impact, and could unleash unprecedented economic and social transformation.

Electrical grids & anticipated solar flares of 2012 Mainstream scientific concern about 2012 has grown since a recent National Research Council report funded by NASA and issued by the National Academy of Sciences, entitled Severe Space Weather Events - Understanding Economic and Societal Impact which details the

potential devastation of 2012 solar storms on the current planetary energy grid and because of the inter-linkages of a cybernetic society, on our entire human civilization. According to New Scientist, sciences concern is a repetition of the 8-day 1859 Carrington event, a large solar flare accompanied by a coronal mass ejection (CME) that flung billions of tons of solar plasma onto the earths magnetosphere and disrupted Victorian-era magnetometers and the world telegraph system. The New Scientist states, The report outlines the worst case scenario for the US. The perfect storm is most likely on a spring or autumn night in a year of heightened solar activity - something like 2012. Around the equinoxes, the orientation of the Earth's field to the sun makes us particularly vulnerable to a plasma strike. The next solar maximum is expected to occur in 2012.

New Scientist reports that Mike Hapgood, head of the European Space Agency's space weather team states, "We're in the equivalent of an idyllic summer's day. The sun is quiet and benign, the quietest it has been for 100 years," "but it could turn the other way." The modern electrical high-power grid magnifies the impact of solar flares. Since the grid is linked into major aspects of modern society, the effects of another Carrington event would be devastating.

The National Academy of Sciences report states: A severe space weather event in the US could induce ground currents that would knock out 300 key transformers within about 90 seconds, cutting off the power for more than 130 million people. The New Scientist states: According to the NAS report, the impact of what it terms a "severe geomagnetic storm scenario" could be as high as $2 trillion. And that's just the first year after the storm. The NAS puts the recovery time at four to 10 years. It is questionable whether the US would ever bounce back. China, which is installing a high-power electrical grid more vulnerable than that of the U.S., Europe and other developed nations will be similarly impacted.

The solar coronal mass ejection from the 1859 Carrington event arrived on earth in less than 15 minutes, which is faster that our early warning system NASA's Advanced Composition Explorer (ACE) can detect. European Space Agency space weather head Mike Hapgood states, "I don't think the NAS report is scaremongering. Scientists are conservative by nature and this group is really thoughtful," he says. "This is a fair and balanced report."

More perfect storm - the hole in the earths magnetic field According to a December 16, 2008 report, NASAs THEMIS spacecraft has discovered a hole in earths magnetic field which is 10 times as large as previously thought. The magnetosphere, which is designed to protect earth from the plasma of solar flares, now has a hole in it four time the size of the earth. According to the NASA report, Northern IMF events don't actually trigger geomagnetic storms but they do set the stage for storms by loading the magnetosphere with plasma. A loaded magnetosphere is primed for auroras, power outages, and other disturbances that can result when, say, a CME (coronal mass ejection) hits. The solar maximum is expected in 2012.

University of New Hampshire scientist Jimmy Raeder states, "We're entering Solar Cycle 24. For reasons not fully understood, CMEs in even-numbered solar cycles (like 24) tend to hit Earth with a leading edge that is magnetized north. Such a CME should open a breach and load the magnetosphere with plasma just before the storm gets underway. It's the perfect sequence for a really big event."

The Obama administration, 2012 and new energy The Obama administration and most modern governmental energy departments in the 192 U.N. member nations have focused on reducing dependence on conventional energy grids (petroleum, coal or nuclear power) by introducing renewable energy sources such as wind, geothermal, and tidal power.

These alternative sources are thought to supply about 10% of current energy needs.

For example, the Obama policy with regard to the electrical energy grid is stated its official energy and the environment agenda on the White House website: Ensure 10 percent of our electricity comes from renewable sources by 2012, and 25 percent by 2025. This policy, which replicates energy grid policy in many advanced industrialized nations, is not adequate for the challenges of 2012 solar flares.

The policy does not promote new fuel-less non-polluting energy sources now sequestered in secret, national security and black budget projects, and which have been developed using U.S. tax-payer funds. These included reported anti-gravitic technology and free energy technologies, based on Tesla technology. So here is a key question: Is human society being set up to fail and suffer an effective systems collapse with great loss of life and property if 2012 solar flares materialize in the worst case scenario? Image of areas of North America affected by 2012 solar flares: The good news: 2012 galactic alignment...

Part Two 2012-13 NOAA predicts solar cycle 24 weakest since 1928 with $1 trillion damages in worst case May 9, 2009 NASA Hathaway Solar cycles 23-24 (1995-2020)

In a report funded by NASA, NOAA (U.S. National Oceanic & Atmospheric Administration) has issued a formal, public prediction that, A new active period of Earth-threatening solar storms will be the weakest since 1928 and its peak is still four years away, after a slow start last December, predicts an international panel of experts led by NOAA's Space Weather Prediction Center. Even so, Earth could get hit by a devastating solar storm at any time, with potential damages from the most severe level of storm exceeding $1 trillion. The prediction, published in a report at www.spaceweather.com, continues: The panel predicts the upcoming Solar Cycle 24 will peak in May 2013 with a daily sunspot number of 90. If the prediction proves true, Solar Cycle 24 will be the weakest cycle since number 16, which peaked at 78 daily sunspots in 1928, and ninth weakest since the 1750s, when numbered cycles began. The NOAA solar panels predictions appear to lessen the potential risk to the high energy electrical grid system of 2012-13 Solar flares set out in a Jan. 2009 National Academy of Sciences (NAS) report.

According to a New Scientist article on the NAS report, The [Jan. 2009] NAS report outlines the worst case scenario for the US. The perfect storm is most likely on a spring or autumn night in a year of heightened solar activity - something like 2012. Around the equinoxes, the orientation of the Earth's field to the sun makes us particularly vulnerable to a plasma strike.

The 2012-13 solar maximum The NOAA panel has conditionally predicted the 3rd calmest solar cycle since 1755.

The report on its findings states, The panel also predicted that the lowest sunspot number between cyclesor solar minimum occurred in December 2008, marking the end of Cycle 23 and the start of Cycle 24. If the December prediction holds up, at 12 years and seven months Solar Cycle 23 will be the longest since 1823 and the third longest since 1755. Solar cycles span 11 years on average, from minimum to minimum. An unusually long, deep lull in sunspots led the panel to revise its 2007 prediction that the next cycle of solar storms would start in March 2008 and peak in late 2011 or mid-2012. The

persistence of a quiet sun since the last prediction has led the panel to a consensus that the next cycle will be moderately weak.

2012-13 solar flares & the high energy electrical grid Still, the report on NOAAs solar prediction panel refers to the Jan 2009 NAS report's risk assessment, stating: A recent report by the National Academy of Sciences found that if a storm that severe occurred today, it could cause $1-2 trillion in damages the first year and require four to ten years for recovery, compared to $80-125 billion that resulted from Hurricane Katrina.

Solar force multiplier - the hole in the earths magnetic field The revised NOAA solar prediction does not lessen the force multiplier effect that large holes discovered in the earths magnetosphere may have of the destructive effect of plasma from 2012-13 solar flares.

An April 1, 2009 article (above report) on the risk of 2012 solar flares stated, According to a December 16, 2008 report, NASAs THEMIS spacecraft has discovered a hole in earths magnetic field which is 10 times as large as previously thought. The magnetosphere, which is designed to protect earth from the plasma of solar flares, now has a hole in it four time the size of the earth. According to the NASA report, Northern IMF events don't actually trigger geomagnetic storms but they do set the stage for storms by loading the magnetosphere with plasma. A loaded magnetosphere is primed for auroras, power outages, and other disturbances that can result when, say, a CME (coronal mass ejection) hits. The solar maximum is expected in 2012. University of New Hampshire scientist Jimmy Raeder states, We're entering Solar Cycle 24. For reasons not fully understood, CMEs in evennumbered solar cycles (like 24) tend to hit Earth with a leading edge that is magnetized north. Such a CME should open a breach and load the magnetosphere with plasma just before the storm gets underway. It's the perfect sequence for a really big event.

The Obama administration, solar cycle 24 and new energy

Though lessening the risk of probability of solar storms in solar cycle 24 (2009-2020), the conclusions of the April 1, 2009 Examiner.com article as to the vulnerability of the high-power electrical grid system still stand. The Obama administration and most modern governmental energy departments in the 192 U.N. member nations have focused on reducing dependence on conventional energy grids (petroleum, coal or nuclear power) by introducing renewable energy sources such as wind, geothermal, and tidal power. These alternative sources are thought to supply about 10% of current energy needs.

For example, the Obama policy with regard to the electrical energy grid is stated its official energy and the environment agenda on the White House website: Ensure 10 percent of our electricity comes from renewable sources by 2012, and 25 percent by 2025. This policy, which replicates energy grid policy in many advanced industrialized nations, is not adequate for the challenges of 2012 solar flares.

The policy does not promote new fuel-less non-polluting energy sources now sequestered in secret, national security and black budget projects, and which have been developed using U.S. tax-payer funds. These included reported anti-gravitic technology and free energy technologies, based on Tesla technology. So here is a key question: Is human society being set up to fail and suffer an effective systems collapse with great loss of life and property if 2012-13 solar flares materialize in the worst case scenario? MORE INFORMATION ON SOLAR CYCLE 24 * NASA: Deep solar minimum (2009) http://science.nasa.gov/headlines/y2009/01apr_deepsolarminimum.htm * NASA: The surprising shape of solar storms (croissant-shaped) http://science.nasa.gov/headlines/y2009/14apr_3dcme.htm

Return to 2012

Return to Solar Storms and Earth's Electric Grid

by Alfred Lambremont Webre Seattle Exopolitics Examiner from Examiner Website Spanish version

Part One April 1, 2009

SOHO/ESA/NASA Solar flares Long scorned as mysticism and parascience, concern about the year 2012 has now surfaced in a mainstream NASA report on the potential impacts on human society of solar flares anticipated to peak in 2012.

The Obama administration and other national governments are not aggressively focused on contingency preparations for the 2012 solar flare impacts, or on introducing available antigravitic, new energy sources that would transform centralized high-power electrical grid systems into de-centralized, anti-gravitic and quantum process energy sources.

These new energy sources are less vulnerable to destructive solar storms, have no negative environmental impact, and could unleash unprecedented economic and social transformation.

Electrical grids & anticipated solar flares of 2012 Mainstream scientific concern about 2012 has grown since a recent National Research Council report funded by NASA and issued by the National Academy of Sciences, entitled Severe Space Weather Events - Understanding Economic and Societal Impact which details the potential devastation of 2012 solar storms on the current planetary energy grid and because of the inter-linkages of a cybernetic society, on our entire human civilization. According to New Scientist, sciences concern is a repetition of the 8-day 1859 Carrington event, a large solar flare accompanied by a coronal mass ejection (CME) that flung billions of tons of solar plasma onto the earths magnetosphere and disrupted Victorian-era magnetometers and the world telegraph system. The New Scientist states, The report outlines the worst case scenario for the US. The perfect storm is most likely on a spring or autumn night in a year of heightened solar activity - something like 2012. Around the equinoxes, the orientation of the Earth's field to the sun makes us particularly vulnerable to a plasma strike. The next solar maximum is expected to occur in 2012.

New Scientist reports that Mike Hapgood, head of the European Space Agency's space weather team states, "We're in the equivalent of an idyllic summer's day. The sun is quiet and benign, the quietest it has been for 100 years," "but it could turn the other way." The modern electrical high-power grid magnifies the impact of solar flares. Since the grid is linked into major aspects of modern society, the effects of another Carrington event would be devastating.

The National Academy of Sciences report states:

A severe space weather event in the US could induce ground currents that would knock out 300 key transformers within about 90 seconds, cutting off the power for more than 130 million people. The New Scientist states: According to the NAS report, the impact of what it terms a "severe geomagnetic storm scenario" could be as high as $2 trillion. And that's just the first year after the storm. The NAS puts the recovery time at four to 10 years. It is questionable whether the US would ever bounce back. China, which is installing a high-power electrical grid more vulnerable than that of the U.S., Europe and other developed nations will be similarly impacted. The solar coronal mass ejection from the 1859 Carrington event arrived on earth in less than 15 minutes, which is faster that our early warning system NASA's Advanced Composition Explorer (ACE) can detect. European Space Agency space weather head Mike Hapgood states, "I don't think the NAS report is scaremongering. Scientists are conservative by nature and this group is really thoughtful," he says. "This is a fair and balanced report."

More perfect storm - the hole in the earths magnetic field According to a December 16, 2008 report, NASAs THEMIS spacecraft has discovered a hole in earths magnetic field which is 10 times as large as previously thought. The magnetosphere, which is designed to protect earth from the plasma of solar flares, now has a hole in it four time the size of the earth. According to the NASA report, Northern IMF events don't actually trigger geomagnetic storms but they do set the stage for storms by loading the magnetosphere with plasma. A loaded magnetosphere is primed for auroras, power outages, and other disturbances that can result when, say, a CME (coronal mass ejection) hits. The solar maximum is expected in 2012.

University of New Hampshire scientist Jimmy Raeder states, "We're entering Solar Cycle 24. For reasons not fully understood, CMEs in even-numbered solar cycles (like 24) tend to hit Earth with a leading edge that is magnetized north. Such a

CME should open a breach and load the magnetosphere with plasma just before the storm gets underway. It's the perfect sequence for a really big event."

The Obama administration, 2012 and new energy The Obama administration and most modern governmental energy departments in the 192 U.N. member nations have focused on reducing dependence on conventional energy grids (petroleum, coal or nuclear power) by introducing renewable energy sources such as wind, geothermal, and tidal power.

These alternative sources are thought to supply about 10% of current energy needs.

For example, the Obama policy with regard to the electrical energy grid is stated its official energy and the environment agenda on the White House website: Ensure 10 percent of our electricity comes from renewable sources by 2012, and 25 percent by 2025. This policy, which replicates energy grid policy in many advanced industrialized nations, is not adequate for the challenges of 2012 solar flares.

The policy does not promote new fuel-less non-polluting energy sources now sequestered in secret, national security and black budget projects, and which have been developed using U.S. tax-payer funds. These included reported anti-gravitic technology and free energy technologies, based on Tesla technology. So here is a key question: Is human society being set up to fail and suffer an effective systems collapse with great loss of life and property if 2012 solar flares materialize in the worst case scenario? Image of areas of North America affected by 2012 solar flares: The good news: 2012 galactic alignment...

Part Two 2012-13 NOAA predicts solar cycle 24 weakest since 1928 with $1 trillion damages in worst case May 9, 2009 NASA Hathaway Solar cycles 23-24 (1995-2020) In a report funded by NASA, NOAA (U.S. National Oceanic & Atmospheric Administration) has issued a formal, public prediction that, A new active period of Earth-threatening solar storms will be the weakest since 1928 and its peak is still four years away, after a slow start last December, predicts an international panel of experts led by NOAA's Space Weather Prediction Center. Even so, Earth could get hit by a devastating solar storm at any time, with potential damages from the most severe level of storm exceeding $1 trillion. The prediction, published in a report at www.spaceweather.com, continues: The panel predicts the upcoming Solar Cycle 24 will peak in May 2013 with a daily sunspot number of 90. If the prediction proves true, Solar Cycle 24 will be the weakest cycle since number 16, which peaked at 78 daily sunspots in 1928, and ninth weakest since the 1750s, when numbered cycles began. The NOAA solar panels predictions appear to lessen the potential risk to the high energy electrical grid system of 2012-13 Solar flares set out in a Jan. 2009 National Academy of Sciences (NAS) report.

According to a New Scientist article on the NAS report, The [Jan. 2009] NAS report outlines the worst case scenario for the US. The perfect storm is most likely on a spring or autumn night in a year of heightened solar activity - something like 2012. Around the equinoxes, the orientation of the Earth's field to the sun makes us particularly vulnerable to a plasma strike.

The 2012-13 solar maximum

The NOAA panel has conditionally predicted the 3rd calmest solar cycle since 1755.

The report on its findings states, The panel also predicted that the lowest sunspot number between cyclesor solar minimum occurred in December 2008, marking the end of Cycle 23 and the start of Cycle 24. If the December prediction holds up, at 12 years and seven months Solar Cycle 23 will be the longest since 1823 and the third longest since 1755. Solar cycles span 11 years on average, from minimum to minimum. An unusually long, deep lull in sunspots led the panel to revise its 2007 prediction that the next cycle of solar storms would start in March 2008 and peak in late 2011 or mid-2012. The persistence of a quiet sun since the last prediction has led the panel to a consensus that the next cycle will be moderately weak.

2012-13 solar flares & the high energy electrical grid Still, the report on NOAAs solar prediction panel refers to the Jan 2009 NAS report's risk assessment, stating: A recent report by the National Academy of Sciences found that if a storm that severe occurred today, it could cause $1-2 trillion in damages the first year and require four to ten years for recovery, compared to $80-125 billion that resulted from Hurricane Katrina.

Solar force multiplier - the hole in the earths magnetic field The revised NOAA solar prediction does not lessen the force multiplier effect that large holes discovered in the earths magnetosphere may have of the destructive effect of plasma from 2012-13 solar flares.

An April 1, 2009 article (above report) on the risk of 2012 solar flares stated, According to a December 16, 2008 report, NASAs THEMIS spacecraft has discovered a hole in earths magnetic field which is 10 times as large as previously thought. The magnetosphere, which is designed to protect earth from the plasma of solar flares, now has a hole in it four time the size of the earth.

According to the NASA report, Northern IMF events don't actually trigger geomagnetic storms but they do set the stage for storms by loading the magnetosphere with plasma. A loaded magnetosphere is primed for auroras, power outages, and other disturbances that can result when, say, a CME (coronal mass ejection) hits. The solar maximum is expected in 2012. University of New Hampshire scientist Jimmy Raeder states, We're entering Solar Cycle 24. For reasons not fully understood, CMEs in evennumbered solar cycles (like 24) tend to hit Earth with a leading edge that is magnetized north. Such a CME should open a breach and load the magnetosphere with plasma just before the storm gets underway. It's the perfect sequence for a really big event.

The Obama administration, solar cycle 24 and new energy Though lessening the risk of probability of solar storms in solar cycle 24 (2009-2020), the conclusions of the April 1, 2009 Examiner.com article as to the vulnerability of the high-power electrical grid system still stand. The Obama administration and most modern governmental energy departments in the 192 U.N. member nations have focused on reducing dependence on conventional energy grids (petroleum, coal or nuclear power) by introducing renewable energy sources such as wind, geothermal, and tidal power. These alternative sources are thought to supply about 10% of current energy needs.

For example, the Obama policy with regard to the electrical energy grid is stated its official energy and the environment agenda on the White House website: Ensure 10 percent of our electricity comes from renewable sources by 2012, and 25 percent by 2025. This policy, which replicates energy grid policy in many advanced industrialized nations, is not adequate for the challenges of 2012 solar flares.

The policy does not promote new fuel-less non-polluting energy sources now sequestered in secret, national security and black budget projects, and which have been developed using U.S. tax-payer funds. These included reported anti-gravitic technology and free energy technologies, based on Tesla technology. So here is a key question: Is human society being set up to fail and suffer an effective systems collapse with great loss of life and property if 2012-13 solar flares materialize in the worst case scenario?

MORE INFORMATION ON SOLAR CYCLE 24 * NASA: Deep solar minimum (2009) http://science.nasa.gov/headlines/y2009/01apr_deepsolarminimum.htm * NASA: The surprising shape of solar storms (croissant-shaped) http://science.nasa.gov/headlines/y2009/14apr_3dcme.htm

Return to 2012 Return to Solar Storms and Earth's Electric Grid

9.

from Diagnosis2012 Website Contents 1. Zulu Prophecy: The Return of Mu-sho-sho-no-no 2. Pueblo Indians: Fifth World in 2012 3. Purification Period & World Ages 4. Kali Yuga and 2012 5. More on Aquarius and 2012 6.

Tracking Down the Kalachakra Prophecy 7. 9/11 Resonation With WWII on Time Wave Zero 8. Near-Death Experience and 2012 9. Cosmic Locusts 10. OOBEs (OBEs) and 2012 11. Behemoth and Leviathan 12. Smelyakov Update Return to 2012

Zulu Prophecy: The Return of Mu-sho-sho-no-no 31/10/02 Credo Mutwa, an 80-year old Zulu Sanusi (shaman) and elder from South Africa, and author of Song of the Stars: The Lore of a Zulu Shaman, gave a talk at the Living Lakes Conference, in California on October 2 1999, which included the following:

Let me tell you two last things please. One, it is this, that I am told by the great storytellers of our tribes, that fresh water is not native to our earth. That at one time, many thousands of years ago a terrible star, or the kind called Mu-sho-sho-no-no, the star with a very long tail, descended very close upon our skies. It came so close that the earth turned upside down and what had become the sky became down, and what was the heavens became up.

The whole world was turned upside down. The sun rose in the south and set in the north. Then came drops of burning black stuff, like molten tar, which burned every living thing on earth that could not escape. After that came a terrible deluge of water accompanied by winds so great that they blew whole mountaintops away. And after that came huge chunks of ice bigger than any mountain and the whole world was covered with ice for many generations.

After that the surviving people saw an amazing sight. They saw rivers and streams of water that they could drink, and they saw that some of the fishes that escaped from the sea were now living in these rivers. That is the great story of our forefathers. And we are told that this thing is going to happen again very soon. Because the great star, which is the lava of our sun, is going to return on the day of the year of the red bull, which is the year 2012. See the whole article here.

There is a stone circle in South Africa, called Timbavati, which means, "the falling down of a star" in Zulu language. It still has an equinox alignment intact. In 1997, a stone circle in the Southern Egyptian desert was found to have an alignment to the summer solstice sunrise, and at 6,000 BC is the "oldest astronomically aligned structure yet discovered anywhere on the planet". There is also a stone observatory at Nomoratunga in Kenya, connected with the "Borana Calendar", based on rising stars and lunar phases. There are also stone circles in The Gambia , Senegal, Morocco, & Togo. The Long Count has been traced to Izapa; Izapa has Olmec connections; the Olmec carved mysterious giant stone heads with African features.

Could there be a connection? Back to Contents

Pueblo Indians: Fifth World in 2012 31/10/02 The Hopi Indians of Arizona believe that we are living in the fourth of five eras - the Fourth World, and there will be a Great Purification just before the start of the Fifth World. They have a series of nine prophecies, starting with the coming of white men with guns, (which came true in the sixteenth century). The eighth prophecy is the hippie era, which was manifested in the nineteen sixties. The only remaining prophecy to be fulfilled is the appearance of a new star that they call Blue Star Kachina. Speaking Wind, a Pueblo Indian from Northern New Mexico, has said that the Fifth World will start in December 2012. This conforms to Hopi Indian prophecies, even though some have put the transition at 2011. As I said, the final cleansing of Earth, began in June, 1998. In September, 1998, the five brothers, (planets), aligned themselves to usher in the cleansing energies of Earth. The chaos everyone has been anticipating, or the tearing away of the illusion, and the lie, will begin between January, and April, 1999, and will continue to escalate until the nine brothers, (planets) align themselves on the 5th of May, 2000.

From that date, until the last day of the fourth world, December 22, 2012, a date taken from our star calendars, everything living, will undergo a purge. If mankind will not willingly let go of the illusion, and the lie, it will be stripped away. And, we have only begun to feel the effect, since June, 1998.

The 23rd day of December, 2012, is the first day of the fifth world. Back to Contents

Purification Period & World Ages 31/10/02 Purification variations Although most agree that the 4th/5th World transition will come in 2012, there are several variations on the date of Purification:

1. 1998-2000 - Pueblo Indians. 2. 1987, in the Shearer/Arguelles/Kalachakra/Seneca/Cherokee calendar wheels versions. 3. July 1991; in Quetza-Sha's version, it began in with the solar eclipse over Mexico City 4. 1992 in many sources, that mistakenly think the last Katun began in 1992 (it was actually April 5 1993) Robert Gilson's Period of Justification also started in 1992 & ends in 2012. However, since the long count fell into disuse, and the 52-haab Calendar Round then was used to measure precession, a 20-haab period may be seen as a placebo for the final katun of the Great Cycle (a haab = 365 days). 5. August 1990 - August 1993, in the Q'ero Indian version. 6. Year 2000 according to the Q'ero that Alberto Villoldo spoke to. World/Sun variations Some tribes say we are in the Fourth World, approaching the Fifth; some say we are in Fifth Sun, approaching the Sixth... 1. The 5th sun ended in 1519; 6th sun starts in 2012 according to some contemporary Aztecs 2. Some New Age sources also think we are "between worlds"; The Mayan fifth world finished in 1987. The sixth world starts in 2012. 3. We are in 5th sun, approaching 6th, say the Aztecs, Toltecs & Incas; we are in 4th world, approaching 5th say the Maya ( Judith Bluestone Polich ) 4. We are in the 4th Sun, and will reach the 5th Sun in 2012, say the Q'ero Incas according to Alberto Villoldo 5. The Q'ero that Joan Parisi Wilcox spoke to, said there are 3 ages, and we start the crossing in 1990-1993 and complete it in 2012, (they have combined their myth with a Christian myth of 3 ages). 6. The Hopi Indians, according to Frank Waters and some other sources, say we are living in the 4th world, approaching the 5th. 7. The Zuni Indians, neighbors of the Hopi, say we are living in the 5th world, according to Dennis Tedlock. 8.The Navajo Indians also have a total of 5 worlds, according to Gordon Brotherston. 9. Some Navajo medicine men say there are 7 worlds and we are in the 5th. Of the 2 "above us", the first is the World of the Spirits of Living Things, the second is the Place of Melting into One.

10. John Major Jenkins points out (In Appendix 2 to Maya Cosmogenesis 2012), that in the Mayan Popol Vuh epic, a total of 4 ages are laid out, of which the first 3 have ended in destruction (so we are in the 4th age). For further discussion, see the Book of the Fourth World by Professor Gordon Brotherston

Variations in duration of World Ages 1. Multiples of the 52-year Calendar Round: (from Leyenda de los soles) 1st Sun: 676 years (52 x 13); 2nd Sun: 364 years (52 x7); 3rd Sun: 312 years (52 x 6); 4th Sun: 676 years (52 x 13) NB This must be the origin of the idea that there were 13 Heavens that ended in 1519, and which were followed by 9 Hells ending in 1987, so we can extrapolate: 5th Sun: 468 years (52 x 9) 1b (UPDATE) According to Jose Arguelles in The Transformative Vision (1975), p. 14, the fifth age consists of the 13 heavens plus the 9 hells; 676 + 468 = 1144 years. This conforms to the Cherokee Calendar 2. From the Vaticano-Latin Codex: 1st Sun: 4008 years; 2nd Sun: 4010 years; 3rd Sun: 4081 years; 4th Sun: 5026 years The implication here is that the 5th Sun is over 5,000 years in length. 3. There is evidence that the Aztec Sunstone shows 1 Sun = 5,200 years; 5 Suns total 26,000 years. (Brotherston p.299) 4. Sioux Indians (Brotherston p.301): 1st Sun: 6,000 years 2nd Sun: 11,900 years 3rd Sun: 3,000 years 4th Sun: 1,100 years 5th Sun: 1,900 years TOTAL: 23,900 years

5. Madrid Codex (Brotherston p.302): Mega-Sun: 208,000 years = 8 x 26,000 years. * Thus, we have a hierarchy of Suns within Suns. * The Mayan word for "day" is kin, and means "Sun" - apparently reborn every morning. * The second level is the year, when the Sun is reborn at the morning of Winter Solstice, and a new year begins. * The third level is the Calendar Round and New Fire ceremony - 52 years. * The fourth level is the Heaven & Hell cycles - 22 Calendar Rounds = 1144 years. * The fifth level is the Great Cycle, or 13-baktun cycle of 5,200 tuns - a fifth of the cycle of precession (level 6) * The sixth level is the cycle of precession - 26,000 tuns - The morning Solstice Sun is reborn aligned to the centre of the galaxy. * The seventh level is multiple precession cycles. As we have seen, there are so many conflicting versions, that a unified theory is still out of reach. There are many differing Calendar Round beginning-dates across Mesoamerica, and anyway, the Calendar Round won't divide into the 13-baktun cycle, or the 26,000-tun cycle, so the hierarchy above just shows various concepts of large cycles.

Since Jenkins has shown that the Calendar Round is also a way of measuring precession (by zenith cosmology), we can say that the Suns (Worlds) measure precessional movement.

However, there is a Calendar Round that ends in 1987 (Teotitlan - 1st March 1987) and one that ends in 2012 (Tikal - 2nd April 2012). Back to Contents

Kali Yuga and 2012 30/11/02 In the Hindu system of time cycles, the longest cycles last trillions of years, but at the shorter end of the cycle spectrum, we have the four Yugas, which are: * Krita Yuga (Golden Age): 1,728,000 years = 2,160 x 800 * Treta Yuga (Silver Age): 1,296,000 years =2,160 x 600 * Dvapara Yuga (Copper/Bronze Age): 864,000 years =2,160 x 400 * Kali Yuga (Iron Age): 432,000 years =2,160 x 200 Each Yuga is split into 3 parts; dawn; day; and dusk: * Krita Yuga: dawn = 144,000; day = 1,440,000; dusk = 144,000 * Treta Yuga: dawn: 108,000; day: 1,080,000; dusk: 108,000 * Dvapara Yuga: dawn:72,000; day: 720,000; dusk: 72,000 * Kali Yuga: dawn: 36,000; day: 360,000; dusk: 36,000 If these numbers look familiar, that is because they are precessional numbers: * Platonic Year = 25,920 years (12 x 2,160) - 1 complete precession of the equinoxes (or solstices) *

Platonic month = 2,160 years - precession of the equinox through one sign of the zodiac * Platonic day = 72 years - precession of the equinox through one degree 2 Platonic months = 4,320 years; half a Platonic month = 1,080 years; 2 Platonic days = 144 years 360 x 72 = 25,920. Rene Guenon and others says we are now nearing the end of Kali Yuga, although some sources say it only started in 3,102 BC. John Major Jenkins' recent book, Galactic Alignment goes into the Vedic Yuga system in some detail, and he studies the work of Hindu saint, Sri Swami Yukteswar, (born 1855), who discovered an oversight in the Vedas, and went on to explain it.

In one of the oldest Vedic writings, attributed to the god-man Manu, the 4 Yugas are said to add up to 24,000 years, but when they are enumerated, they only come to 12,000 years. * The Satya Yuga (Golden Age) lasts 4,800 years * The Treta Yuga (Silver Age) lasts 3,600 years * The Dvapara Yuga (Bronze age) lasts 2,400 years * The Kali Yuga (Iron Age) lasts 1,200 years Yukteswar explained the enigma in a diagram that equates the 12,000 years to a descending half of the 24,000-year cycle, and another 12,000 years to an ascending half. Jenkins Study of the Yukteswar analysis shows that Yukteswar was talking about the precession cycle, but basing it on a 24,000-year cycle, rather than the (approx) 25,700-year cycle recognized by astronomy. The descent into darkness started when the Summer (June) solstice sun was aligned with Galactic Centre, around 10,800 BC, and the ascent back to light starts when the Winter (December) solstice sun aligns with Galactic Centre circa 1998-2012. So, the Yuga system is about precession, as we have decoded from the classic cycle lengths above, and after looking at Jenkins' updates to Yukteswar's work, we can see that the end of Descending Kali Yuga corresponds to the Pisces - Aquarius transition of Western astrology, and to the solstice-galaxy alignment era AD 1998 - 2012.

See an excellent summary by Jenkins here.

Kali Yuga 2012 countdown clock ! Coming to the End of the Kali Yuga ? ( Many say Yes - Few say No ) December 21, 2012

534 days, 9 hours, 53 minutes, and 8 seconds left until the end of the Kali Yuga (This does not work for Netscape)

This (below) is Yukteswar's diagram Click here for Jenkins' diagram. Back to Contents

More on Aquarius & 2012 30/11/02 In an excellent essay on the astronomical symbolism of the Book of Revelation, on the Calendarsign site, we find a quote from the Aquarian Age Network: While acknowledging the zero point of the zodiac to be defined as the point where the true galactic equator crosses the ecliptic between Taurus and Gemini, and recognizing the J2000 galactic equator defined by the galactic north pole of 12h 51.4m, 27 8' to be representative of the B1950 definition of the galactic coordinate system, by virtue of Sagittarius A* being recognized as the dynamical center of the galaxy with the true galactic equator passing through Sagittarius A*, and by virtue of the sun being at 90 00' 32" past the point of the crossing of the J2000 galactic equator and the ecliptic at the spring equinox of 20 March 2000, 0735 GMT, we declare the Age of Aquarius to have unequivocally arrived. Pax Aetatis Aquarii vobiscum! Then a translation:

Expressed in more simple words, this declaration tells us that the point of the spring equinox (once being between the constellations Gemini and Taurus, on the galactic equator) already has moved more than 90 from this point on the galactic equator, which is opposite the center of our galaxy and supposed to be a black hole. The 90 relates to three constellations, each 30, and therefore the constellation Aquarius enters the spring equinox dawn and the new age arrives. We now need to consider the concept of the meridian. This is an imaginary line running from the horizon due north of an observer through the heavens to the horizon due south of an observer. The meridian at the vernal equinox is called the zero meridian, and it runs through the constellation of Pisces in which the sun is situated. At the time of the birth of Jesus Christ the nearest visible star in Pisces to the zero meridian would have been that designated alpha.

However, due to the slow movement of the sun through the Zodiac, mentioned above (the precession of the equinoxes), the nearest star in Pisces to the zero meridian, in fact the nearest of all the 1,800 brightest stars as listed in a star catalogue, is now that designated omega.

It is calculated that it will be exactly on the zero meridian early in 2012. Back to Contents

Tracking down the Kalachakra Prophecy 30/11/02 At What's New item 28 - Kalachakra Prophecy, I had the impression, that Bernbaum's book, The Way to Shambhala had inspired Jose Arguelles to connect 1987 with the Tibetan calendar, revealed in his 1975 book, The Transformative Vision. However, when I got hold of Bernbaum's book, I saw that it was originally published in 1980, so this could not have been Arguelles' source. I finally tracked down a copy of The Transformative Vision , to see if I could see how the Kalachakra Prophecy fits in. As Arguelles recently pointed out in his tribute to the late Tony Shearer, Shearer told him as early as 1969 that the end of the ninth Hell cycle would be in 1987. Shearer's understanding of the "present major cycles of heavens and hells" developed from a conversation with a Mexican Artist called Covarrubias, who had got the information from "a sorceress in the jungle hotlands of Tehuantepec"(p.302).

Shearer worked out how the cycles correlated to the Gregorian calendar, and that information is published in his 1971 book, Lord of the Dawn. Arguelles simply deferred to Shearer's calculation, which then influenced the creation of the Dreamspell count. This is how the Tibetan Kalachakra connects, according to The Transformative Vision: 1. "In Yeats's chart of the historical cones, the last important date is 1927, which initiates a penultimate series..." (p.226). 2. 1927 was "a curious year, marked by the appearance of an erratic comet, Jungs dream, the invention of radio-television, Buckminster Fullers synergistic revelation, and the publication of Evans-Wentzs popular edition of the seemingly obscure Tibetan Book of the Dead, the Bardo Thodol". (p.226) 3. " There is one other point about the year 1927: it was the first year of the current and last sixty-year cycle of the Tibetan calendarthe Kalachakra, or Wheel of Time. It seems more than a coincidence that the esoteric knowledge of The Tibetan Book of the Dead was made available to Westerners in the year that began the fateful cycle in which Tibet itself would be destroyed.

Since the final Tibetan cycle and the ancient Mexican hell cycle both end in 1987, this year may be the date Yeats did not list in his Historical Cones,... ". (p.227) Back to Contents

9/11 resonation with WWII on Time Wave Zero 30/11/02 Time Wave Zero, the time wave generated from the I Ching (see item 17) purports to show the ingression of novelty into spacetime, so Zyzygyz, the founder of the Time Wave Zero 2012 discussion group, looked for resonances on the wave, following the 9/11 tragedy, but found nothing particularly significant at first. Then, another member, Carthellea suggested he looked at the beginning of World War II. Using the Watkins number set*, he found that there was a

visual resonance between the Nazi invasion of Poland on 1st September 1939, and the attack on the USA on 11th September 2001. Peter Meyer, who developed the software for the wave, had calculated a fourth number set based on the I Ching arrangement of Huang Ti (*the original Time Wave was based on the Kelley set; following the Watkins Objection this was superceded by the Watkins set; then the wave was re-calculated as the Sheliak set - see item 17 ). He had become disillusioned with the Time Wave and introduced the Huang Ti wave as a means to test the theory.

This Huang Ti number set was included on the final version of the software (version 7.10, 1999 - now withdrawn from sale). He reasoned that Huang Ti was an earlier emperor than King Wen, so his arrangement should be just as valid if not more so than that of King Wen. However, (as Zyzygyz discovered), some sources say Huang Ti predated King Wen and other sources say King Wen came first. When Zyzygyz mentioned this to Peter Meyer, it got him interested again, and he took a look himself and pointed out that there was an exact resonance using the Huang Ti numbers and the 23rd December 2012** end date. The resonance is also exact using the 21st December 2012 end date, but both dates are on the bottom of a large novelty spike when the end-date is set for the 23rd.

** 23rd December 2012 is the second most popular end-point for the 13-baktun cycle, and is known as the Lounsbury correlation, the 584285 correlation, or the GMT3. In the time wave chart below, set for end-date 21 December 2012, you can see the small vertical line from graphed line to baseline, that shows the pattern of the wave for 11th September 2001. If the chart set for end-date 23 December 2012**, then the graph shape is identical, but September 11th aligns with the long spike that is touching the baseline (novelty increases the nearer the wave gets to the baseline). In the chart below, also set for end date 21 December 2012, you can see the pattern of the wave for the invasion of Poland on 1st September 1939. As you can see, it is identical to the pattern for 9/11 above.

As above, if the chart is set for end-date 23rd December 2012**, then 1st September 1939 aligns with the novelty spike. This resonance is brought further into focus by the forthcoming (2 December 2002) publication of the Michael Drosnin's new book, Bible Code II: The Countdown, which shows on the cover, the 9/11 code discovered in the Bible.

In the Bible code (p.105), Drosnin had already found "1939"; "World War"; "A. Hitler"; and "Nazi" encoded in the same place, and the year 2012 was encoded with "comet", "earth annihilated" and "It will be crumbled, I will tear to pieces"- see item 10. Back to Contents

Near-Death Experience and 2012 31/12/02 I have recently discovered several apparently independent accounts in which people undergoing a near death experience or NDE, have been given access to information about 2012. The most detailed account I found is that of Cassandra Musgrave, of which a brief version can be found here. A more detailed account can be found at this site, from which the following is quoted: Cassandra Musgrave's NDE Revelations For Cassandra Musgrave, the odyssey into the hereafter began one bright summer day. She says, "I feel that my near-death experience was a real gift. I feel it was a real blessing. It really awakened me. I was water skiing in Northern California and when I fell down by some freak accident, the rope twisted around my left arm and dragged me behind the boat. And I found myself being pulled at a very rapid speed and unable to get any air. And my friends, who were goofing off, didnt stop the boat because they werent paying any attention." As she began to drown, Cassandra remembers entering into a kind of dream-like state she feels was the beginning of her near-death experience. "All of a sudden, I was out of my body watching myself being pulled along and thinking This is really incredible. This is really quite amazing. On an inner level, I was being pulled through a very dark tunnel. I didnt feel afraid at all. All of a sudden, found myself coming into a wide open space with stars all around like out in the universe." It was in this cosmic emptiness that Cassandra claims to have received prophecy. "Basically, I saw that there was a 20 year period from 1992 to 2012. Things will be greatly accelerated on earth. All these things will be manifest by great earth changes: earthquakes, floods, tidal waves, great winds. I also saw there were certain areas that would be particularly affected the areas of the east coast, which will be surprised regarding earthquakes. I remember very clearly Japan slipping into the ocean. I was shown there was going to be something akin to 3 days of darkness. I dont feel it is from a nuclear war. To me, it was more of a feeling of natural earth disasters with smoke from volcanoes that would block the sun. We

are all going to be on a roller-coaster ride, and yet it is not forever. If we have darkness for 3 days, it will pass. We will always have the light." A general summary of the visions of near-death-experiencers can be found at NearDeath.com, and includes Cassandra's vision as part of an overview.

Dannion Brinkley's NDE Dannion Brinkley is a more famous case, since he had an NDE that lasted 28 minutes. This is the longest clinically documented NDE ever recorded. His experiences during these 28 minutes are related in great detail in his best seller, Saved by the Light, but briefly: On September 17, 1975, Dannion Brinkley was talking on the phone during a thunderstorm. A bolt of lightning hit the phone line, sending thousands of volts of electricity into his head and down his body. His heart stopped, and he died, but in the process, he had a near-death experience. When Brinkley revived in the morgue after twenty-eight minutes of death, he had an incredible story to tell. At MikePettigrew.com, we can find details of Brinkley's story. Briefly, he found himself floating above his body, went down a spiralling tunnel into a bright light where he was approached by a bright silver being that radiated love. He then re-experienced his life (which had been one full of aggression, including a spell in the marines). He judged himself, feeling the pain he had caused others and also the positive affects he had caused. he was taken to a crystalline city of light. He saw a group of 13 beings representing the signs of the zodiac and a being that presided over the other 12. Dannion was approached by each one of these beings with what looked like a small box. Each time this happened the box opened up to reveal what looked like a small TV screen. Scenes showing events from the future appeared on the screen that would grow in size until Dannion found himself inside the scene. These were major world events that would take place in the future.

There were over 300 of these scenes, 117 of these were Major world events that Dannion was told would take place in the future (1975 to 2012). Dannion was immersed in events ranging from the nuclear accident at Chernobyl, the break-up of the former Soviet Union, the Gulf War, changes to our Earth's climate, breakthroughs in technology and many other things. Now (in 2002) about 100 of these very specific global events have already occurred.

After getting instructions for the building of special centres, Brinkley was sent back to his body which had already been issued with a death certificate, and was cold and covered in a sheet (and, in this version, just about to be taken to the morgue). Following alot of pain and paralysis, Dannion found he had telepathic and precognitive powers. His predictions are said to be coming to pass with astounding accuracy; 95 of the 117, according to one source.

Regarding 2012, when asked by an interviewer, How bad will it get, Dannion? He replied: Or how good will it get? I think it will get really bad geographically, and topographically but in spiritual consciousness it is going to grow in leaps and bounds. Oh, I wouldn't miss it for the world! This earth is changing as the entire universe is changing because between 2004 and 2014, more precisely between 2011 and 2012 , we will experience the return of an energy system that existed here a long time ago. You can call it a spiritually uplifting consciousness, the Second Coming, or the birth of the Aquarian Age. On another page at the same site, he is also quoted as follows: In closing, this is my hope rather than a prophetic prediction: as all the earth changes, both subtle and massive come to pass, one by one, and most especially with the occurrence of the electro-magnetic polar earth shift (between 2012-2014) I hope we all will seize the opportunities for growth which will undoubtedly present themselves to promote our inner development of spiritual virtues. Phyllis Atwater's NDEs Phylis Atwater (also known as PMH Atwater), underwent three NDEs, and a kundalini experience. As a result, she became a researcher into near-death experiences (and author of 8 books ).

In her research into child NDEs, she found that many of the children were reporting predictions of Earth changes and she has correlated the timing of the culmination of these to December 2012, which she says will not only be the start of the Mayan Fifth World, but also the start of the "fifth root race".

Jackie's NDE An Australian woman called Jackie, who experienced 2 NDEs in 1979, says that she received an important message from the angels, but couldnt quite remember what it was. Ever since, shes been looking for cues to jog her memory. While attending a Vancouver NDE conference, she got the cue she needed during a talk by PMH Atwater, following which she said, "Its all come back. It started yesterday in the experiencers session. Then this morning I already knew everything that woman said!" In her talk she informed us that NDErs are in effect Gods new chosen people. Theyre sent back to life with extraordinary powers to pave the way for the consciousness revolution that will transmute our planet beginning in 2012.

Pam Reynolds' NDE Another source says that a woman called Pam Reynolds of Atlanta, Georgia, also had a neardeath experience involving a vision of 2012: This happened about ten years ago when she was dying from a brain tumor...She saw future events like earth changes and a breakthrough in physics and a consciousness change near 2012. She didn't see the end of the world, just changes.

Ken Kalb's NDE Finally, Ken Kalb's book, The Grand Catharsis, was based on a lucid vision gained during a near death experience in 1969. "It is a history of consciousness from 1987 to 2012 weaving together many bodies of knowledge to focus on the real issues for the new millennium". Back to Contents

Cosmic Locusts 31/12/02 There is an excellent new novel called Cosmic Locusts - The 2012 Convergence of Nostradamian, Mayan and Biblical Prophecy by Joel J. Keene, who wrote the book following a series of synchronicities. Joel's birth date is, astrologically, on the cusp of Scorpio and Sagittarius, which is the celestial position of Galactic Centre, and even more accurately, the Galactic equator.

When he heard that the 13-baktun cycle of the Maya was designed to terminate at the point when the winter solstice sun converges on this very point, in 2012, and concurrently found that the Biblical book of Joel, (which is his name), seems to describe Earth's future passage through the tail of a comet, Joel became aware of a clustering of more synchronicities around himself.

He started to write it all down in a fictional format, because it was all so incredible, but like Robert Anton Wilson, when he wrote the fact-based but fictional Illuminatus! Trilogy, Joel found that the synchronicities were continuing.

For example, he had written of a 2012-convergence of a burst of energy from Galactic Centre, and the return of the shattered remains of a comet, only to find that astro-physicist Paul LaViolette had already said that we are overdue for a burst of energy from Galactic Centre, and connected it with the Mayan end-point, and that dendro-chronologist, Mike Baillie has found evidence that an ancient shattered comet became associated with the mythology of the Birth of Venus, (Quetzalcoatl) which is also associated with the start of the 13-Baktun cycle.

Then he found in Ray Stanford's book, The Fatima Prophecy, that the famous series of prophecies of the end-times given to the children at Fatima, spoke of the birth of the planet Venus being responsible for the ascension of mankind. Back to Contents

OOBEs (OBEs) and 2012 31/1/03 Christopher Bache, "is a professor of philosophy at Arizona State University, and does research in self-inducted "Out of Body" (OBE) experiences. In one of his OBEs he was told, by a number of points of light (he assumed they were spirits), that around 2012 the world would go through a global crisis unparalleled in human history (Apocalypse?). They did not tell him what would happen. Because he is a scientific thinker he began look for what this crisis could be". He has now concluded that it will be an environmental disaster caused by humanity. Coincidentally (or not) 2012 is the target date for the world to get its greenhouse gases under control. This is known as the Kyoto Protocol. Prof. Brache has written 2 books, Dark Night, Early Dawn: Steps to a Deep Ecology of Mind, and Lifecycles: Reincarnation & the Web of Life.

If you like the sound of a University degree in Transformation, called Philosophy, Cosmology, and Consciousness, Christopher Bache is on the team, along with Stanislas Grof and David Ulansey, at C.I.I.S. California, USA. Navajo Indian J. Reuben Silverbird , born blind, up to age 5, learned to travel out of body; At age seven, "just two years after my wonderful miracle of sight, I had another, most horrifying

vision that will remain with me until the day the Creator decides I am ready to go to the mountain and join my dear parents, Sun Bear and Thomas Banyanca. The experience conceived the year 2012 and my death and bringing back to life by a spiritual, almost Holy Stranger.

This story and the one about my blindness is too long and will be a part of my book "Spiritual Healing Words of Wisdom". Back to Contents

Behemoth and Leviathan 31/1/03 E.Din Land of Righteousness is a massive work by El a.k.a. Elliott Rudisill, with over 350 pages of very small print. The author has used not only the Bible, but the Dead Sea Scrolls, the Book of Enoch, the Book of Jubilees, and other apocryphal works, combined with the works of Zecharia Sitchin, to form his interpretation of human history.

He also lists the Popol Vuh, Bhagavad Gita, Ramayana, Talmud, Upanishads, Kabbalah and Koran in his list, as well as some of the most influential books on 2012: * John Major Jenkins' Maya Cosmogenesis 2012 * Arguelles' The Mayan Factor * Gilbert & Cotterell's The Mayan Prophecies * LaViolette's Earth Under Fire * Ambilac's Giza-Genesis (!) The planet Nibiru is said by the author to have passed through the solar system around 5100 BC, (no reference is given), and is predicted to return around 2012 AD, possibly as the "New Jerusalem" (p.210). The book of Job is analyzed in detail, since Job was shown how to survive

after his family were killed by a meteor, and it becomes apparent that the 2 "monsters of the deep" Behemoth and Leviathan, mentioned in the book, are actually huge asteroids swimming in the sea of space.

Daniel, Psalms, and Enoch all mention these monsters too, and, when cross-referenced with St. John's Revelation, their consistency and route can be surmised.

END-TIME SCENARIO By combining the Great Pyramid timeline, the "Enochian Jubilee Calendar", and the 13-baktun cycle of the Maya, the author comes up with a "Galactic Calendar" at the root of them all, (p.282-286), and is able to plot an unfolding scenario. That scenario is as follows: Between autumn 2004 and spring 2005, an asteroid/comet will impact the Earth and penetrate the crust (p.344). Then a star will appear in Pisces. This is Leviathan, and its apparent route will be via Cygnus ; Andromeda, Cassiopeia and Perseus; Auriga; Gemini; and Orion (p.267). Around the same time that Leviathan appears in Pisces, Behemoth will travel from the "Southern Constellations" of Hydras; Mensa (Table Mountain); Bird of Paradise, Chameleon, Flying fish, Toucan, Phoenix; Eridanus (The River); Reticulum (The Net); Fornax (The Furnace), up to the end of Eridanus, where it meets Orion (p.268).

Since Behemoth is "the one that hides", it may remain hidden until it gets to Orion. Behemoth has "ten horns" and Leviathan has "seven heads", but when they meet in Orion, "somewhere in the middle of 2008 CE" (CE = AD), they combine to become the "seven headed ten horned "Red Dragon" " of the book of Revelation. The Red Dragon is "cast into the pit" around summer solstice 2008 (p.329); or the Leviathan part is, while the Behemoth component by-passes Earth, but returns in 2012 due to being thrown off orbit by the galactic super- wave that Paul LaViolette has predicted. Mercury (Archangel Michael) collides with the Red Dragon (Leviathan), and Venus and Jupiter may also be hit, but the Moon will take a severe hammering, and may blow apart, with the pieces hitting Earth along with Leviathan (p.328). Three and a half years later (42 months or 1260 days), Behemoth will return, becoming Osiris reborn, or the reborn First Father of the Maya, (p.329).

The galactic super- wave will come into view in Sagittarius, where Galactic Centre is located, appearing as a blue star, or the eye of God, "shortly before the winter of 2012 CE" (p.344), and will arrive at the same time as Behemoth and as Nibiru, which will be the "descent of the New Jerusalem"(p.333).

THE "GALACTIC CALENDAR" So what is this "Galactic Calendar? The author wanted to find a Hebrew source that supplied independent confirmation of a 2012 "end-point", to connect the Maya 13-baktun cycle endpoint with the Judaeo-Christian "Judgment Day" scenario.

The "Jubilee calendar" of the Hebrews is certainly ancient, and was thus examined for a possible connection. The Jubilee was originally simply 7 periods of 7 years, making a total of 49, then adding the Jubilee year to make 50, when years were still reckoned by the Moon (354 days long).

Later, when solar years were used, the Jubilee period was 49 solar years. The author - Elliot Rudisill - found a common denominator in the number 5,096, which can be divided by 49 (years in a Jubilee cycle) and 52 (years in a Mayan Calendar Round) as well as 104 (years in a Mayan Venus Round). Thus, the 5,096-year period represents 98 Calendar rounds and 104 Jubilee cycles. Since this 5,096-year period is 29 years shorter than the 5,125-year Mayan 13baktun cycle, then if it began 29 years after the start of the Mayan cycle, it would terminate in 2012 too (p.284). To check this presumption, Rudisill brings in the "Egyptian calendar built into the Great Pyramid of Giza", by which he must mean the great pyramid timeline, where measurements of "pyramid inches" represent years.

Charles Berlitz said that the timeline ended on 17 September 2001 but Peter LeMesurier found prophecies continuing to 3989 AD. Rudisill takes a period of 10 Jubilee cycles - 490 years - and adds it to the date the great pyramid was supposedly built, although he says it wasn't, but "there was an alignment between the stars and the "Great Pyramid" in the year 2623 BCE" (p.284; no reference given) to arrive at 3113 BC (=3114 BC).

Then, taking another star alignment date of the pyramid "the last "Pole Star Draconis" and the descending shaft"- 2141 BCE (no ref.) - and counts 482 years between these alignment dates, and continuing on to a full 490-year period (10 Jubilee cycles) leads to the year 2133 BCE. Since God said the Jubilee periods had been neglected (during the sojourn of the Israelites in Egypt), and would not be restored until the Exodus, and some have dated the Exodus at 1437 BCE, and this is 696 years after 2133 BCE, and 696 years is "only 4 years" short of 700 years, which is 100 periods of 7 years, Rudisill says,

"This calculated "error" I will call it, of 4 years is so close to "exact" we may be seeing the year 1433 BCE as the "actual" year the "Jubilee Calendar" was "re-started". This equates to a time period of 1,680 years from 3113 BCE and 3,445 years to the year 2012 CE." (p.285). In other words, with enough determination, you can make any theory sound plausible, by being sufficiently long-winded and confusing; providing no references, (apart from a bibliography), and no index. In this way, it is very difficult for anyone to check up on your claims, and cause the whole house of cards to come crashing down.

ERRORS: Three and a half years (3.5 x 360, or 1260) days after summer solstice 2008 is 3 December 2011, not winter solstice 2012 (p.329), and it seems to have been this timing that led to the placing of 2008 as the impact of Leviathan, working back from 2012; working back from the winter solstice of 2012, would put the impact at 10 July 2009.

This kind of error is not acceptable, when your diagrams show (after Ambilac) the timing of the winter solstice event down to a second (12/21/2012 10:18:13) p.278-9; 299-307. Another 40 year error is explained as follows: "This equates to only .004 hundreds in error, closer than the error factor of the "Great Pyramid's" representation of Earth's circumference! " (p.286). When it is calculated, this error (40 years out of 10,290) comes out as 0.38%, which is either ten times less, or a hundred times less than ".004 hundreds", depending on what that means (.004 = 4 thousandths). In a similar way, Ambilac also shot themselves in the foot trying to say how much more accurate they were than the pyramid-builders; see item 39. On p.295 we are told, " Revelation tells us we have a 2.5 million-man army that will conduct a fight here on Earth". However, the only army numbered in Revelation is a 200 million-strong army (Rev.9 v.16). that is 80 times larger, or an error of 800%, and although it doesn't seem to make much difference, since the army is identified as a swarm of meteors, it would be if you'd just survived a storm of 2.5 million meteors, only to be told that it would be the same every day for the next 80 days! On p.307 it says that on one side of the world, Mesoamerica connects to the Galactic centre on the Milky Way, while on the other side of world, Cairo, connects to the point on the Milky Way opposite to Galactic Centre (they connect via astronomy encoded into myth).

Okay, but then it continues to say that there is a twelve hour difference between them, so that at 10:18:13 AM in Mexico, while Mexico looks up at the solstice sun, it will be 10:18:13 PM in Egypt, as people there look up at an array of planets in the night sky.

We are told, "Both are "exactly" 180 degrees apart from each other", meaning both the Galactic center and Galactic Anticentre; and Cairo and Mexico.

While it is true of the celestial locations, it is not true of the terrestrial - Cairo is on 32 degrees longitude, and Mexico city is at 99 degrees longitude - that's not 180 degrees apart, its 131 degrees - that's a 49 degree error! Also, 10:18:13 AM in Mexico equals 18:18:13 PM in Cairo, not 22:18:13 - an error of 4 hours, in which time the sky changes completely.

CONCLUSION The theory of Leviathan and Behemoth as celestial bodies like asteroids or dead binary stars was an interesting idea, but there is too much waffle, too many huge errors and too little in the way of references. Back to Contents

Smelyakov update 31/1/03 In What's new item 27, I mentioned David Wilcock's references to the work of Dr. Alexey Dmitriev, in his paper Planetophysical State of the Earth and Life which analyses the increasing solar system changes, and concludes that the solar system is passing through a magnetised band of plasma. This Russian source of information has now been acknowledged by Professor James M. McCanney who has been working since the 1970s to find the scientific basis to Immanuel Velikovsky's theory.

His Plasma Discharge Comet Model includes an analysis of the solar changes and changes to the planets, and finds that the approach of Planet X is responsible (Planet X is the astronomer's term for an as yet un-named planet, that has been sought beyond Pluto), but his description does sound like Nibiru.

McCanney is the first scientist to agree on the existence an incoming planet, and says it will appear some time in the next 10 years (i.e. by 2012-2013), but may arrive as early as May 2003. If so, it will be visible in February from New Zealand. Unbelievably, May 2003 is the time predicted for the arrival of Nibiru by the Zeta Talk site, who got the information by channeling Zeta reticulans, but McCanney distances himself from them. However, there is now a third possible culprit that is causing these changes, according to a Russian professor. Sergey Smelyakov, who is a professor of mathematics at Kharkov University, (Ukraine, Russia), came up with an interesting theory called The Auric Time Scale and The Mayan Factor but based it on a start date given by Jose Arguelles which was over a year in error.

He had to re-write the theory as a result, but wrote an exclusive summary (Astrological Roots and Forecasting of Some Acute World Trends for the Current Epoch) of the updated theory for 2012: Dire Gnosis. He has just completed the first 2 issues of a 5-part mega-theory that includes The Auric Time Scale, and in Issue 2 part 3 - paragraph 3.3), he mentions that the star Eta Carinae shows all the signs of going "hypernova", which is hundreds of times more powerful than a supernova.

This is predicted for July 2003. Paragraph 3.5 introduces The Auric Time Scale, but part 3 will present the revised theory in a chapter called THE GOLDEN SECTION OF TIME IN SPACE AND HISTORY. The 5-Issue mega-theory contents page is here: THE PREDICTED UNKNOWN - A DECADE OF VOLTEFACE Back to Contents 10.

by David E. Flynn
May 20, 2005 from TheHahrimanGate Website

"Mysteries are due to secrecy." Francis Bacon No UFO conversation goes very long without mention of the Roswell event. It is the pre-eminent story of extraterrestrial folklore. Paradoxically, some say that what occurred near Roswell NM in July 1947 will never be entirely known. Others, like our own government, claim it was a simple case of misidentification... no mystery. But there is a mystery... and there is good reason to believe the truth was covered up.

On July 8th 1947 the headlines of Roswell Daily Record reported:

RAAF Captures Flying Saucer On Ranch in Roswell Region. The intelligence office of the 509th Bombardment group at Roswell Army Field announced at noon today, that the field has come into possession of a flying saucer. The next day the Roswell headlines featured a retraction by the RAAF: An examination by the army revealed last night that mysterious objects found on a lonely New Mexico ranch was a harmless high-altitude weather balloon - not a grounded flying disk. The contrast between these Army statements aroused suspicion immediately. How could Army "intelligence" confuse a balloon with a flying saucer? Witnesses in Roswell had actually observed the disc flying overhead. Their story was featured with the Army's "Flying saucer" announcement in the July 8 th, Roswell Daily Record: Mr. and Mrs. Dan Wilmot... were sitting on their porch at 105 South Penn. last Wednesday night at about ten o'clock when a large glowing object zoomed out of the sky from the southeast, going in a northwesterly direction at a high rate of speed... The object came into view from the southeast and disappeared over the treetops in the general vicinity of six mile hill... It was in sight less then a minute, perhaps 40 or 50 seconds. Wilmot said that it appeared to him to be about 1,500 feet high and going fast. He estimated between 400 and 500 miles per hour... In appearance it looked oval in shape like two inverted saucers, faced mouth to mouth, or like two old type washbowls placed, together in the same fashion... Balloons don't normally glow or travel 400 miles per hour. Despite the evidence supporting the Army's 1 st announcement, the Roswell incident was effectively removed from public scrutiny ...for thirty seven years. In 1984, James Shandera, a Hollywood movie producer investigating the UFO phenomena received an anonymously mailed package of 35 mm film. It contained images of a top secret Government report, later named "the Majestic twelve documents". The report had been compiled for review by president Dwight D. Eisenhower. It was marked: "This is a TOP SECRET- EYES ONLY document containing compartmentalized information essential to the national security of the United States"

Copy of TOP SECRET MAJIC EYES ONLY SOM1-01 "Extraterrestrial Entities and Technology, Recovery and Disposal"

In the document was a list of 12 American scientists, intelligence officials and military leaders appointed to assess the remains of an extraterrestrial craft and alien bodies recovered from Roswell NM in 1947. One year later, an anonymous tip arrived in the mail addressed to the research associate working with Shandera named Bill Moore. This tip directed Moore to a memo confirming the existence of the MJ-12 documents at the National Archives. This new information and other evidence that built a case for authenticity of the MJ-12 documents was pieced together by Moore and his associate Stanton Friedman. During the course of their research, Friedman and Moore began to realize that authentication of the MJ-12 documents would be extremely difficult. The investigators even considered the anonymous release of information could be a process of misdirection. Because the origin of the documents was unknown, no one could be sure that they hadn't originated from a disinformation faction within the government itself. The entire process may have been designed to fail. The release of conflicting or inaccurate information of UFO events by secret factions in government is a well known hazard of ufology research. This disinformation technique is used to establish government plausible deniability. But if the release of the MJ-12 documents wasn't just a convoluted process of disinformation, what other purpose could disclosure of the Roswell event serve? The Majestic twelve documents were made public in 1987. Soon the Roswell incident became the most famous UFO incident in history. Roswell raised the possibility that intelligent extraterrestrial life could exist. The anonymous "assistance" given to the investigators of the Roswell event, or the manner in which any UFO information is dispensed by our government appears more a program of cultural conditioning than simple fact hiding. If this is true, for what purpose are we being conditioned? In 1928 the occult visionary Manly P. Hall wrote: "Not only were many of the founders of the United States government Masons, but they received aid from a secret and august body existing in Europe which helped them to establish this country for A PECULIAR AND PARTICULAR PURPOSE known only to the initiated few." Manly P.Hall, The Secret Teachings of All Ages, pp. XC and XCI "There exists in the world today, and has existed for thousands of years, a body of enlightened humans united in what might be termed, an Order of the Quest. It is composed of those whose intellectual and spiritual perceptions have revealed to them that civilization has secret destiny

"European mysticism was not dead at the time the United States of America was founded. The hand of the mysteries controlled in the establishment of the new government for the signature of the mysteries may still be seen on the Great Seal of the United States of America. Careful analysis of the seal discloses a mass of occult and Masonic symbols chief among them, the so-called American eagle.... The American eagle upon the Great Seal is but a conventionalized phoenix..." Manly P. Hall, The Secret Destiny of America Phoenix, the last word of Hall's statement of the founding of America, is key to the "secret destiny" of civilization. It explains the occult design behind the formation of the United States and the events at Roswell. These mysteries can be solved if we understand this one word. The word "Phoenix" is derivative of the Greek name for "Phoenicians", ancient people that inhabited the East coast of the Mediterranean Sea. Though called "Phoenicians" meaning redness by the Greeks, the Phoenicians referred to themselves as Sidonians. Their capital city named after Sidon, the first born son of Canaan, son of Ham. Ham was one of the original occupants of Noahs Ark and Noahs youngest son. The Sidonians were considered masters of science and magic. They claimed to possess a civilization existing for 30,000 years. Ancient historians venerated the Sidonians: Sidonian navigators were especially sought by the Egyptians, Babylonians, Persians & Greeks. The Greek alphabet was transferred directly from the Phoenician / Sidonian script and applied to the sounds of the language of the Greeks, hence the meaning of the word "phonetic". The modern English alphabet is based on the ancient Phoenician / Sidonian script. The majority of knowledge ascribed through the ages to the Greeks was given to them first by the Sidonians. Pythagoras, considered the ancient father of Free Masonry was schooled in Sidonia. The first phonetic text in existence, the Old Testament, was written in Phoenician characters. The first temple of the Hebrews was built in Jerusalem by artisans from Tyre, a city that traded Phoenician capital status with Sidon. The preeminence of the Phoenician / Sidonian knowledge in ancient civilization is a long guarded occult secret. But more important than the scientific influence of Sidonia, the symbolic meaning of Manly Hall's Phoenix represents an age when mankind and extraterrestrials were believed to have lived on earth side by side. Phoenicia was the land of descent of the "Sons of God" described in Genesis 6. According to the history of every ancient culture in the Middle East, Phoenicia was the first place where beings from heaven came to the earth. The union of these beings with the daughters of Adam produced hybrid offspring, Nephilim (literally in Hebrew, the fallen ones). According to the pseudepigraphic book of Enoch, the book of Jubilees and many other ancient texts, the exact point of descent of the Sons of God was Mt. Hermon in Phoenicia. Through the influence of these heavenly beings and their offspring, men became gifted with knowledge surpassing any that had yet existed. But then came the flood... and symbolically the Phoenix perished. The heavenly and supernatural bird, keeper of secrets of the past and future was consumed in the fire of its own making. In other words, the knowledge given to man from heaven was lost in a global cataclysm. According to Genesis 6, the destruction of earth by the flood was in response to the interaction of the Sons of God with the daughters of Adam. Ancient and modern occult adepts describe the beauty of Phoenix, dazzling and brilliantly colored. It was a perfect symbol for heavenly knowledge manifested on the earth. They believed the power of the Phoenix came from heaven. Its death on earth would only be temporary. The life of the Phoenix could not be extinguished any more than the heavens or knowledge could cease to exist. The Phoenix waited to be born again out of the ashes of its demise. The symbolic rebirth of the Phoenix did take place in the time after the flood. Nephilim that survived the cataclysm, returned to their point of origin in Phoenicia, as recorded in the Old Testament. Canaan, the son of Ham, the cursed son of Noah, once again established civilization amidst the beings that had caused the destruction of the world. The Nephilim were more powerful and intelligent than men, but they were earth bound like men. The connection they once had to their heavenly progenitors had been cut. Together with humanity they beckoned the Sons of God to descend as they had before the flood. They built a tower reaching into the heavens. Because of this attempt, it is recorded that the world lost what was left of divine knowledge, through its dispersion throughout the earth. Manly P. Hall refers to this history when writing of the coming world order and the rise of the Phoenix. His understanding of the Phoenix is shared by illumined fraternal orders that have preserved the scattered "sacred" knowledge of the ancients. They anticipate the rise of the Phoenix from the ashes of history. They wait for an age when knowledge will once again descend from heaven. This secret has been hidden in their symbolism and

numerology throughout history. "In Freemasonry is embedded the core or the secret heart of the occult mysteries, wrapped up on number, metaphor and symbol ..." The Reappearance of the Christ and the Masters of Wisdom, Benjamin Creme p. 87 "Numbers are a key to the ancient views of cosmogony ... spiritually as well as physically ... to the evolution of the present human race; all systems of religious mysticism are based upon numerals. The sacredness of numbers ..." The Occult Power of Numbers, W. Wynn Westcott , p. 15 ...in Spiritual Numerology, '33' symbolizes the highest spiritual conscious attainable by the human being." The Secret of the Illuminati, Elizabeth van Buren, p. 161-2 33 and 3 are all featured prominently in occult doctrine. The great significance of the number 33 cannot be fully understood unless it is combined with the most important science of Free Masonry, navigation. The compass and square, the most visible symbols of Masonry are also the basic tools of navigation and map making. Calculation of speed and location under the heavens is considered to be the highest form of sacred knowledge from antiquity. Navigation unites time with space and the heavens with the earth. The number "3" is essential to this process. Without the geometry of the 3 sided triangle, establishing location and distance on a map or "triangulation" is impossible. Navigation not only predicts the destination of a traveler on the earth but also the time the traveler will arrive. The most powerful secret held by the occult elite is related to this concept taken to a higher level. As the navigator can use increments of the earth's latitude and longitude to determine location in space and time, these increments can be measured in the earth itself to reveal the appointed time of humanity's destiny. This is why the number 33 and the compass and square are such important symbols of the illumined elite. 33.33 degrees of the great circle of the earth represents 2012 nautical miles. Mount Hermon in Phoenicia, the first location of extraterrestrial influence with man, lies precisely at 33.33 north 33.33 east ... 2,012 miles from the equator and 2,012 miles from the prime meridian.* To be completely accurate, the number of nautical miles in 33.33 degrees of the earth is 2012 ".9" This corresponds to the year and date that the ancient Mayans of middle America believed their calendar will end, December 21st, 2012. This is also the year their serpent god and founder of civilization, Quetzalcoatl, will return from heaven.

Does the chosen location of the first connection of heaven with the earth on Mt. Hermon at 33.3rd degrees set in time the final phase of a new world order in 2012? In light of the ancient history of Mt. Hermon, is it possible that

the year 2012 might also represent this scenario? But how is the year 2012 anchored in time? Dates and years were commonly measured from the start of the reign of a king or at the founding of a new city in antiquity. Our modern calendar is aligned to the birth of the Messiah of Israel, Jesus Christ, though even this "anchor point" is not fixed absolutely. There is a debate concerning when exactly Jesus was born. Various researchers have placed the time of Christ's birth at 11 BC, 3 BC, and 1 AD. Additionally, our modern calendar was based on earlier versions that were adjusted several times forward or back a number of years by Roman Emperors and Popes. There has already been a 2012 BC in our calendar, though it was not a remarkable year with respect to knowledge. Finding a relationship between 2012 AD and the present age may be the critical way to resolve this question. It makes more sense to qualify this future date with references left from the previous encounters of extraterrestrials with humanity. If the sons of God descended to Mt. Hermon with the intention of connecting 33.33 with 2012 navigationally, might they also have placed an additional marker coordinating the year 2012 with their return? It appears they did. This is very probably the meaning of the Roswell event. It is a marker consisting of ancient, sacred numbers. The impact area near Roswell lays 33 north latitude, at a distance 2,012 miles from the equator. When the latitude of the impact site 33 north, is multiplied by the universal mathematical constant PI, (3.1415926572...) the result is 104, the longitude of the impact site. The value of PI is one of the most important numbers of geometry. Without an understanding of this number, the science of building, architecture and navigation is not possible. Historians actually base one of the classifications of a true civilization on its achievement of PI. At Roswell, if PI is multiplied by the latitudes from 33.00 to 33.59, a line with the resultant longitude can be traced showing the precise flight path the disc traveled before impact. This line of coordinates lies south east to North West, exactly in the direction the craft appeared to follow according to eye witnesses recorded in the Roswell Daily Record, July 8th, 1947: "... (the) large glowing object zoomed out of the sky from the southeast, going in a northwesterly direction at a high rate of speed... The object came into view from the southeast..."

The only place on earth where 33 latitude and 104 longitude exist without lying in an ocean, as it does south of the equator, or an uninhabited mountain plateau as it does in the eastern hemisphere... is a few miles north west of Roswell, New Mexico, USA. The sacred number 33 multiplied by PI, just happens to produce the location where a flying saucer crashed landed in 1947.

Scientists at the Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence (SETI) know that a radio message from intelligent life out in space would have to use redundant universal mathematical constants. Universal constants are not dependent on calibration systems, but ratios. They function with every counting system that exists. Any signal coming from space that has these numbers stands out against the randomness in the background of space noise. Such a signal would define itself as intelligent and deliberate. Such is the case with the location of the Roswell incident. The odds against a crash location occurring "by chance" precisely at the coordinates that are the product of PI x 33 are astronomical... on the order of millions to one. The location was chosen therefore to show a deliberate and intelligent message. In other words... the Roswell event was not an accident. This is a profound contradiction to its initial appearance. The crash and destruction of the sophisticated flying vehicle with occupants, according to reports, seemed an unplanned disaster. It is exactly because of this appearance that researchers speculated that American radar, used in missile tracking experiments at white Sands testing grounds near Roswell, some how brought the extraterrestrial vehicle down. However, if the message at Roswell is more than a strange mathematical coincidence, this would also suggest that the crash was staged and the vehicle's occupants sacrificed. By appearing as an accident, the last thing one would look for is a message deposited in the crash location itself. But there is more to the message than the display of "Pl". The Roswell event also incorporates numbers of the earth's dimensions and orientation in space. These numbers interact with each other in patterns similar to those known to exist in occult ritual magic. Though the value of a number may change with placement of the decimal point, the magical form of the number remains the same. Numbers that display these characteristics are commonly seen in the practice of "theurgy"** or numerology. This is especially notable in the way the message displays the number 19.47. 1947 was the year the Roswell event occurred. 19.47 or "19.5" is a universal number signifying the meeting of a tetrahedron with a sphere. 19.47 is the latitude where 3 points of the 4 sided tetrahedron touch north or south the equator if the 4 th point is anchored at the pole of a rotating sphere. If the number 19.47 was discovered in an extraterrestrial radio signal, SETI scientists would have proof that the broadcasters understood advanced Platonic geometry. The Roswell message numerologically interconnects 19.47 with the date, latitude, longitude and distance from the equator of the impact event itself. The earth is 21,600 nautical miles around. This measurement is based on the ratio of 360 x 60 first used by the Phoenicians and still in use by modern ocean and flight navigators. The number 6,480 is exactly 1/4th of the total 25,920 years it takes earth to complete one circuit through the signs of the zodiac. 6,480 years is unique because it marks the duration between a series of global cataclysms left in earth's historic and geologic record. At Roswell, 19.47 appears in relationship between 21,600, 6,480 and 33.33 When the earth's circumference, 21,600 is divided by 33.33 the number 6,480 appears in a variation: 21,600 / 33.33 = 648.06480648064... 648.06480648064... divided by 19.47, the number suggested by the year of the Roswell crash itself (1947)... produces a modification of 33.33: 648.064806480 / 19.47 = 33.28 ...Latitude 33.28

This latitude, 33.28 multiplied by PI (3.141592653589...) results in a longitude 104.56 ... pinpointing the exact coordinates of the disc impact site near Roswell NM.

Additionally the number 2012 can be calculated with a form of the number of the exact Roswell crash site latitude, 33.28 and the year of the Roswell event itself, 1947: 19.47 x 3.328 = 64.80 Between July 1947 and March 2012 there are 64.80 years. It is significant that the United States recovered the debris and "alien" bodies of the Roswell crash on the 4 th of July 1947. America itself was founded on the same date in 1776. This year was chosen by the occult elite behind the formation of America for a special reason. 888 is the sum of the letters in Greek of the name Jesus (each Greek letter represents a number). A second "messiah" (888) plus the first messiah (888) = 1776. America's founding date, 1776 is a number representing a 2nd messiah or the "king" of the World Order. It symbolizes the advent of a god man on earth. According to the illuminated elite, as the first messiah came to establish the Kingdom of Heaven, the second illuminated messiah will establish a New World under his rule. Concerning this messiah, Manly P. Hall, wrote: "The outcome of the 'secret destiny' is a World Order ruled by a King with supernatural powers. This King was descended of a divine race; that is, he belonged to the Order of the Illumined for those who come to a state of wisdom then belong to a family of heroes-perfected human beings... " The Secret Destiny of America., p. 26. The average number of days in a year for a century is 364.864 (this is slightly less than 365 because it includes leap years that have an extra day) This number can be found by dividing the quarter of precession 6,480 with the founding year of America 1776 by moving the decimal point two spaces to the left. 6,480 / 17.76 = 364.864648 1776 is therefore related to the latitude and year of the Roswell event: 364.864648 x 1776 = 648,000 / 33.28 (Roswell event latitude) = 19,470 The Roswell event longitude is also related to America's birth year 1776: 1776 / 17.076 = 104.0056, (the exact longitude of Roswell crash site is 104.56) America has existed from the beginning as an intellectual beacon in the world. It was the first country to achieve super power status, moving mankind into the space age and nuclear age. It continues to shape the political and economic climate for a future ruled by one heavenly power. It is the country where the year 2012 appears to have been supernaturally communicated to humanity by the Roswell event. Having taken the appearance of an accident, the Roswell event limited the directions an investigation would take. Working from the paradigm of an accident, researchers who might otherwise have suspected its mathematical message were diverted. This mental conditioning worked very well. The messengers seem to have been masters of the human psyche. They did not want the Roswell event's true nature known in 1947. It was designed to be understood in the future. The identity of the messengers was also obscured. Some had concluded that genuine, "Hollywood type" extraterrestrials crashed near Roswell in 1947. This idea doesn't fit so easily in light of the numbers on the ground. A true extraterrestrial would understand universal math... but not necessarily numbers distinct in human culture and religion. The Roswell math bears uncanny similarity to ancient human systems of occult numerology.

The word "messenger" is exactly what the ancients named the heavenly beings. They knew their nature, having lived with them in Phoenicia. The modern illumined shares this understanding. In the ancient Hebrew, the word from messenger is "malach"; the ancient Greek word is "angelos". According to the science of Angelology, the angelic mind grasps every mathematical and scientific concept in the universe. It is not outside the Angelic repertoire to take concern with mankind or to interact with it. They also know man's religious numbers and symbolism... in Phoenicia, they were the teachers of these concepts. They were the sons' of God that descended to Mt. Hermon. But the messengers of Mt. Hermon were not morally aligned with the God of the Bible. On the contrary, they were aligned with the god that "illuminates" the mind of man. Concerning this god, Albert Pike, the 33 Mason, wrote in his Masonic guide, "Morals and Dogma": "Lucifer, the Light-bearer! Strange and mysterious name to give to the Spirit of Darkness! Lucifer, the Son of the Morning! Is it he who bears the Light, and with its splendors intolerable, blinds feeble, sensual, or selfish souls? Doubt it not!" Morals and Dogma of the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, p. 321 The origin for Lucifer's name is found in the book of the prophet Isaiah. This text also explains that Lucifer is an angel. As an angel, his job is clear: Angels leave messages, (angelicon). The Roswell event was a message ...left at 33 One third of anything is 33 percent. 1/3rd of 100% is 33.333333...There is an ancient text that reveals the connection between the messengers and number 33: And there appeared another wonder in heaven; and behold a great red dragon... And his tail drew 1/3rd part of the stars of heaven, and did cast them to the earth... And there was war in heaven: Michael and his angels fought against the dragon; and the dragon fought and his angels... And the great dragon was cast out, that old serpent, called the Devil, and Satan, which deceiveth the whole world: he was cast out into the earth, and his angels were cast out with him. Revelation 12:3-9 In this text the number 33 or 1/3rd is explained as the actual percentage of rebellious angels that will be cast to the earth. Satan is also clearly associated with this same number. We know that 33 degrees of earths circumference is 2012 miles and that 33 is a prominent number in the Roswell message. 33 is also prominently featured in the location of the first descent of angelic forces to Mt. Hermon. Might this numeric connection indicate a similar type event occurring in the year 2012? It shall come to pass in that day the Lord will punish on high the host of exalted ones, And on the earth the kings of the earth. They will be gathered together, As prisoners are gathered in the pit, And will be shut up in the prison; After many days they will be punished. Isaiah 24:21,22 NKJV According to Isaiah 24 and Revelation 12, Lucifer and his angels are bound by the same destiny. They will be cast to the earth. Because they undoubtedly anticipate this event, this unseen group of heavenly beings must be preparing themselves for an inevitable change of estate. It also makes sense that they would condition mankind to accept them as gods when they return. It has happened before. In fact, Jesus himself compared his second coming with the situation before the flood. Genesis 6 is the blueprint for the future. And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men's hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken. Luke 21:25, 26 But as the days of Noah were, so also will the coming of the Son of Man be. For as in the days before the flood, they were eating and drinking, marrying and giving in marriage, until the day that Noah entered the ark, and did not know until the flood came and took them all away, so also will the coming of the Son of Man be. Matthew 24:37-39 According to Christian eschatology, the return of Jesus as king of the earth follows the appearance of his counterfeit. This false king will control humanity empowered by the same angelic rebels that ruled the earth before Noah entered the Ark. This concept has been around for a long time. It isnt so extraordinary that Roswell repeats it. The troubling aspect of the Roswell message is that it seems to predict that these events will occur, or begin to occur in 2012. Christian eschatology can accommodate the existence of the Roswell message. It can accept its angelic origin for the message and even its symbolism. But so far there has been little room in eschatology for the setting of dates or years for prophecy fulfillment. There is only one true way of knowing the future, apart from trusting Gods words to mankind One has to wait.

According to the message at Roswell, we have only to wait a few years...

11.

by Alfred Lambremont Webre Seattle Exopolitics Examiner July 14, 2010 from Examiner Website Spanish version

Part 1

U.S. Supreme Court, target of 2013 DARPA chronovisor probe In the course of research on potential impending transitional changes during the 2012-13 time horizon, this 'Examiner' reporter has identified what can be described as two parallel realities, each buttressed by independent sets of data and personal and institutional decisions: * a 2012-13 catastrophic timeline * a 2012-13 positive future timeline The two parallel 2012-13 timelines are quite opposite in nature. *

The cataclysmic timeline envisions 2012-13 as a time when the Earth is hit by destructive solar flares, large meteors, tsunamis, world-wide coastal inundations, mega-catastrophe. * The positive timeline envisions 2012-13 as follows: o 2012 heralds Earths entry into the Golden Age, and between now and then is a time of transition from life as you have known it into life totally in harmony with all of Nature. As evidence of a possible 2012-13 catastrophic timeline, researcher Dr. Courtney Brown points to the results of a recent Farsight Institute remote viewing study of global climate change 20082013.

Expecting to find marginal effects of global climate change on coastal areas in 2013, Dr. Brown reports, instead remote viewers found a catastrophic 2013 timeline.

The 2013 catastrophic timeline is set out in an article by Dr. Brown, and in a presentation that has been shown publicly at only three venues including the recent 2010 IIIHS.org conference in Montreal in which this reporter spoke and participated. This reporter has reproduced the conclusions of Dr. Brown's study from his notes, as the Farsight video of Dr. Brown's presentation has been removed from its website. Dr. Brown indicated at his IIIHS presentation on July 7, 2010 that he has been threatened by intelligence agents from showing his remote viewing information at wider venues, and suggested that to this 'Examiner' reporter that the issue of a 2012-13 catastrophic and 2012-13 positive timeline future be distributed to a wider public in articles such as the one you are reading. In his July 7, 2010 presentation, Dr. Brown states there are anomalies that suggest the U.S. government and elites are heavily invested in covertly preparing for the 2012-13 catastrophic timeline, while keeping the bulk of the human population in the dark.

These anomalies (which are explored at length in the article below) suggest that decisionmakers in the U.S. and other government and some elites have made the decision that the 201213 catastrophic future is the most probable future, and are feverishly completing underground facilities on Earth for the military, police, and key financial and political elites (as well as secret bases on Mars). The evidence that Earth has recently shifted onto a positive, non-catastrophic timeline is growing, however. For example, the results in the Farsight Institutes 2008-2013 remote

viewing study are skewed between a 2013 catastrophic timeline and a 2013 noncatastrophic timeline.

Statistically, 39 percent of the remote viewing reports achieved a disaster score of 3 (Catastrophic), while 29% of the remote viewing reports achieved a disaster score of 0 (Noncatastrophic). If the Farsight remote viewing study is correct, it is statistically almost as much a certainty that a positive future will occur in 2012-13 as that a Solar flare-Planet X catastrophe will occur. Dr. Brown notes that Farsight Institute remote viewers once predicted an earthquake that would flatten Los Angeles International Airport (LAX) on a specific date.

Concerned about public safety, Farsight went public with that prediction. A 6.4 earthquake did occur in the LAX area, without consequent damage to the airport. In a remarkable coincidence (or synchronicity), both the Farsight Institute and a chronovisor probe in the early 1970s by DARPAs Project Pegasus chose archetypal targets in Washington, DC right across the street from each other.

Project Pegasus chose to view the U.S. Supreme Court building in 2013 via chronovisor and Project Pegasus participant and whistleblower Andrew D. Basiago, found that the Supreme Court building was under 100 feet of stagnant water in a chronovisor probe.

The Farsight Institute targeted the U.S. Capitol building in 2013, and some remote viewer reports viewed the U.S. Capitol in ruins along side deep water (below images).

The chronovisor is a device that uses a screen or holographic template to locate and display scenes from the past or future in the time-space hologram. The chronovisor was originally developed by two Vatican scientists in conjunction with Enrico Fermi and later refined by DARPA scientists. Mr. Basiago has stated that,

because the chronovisors did not identify absolute, deterministic futures but rather alternate futures in the multiverse, this catastrophic vision of Washington, DC might be from an alternative time line that does not materialize on our time line. Other Farsight remote viewers targeting the U.S. Capitol in 2013 did not see a Washington, DC devastated by natural catastrophe. Here, then, we have the 2012-13 catastrophic and 2012-13 non-catastrophic futures side by side. DARPAs Project Pegasus chronovisor technology for probing future events in the timespace hologram was state of the art in the early 1970s.

Project Pegasus itself was under the policy oversight of Donald H. Rumsfeld as a Nixon cabinet member.

It may have been that Presidential-level decisions were made in the early 1970s to commence underground shelter preparations, on the basis of Project Pegasus and other time-travel intelligence about the 2012-13 catastrophic timeline. It is reasonable to speculate whether the U.S. and other governments and elites may have made a fundamental miscalculation and false decision in using secret forecasting technology to assume that a 2012-13 cataclysmic timeline will be the actual future, when in fact it was an alternative future that will not materialize as the actual deterministic future in 2012-13. It is also reasonable to speculate that the governments and political and financial elites have made a colossal moral error in creating safe underground bases for themselves, while making plans to leave an unwitting humanity on the surface to be depopulated by a combination of giant solar flares, meteors from space, and a Mad Max scenario playing out - all of which is a future that does not materialize. Have these governments and elites trapped themselves into a cataclysmic 2012-13 timeline mentality or meme? An awakened and empowered humanity may find itself in a 2012-13 positive timeline, achieving self-governance.

A meme is a unit of cultural ideas, symbols or practices, which can be transmitted from one mind to another through writing, speech, gestures, rituals or other imitable phenomena. from Wikipedia Website In 2012-13, as Dr. Carl Joseph Calleman stated in an interview with this 'Examiner' reporter,

the universal alternating energy wave movements end, and Earth is set on a gradual setting of a potential to reach advanced utopian planet status - a virtual Garden of Eden. This 'Examiner' article explores the evidence for a, 1. 2012-13 catastrophic timeline, as well as a, 2. 2012-13 positive timeline, ...and invites you - the reader - to go deep inside and ask: Which timeline am I on? Am I making plans for a 2012-13 Cataclysm or a 2012-13 and beyond Golden Age - or something in between?

Remote viewing the 2012-13 cataclysmic and 2012-13 positive future timelines The Farsight Institute study incorporated highly trained former U.S. military remote viewers using remote viewing to study climate and planetary change between the years 2008 and 2013. The study involved the following goals: 1. To explore whether remote-viewing data can describe climate and planetary change 2. To see if releasing information about multiple possible futures can influence which future is most probable The study compared targeted futures in 2013 where scientists had been assumed to have accepted the extraterrestrial presence and validity of remote viewing, and where scientists still maintained an extraterrestrial truth embargo. Remote viewers viewed 8 targets in various continents in 2008 and 2013 (using blind controls) to view climate and planetary change during the period. The remote viewing targets included the U.S. Capitol building, Washington, DC in 2013.

Farsight Institute - cataclysmic 2012-13 timeline According to Dr. Brown in his July 7, 2010 presentation, the study was expecting to find marginal differences in climate change around the globe in the interval between 2008 and 2013.

Instead, 39% of the remote viewing reports in the study found a cataclysmic timeline in 2013.

The catastrophic remote viewing reports contain the following: 1. Destructive Solar flares 2. Large meteors leading to Tsunamis 3. Volcanism 4. Flooding of coastal cities 5. Self-organized refugees from coastal areas 6. Breakdown of government 7. U.S. government, military, political and economic elites have gone underground 8. Breakdown of energy - no electricity 9. Breakdown of food supply 10. Breakdown of transportation - no cars, buses, trucks, planes or trains 11. Loss of buildings on coastal areas.

In his presentation, Dr. Brown comments that a Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf approaching the solar system and Earths orbit, and causing large scale solar flares as well as large incoming meteors is one scenario that would account for this pattern of remote viewing.

Extraterrestrial disclosure and the 2012-13 catastrophic timeline The Farsight study found that the effects of the 2013 cataclysmic timeline are ameliorated if scientists are able to end the extraterrestrial truth embargo, as for example, at one of the 2013 targets - the Sydney, Australia Opera House.

Remote viewers found no people at the Sydney Opera House scenario in a 2013 where the extraterrestrial and remote viewing embargo was still in force, but found that refugees were streaming out of Sydney on foot in a 2013 where scientists acknowledged the extraterrestrial and remote viewing reality. (See slide show above for selected remote viewing scenes from the Disaster 3 scores for 2012).

2012-13 anomalies - U.S. government and elites hidey-hole plan 'Examiner' readers can view a presentation at Project Camelot by Alfred Lambremont Webre on 2012 & A Golden Age:

In his presentation on July 7, 2010 of the Farsight study, Dr. Brown mentions a growing list of anomalies that are indicators of an apparent high-level covert plan for the U.S. and other governments and elites to abandon their roles in surface society, and go underground sometime in 2012-13.

These anomalies are indicators that the U.S., other governments, and decision-making elites may have concluded that a 2012-13 cataclysmic timeline is going to be the actual future

timeline (a conclusion that has not yet been established, as in fact Earth may now be on a 201213 positive future timeline).

2012-13 Catastrophic timeline anomalies The following is a non-exhaustive list of 2012-13 catastrophic timeline anomalies. 1. U.S. is ending all human space flight vehicles in Feb 2011, indicating a risk that giant solar flares and large meteors or other incoming from a Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf may damage U.S. space assets 2. U.S. national debt is unpayable, indicating an expectation that existing 2012-13 world public order will be destroyed and debit will never have to be paid by the post 2012-13 United States of America. The U.S. debt itself has been analyzed as a false flag operation by City of London banking interests and the Federal Reserve Bank 3. The Svalbard Is. (Norway) seed vault containing samples of the worlds seeds was recently inspected by the UN and will be sealed in 2011. The project, started by Bill Gates, the Rockefeller Foundation, Monsanto and Syngenta and other GMO (genetically modified organisms) organizations, has been criticized as a possible part of a global depopulation plot 4. Norway has built an underground shelter for half its population that will also house 2.5 million U.S. political and financial elites. Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf is speculated upon as a possible cause of the 2012-13 catastrophe, although there may be disinformation surrounding these reports of a Planet X object approaching the solar system. See Letter from a Norwegian politician and associated interviews 5. China is now building 200 miles per year of tunnels under its major cities to be completed by 2011, presumably reflecting a decision by the Chinese government to save the bulk of its population from the effects of a 2012-13 cataclysmic timeline;

6. Active major tunneling continues under the Dugway, Dulce and other covert DUMB (Deep Underground Military Bases) in the southwestern U.S. bases, and coal power plants are being built on the surface of these bases; 7. Google earth is intentionally obfuscating photos of this tunneling at U.S. underground bases 8. Tunneling continues under the Denver International airport continues 9. An Internet kill switch approval for the U.S. President has been passed by a congressional committee. If passed, the internet kill switch could be applied in a 2012-13 scenario to make it more difficult for a surface U.S. population to self-organize and form its own citizen-based government, once U.S. and other governments go underground and the internet is killed 10. A Martial law matrix provides for the supremacy of the Executive and functional collapse of constitutional rights in the event of a national emergency such as a 2012-13 cataclysmic timeline or a period in which the U.S. government and elites disappear into underground bases

DARPAs chronovisor probe of Washington, DC in 2013 'Examiner' readers can view the Mt. Adams Statement on 2012 & A Golden Age. Cambridge-educated environmentalist and attorney Andrew D. Basiago has revealed in previous 'Examiner' articles that, between 1969 and 1972, as a child participant in Project Pegasus, he both viewed past and future events through a device known as a chronovisor and teleported back and forth across the country in vortal tunnels opened in time-space via Tesla-based teleporters located at the Curtiss-Wright Aeronautical Company facility in Wood Ridge, NJ and the Sandia National Laboratory in Sandia, NM. As previously reported by this 'Examiner' reporter,

In one time probe to the future undertaken by Project Pegasus from a chronovisor device located at ITT Defense Communications in Nutley, NJ, Mr. Basiago viewed the US Supreme Court building in Washington, DC as it would be in the year 2013.

During this probe, Mr. Basiago found that the Supreme Court building was under 100 feet of stagnant water and reported this to the Lieutenant Commander from the Office of Naval Intelligence who debriefed him after the probe to the future was completed. Mr. Basiago hastens to add that because the chronovisors did not identify absolute, deterministic futures but rather alternate futures in the multi-verse, this catastrophic vision of Washington, DC might be from an alternative time line that does not materialize on our time line. According to Mr. Basiagos whistleblower testimony, Donald H. Rumsfeld was the defense attach to Project Pegasus during the early 1970s, when Mr. Rumsfeld was officially serving as a counselor to President Nixon, a member of the Nixon cabinet and member of his Board of Wage and Price Stabilization. In all likelihood, Rumsfeld, as the defense attach to Project Pegasus, would have known about and possibly had control over the data about the chronovisor probe to the U.S. Supreme court building in 2013 and derived via quantum access and brought back to the early 1970s for analysis by the DARPA research and development program under his administrative authority. U.S. Executive authority under U.S. President Richard M. Nixon or his successors can then have plausibly relied upon the DARPA Project Pegasus chronovisor 2013 Washington DC catastrophic timeline information in making an executive decision of the U.S. government to proceed with the development of a network of deep underground military bases (DUMB). If, as Mr. Basiago points out, this catastrophic vision of Washington, DC might be from an alternative time line that does not materialize on our time line, ...then the entire network of DUMB underground bases and socially repressive anomaly infrastructure (See above) used by the U.S. government and elites to implement this predicted 2012-13 catastrophic timeline would backfire against the governments and elites.

Part 2

Will a Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf materialize in our solar system in 2012-13? According to Dr. Courtney Brown's July 7 IIIHS presentation, the remote viewing 2012-13 catastrophic timeline hinges on the entry of a Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf into our solar system, creating the gigantic solar flares and large meteors that in turn trigger tsunamis, coastal inundations, and systems collapse on Earth. As a scientific control we can reasonably ask - Is a Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf headed toward Earth, to arrive in 2012-13? One indicator that a Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf may be headed toward Earth, to arrive in 2012-13 can be inferred from a Project Camelot document, a 2008 Letter from a Norwegian politician stating, in part, that, "Planet X is coming, and Norway has begun with storage of food and seeds in the Svalbard area and in the arctic north with the help of the US and EU and all around in Norway. They will only save those that are in the elite of power and those that can build up again: doctors, scientists, and so on. "As for me, I already know that I am going to leave before 2012 to go the area of Mosjen where we have a deep underground military facility. There we are divided into sectors, red, blue, and green. The signs of the Norwegian military are already given to them and the camps have already been built a long time ago. "The people that are going to be left on the surface and die with along the others will get no help whatsoever. The plan is that 2,000,000 Norwegians are going to be safe, and the rest will die. That means 2,600,000 will perish into the night not knowing what to do." Project Camelot has also received independent confirmation of the existence of the Norway underground bases, complete with photos and maps. In his July 7, 2010 Farsight Institute 2012-13 remote viewing presentation, Dr. Courtney Brown states that part of the cost of the Norway bases was covered by U.S. government funding sources. The Norway 2012-13 underground bases will accommodate about half of the Norwegian population of elites and specializes personnel (2.5 million), as well as another 2.5 million U.S. economic and political elites. There is, of course, the possibility that the reports of the 2012-13 Norway underground bases are disinformation themselves.

However, the Project Camelot evidence and mainstream media coverage of the Svalbard Islands seed bank (recently inspected by the United Nations and to be sealed in 2011) tends to confirm their existence.

The Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf meme Readers can view this video presentation by Alfred Lambremont Webre at Project Camelot's Awake and Aware on 2012 & A Golden Age. Following an eight-year investigation of the topic since 2002, it is the operating conclusion of this reporter that the catastrophic 2012-13 arrival of Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf is largely a meme, or thought-virus with no corresponding reality to it.

Scientifically investigation of possible, additional planets or suns in our solar system is a valid activity, and may yield results.

This research activity should not be confused with the meme that Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf is arriving in our solar system in 2012-13 with catastrophic results. The following summary source states the case for the 2012-13 Planet X, Nibiru or red or subbrown dwarf as a meme. The 2012-13 Nibiru collision One source states, "The idea of [a Nibiru collision] was first proposed in 1995 by Nancy Lieder, founder of the website ZetaTalk. Lieder describes herself as a contactee with the ability to receive messages from extra-terrestrials from the Zeta Reticuli star system through an implant in her brain.

She states that she was chosen to warn mankind that the object would sweep through the inner Solar System in May 2003 (though that date was later abandoned) causing Earth to undergo a pole shift that would destroy most of humanity.

The predicted collision has subsequently spread beyond Lieder's website and has been embraced by numerous internet doomsday groups, most of which link the event to the 2012 phenomenon.

Although the name "Nibiru" is derived from the works of ancient astronaut writer Zecharia Sitchin and his interpretations of Babylonian and Sumerian mythology, Sitchin himself denies any connection between his work and various claims of a coming apocalypse." Year proposed - 1995 Original proponents - Nancy Lieder Subsequent proponents - Marshall Masters, Jaysen Rand, Mark Hazlewood, Pana Wave The source continues, "The idea of the Nibiru encounter originated with Nancy Lieder, a Wisconsin woman who claims that as a girl she was contacted by gray extraterrestrials called Zetas, who implanted a communications device in her brain.

In 1995, she founded the website ZetaTalk to disseminate her ideas. Lieder first came to public attention on internet newsgroups during the build-up to Comet Hale-Bopp's 1997 perihelion.

She stated, speaking as the Zetas, that, "The Hale-Bopp comet does not exist. It is a fraud, perpetrated by those who would have the teeming masses quiescent until it is too late. Hale-Bopp is nothing more than a distant star, and will draw no closer." She claimed that the Hale-Bopp story was manufactured to distract people from the imminent arrival of a large planetary object, "Planet X", which would soon pass by Earth and destroy civilization.

After Hale-Bopp's perihelion revealed it as one of the brightest and longest-observed comets of the last century, Lieder removed the first two sentences of her initial statement from her site, though they can still be found in Google's archives.

Her claims eventually made the New York Times. "Lieder described Planet X as roughly four times the size of the Earth, and said that its perigee would occur on May 27, 2003, resulting in the Earth's rotation ceasing for exactly 5.9 terrestrial days.

This would be followed by the Earth's pole destabilizing in a pole shift (a physical pole shift, with the Earth's pole physically moving, rather than a geomagnetic reversal) caused by magnetic attraction between the Earth's core and the magnetism of the passing planet.

This in turn would disrupt the Earth's magnetic core and lead to subsequent displacement of the Earth's crust. "Roughly a week before the supposed arrival of Planet X, Lieder appeared on KROQ radio in Los Angeles, and advised listeners to put their pets down in anticipation of the event. When asked if she had done so, she replied that she had, and that "The puppies are in a happy place." She also advised that "A dog makes a good meal".

After the 2003 date passed without incident, Lieder said that it was merely a "White Lie... to fool the establishment, and said that to disclose the true date would give those in power enough time to declare martial law and trap people in cities during the shift, leading to their deaths. "Many internet sites continue to proclaim that Lieder's object is en route to Earth, often citing its arrival date as December, 2012. This date has gathered many apocalyptic associations, as it is the end of the current cycle (baktun) in the long count in the Mayan calendar.

Several writers have published books connecting the collision with 2012, including Marshall Masters and Jaysen Rand.

Hazlewood has since changed his views on Planet X, and now says that there are intelligent alien forces acting to protect us as a species, and that we are set to ascend to a higher level of consciousness in 2012."

Zecharia Sitchin, Sumer and the 2012-13 Nibiru The source states, "Although Lieder originally referred to the object as "Planet X", it has become deeply associated with Nibiru, a planet from the works of ancient astronaut proponent Zecharia Sitchin, particularly his book The 12th Planet. According to Sitchin's interpretation of Babylonian religious texts, which contravenes every conclusion reached by credited scholars on the subject, a giant planet (Nibiru or Marduk) passes by Earth every 3,600 years and allows its sentient inhabitants to interact with humanity.

These beings, which Sitchin identifies with the Anunnaki of Sumerian myth, would become humanity's first gods. Lieder first made the connection between Nibiru and her Planet X on her site in 1996 ("Planet X does exist, and it is the 12th Planet, one and the same."). "Sitchin however denies any connection between his work and Lieder's claims. In 2007, partly in response to Lieder's proclamations, Sitchin published a book, The End of Days, which set the time for the last passing of Nibiru by Earth at 556 BC, which would mean, given the object's supposed 3,600-year orbit, it would return sometime around AD 2900.

He did however say that he believed that the Anunnaki might return earlier by spaceship, and that the timing of their return would coincide with the shift from the astrological Age of Pisces to the Age of Aquarius, sometime between 2090 and 2370."

Science and the 2012-13 Nibiru The source continues, "Astronomers point out that such an object so close to Earth would be easily visible to the naked eye (Jupiter and Saturn are both visible to the naked eye, and are dimmer than Nibiru would be at their distances), and would be creating noticeable effects in the orbits of the outer planets.

Some counter this by claiming that the object has been hiding behind the Sun for several years, though such a claim is geometrically impossible. Images of Nibiru near the Sun taken by amateurs are usually of lens flares, false images of the Sun created by reflections within the lens.

"Mike Brown notes that if this object's orbit were as described, it would only have lasted in the Solar System for a million years or so before Jupiter expelled it, and that there is no way another object's magnetic field could have such an effect on Earth. Lieder's assertions that the approach of Nibiru would cause the Earth's rotation to stop or its axis to shift violate the laws of physics.

In his rebuttal of Immanuel Velikovsky's Worlds in Collision, which made the same claim that the Earth's rotation could be stopped and then restarted, Carl Sagan noted that, "the energy required to brake the Earth is not enough to melt it, although it would result in a noticeable increase in temperature: the oceans would [be] raised to the boiling point of water...

[Also,] how does the Earth get started up again, rotating at approximately the same rate of spin? The Earth cannot do it by itself, because of the law of the conservation of angular momentum." "Many believers in the imminent approach of Planet X/Nibiru accuse NASA of deliberately covering up visual evidence of its existence.

One such accusation involves the IRAS infrared space observatory, launched in 1983. The satellite briefly made headlines due to an "unknown object" that was at first described as "possibly as large as the giant planet Jupiter and possibly so close to Earth that it would be part of this Solar System".

This newspaper article has been cited by proponents of the collision idea, beginning with Lieder herself, as evidence for the existence of Nibiru. However, further analysis revealed that of several unidentified objects, nine were distant galaxies and the tenth was "intergalactic cirrus"; none were found to be Solar System bodies. "Another accusation frequently made by websites predicting the collision is that the US government built the South Pole Telescope to track Nibiru's trajectory, and that the object has been imaged optically. However, the SPT (which is not funded by NASA) is a radio telescope, and cannot take optical images. Its South Pole location was chosen due to the low-humidity environment, and there is no way an approaching object could be seen only from the South Pole.

The "picture" of Nibiru posted on You Tube was revealed to in fact be a Hubble image of the expanding gas shell around the star V838 Mon." Public reaction, fear, and the 2012-13 Nibiru The source states, "The impact of the public fear of the Nibiru collision has been especially felt by professional astronomers. Mike Brown now says that Nibiru is the most common pseudoscientific topic he is asked about. "David Morrison, a CSI Fellow and Senior Scientist at NASA's Astrobiology Institute at Ames Research Center, says he receives 20-25 emails a week about the impending arrival of Nibiru; some frightened, others angry and naming him as part of the conspiracy to keep the truth of the impending apocalypse from the public.

Half of these emails are from outside the US. "Planetary scientists are being driven to distraction by Nibiru," notes science writer Govert Schilling, "and it is not surprising; you devote so much time, energy and creativity to fascinating scientific research, and find yourself on the tracks of the most amazing and interesting things, and all the public at large is concerned about is some crackpot theory about clay tablets, god-astronauts and a planet that doesn't exist." Morrison states that he hopes that the non-arrival of Nibiru could serve as a teaching moment for the public, instructing them on 'rational thought and baloney detection', but doubts that will happen. "A viral marketing campaign for Sony Pictures' 2009 film 2012, directed by Roland Emmerich, which depicts the end of the world in that year, featured a supposed warning from the "Institute for Human Continuity" that lists the arrival of Planet X as one of its doomsday scenarios.

Mike Brown attributes a spike in concerned emails and phone calls he received from the public to this site."

2012-13 "catastrophic timeline," U.S. secret Mars bases, and Alternative 4 The 2102-13 "catastrophic timeline" is the apparent driver behind the establishment of U.S. secret bases on Mars, which this reporter has exposed in multiple 'Examiner' articles.

Some researchers maintain that the 2012-13 "catastrophic timeline" was behind the founding of Skull & Bones, the secret society whose membership reaches into the power structure of the financial and political elite that is destined for the underground shelters in Norway and on Mars.

Skull & Bones, aka Brotherhood of Death, alias The 2nd chapter of the Illuminati, incorporated for business purposes as Russell Trust, was established in 1776 at Yale University in New Haven, Connecticut. Some believe the "catastrophic timeline" will come in 2442. The Skull & Bones moniker number "322" is said to stand for March 22, or Aries, signifying Mars. Skull & Bones, as a 1776 chapter of the Illuminati was chartered for the purpose of implementing elite human survival colonies on Mars, and elite human survival colonies underground on Earth during a predicted 2012-13 "cataclysmic timeline." Independent Mars colony recruits Andrew D. Basiago and Laura Magdalene Eisenhower confirmed the existence of a secret human survival colony on Mars to this reporter.

Former U.S. serviceman Michael Relfe, who spent 20 years on a secret U.S. military base on Mars, and former DOD scientist and Project Camelot witness Arthur Neumann have likewise independently confirmed the existence of the secret Mars base. Mr. Basiago, 48, was a child participant in the DARPA time travel program Project Pegasus (1968-72) and later teleported to a U.S. base on Mars twice in 1981.

Ms. Eisenhower, 36, the great-granddaughter of U.S. President Dwight D. Eisenhower, was the subject of a sophisticated attempt to recruit her into the secret Mars colony in 2006 that she broke free from after resisting its deeply rooted manipulations and chose to live out her destiny on Earth They described how the secret Mars colony is funded by black budget military and intelligence sources as a survival mechanism for the human genome in the event that solar flares, nuclear war, or some other cataclysm ends human life on Earth. Mr. Basiago termed the cover-up of the Mars colony Marsgate and called for a Congressional investigation of the U.S. presence on Mars, with its emphasis on military occupation rather than diplomatic engagement of the indigenous human society living in underground cities beneath the surface of Mars. Ms. Eisenhower stated that Alternative 3 - the notion that trillions of dollars of resources should be spent to protect human life by placing it on Mars - should give way to Alternative 4, a new public awakening to achieve a sustainable civilization on Earth.

Their historic, interactive expos of Marsgate on Exopolitics Radio was based on direct personal experience.

For Mr. Basiago, this consisted of the two trips that he took to Mars in 1981, when, at age 19, he walked on the surface of the Martian terrain after teleporting there from a CIA facility in El Segundo, California. For Ms. Eisenhower, this consisted of clandestine efforts that were made in 2006, when she was 33, to infiltrate her personal life and recruit her as a member of the secret Mars colony.

She was recruited for a mission that would travel to Mars and learned that a colony had been under development there for several decades. It wasn't until later that she found the connection between the mission and the colony, in very significant ways. During the interview, the two emerging figures in the Disclosure Movement discussed their opposition to factors guiding the secret Mars colony. These include fear, secrecy, psychological manipulation of recruits, and the abuse of quantum access technologies and other covert methods to identify potential colonists.

Mr. Basiago speculated that the Mars colony is being staffed by individuals who descend from specific Aryan bloodlines that contain a Martian genetic substrate and that do not represent the genetic diversity of the entire human race on Earth. Ms. Eisenhower, agreeing, also was exposed to and understood the archetypal aspects and significance of it. They suggested that this policy be reconsidered.

In various venues, Mr. Basiago, Ms. Eisenhower, and this reporter have advocated a treaty between Earth and Mars society that would establish a Mars protectorate and normalize diplomatic recognition and immigration between the two planets. Mr. Basiago and Ms. Eisenhower issued a joint statement about human survival colonies on other planets. "It is a positive thing for the human race to put survival colonies on other planets. Earth has been struck by many cataclysms in the past, and so we should protect the human genome by placing human settlements on other celestial bodies.

Yet, when secrecy surrounding such projects tempts government to rob the free will of individuals, and excludes humanity from debating a subject that implicates the whole human future, and diverts the destiny of a planet to serve an off-planet agenda, the conscience of a free

people requires that such projects be undertaken in the bright sunshine of public scrutiny, not within the dark corridors of the military-industrial complex." The U.S. secret bases on Mars are part of plans implemented over the course of several centuries by elite Illuminati organizations in the mistaken belief that the 2012-13 "catastrophic timeline."

Yet, science now establishes that a parallel 2012-13 "positive timeline" is materializing as the deterministic future.

The "2012-13 catastrophic timeline" ...and Dr. Wernher von Brauns warning about a psyops War against the Asteroids In a 2004 interview with researcher Linda Moulton Howe, Dr. Carol Rosin, President of the Institute for Cooperation in Space (ICIS), relates her conversations with Dr. Wernher von Braun (whom she characterizes as a whistleblower) on Dr. von Brauns deathbed. Ms. Howe: WHAT WAS DR. VON BRAUN'S DEFINITION OF WHAT WE REALLY ARE IN THE UNIVERSES? Dr. Rosin: Well, this is what he did not describe. I believe what was happening is that he was under threat. American "Enemy's List" to Sustain War Mode and Pentagon Budgets: * Soviet Union * Terrorists * Asteroids * Extraterrestrials Notice that asteroids or incoming threats from astronomical phenomena including meteors associated a presumed Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf is included among Americas enemies.

This means that the manufactured threat of astronomical bodies, such as meteors associated a presumed Planet X, Nibiru or red or sub-brown dwarf has, according to whistleblower Dr. Wernher von Braun, been considered by high war-planners as among the enemies to be used in the Hegelian dialectic of enemies that makes up the for-profit industry that we commonly know as warfare. Thus, it is possible to interpret the Norway underground bases, the DUMB military bases in the southeastern U.S., and all of the anomalies, such as a martial law matrix as part of a gigantic Psyops called "the war against the phony meteors."

The goal of such a Psyops would be to submit the human population to fear, enslavement, and loss of civil liberties during a national and international emergency created around Psyops meteors headed toward Earth. Advanced electromagnetic technology, such as HAARP, can create a Project Blue Beam-like meteor emergency, if needed. This reporter has analyzed a possible false flag application of this technology over Norway (of all places) the night prior to Barack Obamas December 9, 2009 Nobel peace prize speech.

Deconstructing the 2012-13 1859 Carrington event-like solar flare and pole shift memes In prior 'Examiner' articles, this reporter has deconstructed the science behind predictions of the repetition of destructive 1859 Carrington event-like solar flares and Earth pole shifts as memes and scientifically improbable. Readers can access one of these article by clicking here. In brief, key data addressing our prior 'Examiner' examination of the possible future shape of 2012 includes: 1. A NAS report and recent NASA updates on the 2012 perfect storm, solar flares and power grid systems collapse 2. Opposite data that we may be headed toward a solar Maunder minimum and new ice age 3.

ALTA and Web Bot reports on a data gap found between early 2012 running through May 2013, possibly due to solar flare activity The year 2012 may also manifest for individuals as breakdown, breakthrough, or business as usual, depending on an individuals perceptual modality and multi-dimensional identity.

Sources of 2012-13 'solar flare Carrington event' meme Below is a summary of the conclusions of our 'Examiner' analysis of a 2012-13 solar flare Carrington event meme.

The repetition of the 1859 Carrington event solar flare is the basis of a January 2009 National Academy of Sciences report that predicted that 2012-13 solar flares and a possible systems collapse of the electrical grid.

1. 2012-13 & Catastrophobia There appears to be a collective fear of earth changes and cataclysm in human society based on the historical prior cataclysm of 11,500 years ago triggered by a galactic superwave that triggered the Vela supernova, a fragment of which entered the solar system around 9500 BC. For a variety of reasons, the year 2012 has been front-loaded with memes that trigger humanitys catastrophobia.

2. 2012 Solar flare Carrington event There are at least two possible 2012 futures, based on the current Web Bot: 1. 2012 solar flare meme - One possibility is that the Web Bot technology may be detecting the presence on the Internet of an escalating meme regarding a repetition of a Carrington-type event during the 2012-13 solar maximum, rather than an actual future event. This is the more probable 2012 reality. 2.

2012 Carrington-type event solar flare (unlikely possibility) - Another possibility is that the Web Bot technology has done what mainstream science now says cannot be assigned with any reasonable accuracy, and Web Bot is accurately predicting a repetition of a Carrington-type solar flare or related event for 2012-13. This appears to be a very unlikely possibility.

3. 2012 Super-cataclysm memes 2012 Pole shift, super solar flare, galactic super wave-caused super nova fragments appear to be memes propagated by catastrophobia, and are extremely unlikely to materialize in 2012.

4. 2012 cataclysm memes and social manipulation 2012 cataclysm memes appear to be used by a variety of institutions, ranging from covert military-intelligence, governmental and other agencies to organized religion for purposes of social control. See, for example, Basiago and Eisenhower reveal Marsgate and make case for Alternative 4

2012-13 and the positive timeline 'Examiner' readers can view the Mt Adams Statement on 2012 & A Golden Age.

Scientists and researchers in disciplines ranging from time science to meta-science can now provide a framework and infrastructure for understanding how it is that alternate futures in the multi-verse might be from an alternative time line that does not materialize on our time line as an absolute, deterministic future.

As a Tesla technology quantum access time travel participant, Andrew D. Basiago was able to experience the 2013 U.S. Supreme Court building as being under 100 feet of stagnant water in an early 1970s DARPA chronovisor probe. The alternative time line under which that 2013 catastrophic Washington, DC event can be identified as a 2013 catastrophic time line as we have been discussing in these articles. Yet that alternative time line can be one that - although it was accessed by DARPA using state of the art quantum access chronovisor technology in the early 1970s - may not materialize in the our real time line of 2013 as an absolute, deterministic future. The absolute, deterministic future of 2013 that materializes is a positive future timeline, rather than a catastrophic timeline. Whether the 2012-13 future that materializes on Earth will materialize as a catastrophic timeline for some and a positive future timeline for others is a very interesting question. This 'Examiner' reporter has interviewed multi-dimensional contactees such as Anthony Kane, a relative of Nobel Prize winner Dr. Martin Luther King, whose inter-dimensional contacts have suggested that in 2012-13, timelines may materialize as a catastrophic Earth timeline for some and a positive future Earth timeline for others.

Please read: 2012 - Dr. Martin Luther King relative, contactee, brings UFO/ET message of dimensional shift in 2012. On the other hand, the positive future timeline may be accessible to all in 2012-13. This is the implication of the Dr. Carl Johan Callemans discoveries concerning the purposeful singularities at the core of our Universe and at the core (galactic center black hole) of our galaxy and at the core (our sun) of our solar system. According to Dr. Calleman, alternating waves of universe core energy in turn are mediated through our galactic center and are what drive the evolution of human consciousness. Since the Big Bang 16 billion years ago, these waves of energy have been disseminated in alternating format of boom and bust creating the circumstance of conflict and uncertainty in our reality." Dr. Calleman has found that, the alternating sign-wave universe core energy phenomenon ceases after Oct. 28, 2011, and [in 2012-13] Earth will be set on a gradual setting of a potential to reach advanced utopian planet status - a virtual Garden of Eden. He adds, We will in this coming night be witnessing the most significant transformation of consciousness ever in the history of mankind. What is exciting about this is that I feel that a

relatively clear picture of how a new world is going to be born is now finally becoming evident. On the other hand, what is also becoming increasingly clear is that this birth is likely to become very demanding. This seems to auger well for human self-determination, the dissolution of hierarchies and extraterrestrial disclosure in the 2012-13 period.

If the universe core energy model put forth by Dr. Carl Johan Calleman and researcher Barbara Hand Clow is correct, human consciousness will no longer be subject to the conflicts caused by alternating expansion and contraction energy cycles, and the power of hierarchies that have and subjected humanity to repressive and militaristic regimes enforced the extraterrestrial embargo will be increasingly weakening. The very core of our Universe seems - in 2012-13 - to deconstruct the mentality that has enforced the 2012-13 catastrophic time line throughout the U.S. and other governments, and financial and political elites.

2012-13 Galactic genetic engineering 2012-13 solar flares, gamma ray bursts, galactic center emissions may function, according to some researchers as a form of galactic genetic engineering, upgrading our human DNA in the 2012-13 time horizon as part of the initiation of a Golden Age on Earth. The Galactic DNA upgrade model suggests, as researcher David Wilcock states, that humanity is on the verge of a near-spontaneous metamorphosis into a more highly evolved state of consciousness. Biochemist Colm Kelleher observes that, "If one were to hypothesize a transmutation of the human body, it would be necessary to orchestrate a change, cell by cell, involving the simultaneous silencing of hundreds of genes and the activation of a different set of hundreds more. A Transposition burst is a plausible mechanism at the DNA/RNA level that could accomplish such a genome-wide change... that eventually results in the transformation of the human body." The transfigured body Colm Kelleher describes has been called the lightbody, similar to the description of upper-dimensional, human-like extraterrestrials. One source states,

"Many ancient traditions worldwide maintain that humans not only inherently possess the potential for fully incarnating light at the physiological level, but that some have already achieved it, and millions more will do so in the very era in which we live.

The historical literature, suggests that there are unusual physical, as well as psychological, consequences in humans to the attainment of the exalted state of mind known as enlightenment, writes biochemist Colm Kelleher.

These reported changes include, but are not limited to, sudden reversal of aging, emergence of a light body and observed bodily ascension. While many of these descriptions associate the lightbody with death, Kelleher makes it clear that a number of reports indicate that transformation of the body can happen independently of death. Multi-dimensional researcher Judith K. Moore, MA writes, Scientists do not realize the codes they have discovered in DNA are not mindless. Rather, they are capable of consciousness and respond primarily to the Divine Plan of what can be called the Mind of God. The so-called junk DNA is, in fact, inactive DNA time-coded to be activated when exposed to increased vibrations of enhanced Light fields.

The DNA codes are sensitive to ultraviolet frequencies.

As the solar resonance s magnified by increasingly powerful solar flares, the ultraviolet light spectrum on the planet is being altered. The increased megahertz of the planetary field activates a metamorphosis of the genetic structure, which will result in the rapid evolution of the species.

The new spectrum carries light frequencies that stimulate dormant codes within the DNA of all life forms, preparing the planet for a quantum leap in evolution.

How can you know if you are on a 2012-13 catastrophic timeline,

...or on a 2012-13 positive future timeline? Here one way to know if you are on a 2012-13 catastrophic timeline, or on a 2012-13 positive future timeline. Find a quiet comfortable place to draw your focus within in solitude. Relax, breathe slowly and let go of the cares of the day. Close your eyes and imagine your perfect place of peace It can be a meadow, a beach, at the foot of a mountain, on a distant planet, anywhere your inner self feels at peace. Visualize yourself in your full potential and invite your full potential self into your place of peace. Ask your full potential self: "Am I on a 2012-13 catastrophic timeline, or on a 2012-13 positive future timeline?" Listen to your hyperdimensional full potential self as she/he answers you. Be genuine and in integrity in this process. Return to 2012 Return to Ascension

12.

by John Lash January 2007 Andaluca from MetaHistory Website

With the turn of the new year, I found myself reflecting on the proximity of 2012, the end date of the Maya calendar.

Discussion of this timing has been escalating rapidly for a number of years now, and not just in New Age circles. A great many internet sites and forums are dedicated to it. It is the main subject of Daniel Pinchbeck's book, 2012 The Return of Quetzalcoatl (which I have yet to read), and a dozen other speculative tomes.

Currently, John Major Jenkins and Carl Johan Calleman are slugging it out to see who will be the victorious visionary of the 2012 countdown. This may be the apt moment for me to weigh in on this arcane subject. Apart from a tentative essay for phenomenamagazine.com, I've kept mum so far. More and more of late, friends are asking me what I think about the "end-time" and how I view what others like Jenkins and Calleman are saying about it. Those who know something of my work in astral phylogenetics (Quest for the Zodiac), stellar mythology, the World Ages, and precessional timing (Dendera Decoded), are curious about my views.

Having spent a good many years in the practice of sky-watching and investigation into the Zodiacal timeframe and various schemes of long-term chronology - Hindu, Egyptian, Tibetan, Maya, Aztec, Persian, Mithraic, Gurdjieffian, theosophical, anthroposophical, and others I forget - I feel obliged to comment on this trendy topic. What follows is a short description of the Maya Long Count, with some thoughts about what might be facing us in the countdown to the end-time. Maya fresco thought to depict the Flood, with volcano erupting in the background.

Thirteen Baktuns The Maya calendar is a cultural artifact from the general category of the World Ages. Computing the long-term cycles of cosmic order was a concern in all ancient cultures from China to Peru.

The introduction of calendars to regulate civic life and agricultural planning was a long and complex process. In devising these systems, the calendar-makers did not limit themselves to time in the human scale, but extended their computations to countless thousands of years. Doing so, they sometimes came up with remarkable figures. In Hindu chronology, the number 4,320,000,000 is associated with the cosmological motif of the "Days and Nights of Brahma."

This number caught the attention of Joseph Campbell, who observed that 4,320,000,000 years, or 4.32 billion years, is intriguingly close to the current estimate for the geological age of the earth, 4.5 billion years. (I apply the Hindu norm rather than the accepted geological estimate in my calculation of the age of Gaia.)

4320 is the base number that generates the four Yugas of Hindu cosmology. It also shows up in the chronology of prediluvian kings compiled by the Babylonian priest, Berossus, and elsewhere. It is an artificial norm (a sacred canonical unit, if you prefer) that also factors into various geological, sidereal, solar, lunar, and planetary time cycles. Like the Hindu timescale, Maya calendrics runs into the range of remote, unimaginable numbers. The mathematician-priests who devised the Maya calendar recorded exact dates of events, down to the day, but they also liked to extrapolate far backward and forward in time. The precision of their planetary, solar, and lunar tables is impressive.

They calculated the cycles of Venus and the Earth as accurately as we do today, down to four decimal points. This mastery of verifiable time-cycles commands respect, and obliges us to look closely at their long-term extrapolations.

For the Maya and all other ancient peoples, verifiable and non-verifiable calculations were integral to a single system of sacred calendrics. I see nothing woolly-minded in granting some respect to their long-term timeframe, especially if something can be learned from doing so. According to most experts, the Long Count dates from early in the Classical Maya era, 200 900 CE, although it may be much older in conception, possibly originating among the Olmecs in the 7th C. BCE.

The engravings that record the earliest dates are:

* Chiapas de Corzo, Stela 2, 32 BCE * Tikal Stela 2, 292 CE The last date recorded was January 909 CE.

The calendar uses a string of five units factored on a 20-base: * k'n (1 day) * winal (20 days) * tun (360 days of 18 winals) * katun (7200 days or 20 tuns) * baktun (144,000 days or 20 katuns) The stele or engraved stones with calendric glyphs record dates by hieroglyphs and dot and bar notations, showing the units by position.

Scholars notate the dates in five placements, from baktun to k'in, like this: 9.16.0.2.0, equivalent to June 18, 751 AD. December 21, 2012 is written 13.0.0.0.0. There are three standards of correlation and, you bet, a lot of quibbles and fine tuning in Maya chronology. (Stela drawing from Beyond 2012, used by permission. See box below.)

Beyond 2012 by Geoff Stray (www.vitalsignspublishing.co.uk) is the source book on the 2012 debate. The author pulls together a staggering array of theory and information and on the endtime, including my discovery of the fifth axis in the Dendera Zodiac. Stray's book is especially strong on technical information and telluric sciences - for instance, the correlation of fluctuations in the earth's magnetic field to precession (Ch.9).

Geoff Stray is the creator and manager of the Dia-gnosis2012, the premiere database on 2012. The Long Count is backdated to August 13, 3114, and comes ahead to December 21, 2012.

This is a total of 5126 years or 1,867,145 days. This interval is close to 13 baktuns of 144,000 days each, so the Maya Long Count is routinely called "thirteen baktuns." Not a terribly long period of time as sacred calculations go, but long enough to frame a vast historical perspective. The Long Count of 5126 years is roughly one-fifth of the full cycle of precession of the equinoxes, 25,920 years. This fits the Long Count into a verifiable frame of astronomical timing, which is impressive.

Because the Count is an increment of the full precessional cycle, it can be analyzed in parallel with the Zodiacal frame of precession.

The current debate centers on what is going to happen when the Count expires in December 2012, just five years and eleven months from now. I will be more precise: there was a new moon on the eve of the winter solstice, 21 December, 2006. This is exactly six years to the end of the Long Count. In six years there are 74 new moons (occurring on the synodic cycle of 29.53 days).

We can count down to the end-time by lunar intervals. As I write these words, we are in the 74th moon.

Making It Up Before looking ahead at what the Maya end-time might signify, let's look back at the initial date.

So far, this has received considerably less attention than the end date. But I would argue that outcome of the Count will be reflected, in some manner and some measure, in the initial

conditions. If we are expecting something to end in 2012 CE, it might be helpful to know what began, what conditions prevailed, at the start date in 3114 BCE. When scholars first worked out the correlation of the Long Count to the Julian calendar that we use - the Goodman-Martinez-Thompson correlation, lately improved by John Major Jenkins some esotericists loitering on the sidelines noted that the 3114 BCE start date is close to the Hindu date of 3102 BCE, said to mark the beginning of a cosmic cycle, Kali Yuga.

Hindu legend states that Kali Yuga, the age of darkness or decadence in which we now live, began with the death of Krishna on February 16, 3102 BCE. This is perhaps the most famous date in sacred calendrics. Hindu calculations make the length of Kali Yuga hugely longer than the Maya Long Count, but the coincidence of start dates is striking. This is the Hindu-Maya correlation. In Dendera Decoded (unpublished), my study of the sacred calendrics of the Dendera Zodiac, I show that Axis D on the bas-relief at Dendera marks the date 3102 BCE, indicated by alignment of the equinoxes to the star Antares in the Scorpion. (Right now, the planet Jupiter is aligned to that star, the red giant in the heart of the Scorpion, making a lovely predawn spectacle here in Andaluca.)

In Egyptian myth, the date 3102 BCE designates the murder of Osiris, parallel to the death of Krishna. This gives the Hindu-Maya-Egyptian correlation. (For a short summary of my Dendera work, including the discovery of a fifth, hitherto unknown axis, see Colin Wilson, The Atlantis Blueprint. Also, http://www.diagnosis2012.co.uk/5.htm, and scroll down to item 38.) What to make of the correlation between Kali Yuga and the Maya Long Count?

Buddhist and Hindu sources present a lot of material on Kali Yuga. In the Tantra of the Great Liberation, Shiva discourses to his consort Parvati on the deplorable conditions into which humanity will sink at the end of Kali Yuga.

Many of the things he describes are now commonplace in our world.

The prophecies of Padma Sambhava (Guru Rinpoche) from Tibetan tradition also present similar predictions, ranging from trivial social customs (people will eat standing up, and even

running) to technological inventions (the metal bird will cross the skies) to spiritual decadence (guides to enlightenment will be sold on street corners).

Guru Rinpoche:

"As the kaliyuga progresses towards the final conflagration, life expectancy of man decreases and the weight of darkness becomes more intense, but there remain restraints on the downward path when the Voice of Buddha is heard and the Path of Dharma followed. Towards the end of the era, when man's lifespan has been reduced from sixty to fifty years and there has been no respite in man's increasing egoism, these conditions will prevail, portending ruin to the Great Stupa: householders fill the monasteries and there is fighting before the altar; the temples are used as slaughterhouses; the ascetics of the caves return to the cultivated valleys and the yogins become traders; thieves own the wealth and cattle; monks become householders, while priests and spiritual leaders turn to robbery, brigandage and thievery. Disorder becomes chaos, which generates panic raging like wildfire. Corrupt and selfish men become leaders, while abbots turned army officers lead their monks as soldiers; and nuns put their own bastards to death. Sons see their estates and inheritances stolen from them. Mean and vulgar demagogues become local bosses. Young girls instruct the young in schools. The belch of the Bon Magician resounds in the yogin's hermitage and the wealth of the sanctuaries is looted; the scriptures of the Tathagatas, the images of the Buddhas, the sacred icons, the scroll paintings and the stupas will be desecrated, stolen and bartered at the market price, their true worth forgotten; the temples become dung-smeared cow sheds and stables. "When religious duties are forgotten, spirits of darkness previously controlled by ritual power are unloosed, and frenziedly govern the mind of whatever being they possess. Spirits of vindictive power possess monks; spirits of egoistic wickedness possess the mantradhara or magician; spirits of disease possess the Bon Priest; enchanting spirits causing disease possess men; grasping, quarreling spirits possess women; spirits of wantonness possess maidens; spirits of depravity possess nuns; spirits of rebellion and malice possess children; every man, woman and child in the country becomes possessed by uncontrollable forces of darkness. The signs of these times are new and fantastical modes of dressing - traditional styles forgotten; the monks wear fancy robes and the nuns dress up before a mirror. Every man must carry a sword to protect himself and each man guard his food from poison. Abbots and Masters poison their pupils' minds and hearts; the executive and legislature disagree; men become lewd and licentious; women become unchaste; monks ignore their discipline and moral code; and the mantradharas break their covenant. As the frenzy of malicious, selfish, vindictive and ruthless spirits grows, paranoid rumor increases and ornament and clothing fashions change more frequently. "Drunkards preach the Path to Liberation; the advice of sycophants is followed; fraudulent teachers give false initiations; guileful impostors claim psychic powers; loquacity and eloquence pass as wisdom. The arrogant elevate profanity; the proletariat rules the kingdom; kings become paupers; the butcher and murderer become leaders of men; unscrupulous self-

seekers rise to high position. The Masters of the High Tantras stray like dogs in the streets and their faithless, errant students roam like lions in the jungle. Embodiments of malice and selfishness become revered teachers, while the achievements of tantric adepts are reviled, the guidance of the Secret Guru execrated, the precepts of the Buddha ignored and the advice of yogins and sages unsought. Robes become worn by fools and villains while monks wear foreign dress - even murderers wear the sacred robe. Men resort to maledictory enchantment learning mantra for selfish ends; monks prepare poisonous potions for blackmail, extortion and profit. False doctrines are devised from the Buddhas' Word and the teachers' interpretations become self-vindications. Many treacherous paths, previously uncharted, are followed; many iniquitous practices spread; behavior becomes tolerated which was previously anathema; ideals are established contrary to tradition; and all good customs and habits are rejected and many despicable innovations corrupt. The wealth of the monasteries is plundered and spent upon gluttony by those under vow; following errant paths men become trapped by their own mean actions; the avaricious and spurious protectors of the pure teaching no longer fulfill their functions. "The celestial order, disrupted, loosens plague, famine and war to terrorize terrestrial life. The planets run wild, and the stars fall out of their constellations; great burning stars appear bringing unprecedented disaster. Rain no longer falls in season, but out of season the valleys are flooded. Famine, frost and hail govern many unproductive years. Rapacious female demons (Mamo) and the twelve guardian protectresses of the Dharma (Tenma), unpropitiated and enraged, release diseases, horrible epidemics and plagues, which spread like wildfire, striking men and cattle. Earthquakes bring sudden floods, while fire, storm and tornadoes destroy temples, stupas and cities in an instant. At this time the Great Stupa itself falls in ruins. During this pall of darkness the Wheel of Dharma at Vajrasana (Bodh Gaya) ceases to turn; the storm of war rages in Nepal for many years; India is stricken with famine; the Kathmandu Valley is inflicted with plague; earthquakes decimate the people of Upper Ngari in Western Tibet; plague destroys the people of Central Tibet; the Kyi Valley District of Lhasa subsides; the peaks of the High Himalayas in the borderland of Mon fall into the valleys. Three strong forts are built on the Five Peaked Mountain; yogins assemble in the Valley of the Bear's Lair on Mon; two suns rise in Kham to the east; the Chinese Emperor dies suddenly; four armies descend on Central Tibet from the borders; the Muslim Turks conquer India; the Garlok army suppresses the Dharma in Kashmir; the Mongols conquer Tibet; the Jang army enters Kham; the Protectors' Temple, Rasa Trulnang (The Jokhang) in Lhasa is threatened; the famous temple of Samye is desecrated; the stupas of Bhutan tilt and the Wheel of Dharma malfunctions. "The great monasteries of the country become deserted and the belch of the Bon Priest resounds in quiet hermitages; the wise and simple leaders of the monasteries have been poisoned so that the lineal explanations and practices are fragmented or lost; the holders of the lineal traditions meet sudden death. Impostors and frauds cheat the people and black spectres haunt the land. The knot in the silken thread binding demonic forces in divine bondage is untied and the cord of faith keeping the human mind harmonious is severed. The king's law is broken and the strength of communal unity lost; the people's traditions are rejected and the sea of contentment dries up; personal morality is forgotten and the cloak of modesty thrown away. Virtue is impotent and humiliated and led by coarse, immodest and fearful rulers. Abbots, teachers and professors become army officers, while the ignorant guide religious aspirants, explain the doctrine and give initiation. Aspirants speak with self-defensive abuse, while butchers and wild elephants lead men. The passes, valleys and narrow paths are terrorized by shameless brigands;

fearful, lawless and leaderless, the people fight amongst themselves, each man acting out of self-interest. Tibet becomes corrupt and defiled. These are the conditions prevailing during the middle of the kali-yuga when the duration of man's life is fifty years: these are the portents of the destruction of the Great Stupa. "These signs and sufferings shall awaken the mind of a man sickened by the human condition. Favored in his actions and governed by sympathy and compassion towards suffering beings, he shall dedicate himself to the restoration of the Great Stupa. He shall aspire to the highest human achievement and fulfill his wish to re-establish perfection."

from "http://www.khandro.net/stupa_Boudhnath_KD.htm#kaliyuga" There is no such record of what the Classical Maya thought about the way the world would be at the end of the Long Count, or if they had anything like a prophetic conception of the last days.

Without evidence of what the calendar-makers believed, we are obliged to make up our own minds about the social, spiritual, and psychological aspects of the end-time. I may differ from other scholars in openly admitting that I am making up what I say about signs and prospects of the end-time.

Others more qualified than I tend to claim that they draw their interpretations from ancient evidence, or follow what the ancients believed, even though there is no written account to tell us what the Maya believed. What I make up may or may not be true, or helpful, or even interesting. The fact that I make something up - that is, devise interpretations from my own learning and imagination - may disqualify it as mere invention to some minds. Fine. I prefer to let you know how I operate, keeping my methods and pretences right out in the open.

Take what you like and leave the rest.

Krishna and Osiris

The Hindu-Maya-Egyptian correlation provides some mythological clues for profiling the start date of the Long Count.

The death of Krishna and the murder of Osiris represent mythogenetic moments (Campbell's term) when our species' intrinsic access to the Sacred was ruptured. Consequently, the cultural reflections and creative expressions of that access began to decay dramatically. Here I do not read Krishna and Osiris as patriarchal icons, but prepatriarchal consorts of the Goddess. Krishna may be pictured as the divine teacher or male-guru-avatar of the Bhagavad Gita, but equally, and more anciently, he was the orgiastic love god who romped with the matron Radha and the gopis, cow-herding girls always ready for a roll in the hay.

In this perspective, Krishna is not an empowered patriarch but more like an Asian version of Eros, or a Hindu Dionysos. This view is consistent with the preponderance of Vaishnava scholarship.

(See the excellent anthology, The Divine Consort. Vaishnava is the name for cults dedicated to Krishna worship.) Krishna and Radha, Gita Govinda series, Pahari School, Himadel Pradesh, 18th C Likewise, in the predynastic culture of southern Egypt, Osiris was the consort of Isis who was born at Dendera.

The supreme mother goddess of predynastic Egypt was Hathor, to whom the temple of Dendera was dedicated. Hathor was a female divinity without a male consort, except for her own offspring, Horus, who had no father. Her totemic animal was the vulture, said to be fertilized by the wind.

The Hathor-Horus myth points to the time when men did not rule society and paternity was not the determinative factor in social status or organization. That is, pre-Osirian times. The roof chapels at Dendera present the most complete account in hieroglyphic writing and iconography of the resurrection of Osiris, along with the sole intact model of a working Zodiac that survives from antiquity. Osiris, the grain-god in Hathor's cult, preceded Osiris the divine pharaoh of northern Egypt. In other words, there is a pre-theocratic Osiris in the goddess-

oriented culture that left us the Dendera temple, a Ptolemaic construction incorporating some extremely ancient motifs.

In the Denderic context, Osiris was an epiphany of the regenerative powers of nature, specifically the phylogenetic code.

Osiris represents the "ingrained" language or operating instructions of nature, the linga sharira ("long sheath") in Tantric terms, and Hathor was the ancient matriarchal guardian of his Mysteries. In Dynastic times, the priesthood who ran Egyptian theocracy elevated Osiris to status of a divine avatar, and made him the deific model of the theocratic ruler, the pharaoh.

Such is the hype typical of theocratic scripting around the world. This view of Krishna and Osiris is idiosyncratic perhaps, but based on well-known mythological material and matching the profile of predynastic times. In this framework, I propose that the start time of the Long Count represents a break from goddess-oriented naturewisdom, the co-optation of sacred biology for a theocratic agenda, and a consequent loss of contact with the Sacred immanent in the natural world, leading humankind into a dark age when contact with the Sacred is mediated by beliefs dictated by men who claim to speak for God. Although the full historical picture would place its inception somewhat earlier, around 4400 BCE, the Age of Patriarchy can be synchronized with the Count along these lines. Since the dawn of that Age, communion with the intelligence of nature, embodied awareness of the Sacred, and reverence for the Divine Feminine, not to mention mortal woman herself, have all declined drastically.

With this decline, the human species lost its gender balance, its natural moral disposition to goodness and cooperation, and fell under the spell of patriarchal and theocratic narratives such as the Egyptian and Babylonian fables of divine kingship and, of course, the Old Testament tale of the Chosen People.

Nodal Moments How does this interpretation of the start date of the Long Count play against the historical record?

Well, here's a little trick I sometimes use in tracking historical patterns over the long term: Go to the midpoint of the Count by subtracting one-half of 5126 years from 3114 BCE. This comes to 551 BCE. The 6th Century BCE was the moment when the Yahwist narrative of Genesis came into rigid formulation under the reforms of King Josiah (ruled 640 - 609), lauded as the ideal ruler in that brutal manifesto of theocracy, Deuteronomy.

Between 587 and 537 BCE a large part of the Jewish nation was exiled to the city of Babylon. When they returned to Canaan, the Yahwist scribes who were writing the program of the father god merged their racial myth with Persian split-source dualism, a world view that attributes good and evil to the same super-human agency. Hence, the model of cosmic conflict absorbed into Biblical narrative, which determined all later variations of divine retribution and apocalyptic violence consistent with the crypto-fascist theocratic agenda, came to definition a the midpoint of Kali Yuga. From this nodal moment on, the paternal script has relentlessly driven humankind toward the global wars of religion that threaten the world today. Thus I connect some specific events at the midpoint of the Long Count with my thematic overview of the significance of the Count.

To do so, I use the simple method of computing nodal moments: 3114 BCE > 551 BCE < 2012 CE. This is as simple as it gets, yet it's amazing what kind of information this tool can generate, once you have a framing concept or heuristic phrase to tell you what to look for.

In this case, the heuristic tool is the concept "goddess-based societies overthrown by theocratic agenda" or "nature-wisdom versus revealed religion." The nodal moments reveal pivotal historical events that make sense within the heuristically predefined frame. Want to try another node? Go to the midway moment between 3114 BCE and 551 BCE. This is 1832 BCE, the period assigned to the patriarch Abraham who was born, by some accounts, around 1812 BCE.

The Code of Hammurabi (b. 1810) is the earliest surviving example of a totalitarian, malemandated social agenda.

The transition into patriarchy gained huge momentum during the period when the vernal point shifted from the Bull into the Ram, Taurus to Aries, around 1850 BCE. No causality implied here, folks: it is simply a matter of synchronal dynamics! It appears that moments in historical time have a fractal or self-similar, self-repeating structure. In eonic studies of history - chronological plotting of events in the frame of the Zodiac and long-range planetary cycles - the Ram indicates the rise of patriarchy. In 551 BCE, the vernal point was transiting the head-stars of the Ram. In the time of Alexander the Great, two centuries later, it still in this region, and had been remarked by skywatchers for some time.

Egyptians called the Ram constellation Amon, and Alexander identified himself with Amon that is, he deified himself. The priests at Siwa, who declared him the "Son of Amon" to appease the lonely boy's narcissistic fixation, disingenuously advised him to have himself pictured with ram's horns on coins.

These priests would have been veteran skywatchers who knew that the horn motif matched the current Zodiacal picture. Coming forward in time, midway between 551 BCE (midpoint of the Count) and 2012 CE (end of the Count) is 731 CE. Just at this historical moment the Moors were engaged in massive waves of invasion against Europe and extending into the Russian steppes. The 8th century saw both expansion and defeat of Islamic aggression on several fronts.

Quite often, nodal dates are amazingly precise. Note that scholars designate 731 as the exact year when Classical Maya civilization peaked out, and began to decline rapidly.

Here is an example of how a simple time-factoring tool with no connection to the Maya calendar, and far removed from the complex computations usually applied to it, can generate discrete data-points consistent with the historical profile of the Long Count.

Printing Power In Europe, the Battle of Tours on October 11, 731, marked the defeat of the 90,000-strong Moorish army that had invaded southern France under the command of the Yemenite governor of Spain, Abd-ar-Rahman.

741 saw the death of Byzantine Emperor Leo II who had successfully repelled the Arab invasion, as well as of Charles Martel, the key figure in resisting the Moorish advance into France (Gaul). With the major power-players shifting, Europe became more vulnerable to Islam, the most virulent form of theocratic fascism on earth.

The rise of Islam involved wide scale genocide, often committed by Arabs against other Arabs, as seen today in Iraq. In 750, Abu-Abbas al-Safah, a descendant of Mohammed's uncle, founded the Abbasid dynasty that would establish an Islamic empire to last for 350 years. Doing so, he massacred the Umayyads, the competition surviving from the preceding dynasty. The Moors occupied Spain from the middle of the 8th century until 1492, when they were expelled. The Islamic offensive against Europe was re-inaugurated with the call to return Andaluca to Islam, raised in the wake of the Madrid bombings of March, 2004.

Will the 2012 end-time be marked by an intensified replay of the Islamic offensive of 731 CE?

According to the Eurabia theory of Bat Ye'or, an Egyptian-born British historian who specializes in the experience of non-Muslims in Muslim countries, this is precisely the case. (See Wikipedia for an excellent article on this debate.)

In While Europe Slept (Doubleday, 2006), American ex-pat author Bruce Dawer paints a frightening, tightly documented picture of the Islamic subversion of democracy in Europe, especially in Scandinavia. Currently, Islamic imperialism in Europe is rolling like a shock wave across the continent.

Moslems demonstrating against what they view as intolerance toward Islam are manifesting the very intolerance they condemn, but they are succeeding in their demands for special exemption of their religion from rational criticism. Islam presents the endgame formula of patriarchy and

dominator religion, the stage where it wins or destroys itself trying: the parasite destroys its host.

The initial conditions of the Long Count culminate in the theocratic fascism of Islam with its program for rigid social control, blind submission to revealed authority, menacing intolerance, and sexual apartheid, all founded on a book attributed to the creator god. Looking at historical precedents is one way to sketch out a "predictive" profile of events leading to the end of the Count. In fact, there is no prediction involved: one merely looks at the all-too-obvious consequences of recorded events. This is, please note, not the way that 2012 diagnoses are usually conducted. To summarize: the death of Krishna and Osiris around 3114 BCE indicates a sharp escalation in the agenda of patriarchy.

Male domination gained momentum when sacred kings were no longer anointed in rites of sexual congress with daughters of the Goddess.

(I have repeated this point numerous times on this site, and I don't like to repeat myself, but I insist that this is a key historical insight we cannot afford to ignore. Read Merlin Stone, When God Was A Woman.)

The suppression of goddess-oriented society led to the success of patriarchy, the domination of nature, and sexual apartheid - a pattern that can be traced in close historical detail, if one is so inclined. All this was accomplished by force and intimidation, of course, and by operating "by the Book." The factual record of history - one damned thing after another, as Henry Ford remarked - is largely a side-effect of the writing of the patriarchal narrative. Emphasis on the ideological instrument of "the book" (or Holy Writ) fits the profile I am developing here. Indeed, it supplies a main motif that can be seen reflected in many specific events.

In the 8th century, Islam was spreading globally and Arabs battled with the Tang dynasty for control of central Asia. Moslems remained the dominant force in Transoxiana for 150 years. One consequence of the Arab-Chinese confrontation was the setting up of the first paper mill in the Muslim world.

This happened in 751 (20 years off the nodal date) in Samarkand after two Chinese prisoners of war revealed the technique of papermaking to their captors.

Immediately, Muslim scholars began to use the new technology for translations of ancient Greek and Roman writings, but also to produce copies of their revealed scripture, the Koran, of course. So, around the "readward" nodal moment of 551 BCE, Yahwist scribes buckled down to composing the rigid doctrinal narrative of the Chosen People, the directive script for JudeoChristian salvationism.

Then, around the "forward" nodal moment of 731 CE, Muslim scribes acquired the paper-based technology to spread their version of the story, inscribed in the Koran.

The pattern is clear: doctrinal narrative and printing work together in the enforcement of patriarchal domination and the Paternal Lie. The trick of nodal computation reveals the pattern. The Holy Book (of whatever faith) is the main tool of indoctrination and behavioral control for the theocratic agenda of white male supremacy. The fact that Muslim women embrace and adore the Koran is no measure of their compliance, but an indication that they know their lives are at risk were they to do otherwise. If you are a Muslim, the penalty for dissenting from or renouncing the Faith is, according to the Koran, death.

For women in Islamic societies, there are penalties worse than death. The authority of Holy Writ is beyond human critique - quite plainly, Abrahamic religion is incompatible with a civil and democratic society that allows freedom of expression. Today, Moslems in Europe use the freedom of expression granted to them by the democracies in which they live to call for the repeal of that freedom, and almost no one dares to tell them that this tactic is unacceptable. Figure it. The Book is, and has ever been, the sovereign tool of behavior modification, off-planet imperialism, a potent catalyst to ecocide, genocide, and suicide.

It is the mass-produced weapon of mass destruction par excellence.

Narrative Spell So, my expanded definition of Kali Yuga is: the age of darkness (ignorance) and decadence (moral and material derangement), due to the break from Goddess wisdom, the imposition of off-planet morality dictated by a father god, and the cancerous spread of faith-based religion operating on the theocratic authority of The Book (Torah, Bible, Koran). Over the last 5000 years, the entire human species has fallen under the thrall of The Book. In Not in His Image, I propose the term narrative spell for the uncanny power of the salvationist script that encodes the beliefs of the three Abrahamic religions. The mandate of the male-only creator god has a vast, fixating power based in fear and shaming. Those who adopt the Paternal Lie, or, more often, have it mindlessly imposed on them, live it out as if they are acting under post-hypnotic suggestion. Those who are forced to believe in the story of revealed religion enact it madly and without critical reflection or restraint.

What they have received mindlessly, without consent, they act out mindlessly, disregarding the free choice of others. They behave as they believe. What they are told to believe is inscribed in The Book (Torah, Bible, Koran). The end of the Long Count plunges the entire world into the violent drama of the culmination of such behavior.

Mystic Confidence If the ascent of The Book as a tool of mass-scale ideological programming fits the historical profile of the Long Count, how can we bring to the end-time the inspired will to challenge and repel that power? Let's consider some solutions and inspirational strategies. Speculation about the meaning of the Maya end-time peaked briefly in August 1987 with the "Harmonic Convergence." In the debate at that time, Jose Arguelles played a central role with

his declaration that the end of the Long Count indicated a moment when a beam from the galactic center would sweep across the earth and produce magical effects.

If I recall correctly, the period of the beam matched the precessional cycle of 25,920 years.

Hence, Arguelles simply attached a fantastic interpretation to known phenomenon of astronomical timing. In The Mayan Factor, he claimed that Maya civilization disappeared (nodal moment: 731 CE) by dematerialization when some of the population were teleported off the earth on that mysterious cosmic beam, and predicted that the same would happen for many people in 2012. His theories won him two minutes of fame on CNN. I am not deeply enough involved in the current debate around 2012 to know if Arguelles's ideas are undergoing a revival, but I sense that others, a younger and more creatively inspired crowd, have taken over the discourse, and morphed it considerably.

There may be a reprise of Arguelles' notion of dematerialization in some circles, but I would rather hope not.

Calls for escaping the planet will not be tolerated on this site. I am probably out of touch with the pulsations of the new crowd who are building expectation of 2012, but it looks to me like the best options for the Maya end-time are erupting from the orgiastic imagination of younger people in the counterculture, people who are ignited with all manner of erotic, cosmic, artistic, mantic, mythopoeic, and esoteric inspirations. I have not sensed anything comparable to this excitement since the Psychedelic Revolution of the 1960s.

There is true mania in the air, a hint of divine madness, a sense that fantastic things are possible in life and art, that the world itself might be transfigured by acts of imagination. (This is, of course, exactly what the Romantics believed and proposed, a couple of hundred years ago.) A multi-frequency surge of mystical confidence is spreading through some areas of the youth culture. It would be foolish to dismiss that possibility that the huge buzz around 2012 is the reflection of a collective psychic event of some kind. The question is, do the discussions, speculations, and predictions about 2012 point to that event, or do they merely draw attention to themselves?

So far, the discourse on 2012 has been dominated by claims about the evolution of consciousness making a huge jump, a paradigm shift. We will realize the noosphere of Teilhard de Chardin, for instance. I have a gut feeling that this kind of high-toned chatter might be distracting us from the genuine possibilities of the moment ahead.

This type of speculation could be off the mark if it does not offer a message of change that specifically addresses the terminal social and material conditions of the Kali Yuga. It is one thing to claim a quantum leap into cosmic consciousness, and support it with abstruse computations that go back 16 billion years (Calleman), and another, say, to rally against the social menace of revealed religion.

The first is a mere hypothesis, glorious or not, the second is a revolutionary stance, involving a call for action and transformation. I, for one, begin to wonder if the promise of a sudden, spectacular shift in the collective mindset may not be deviating or undermining the actual breakthrough that is emergent as the world lurches toward 2012. What if this breakthrough is about facing the human condition, rather than skateboarding at warp speed beyond it?

If Sophia relies in some way on humanity to achieve her correction, as the Gnostics taught, the human condition will either contribute to that magnificent possibility, a planetary course correction, or impede it. Any breakthrough around 2012 depends on how we view the human condition, regarding both resistance to entering the correction, and the skill and inspiration required to enter it. I sense that expectations of a paradigm shift in 2012 are contaminated by two distortions, concerning the scope and the manifestation of the shift. So far, I am not convinced that the notions circulating about the Maya End-time offer a reliable preview either of what can happen, or the scale on which it can happen.

My main criticism of the speculation is that, although it may use historical references, as seen in the close correlation of the "thirteen hells" and "nine heavens" to known events, etc., in Calleman's scheme, this approach does not identify the prevalent pathological motif of Kali Yuga: the narrative spell of revealed religion, enshrined in the authority of The Book. But, *

What if the breakthrough of 2012 involves breaking the spell of The Book, i.e., overthrowing the spiritual and moral tyranny of the Abrahamic faiths? * What would it mean to disempower the narrative spell? * What conditions would arise? * What kind of behavior would result? * How would the human condition itself be changed, radically and permanently altered? * The mystic confidence in the air is savory and palpable - but where is the new-born confidence located? * In what do we, the human species, invest our deepest confidence?

Mental Scheming As for the scope of the coming shift, there is talk of a sudden awakening in the mentality of our species, sweeping through a vast segment of the global population.

As if millions of people around the world will wake up one day and see life in a totally different way than the day before. Such predictions of quantity are not helpful, I believe. They set up false expectations. Such a mass-scale shift could occur if it were to be triggered by an external event, such as the meltdown of the Greenland ice shelf.

Given a nuclear strike, a biological terrorist attack, or a geological upheaval that devastates a major urban area, the attention of the entire world would be affected, and people would collectively and simultaneously have to adjust their way of life to the new situation. Lacking such events, it is hard to believe that masses of people will suddenly change their minds about how we live on this planet.

You don't have to be a shamanic wizard to predict that catastrophic events and more terrorist mayhem will occur in the next six years (as of 2007). It is widely claimed that Israel will launch a preemptive strike against Iran, sooner or later.

This event could escalate into nuclear war in the Middle East, into WW III - something that may be bound to happen, if the current concatenation of historical events is not averted. In due time, there is likely to be another terrorist event in the USA, a biological attack on a major urban center, perhaps. All the experts say that it is not a matter of if, but when, and a large segment of the public are apprehensive, tensed for what is to come. Such tension can be expected to reach excruciating heights in the next six years. What has all this frightful business to do with the Maya Long Count?

These awful events would be happening whether or not the Count was down to its final years. They are not the result of calendric determinism, but the cumulative madness of history. They stem from initial conditions going back some 5000 years.

Elaborate breakdowns of the Count - the nine heaven periods and thirteen hell periods, for instance - are exercises in mental scheming, ways to impose a comfortable sense of order on events, but such exercises do not, to my mind, prove the predictive power of the Count. In my view, to use the Count as a tool for prediction is to misuse it.

The question, "What's going to happen?" is less helpful than the question "What is the behavior that most urgently needs to be changed in the immediate future, if we are to have a future?" The Count can be an heuristic tool that allows us to frame events and learn something about the compulsive patterns of history, as I've demonstrated above. As such, it need not be taken for a mysterious oracle that has the power to bring about what it foretells. The forces set in motion at the dawn of Kali Yuga are now playing out their final stage, the endgame of patriarchy, the global showdown for theocratic fascism. It may not all end abruptly in December, 2012.

More like than not, it won't die with such elegant brevity.

But in the way we approach the designated moment, mindful of the historical trajectory that brings us to it, something crucial to ending the lethal spell of patriarchy could be achieved.

Against the Book In the first chapter of The End of Faith, Sam Harris makes two outstanding observations: * first, "most of the people in this world believe that the Creator of the universe has written a book" * second, "criticizing a person's faith is currently taboo in every corner of our culture" These are obvious facts of modern life, but the peculiar force of Harris's argument throughout the book consists in his stating the obvious in such a way that it looks at once novel and alarming.

Once it is said, in just so many words, that most people believe God has written a book, the belief looks patently absurd. Yet we know this belief is universal, deep seated, and longstanding. It determines the way a good many of people on this planet behave. Now, if suddenly countless numbers of people who hold this belief and adhere to The Book were to repudiate it, that would be an event worthy of Long Count expectations. That would be a paradigm shift to exceed the wildest prophecies of Jenkins and Calleman.

It would also be the shift consistent with the historical profile of Kali Yuga sketched in the above paragraphs. Recall that we identified two nodal dates, 551 BCE and 731 CE, when the composition of the patriarchal agenda was highlighted. These were key dates in establishing domination by The Book: * the Bible in 551 BCE * the Koran in 731 CE

Does the moment 2012 portend the opportunity to disempower or even reverse those earlier moments? Are such massive trends in psychosocial behavior reversible? The End of Faith may indicate what can really happen in the end-time better than any number of prophetic tomes that purport to describe what will happen, or what is hoped to happen, such as Jenkins' speculations in his books on galactic alignment. But is mass-scale rejection of Abrahamic faith likely to happen? Consider the certainty of world-shattering events, such as terrorist biological attacks and geophysical catastrophes, and what do you conclude? I would guess that when such events occur, most people will go scrambling for The Book, rather than chuck it away.

The certainty of frightening events that will disrupt or even destroy social and personal security almost totally precludes the possibility that masses of people will opt to throw off the narrative spell. On the contrary, they are likely to hunker down into it ever more deeply. They will fall on their faith when the system fails.

They will die with clenched hearts, believing rather than liberated from belief. Yet there will be some spell-breaking in the end-time. The mass awakening of the human species may be a comforting fantasy to some, but others are perhaps more inspired by a different scenario in which a few people break through the spell that still holds the vast majority of human beings in thrall.

Is this an elitist view of the end-time opportunity? No, but it may be a genuine survivalist view. It would be foolish, I think, to expect that between now and December 2012 untold millions around the world will renounce the Torah, the Bible, and the Koran, and liberate themselves from the stupid, vicious, and irrational beliefs stated in those texts - but there may be a more reasonable expectation for the end-time.

If the antireligious debate signaled by The End of Faith were to escalate into an open public controversy, we would find ourselves living through an event that truly reflects optimal change for humanity. To openly challenge in public debate the sexual apartheid of Islam, for instance, would be a momentous event and a vast gain for positive change and social healing.

The problem today is, not only that sexual apartheid exists - most blatantly in Islam, but also in the other two Abrahamic religions, not to mention in Indian and Chinese religion - but that it cannot be called into question, due to perceived political incorrectness and fear of offending Muslims. Let's recall Harris's second observation of the obvious: it is absolutely taboo in our society today to challenge or criticize matters of faith. But what if this taboo also were suddenly to be challenged and overridden?

Suppose that it became acceptable to confront and even offend people on their beliefs. Suppose the tables were turned, and it was the offended party, not the offending party, who must go on the defensive in the debate over religious beliefs and faith-based principles. That would be a shift in social reality and social syntax consistent with a breakaway from the narrative spell of patriarchy that has dominated Kali Yuga. It would be a tremendous shift to start offending believers and have them be accountable for what they believe, and for what is done by blind adherence to their irrational, threatening, and intolerant convictions.

No Exemption A recent court ruling on religious offence in England established that "offence is not incitement."

This ruling introduces what could be a radical shift in the rules of discourse on faith issues. It changes the syntax of the debate over faith issues. The case concerned the leader of the British National Party, Nick Griffin, who described Islam as a "vicious" religion.

Regardless of the source of the remark, it is true that offence is not incitement. Griffin did not say that Islam is a vicious religion and Muslims ought to be hanged. The latter phrase is surefire incitement. With the privilege of free expression comes the responsibility to use language in a sober, rational, and measured way: to be careful what you say, but not be so cautious that you never challenge or offend.

Any sane person of good conscience knows what it is to talk incitement, and what it isn't. The argument that offensive talk leads automatically to incitement is invalid and supports the plea for special exemption that is antithetical to open debate in a free society. Likewise for the argument that offensive talk alienates the offended people from positive dialogue that could lead to social reconciliation and better integration: to take being offended as an excuse to withdraw from open social discourse is just another way to extort special exemption. The offence response is specious and rejects the creative dissonance that makes democratic society possible. Living in an open society, we are all exposed to a lot of offence, things said and done that offend us for one reason or another, in one way or another.

I for one are offended by the use of sex in advertising, by the exploitation of children as fashion icons, by the entire educational system of Western culture, and a lot more.

The risk of being offended is a consequence of the free expression offered in an open society. Currently, it is taboo to offend Jews, Christians, or Muslims by saying anything critical or derogatory about their faith, their beliefs, and their customs, including how they dress, how they treat their children, and how they slaughter animals.

The fear of offending is not a measure of compassion or consideration, although it disguises itself as such. It a concession to the demand for special exemption exerted by members of these religions, who seek the advantage of enforcing their agenda by operating on values and beliefs that cannot, they insist, be questioned, criticized, or ridiculed.

But the demand for special exemption on any issue whatsoever is inconsistent with the principles of an open society (or civic society, as Harris calls it). The demand for special exemption is a disguised tactic for spreading tyranny and totalitarianism, the rule of The Book. There can no special exemptions from open social critique of any subject in a free society, least of all religious beliefs that drive social behavior and religious practices that define social identity.

The society that succumbs to this demand is committing moral suicide (which is precisely what's happening in Europe, Bruce Bawer argues in his disturbing study, While Europe Slept.)

But the West, and especially European society, has become ever more and more compliant with this demand over the last few decades. I submit that the policy of appeasement signals the terminal decadence of Kali Yuga and the end of the long countdown to a planet-wide orgy of righteous self-immolation. Defiance of the taboo against religious offence would be a true paradigm shift with worldwide repercussions for the good. This is the kind of mass behavioral change to look for in social life as the Maya endtime approaches.

This is something worth discussing, not as a mere expectation, but as a challenge for the 2012 moment.

Belief Change

belief-change The act of changing what one believes, especially by examining and rejecting received beliefs and adopting aligned beliefs; and, going even more deeply into this process, by changing the way one views belief itself. I call these the relative and radical forms of belief-change, respectively. My book, Not in His Image, attempts to challenge and break the narrative spell of patriarchy. It presents a radical critique of faith in The Book. So do many articles on this site.

Metahistory.org proposes belief change as the single most powerful act that can make a difference for human life on this planet today. Some essays on this site exemplify realistic expectations we might hold for a positive grand finale of the Long Count: for instance, The Promise of a Lonely Planet. People of faith can be as offended as they want to be - that is their problem. When they make it the problem of others, they act spitefully and destructively against the principles of open, democratic society, the very principles that allow them to hold their beliefs. It is no crime to hurt someone's feelings, nor to discount what they have invested in their identity. In fact, it is a sign of a healthy society that this can be done without fear of reprisal.

But if a society at large complies with the demand for special exemption, the faith-based program of patriarchal domination that got rolling into high gear at the start of Kali Yuga will prevail, down to the last man standing. Breaking the narrative spell is only possible if open debate on religious beliefs can unfold without restraint and without fear of reprisal, in a theatre of non-threatening debate, guided by the principle that offence is not incitement.

As it stands now, anyone who even jokes about the Prophet can be threatened with death. It is bad enough that Muslims feel this way, but worse that infidels in the "democratic West" are willing to appease their feelings. Freed of the threats routinely expressed by outraged Moslems, the antireligious debate would grow to considerable proportions, or at least it would have a chance to grow. Although it is, I believe, unlikely that many people will renounce their beliefs and break away from the spell of The Book, societies around the world would be hugely improved if some people could at least talk openly about what they see as insane and inhumane in religious traditions. (We started to do this on this site back in 2002, with a slim ten-year lead on the endtime.)

Many people could then become involved in the debate, and who knows how many might undergo a radical change of heart regarding God, salvation, and survival? To see something like this happening in the next six years would be one of the best outcomes of the Long Count. Breaking the narrative spell by open, non-inciting debate on faith issues is not the only way that the rendezvous in 2012 could turn into a profound healing moment for humanity.

There is also another major path toward the breakthrough into a future safe for debate and difference...

I will present my ideas on this subject in the companion article, now in development: The Discovery of the Next World. Return to 2012 Return to The Tzolkin Maya

13.

by Linda Moulton Howe 2004

April 26, 2004 Los Angeles, California

Dan Burisch is a microbiologist who received his Ph.D. from the State University of New York, Stonybrook, in 1989. He is 40 years old now, born on February 2, 1964. His birth certificate name was Danny Benjamin Crain. I have met and talked with his mother, Dodie Crain, and with Dan Burisch, Ph.D., himself. In 1990, he married Deborah Kay Burisch who had a child from a previous marriage. Five years later in 1995, Dan legally changed his last name from Crain to Burisch to match the childs legal last name. In 1989, as Dan Crain graduated from SUNY Stonybrook with a Ph.D. in Microbiology and Molecular Genetics, Dan was at the same time employed by the U. S. Navys DOD Naval Research Laboratory. His rank was Captain and his title Microbiologist IV. In 1994, he was assigned to work in an underground laboratory at S-4/Area 51, five floors under the Papoose Mountain installation at Nellis AFB, Nevada. The fifth floor is accessible only by one secure elevator. Dr. Burisch told me that in the year 1994, he suited up in the fifth floor underground laboratory like an astronaut with breathing and urination hoses. His assignment was to enter a round clean sphere filled with cold hydrogen atmosphere that housed an entity called extraterrestrial by his government superiors. According to Dr. Burisch, his boss reported to a MAJI committee, an extension of the Majestic-12 Special Studies Group organized by President Harry S. Truman in 1947. Majestic 12 included top scientific, military and business leaders asked to study the extraterrestrial phenomenon.

Note: The percentage of hydrogen in sphere was only 4%; the remaining composition of the atmosphere is unknown - BH Dr. Burisch says the being at S-4/Area 51 was called J-Rod. The name emerged when the being pointed at the J key on a computer keyboard and then at a hyphen-like or bar key. Telepathically, the being communicated that those symbols were equivalent to the number 15 in hieroglyphics, similar to Egyptian. Fifteen, the being telepathed, was an appropriate name for him because it was the number of light years from Earth to a planet important to his civilization. So, the Majestic group named him J-Rod Dr. Burisch was told there was a serious medical problem with the J-Rod and his species and that MJ-12 wanted Dan to extract tissue from the beings arm for microscopic study. A serious peripheral neuropathy was diagnosed and Dr. Burisch said in the year 1994, he collected more than 100 tissue samples in an effort to study the J-Rods nerve damage and to perhaps develop a treatment.

Dan became upset by what he was learning and in a whistle-blowing effort, Dr. Burisch began to leak information to longtime UFO researcher and Executive Director of Skywatch International, Bill Hamilton, in the summer and fall of 2002. That year, Bill played audiotaped and videotaped interviews for me of Dr. Burisch talking about his microbiology research of the extraterrestrial beings neuropathy and a complicated threat that has come to be known as the Time Convergence Paradox. Now Dr. Burisch has been diagnosed with a heart condition in which part of his heart muscle is weak, similar to the condition that killed the TV actor, John Ritter. In April, Dan Burisch told Bill Hamilton that he has negotiated a deal with his government handlers to retire from official service to MJ-12. But he wants to keep researching the issue of panspermia - the seeding of life on Earth that has been provoked by what the J-Rod has communicated to Dan Burisch during the tissue extraction procedures at S-4/Area 51. I talked with Bill Hamilton at the recent X-Conference in Gaithersburg, Maryland, about his evolving understanding of the extraterrestrials communications to Dan Burisch.

Interview:

Bill Hamilton, Computer Programmer Analyst, University of California-Los Angeles, and Executive Director of Skywatch, Lancaster, California: These extractions that he took were of course painful to this entity. And he knew that and he could even feel the pain the entity was feeling because its a vacuum extraction and these tissue extractions were sent down like a vacuum hose to a container of some kind and as far as I know, traveled down a conveyor belt to another station and perhaps someone like another biologist would be looking at these tissue samples under a microscope. And I have asked Dan: Does he believe the J-Rod is still at this particular facility? He believes that he is, but has no confirmation of that. The purpose of taking these tissue samples was to come up with a means possibly to reverse engineer the genetics of this particular entity, perhaps even by hybridizing genes together in order to remedy a peripheral neuropathy that this entity was suffering.

WHICH IS SOME KIND OF DETERIORATION OF THE NERVES THAT IS CAUSING BOTH A WEAKNESS IN THE ABILITY OF THE BEING TO STAND UP AND LOSS OF BODY HEAT FROM THE ENTITYS BODY? Yes, I believe that is so. I have studied a little about peripheral neuropathies - using the world wide web of course! - and I have found out that people who suffer from these are in great pain. It is very painful for them to have neuropathies of this kind.

ON THE VIDEOTAPE, DAN SAYS HE COULD FEEL THIS BEINGS PAIN WHEN HE WOULD EXTRACT TISSUE BECAUSE THERE IS SOME KIND OF TELEPATHIC COMMUNICATION? Yes. Not only telepathy in terms of what the being is thinking, but what the being is feeling is conveyed and empathy is going across here. Now, why is anybody trying to remedy this beings problem? Why are they trying to fix it? I think there was a dialogue that went on before Dan ever arrived there and they (MJ-12 and entity) had reached some kind of agreement that if we would help fixing the problem and what was needed was samples from present-day human genomes thats why coming to us on Earth. They need something from us. They need this assistance, or at least some asked for this assistance, and in exchange for the help, they would provide us with some details of their advanced technology which in turn could be passed to those scientists and engineers who deal with hardware.

Paradox of the Converging Time Lines THE BAFFLING, MIND-BLOWING PART OF THIS WHOLE STORY - IF IT IS ALL TRUE - IS THAT DAN BURISCH ULTIMATELY IS TOLD BY HIS GOVERNMENT SUPERIORS THAT THE BEING IS NOT TECHNICALLY EXTRATERRESTRIAL BECAUSE IT IS A TIME TRAVELER FROM A DISTANT FUTURE (AT LEAST 50,000 YEARS IN THE FUTURE), THAT DETERIORATES INTO SEVERE MEDICAL PROBLEMS THAT THREATENS THE ENTIRE CIVILIZATION. THEIR TECHNOLOGY IS ADVANCED ENOUGH TO THROW THEMSELVES BACK TO OUR PRESENT TO TRY TO HARVEST GENETIC MATERIAL FROM EARTH LIFE TO HELP REPAIR THE FUTURE DAMAGE. Thats essentially correct, as fantastic as it seems. But it would explain why there is such interaction, why there is such interest in us - why the abductions. Or even why the animal mutilations, because some of these beings are conducting these operations and they are harvesting material. Harvesting material they hope can help them and this is the reason why they traveled back. And another reason is: how did they get into this condition? Well, they are talking about there is yet to come a catastrophe that affects the whole population of the Earth. This catastrophe was of such a nature that it included intense radiation and as we know, radiation can change, mutate genes. Those that were exposed to it underwent micro-evolutionary changes that eventually ended up in this type of creature. Of course, something was defective that was passed on in the genetic line that resulted in the neuropathy. There was another branch of the human race that apparently goes on and remains more human and becomes more as Dan has termed it more spiritual in nature. Both of these branches of the human race at a far time in the future as they have developed technology for not only travel to other planets, because we do go on to inhabit the planet Mars in the future and probably build habitats there.

ACCORDING TO DANS UNDERSTANDING OF THIS TIME PHENOMENON THAT HE HAS BEEN EXPOSED TO? Yes, according to that. That is a jumping off point from Mars to their ultimate destinations and the little grey type humanoids end up on some planet around Zeta Reticulii 2. The other human blond-type, Nordic-looking types, end up somewhere on a planet near the middle star in Orions belt, Epsilon Orionis, I believe. I dont know what particular planet that is. Dan had no

contact with the Orion beings. He only read about them in the documents. He was only told about them from the J-Rod. He only had an encounter with one J-Rod, as he says.

AND THIS EVENT THAT SET ALL THIS IN MOTION IS SUPPOSED TO HAPPEN IN 2012? Yes. He did not hesitate to tell me the year this was supposed to happen was 2012. And I said, Oh, you mean the Mayan date. And he said, Yes. I asked him, Why do you think this is? Actually, he had to check back to find out, so our conversation on this became a little more informed and I was given to understand that somewhere around that date I dont know if there is a little bell curve before and after that date, December 2012 would be the middle point. At that time, our solar system was going to pass through the plane of the galaxy because it has a periodic motion of approximately 200 million years in which it makes an entire circuit of the galaxy. We are approximately 30,000 light years from the core of the galaxy, so we are kind of one of the rim worlds. But we have lots of company. Its going around the galaxy like a horse on a carousel, going up above the plane, down below the plane, like a sine wave. As we pass through the plane of the galaxy, there is a dust belt. We are now feeling the affects of this dust belt because there is an influx of dust coming into the Sun. It is causing the Sun, like a T Tauri type star, to heat up, radiate in infra-red and x-ray bands of the spectrum. (T Tauri stars are young suns, near many molecular clouds in our galaxy. They have temperatures and masses similar to our Sun, but are brighter and more variable, with solar-like activity at X1000.) Worm Holes and Time Travel Can highly advanced civilizations build wormholes through hyperspace for rapid interstellar travel and machines for traveling backward in time? - Kip S. Thorne, Astrophysicist (Illustration on Page 483, Black Holes & Time Warps 1994 by Kip S. Thorne)

The only thing that Dan mentions that would put a coming 2012 catastrophe outside current scientific knowledge is what (the J-Rod says) lurks in this band of our Milky Way galaxy - that is natural worm holes (not confirmed by Earth scientists). Worm holes hypothetically can connect two points in space and time (Einstein-Rosen bridge), as if the points were adjacent to one another.

Therefore, if there is any radiation coming from the center of the galaxy in addition that could be absorbed by the planets, if a worm hole comes into alignment with this, it could amplify that radiation. Then the radiation would seem like we were right adjacent to the radiant source. If there were any (artificially engineered time travel) machines of such a nature that they could generate artificial worm holes on the Earth and were active at the time (Earth passed through worm holes in the galaxy), that in turn would also amplify this radiation.

So, if you want to consider the scientific world and that natural or ET-made 'star gates' really do exist and they were left on Earth by ancient civilizations a long time ago then if any of them remain secret and somebody goes to activate them in order to escape (catastrophe) or make their own exit to save their own hide, that could be disastrous for all of us because it would amplify the catastrophic consequences.

Global Warming and Freezing - Are Galactic Gas and Dust Regions the Cause? In the July 25, 2003 Science Journal, the Astrobiology: Latest News section reported: Solar Systems Path May Have Spurred Ice Ages - Physicist Nir Shaviv of the University of Toronto argues that the path of our solar system through the Milky Way galaxy may be responsible for Earths periodic ice ages. Our Sun and its planets move in a slow orbit around the center of our galaxy. Over time, our solar system passes through the galaxys spiral armsregions dense with stars. Where there are more stars, there are also more supernovae-giant stars that explode in a flood of cosmic rays. Such rays could affect Earths atmosphere and alter its climate. Shaviv says that the timing of ice ages on Earth correlates closely with the historical levels of cosmic ray exposure and with the solar systems route through the spiral arms. Other scientists have previously suggested that our solar systems galactic orbit makes Earth habitable.

YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT SOMETHING THAT IS HOOKED INTO THE NATURAL CYCLE OF THE ENTIRE GALAXY THAT WE ARE IN. BUT THERE HAVE BEEN ABDUCTEES AND OTHER PEOPLE IN THE MILITARY/INTEL WORLD WHO HAVE NOT SPOKEN ON THE RECORD, BUT HAVE SUGGESTED OFF THE RECORD THAT WHAT WE ARE COMING UP AGAINST IN 2012 IS GLOBAL NUCLEAR WARFARE SET OFF BY EVENTS IN THE EARLY PART OF THE 21ST CENTURY IN THE MIDDLE EAST. IS IT POSSIBLE THAT THE RADIATION AFFECTS THAT CREATED THE JRODS AND THE BLOND NORDICS AS DAN BURISCH HAS BEEN TOLD COULD BE LINKED DIRECTLY TO NUCLEAR GLOBAL WARFARE? Let me make this statement first. How would they know this? How would they know there was a coming nuclear war when we could strategically plan to avert it? How would they know this unless they had some means of accessing the future? Right? Either through a remote viewing program of some kind or some kind of device that has been developed like in Project Looking Glass. Project Looking Glass is an instrument to assist them in looking into this. But another source, if I may go outside of the Dan Burisch circle, another source indicated to me that a long time ago, one of the first gifts given to us by the extraterrestrials and given to Harry Truman of all things was a sphere and this sphere was multi-dimensional. It had 6 portals. One of the portals would open up a view of the future. That was the first one they were able to open up. And they saw things they could not understand. And what they saw, I was told, was fire, fire, fire everywhere, like the Earth was burning up. And they could not comprehend that. But as I understand it, that sphere still exists. And another device called the Yellow Book which is a holographic type of record that the J-Rods have about our history and their history from thousands of years ago to the present and into the future. And some people, who have had access to the Yellow Book, have accessed the future and have almost gone crazy about what they have seen.

WAS THERE ANY INDICATION OF A TIME WHEN THIS WOULD OCCUR? Some time between, I believe, 2007 lets say to beyond 2012. But 2012 is kind of like a center point. Return to Dan Burisch Return to 2012

14.

July 11, 2005 from EaglesDesobey Website

W.M. discusses the issue of The Doctrine of Convergent Timeline Paradox, from the perspective of a remote viewing methodology.

(The problems that had been caused by the J-Rods who were using their technology to travel back in time, and thereby creating overlaying time anomalies)

* Can it be that what we think is physical reality is made up of an illusion, a play of light of quantum participant observer probabilities? * Is reality an illusion that is physically effective? * What if, just like you can hypnotize someone to think they were burned when they were not, and they suffer real skin burns caused by their imagination, that you could hypnotize masses of people to both experience a world they are conditioned to expect and believe, and also have them be unable to experience something they are conditioned to deny as being real? The brains body image can lead the presentation of objectively measurable physical manifestations in the body.

This is the flip side of what we usually assume, which is also true, that experience of the physical body, through sensation and action, certainly lead to experience in the brains body image.

But on the other hand, given the placebo power of the mind to cause the manifestation of physical symptoms, and given masses of people could do it in concert, it is possible the entire agreement about what is reality can be manipulated, and reality itself can be herded. * Is there a global timeline placebo effect going on? * Are we in a situation where we have been manipulated by competing ET races into using our innate and possibly soon to be more awakened creative conscious spiritual energies in a way that serves them, but not always us? * Must they keep us asleep to get away with herding our souls like cattle for their own ends? * Are we being led along in a fairly controlled sleepy manner to preserve and continue steps toward a realizing a large global consensus blueprint future, a future that serves these ET society future human interests, not necessarily our own present day human interests? * What does the Dan Burisch saga have to do with this?

What is the DCTP doctrine? 1. The DCTP is a doctrine of the human races probable competing pasts, observer relative present and probable futures. 2. A DCTP prime truth is there are strongly competing timelines or futures that are in a natural semi-quiescent laminar convergence right now, until the 2012 period is upon us when things change. 3. The DCTP suggests that future humans are warning of an upcoming environmental catastrophe following the 2012 galactic energy related natural stargate amplifications in our solar system that will be possibly precipitated by the presence of some artificial stargates on the

Earth. If this future transpires, it is a future that leads to the developmental evolution, for better or worse, of various factions of future humans, now known as J-Rod ETs or Orion Talls. 4. The DCTP suggests there is a future where a possibly pole shift related environmental catastrophe is averted and does not happen, and relative to this different time line, the future that generated the J-Rods as we know them will never evolve from our own, and we have taken a new path. 5. The DCTP suggests the remaining presence of the J-Rods in our timeline, having originated from the alternate prior timeline, will effectively be world line immigrants from a future that they helped never happen for us. 6. The DCTP suggests our distant descendents help us change our course in a way that precludes their own development in this new timeline, but they still exist in our timeline coming from that prior original future they traveled back from to, 1. have helped us avert the catastrophe (Maji allied J-Rods), and/or 2. help them raid our genetic stocks before the catastrophe (Illuminati allied Rogue JRods). 7. The DCTP suggests future humans or J-Rods, have engaged in a future into past immigration, and are using current day human genetic resources as an evolutionary pit stop to recover factors they lost in their own originating timeline. 8. The DCTP suggests there is a future where we continue to have an ongoing relationship with the non-Rogue J-Rods, and another where they stay relatively hidden, denied, unknown, and they either go to other planets, or otherwise gradually fade out of history. The ET phenomenon related to future humans as ETs fades out. 9. The DCTP suggests there is a future where if the so called Ark of the New Dawn were not to be deployed because it isnt needed after all (hey folks, come on out, the weathers great up here, no catastrophe like you thought, we dismantled those remaining stargates in time!)

10. The DCTP suggests there are many timeline overlays going on, at least pre-2012. 11. The DCTP suggests there are many externally introduced novel butterfly attractors that are being stacked into motion in our timeline pre-2012. 12. The DCTP suggests that circa 2012 as we cross the galactic ecliptic natural stargate wormhole that exist along the galactic ecliptic will line up and activate in such a way as to cause a plenum of energy flux of some kind that will affect our solar system. 13. The DCTP suggests that this natural stargate activation event will produce some changes in the solar system and the sun which, along with changes and energy flux associated with any natural stargates in the vicinity of our planet. 14. The DCTP suggests that future humans have time traveled to the past our present and are working to steer timeline causality into certain trajectories. 15. The DCTP suggests that the future humans experienced a catastrophe that began with an event that occurs around the 2012 timing, and this catastrophe may have included the activation of artificial wormholes or stargates left over from previous ET travelers, which activation may have precipitated a radical pole-shift and other things during or subsequent to that timing. 16. The DCTP suggests that future humans have used the ability to time travel to return to a pre-2012 era in order to attempt to deactivate certain artificial stargates that may have helped precipitate disaster attributed to their activation during the 2012 timing. 17. The DCTP suggests that these future humans, known also as ETs or J-Rods, have also returned back in time in order to migrate their future human species into a more survivable and evolutionarily efficacious future. 18.

The DCTP suggests that timelines can be overlaid or stacked, and that we presently live in a causality nexus that combines multiple timelines and multiple loops of timeline feedback. 19. The DCTP suggests that if due to their influence and present human actions, the historical catastrophe of their ancient history our immediate future does not happen, then it is understood the J-Rods will not develop in the new timeline as they did in the original one that developed them to their current evolutionary appearance. 20. The DCTP suggests that if the catastrophe does not happen as it once did, the J-Rods who have migrated back in time will continue to exist from their heritage of the prior timeline they evolved in, but that humanity in the present new timelines will be spared an evolutionary path that led to the J-Rods current problems. 21. The DCTP suggests that the J-Rods from more than one future have migrated back to our present era, specifically the 45s (meaning they are from the future 45,000 years ahead of us...) and the 52s, and that the 52s, as a whole, are suffering from a terminal form of peripheral neuropathy (PN). 22. The DCTP suggests that the 45 J-Rods, 7k years earlier in time than the 52s, do not directly suffer from the PN syndrome are split into two factions, reasonable and unreasonable, or friendly and rogue, and that the rogue J-Rods resist following any agreements with current time human governments, and that the friendly 45s and the 52s have both formed treaties (Tau9) 23. The DCTP suggests that the latest summed iteration of multiple composite timelines have, across different scales, a substantial degree of relative integral convergence of causality paths with all the prior feedback loop overlaid lines after the original line. 24. The DCTP suggests the feedback loop overlay series of new time or world lines is constituted of varying causality streams in multi-wave paradox that we are currently riding together. The multi-wave time stream is comprised of the original and all the varying changed or tweaked world lines, through to the latest loop overlay. 25.

The DCTP refers to a composite of multi-potential range of different possible causality trajectories, with different relative outcome probability-to-actuality biases, but existing as an overlay. Living inside a multi-trajectory time stream stack, individual participant observer by their own resonance can individually bias their superposition-to-position to one or more of the different lines in the stack. 26. The DCTP suggests there are causality trajectory potentials in the environment of stacked time stream potentials which all remain common across the lines. They remain singular or at least flow in unified fused convergent trajectory, and in this respect the timelines remain, at certain scales and domains of participant observation, relatively indistinguishable from each other. 27. The DCTP suggests other novel or divergent future potentials are also resonantly competing with each other for substantially mutually exclusive future outcomes. Yet at other scales of observation, much of the different causality stream paths are largely similar to one another. 28. The DCTP suggests the stacked timeline experiential paradox effect is intensified by how extreme the range of line-to-line novelty in the time line stream stack. The more extreme range the experience of locally or globally divergent timeline superposition-to-position dominance depends on the bias of the participant observer. 29. The DCTP suggests multiple loop or embedded time streams can alternately flow in a laminar-like convergence or causal fusion or otherwise flow divergently and separately, depending on the participant observer population intentional variations. Does this suggest the native active intentional resonance of the participant observer can converge with one stream or another and entrain their conscious observer participant influence to reinforce to particular time stream potential over another? 30. The DCTP suggests a paradox generating situation where the time stream is appearing to remain largely convergent and fused as if one singular largely composite world line, but on the other hand there are different causal trajectories which can super-positioned into position by the influence of participant observers. Does like attract like, and the laws of resonance entrainment apply in this regard? 31.

The DCTP suggests any given reality is comprised of convergent probability waves more than solid objects, and locality is a balanced convergence of both local explicate and entangled non-local implicate pattern potentials. If this is so, do mass convergent causal vector potentials literally tend to reinforce and steer global consensus causality in a direction that is consistent with the convergence of probability waves produced by masses of observer participants? 32. The DCTP suggests the prime global, planetary and species strategic inference is that we live in a time that includes the progression of more than one future in the offing that will develop. Is it true the stakes are that these currently overlaid different future potentials are each and all vying for conscious observer participant quantum population? They each have spiritual quantum superposition advocacy to entrain our souls into their particular causality orbit. Which orbit we align to is the causality time line that more of our conscious energy will be invested in, and hence feeds forward to energize those future potentials, just as those future potentials fed back to look for (1) reinforcement or (2) change. 33. The DCTP suggests that pre-2012 that several distinct time lines are stacked and overlaid and in relative laminar-like convergence, and that in the 2012 period there is a galactic scale alignment that provides a natural boosting and turning on of natural stargates in our solar system. 34. The DCTP suggests that the natural stargates may accommodate and support spiritual evolutionary changes and transformation for human consciousness, and will additionally produce material effects on the electromagnetic environment of the sun and our planet. Is it thought by some of the future humans that during this event, the existence of some remaining artificial stargates on Earth may have radically influenced the progress of a natural pole shift in progress to unnaturally occur in such an accelerated manner that it has radical global environmental consequences? 35. The DCTP suggests that some of the future humans wish to possibly avert the severity by removing or disabling any artificial stargates before the galactic alignment stargate boosting event. 36. The DCTP suggests there are some future humans who have effectively migrated back to this present time and appear to want to, 1.

influence their precedent future so that it may not happen as it once already did for them (and still could for us), and 2. emigrate to this present for its expedient evolutionary resources, such as for precatastrophe DNA pit stop, in order to genetically engineer and accomplish a future human species evolutionary potential recovery operation. 37. The DCTP suggests if the future humans (who are here to be present timeline changers) avert the catastrophe that befell their species, they will still exist, and still have originated from their earlier now relatively defunct timeline, but they will now recover more of their lost evolutionary energy that was sapped by their historical accretion into that timeline, and more fully move on from their presence in this timeline.

However, is it not also true they will themselves from present, after averting the catastrophe, diverge into a new timeline that becomes increasingly separate from ours as a species now moving along a much different future timeline trajectory? 38. The DCTP suggests that the future humans who have time looped back are executing a present era DNA pit stop to recover those lost factors that their soon to be averted future had eventually stripped them of. These future humans, will, through this time looped DNA hybridization operation, produce a new future genetic line for evolutionary progress for them.

It will hopefully combine what was the best of our human future in the post-catastrophe trajectory, with the best of their past heritage, our present pre-2012 gene pool, and permit them a recovered evolutionary trajectory. 39. The DCTP suggests the new evolutionary trajectory project instigated by the future humans operating in our present era, looks to accomplish its ends by several somewhat conflicting means. In one instance one faction of future humans, the more logic and technology worshippers, descendents of present day Illuminati, are willing to resort to any means necessary to move along their evolutionary recovery agenda without much care for how it affects our timeline forward (since it wont be them), and in another instance, the heart and compassion worshippers, the brothers from Orion, want to see a win-win where the new future timeline of the emigrated future humans only supports a better future for the current human species. 40.

The DCTP suggests the service-to-self expediency logic camp is uninterested in our new future timeline and its fate just using us as a free resource for achieving their ends for an evolutionary uplift, as and such, could care less if we still hit the catastrophe that befell them these are the Illuminati linked Rogues. 41. The DCTP also suggests, that in contrast, the service-to-others compassion camp is very interested in optimizing how this reverse time emigration of the future humans can also incidentally help to both, 1. to avert the precedent catastrophic pole shift future that happened for them 2. provide a disclosure of the 2012 events potentials in a way that can spiritually reinforce a more optimal evolutionary fate for present era humans. And this future human group is comprised of the non-rogue future humans who are working with the present-era faction known as the Maji. 42. The DCTP suggests the future human descendents of the Illuminati and Maji, in their various flavors, are both competitively influencing the present pre-2012 for their own ends, but with the Illuminati are willing to see a win for them and losing situation for us, whereas the Maji are predisposed to influencing towards a win-win, service-to-all outcome. 43. The DCTP suggests that one faction of future humans called the Rogues wish to prevent disclosure of how humans may choose to populate different possible soul futures. 44. The DCTP suggests that the some of the future humans known as Rogue J-Rods, wish to engage in soul-energy hijacking activity in addition to genetic energy recovery activity, and this may have an additional negative effect on the prospects of the current era timeline trajectory. 45. The DCTP suggests that human souls from the future are influencing their soul ancestry in their relative past, our present, in to order to upgrade their own future. 46. The DCTP suggests the future holds a known track of development that eventually generates three

47. The DCTP suggests that of recent, the present day Maji allied future human J-Rods, have begun to appreciate how their ancestral genetic pit stop operation in our time will have further karmic consequence they will face in their new future if they engage in it with unwilling free souls. 48. The DCTP suggests, that as a result, the non-Rogue J-Rods are largely curtailing their continuing abduction activity to obtain genetic material in order to forward their hybridization program. It also suggests they have recently chosen to live with the state of the art DNA hybridization level of accomplishment they have reached as of this point, and further suffice through evolutionary genetic tuning of the current stock, and also suffice also through the possible influence of certain present era-human new breakthroughs in energetic biological healing. 49. The DCTP suggests, that in contrast to this, the Illuminati descended more Godless Rogue J-Rods dismiss abduction compassion considerations, and that even while they would like to obtain natural biological healing technologies uniquely discovered in the current loop by present humans associated with the Maji, they are far too arrogant and self interested to care about how much they manipulate and use the present era to serve their own timeline uplift resource piggy bank. 50. The DCTP suggests that the Rogue J-Rods are against disclosure of the situation in any manner that would promote present day human species enlightenment, as this enlightenment provides human conscious souls freedom from their plans to continue to manipulate their ancestors, after a fashion, to be an expedient resource for their own upliftment ends. 51. The DCTP suggests that as a result, these Rogue J-Rod future humans have deployed a population of near era time traveling human hybrids, often known as MIBs, who are early products of prior accomplished future-human/past-human genetic hybridization work, to acts as a timeline enforcement operation. 52. The DCTP suggests this causality control and containment operational force of MIBs instigated by the Rogues is intended to accomplish the ends of 1.

preventing consensus awareness of their abduction activity and present era manipulating presence 2. preventing scientific progress to develop technologies that could be used against them 3. preventing any mass human enlightenment breakthroughs that could impair their capacity to manipulate present day era humans toward a future of servitude to their own future evolutionary ends 53. The DCTP suggests from the Rogue ET view, that consensus acknowledgement and awareness of the ET presence will produce unpredictable responses among the genetic resource stock and thereby hinder their usage agenda. 54. The DCTP suggests that substantial leap frog scientific progress due to the feedback of future technology into this current era can provide current era humans with the ability to combat the Rogue agenda. 55. The DCTP suggests that the natural consequence of the 2012 period stargate activation will boost and accelerate present day human observer participant co-creative quantum energetic potentials, and that this influx into the population during this period will cause the presently semi-convergent laminar time stream flow following that period to diverge into several increasingly distinct and increasingly divergent timelines. 56. The DCTP suggests that pre-2012 these laminar timeline streams can be more easily crossed back and forth naturally by observer participants depending on their conscious resonance. 57. The DCTP suggests that there is a dimensional war or timeline resonance competition in the present day laminar flow for more soul energy migration into the different lines, and that these factions of different future human ET societies realize. They will only be successful to the degree current present era humans behave in accordance with their desires.

The Rogue J-Rods desire to control and use this current day era as a natural resource to be exploited for their own future hybrid and future non-hybridized evolutionary ends, and the non-Rogue J-Rods desire to cooperatively both help themselves and us in the present, by 1. recovering lost evolutionary factors for them own future development, 2. contributing to our new catastrophe-averted future timeline some more balanced material and spiritual potentials 3. enabling a limited voluntary evolutionary consensus agreement level exchange and integration of their existence between themselves and present new timeline humans to support a more optimal trajectory future for the preservation of the species 58. The DCTP suggests if the non-Rogue J-Rods recover lost factors from our present era they will assure themselves of avoiding an evolutionary dead end future. 59. The DCTP suggests that if the non-Rogue elements contribute to averting the catastrophe that will help karmically balance the use they have made of the present era as an evolutionary pit stop for their continuing into a new future from this loop back point. 60. The DCTP suggests that if the non-Rogue J-Rods help enable an optimum evolutionary engagement by present era humans of the natural stargate activation and boost during the 2012 period, then this will feed forward to produce new evolutionary future spiritual factors that will feedback to support their new course in even deeper positive participant quantum energetic karmic loop back terms. 61. The DCTP suggests that the non-Rogue J-Rod future humans are allied with the present day Maji human faction, through a treaty called the Tau-9 treaty for the preservation of humanity, but that the Rogues are not a party to this treaty, which is why they are called Rogues. 62. The DCTP suggests that the present day Illuminati are building a number of Arks to survive a predicted abrupt global change due to the hypothesized 2012 stargate activation, and that their descendents will become the Rogue J-Rods.

63. The DCTP suggests that if the global catastrophe is averted by whatever means, that the re-direction of quantum observer participant energy away from their precedent future will result in a weakening of their capacity to influence our future in their current era loop back immigration trajectory. 64. The DCTP suggests that if the post global pole shift environmental catastrophe does not occur, that there are significant positive benefits reaped from the 2012 natural stargate activation period. The benefits could be to alternatively produce a human consciousness liberating evolutionary leap frog, and a level of enlightenment among the masses, that will produce a new set of future timeline trajectories that will compassionately steer the course of humanity into a virgin future of untold beneficial futures and heights, and in fact fulfill the original evolutionary directive to evolve the consciousness of humanity into its optimum potential as future creative agencies in the universe. 65. The DCTP suggests that if the Illuminati connected Rogue J-Rods can obtain the secrets of new biological re-vitalization technology associated with the discovery of how to produce Ganesh particles, (cellular level effective electromagnetic energy bundles which carry the potential to heal as well as potentially harm), that this could help them to achieve some of their desired ends with regards to their DNA hybridization and recovery goals.

However sharing this disclosure is being reasonably withheld by the Maji in order to possibly influence the Rogue J-Rod current course of action, and as a result have them abide by some of the Tau-9 treaty objectives. 66. Another prime DCTP truth is that Post 2012, the different timeline streams, old lines (original and earlier loop back and forward), and new ones (later loop back and forward), will increasingly and naturally more and more separate and diverge into less and less interacting phase coherence with each other. There is a global timeline split event coming up soon.

When there is, 1. enough mass population cohesion of competing conscious observer quantum energy potentials, combined with 2.

enough natural quantum resonance boosting factors (2012), ...then, several different global futures can and will establish themselves in different mass-quantum phase positions of forward time. 67. The DCTP says there is a future where the original environmental catastrophe occurs. The Ark is deployed, and the illuminati style Ark distant descendents eventually become the JRods, apparently more Rogue than not. The post-catastrophe surface dwellers survive and some eventually head for Orion to become the Talls, the others head elsewhere as an Ark society, and the classic archetypal H.G. Wells Eloi versus Morlock like human evolutionary split somewhat transpires. 68. The DCTP says there is a future where the catastrophe is not averted, though attempted to be averted, and things go so bad that the loop back J-Rod Rogues use us effectively as spiritual batteries for their own future benefit (The Matrix movie was close to revealing the nature of our illusion). These Rogue folks are like a spiritual vampire soul sucking slow motion 911 Al Qaida attack on the sly against the whole human species. They dont want their presence to be known, since history has proven it potentially fatal to getting away with soul trapping, and they dont want us to figure out how to be free of them, and they are afraid we might use our awakening to control them. 69. The DCTP infers that the Rogue J-Rods are scared of what our spiritual potential can unleash in terms of our own newly possible futures. The Rogues prefer us to not have the capacity to be transparently at-one-with-and-within the wonderful conscious creative quantum energy potentials that 2012 alignments can forge that robs them of their unknowing human livestock flock. That is their greatest fear. 70. The DCTP identifies that humanity as a whole is quantum volitionally participant in their different mass futures from different grouped biases of quantum accretion potential.

The fact is, present time humanity could become the conscious, subconscious, or unconscious victims of its own negative future that has already cruised into existence ahead of us, and is even already bouncing back to us in a shout for help, and watch out!! Or, humanity can increasingly become a fully awake conscious creator in the matter of its future.

Furthering that opportunity for conscious choice and influence for the preservation of humanity, is the choice that the DCTP recognizes and is challenged to provide an answer to, without shooting itself in the foot, without the cure killing the patient. Hence the operational need for extreme discretion about the process of disclosure and assimilation of the DCTP truths into the pre-2012 culture. 71. The DCTP suggests the natural life boosting effects of the 2012 timing will one day begin to boost different global competing futures, and amplify their diverging into increasingly separate and distinct global future timelines. While we all will continue to exist in all the futures, our conscious volitional quantum soul energy has a choice as to where we take most of our consciousness.

When we take enough of our consciousness somewhere that somewhere becomes more physically real and solid and dense. When we take very little of our consciousness down another possible free-will timeline, that timeline tends to hold less energy, and is comparably, a more dream-like phantom reality. 72. The DCTP suggests there the more conscious you become by connecting with the consciousness that exists, the more potential you have to be an agency, in your own way, of helping to steer the mass quantum field towards more optimal self-corrective revision. 73. The DCTP suggests there are Blue Apples everywhere at all scales of creation and life, from subatomic, to atomic, to molecular, to electromagnetic, to cellular to organismic. Blue apples are simply all the active hyper-dimensional toroidal vortex connection points of and between all conscious local life or soul in the universe at large. 74. The DCTP suggests that Blue Apples are natural spatio-temporal locations, points and regions and events where the non-local oneness continuum that encompasses this universe is more actively linked across dimensions, from local to non-local. Blue apples are the natural wormholes between local physical life and non-local spiritual life. Blue apples connect the energetic beingness vortexes of universal soul into individual expression. Blues apples connect the tough-love of transpersonal consciousness and unified beingness that is the force of evolution with individual souls, lifeforms, and all diversity of identity in time and space. 75. The biggest DCTP secret is our spirits, souls and hearts, if awakened, are natural and very powerful blue apple stargates.

76. The DCTP suggests there is a dimensional war for harvesting our soul creative energy into different future timeline realities. Heaven, hell and purgatory timelines are a literal choice for the future physical existence of the human species. Every human soul, consciousness itself, is in reality a blue apple, every auric Chakra is a blue apple, every type of vortex relationship between this dimensionality and others at all scales is a blue apple - blue apples of the solar system gravitational EM field, the blue apples of the planetary EM vortex field, blue apples in the magnetic cross lines of the geo-electromagnetic Earth field currents, blue apples of geophysical mineral life, plant life, animal life and human life. 77. The DCTP suggests technology based artificial blue apple stargates exist, whose presence on Earth may cause an Earth EM field flip short-circuit or blowout during the 2012 period, and cause consequent disastrous global environmental conditions following the 2012 period. 78. The DCTP suggests there have always been competing streams of future mass consensus reality timelines, and that competing reinforcement of different paths, different futures currently embedded in the larger time stream is a manipulated affair. There is more than one past, present and future timeline potential that is unusually converged for a while right now, all mixed for our integrated pleasure right now, as our opportunity to solve the questions of conflict that this world presents. 79. The DCTP suggests that if we solve the challenges of compassion and inclusion, of sensitivity and courage, and we dismantle the artificial stargates that are a symptom of an overload of arrogance, we then avert a planetary system overload, things go more smoothly, and the natural 2012 period stargate activation becomes all the more wonderful an opportunity for awakening and vitalizing a new untrammeled future, an undiscovered new world, where instead of a catastrophe befalling our arrogance, there is, in contrast, a grand resonance of spiritual awakening that heralds a bright future that is newly born. 80. The DCTP suggests that right now, we are pre-2012, so now is the time to make the difference by waking up from our slumber, and begin to realize how we have our individual and collective strong mass quantum probabilities associated with and invested in several different distinct futures.

The DCTP Transcendence Debriefing

1. Transcending the DCTP suggests identifies that the more energy patterns in the time and space of the subconscious or unconscious mind are at odds with the intentional energies of the conscious mind, the more we are dis-integrated and in a Gordion knot slumbering to the consciousness of the living loving infinity that surrounds us.

Our multi-dimensional soul vortex, that is the portal of who we are as pure beingness, in this numb slumber, ends up stuck with much of its essential quantum influential conscious awareness capacity being ineffective in directing its own course.

The true and hidden potential and natural powers of quantum creative influence remain elusive and hidden from easy access by the average human soul. 2. Transcending the DCTP suggests that your consciousness is deprived of much of your energy capacity as a soul, due to all the mind numbing, feeling numbing, arrogance increasing preoccupations, distractions, negative investments, unhealthy engagements, recessions into the subconscious, or into the unconscious, the buying global propaganda, the refusal to think or feel, not growing up, not being alive, not loving and not being connected to the truth and feeling and the beauty and the pain and intricacy of all that is in your worldly perceptual sphere. 3. Transcending the DCTP suggests you can be an agency of conscious compassionate loving spheres of intention and quantum accretion influence that far exceed your local limits of prescience.

4. Transcending the DCTP suggests it is our natural potential as human beings to be completely connected with God, to consciously accept the invitation from the universe, every living thing, every changing thing, and all the beauty and chaos within the whole and all its parts.

It is not only our birthright, it is our invited responsibility to wake up now and make the coming 2012 natural stargate quantum blue apple life vortical reality boosting events occur to our maximum evolutionary benefit. 5. Transcending the DCTP suggests that transpersonal awareness, is experiencing your relationship to the wholeness and connection of other souls and connection to the universe of course. Transpersonal awareness is the natural connection between the spark of divinity that is your conscious soul, with any of the chaos and intelligence of creation.

This awareness is expressed through the enlightenment of the internal conscious awareness capacity to be in directed and receptive sentient and sensorial union with any and all of the spiritual and material aspects of any object of perception. This skill is available to everyone as an effortless experience to have, if they tell the truth to themselves. This is effective without anything other than childlike humility to truly wake up and see what is, and not what you expect or want.

This is sharing connection, riding the quantum entanglement currents between everything in the living and alive universe that is, discovering how all of the consciousness of creation is available to be connected with your own consciousness, if you so truly invite it and intend it and allow it and become its agency.

When you consciously experience higher self and unconscious self manifestations that allow you access reality at a larger and deeper scale, all of creation can be a synchronistic reflective medium of who you are and who you are becoming in the beyond. 6. Transcending the DCTP it is calculated, that right now, circa 2005 on planet Earth the global mass quantum accretion power distribution is as follows: 1. 10% Higher conscious creation, up from recent past 2. 10% Unconscious creation, down from recent past 3.

60% Subconscious creation, down from recent past 4. 20% Conscious creation, up from recent past

7. Transcending the DCTP suggests if you are personally over 50% in the conscious domain for yourself, you are as enlightened as anyone can ever typically claim. But if you are volitionally all spent in the unconscious domain then the momentum consensus blueprint future is more probably your future.

If you dont consciously stand for something, you fall for everything. 8. The DCTP suggests there are future timelines that are more probable depending on what part of the quantum future power distribution you are biased to. 9. Transcending the DCTP suggests if you have invested too much of your blue apple soul energy in the subconscious domain, then you are slumbering through the predilection of your personal story, your local concerns, your perceptual habits, patterns, scripts, contracts, karmas, and illusions. 10. Transcending the DCTP suggests most are asleep in the real dream of the real world, unable to awaken from the realness of the illusion they have invested themselves into. 11. Transcending the DCTP suggests the secret truth beyond the DCTP is there is a universal mind-heart-infinity symphony of all beingness hoping we will reach out and become a cocreative friend, companion and partner in the larger creations unified intentional quest for evolving higher orders of love and consciousness.

To eventually each of us have the capacity to recover the yield of all the soul energy lost into all Maya wheels of pain and unconsciousness we have passionately invested ourselves in to learn, understand, love, become one with, and eventually transcend. 12. Transcending the DCTP suggests the secret truth of enlightenment is that simple innocent yet wise humility, honesty, sensitivity, vulnerability, caring, courage, openness, receptiveness, and desire to experience and know more of love, along with a little discernment, is and has always been the natural answer to realizing the desire for union and connection and cosmic belonging with all life and beingness.

These habits of humility, being as the wise fool lilies of the field, can make transparent all the mysteries of the souls own grain of sand within the worlds disguise, freeing one to forge into a new future never before predicted, never before possible, and that will become more spiritually integrated in ways that are currently unimaginable by any individually bound consciousness, agenda or storyline.

It is virgin timeline territory and virgin consciousness evolution territory. 13. Transcending the DCTP suggests it is the destiny of more and more souls to eventually choose the timeline of more love and less pain, more beauty and less violence, more oneness and less chaos, and more enchantment and less crisis.

But to actualize this higher evolutionary path, we must not be the ones that somehow escaped the problems in the world, but be the ones that found a way to consciously solve and resolve them. 14. Transcending the DCTP suggests that the optimal future timeline is the timeline where all the problems were solved, not avoided. The irony is that the timelines where the huge problems are avoided and ignored or covered up are the timelines that run into serious problems.

Creating something wonderful requires waking up and getting to work, not expecting someone or some spiritual agency to fix it for you. For this reason it is asserted that some disclosure of the hidden truth of our situation occur.

As a species if we can wake up to and recognize what is at stake, we may change the course of the future the DCTP fears will transpire. Return to 2012 Return to Stargates Return to Ascension Return to Time-Travel Return to Dan Burisch

16.

by Dan Eden from MondoVista Website

ViewZone asked me to write a story about the Mayan Calendar. There is a common belief that the calendar holds a prophecy that the end of the world will happen in 2012. At the time, I knew very little about the whole topic and when I began doing the research. I like to think I had an open mind. My investigation began with mainstream archaeology and the expert interpretations of the calendar. But it soon took a turn that made my hair literally stand on end. I am now convinced that these prophecies are true. To understand what is likely to happen to Earth and it's people, you will need to remain calm and try to follow the facts. It's not as simple as some people describe. It requires an understanding of some fairly complicated scientific realities, but I think I can explain them in a way that you will easily understand.

The Calendar - A Description

First, the Mayan calendar is also sometimes called the Aztec Calendar.

This calendar is recorded as a carving on the Aztec "sun stone" currently on exhibit in the National Museum of Anthropology and History located within Chapultepec Park, Mexico City. There's a lot we could say about the carved stone but most of those details are irrelevant to the end times. In our modern calendar, called the Gregorian Calendar, we have days, weeks, months and years.

In the Mayan Calendar it's more complex. In fact, it's really three calendars. First there's a religious calendar that takes 260 days to complete a full religious cycle. There are 20 "weeks" made up of 13 days. Each week has a special name, a graphic logo and unique meaning associated with it. This rather reminds me of the Chinese years which cycle through "the year of the rat" and "the year of the monkey," etc., each with it's special image and meaning. Graphic logos for each of the 20 religious weeks Next there is the solar calendar.

This has 365 days, like our modern calendar. It's divided in 18 months of 20 days each. At the end of the cycle there's five special days considered to be unlucky because they don't belong to any month. Each of the months has a special name, graphic logo and some special significance. So it is possible, for any specific date, the calculate the religious week and the solar month and to predict the influences that might be guiding fate. But that's not really what's involved with the prophecy of 2012. To understand that we must look at the third calendar, called the "long count." While the first two cycles could be thought of as cogs or gears, revolving through time, the long count is a linear number of days, starting from the first day, "1," and counting through each day to the present. Any day in history can be recorded using the long count and, with some fancy mathematics, the corresponding religious week and solar month can also be found. In writing this article, I thought about creating a javascript program that would do this calculation. My friend, Gene Matlock, then told me that when he was in Mexico, he found a place that sold wooden, mechanical calculators with gears that did just that. He said that Mexicans sometimes used these mechanical calendars to foretell the future or to find auspicious times for special events like marriage or births. Anyway, although it might be nice to know the religious and solar significance, it's the long count that foretells Doomsday.

Cog or "gears" can be used to compute the religious and solar cycles for any date The days of the long count are numbered with an unusual system. Instead of writing numbers as we do, from right to left with each place being a multiple of 10 (i.e. 10000, 1000, 100, 10, 1), the Mayans had only 5 places. The first place recorded a number from 0 to 20. To the left, the second place could have a range from 0 to 17; the third from 0 to 19; the fourth from 0 to 19 and the last from 0 to 12. The numbers were written from right to left, like our system, separated by a dot. Instead of multiples of 10, the first place had a multiple of 1 (like our system); the second place a multiple of 20; the third a multiple of 360; the fourth a multiple of 7200 and the fifth a multiple of 144000. So a long count number, for example, could be written as 4.12.5.9.0 and would be calculated as follows: (4 x 144000) + (12 x 7200) + (5 x 360) + (9 x 20) + (0 x 1) or a long count of 145980. It's not too difficult to realize that the maximum number which can be recorded this way would be 12.19.19.17.20, although some researchers like to write it as 13.0.0.0.0. This amounts to a long count number of 1,872,000 days or 5125.36 years of our modern calculations. Obviously, the calendar is very old! Over the years, archaeologists have found carved monuments that recorded the long count for known dates in Mayan history. Once a date was fixed in time, it was easy to determine the "day 1" as August 11th, 3114 BC. And it was also easy to calculate the date at which the calendar would end -- December 21st, 2012. Trust me, just because the calendar ends doesn't prove that time, or the world, or life will end. We need to look carefully at December 21, 2012 and try to understand why the Mayans never calculated a date beyond this point in time. To do this we must move from Archaeology to the science of Astronomy and Astrophysics. It's all about the Sun It's ironic (or maybe not) that the Mayan Calendar is often called the "sun stone." While the calendar does have "solar" days, acknowledging the 365 days it takes for Earth to rotate around the celestial body, it is also true that the Sun plays a key role in the final day of the "long count." To understand what will happen to the Sun on December 21, 2012, we need to review some scientific terms like "ecliptic," "barycenter," and "sunspots." These are important in the discussion that follows.

We'll start with the most difficult one first.

Terms we will encounter... What is the Barycenter? You've no doubt heard that Earth revolves around the sun. Well, actually, that's not quite true! Have you heard the term "center of gravity"? It's a technical-sounding term for something pretty simple. It's the exact center of all the material (that is, mass) that makes up the object. For example, if you have a straight stick, like a ruler or yardstick, there's a place at the middle where you can balance it on your finger. That's its center of gravity. But the center of gravity may or may not be the point that is exactly in the middle, distancewise, of the object. Some parts of the object may be heavier (denser) than others. If you have something like a sledge hammer that is heavier on one end than the other, the center of gravity will be much closer to the heavy end than the lighter end. To get an idea of where the center of gravity is, rest the ends of any object like the ruler or a pencil on one finger from each hand. Slowly move your fingers together without dropping the object. Your fingers will meet underneath the object's center of gravity. You can balance the object on one finger at that special place. The actual center of gravity could be close to the surface or deep inside, depending on whether the object is flat like a ruler or a dinner plate, or "three-dimensional," like a box or a ball. And if you let the object spin (like when you throw it), it will try to spin about that point. In the case of the Earth and the sun, both bodies actually revolve, or spin, around the very center of the mass (similar to center of gravity) between them. This point is called the "barycenter." Earth and the sun are "connected" by the gravity pulling them together. It's just like the light end and heavy end of the sledge hammer. Compared to the size of the sun, Earth is about like a flea on a cat! So the center of mass between the Earth and the sun is almost--but not quite--the very center of the sun. In the case of a planet the size of Jupiter, which is 318 times as massive as Earth, the barycenter of Jupiter and the sun is a bit further from the sun's center. So, as Jupiter revolves around the sun, the sun itself is actually revolving around this slightly off-center point, located just outside its center. Thus, a planet the size of Jupiter will make the sun (or any star) appear to wobble a tiny bit.

This picture shows you that the center of mass and barycenter can be slightly different points. It isn't meant to be very accurate! We can take advantage of this bit of knowledge and look for large planets in other solar systems by learning to detect this type of tiny wobble in the star's position. For now, let's forget all the small planets and focus on Jupiter. It makes one complete trip around the Sun every 11.861773 years. There's a new theory put forth by Dr. Rollin Gillespie

which shows that Jupiter, and to a smaller degree the other less massive planets, may trigger the 11 year cycle of sunspots and solar flares. Here's how it works. The barycenter is not a single point in the Sun. Because the Sun is a rotating gaseous sphere, the barycenter forms a vertical, cylindrical "sleeve" that is partially inside and outside the main solar body. All of the planets have such a "sleeve," one inside the other, depending on their relative mass and the location of their barycenters. The particular sleeve representing the mass of Jupiter intersects the solar surface at 35.9 degrees North and South. This is precisely where sunspot and flare activity begin and end during each 11 year cycle. Scientists have noted that when Jupiter and Saturn are aligned, on the same side of the Sun, the solar activity is at its maximum; when they are on opposite sides of the Sun the solar activity is at its minimum. These cylinders are usually quite orderly because the planets adhere to a narrow plane, called the ecliptic which resembles a thin plate extending from the equator of the Sun. The planets hang out here because (in simple terms) this is the zone where the gravitation of the system is the strongest. (see below) The planets orbit the Sun in a narrow plane called the ecliptic But nature is never perfect. The Sun rotates at a slight angle (7.25 degrees), much as our Earth does. As it wobbles, it tilts the sleeves, causing them to clash with each other and eventually disrupt the surface. This disturbance, to put it simply, works its way to the surface and erupts in sun spots and solar flares. The last solar cycle was in 2001. Each active solar cycle has a period when the flares are strongest, usually happening near the solar equator, called the "solar maximum." This is significant because the next "solar maximum" event will coincide with December 21, 2012.

But wait -- there's much more! Solar flares are pieces of the sun which leap into space, discharging radiation and strong electrical currents that travel outward into space. They often fall back to the surface of the Sun. Sometimes, a very strong flare, called a Coronal Mass Ejection (CME), actually leaves the Sun and this deadly mass shoots out from the Sun towards the planets like a bullet. Usually they don't hit anything but occasionally they hit a planet like Earth. Most flares are small.

But even a small flare can be dangerous. In 1989 a flare hit the North American continent and fried electric lines, zapped power grids in the US and Canada, and created large power blackouts. Flares can also effect our moods and physical health. In theory, a large flare impacting the Earth could zap the ionosphere and irradiate the surface, killing every living organism that it touched. Solar flares and sun spots have an average cycle of 11.120412 years (estimated from one "solar maximum" to the next). Right now, 2007, we are in a relatively quiet part of the cycle. The small discrepancy between this figure and the 11.861773 year period of Jupiter is close enough to be significant but suggests that something else is also influencing solar disturbances.

Sure, it could be attributed to the various positions of the other less massive planets, but it could also be something even more significant -- the Milky Way.

The Galactic Alignment of December 21, 2012

Our solar system is part of a huge disc shaped collection of stars and planets called the Milky Way. We're located somewhere on the edge of the disc, slightly on top of the narrow disc. But very soon we'll be moving to the bottom of the disc. This change, from top to bottom, begins on December 21, 2012. Yes, that's right. On the same day when our Sun is at it's solar maximum, something will happen that's never happened before -- the ecliptic of our solar system will intersect with the Galactic plane, called the "Galactic Equator" of the Milky Way! [see below star chart] If you imagine our solar system as a bunch of peas on a plate, with a huge meatball in the center, imagine the Milky Way as a city-size pizza with the "Guiness World Book Record Meatball" in its center! Prior to December 2012 we have been drifting on the top of the pizza, never really able to see the bottom. The plate and pizza are not parallel. They are moving at different angles. We've been drifting down, down, down... and on December 21st, 2012, we will be exactly level with the crust -- forming an "x" at the Galactic Equator where galactic gravity is the strongest. After 2012, if we are still here, we will be passing through the bottom zone, viewing the Milky Way pizza from the South. Yes, there's even more!

By some amazing coincidence, not only will we be intersecting with the Galactic Equator, but we will be doing this precisely aligned with the center of the Galaxy where there is maximum mass! More mass means more gravity.

More gravity means more influence from those barycenters in our Sun. That means exponential increases in solar disruptions -- all coinciding on the same day! Whew! Above: The Hercules Cluster of galaxies This group of galaxies is held together by the gravitational attraction or "pull" of each individual galaxy on the others in the group. This demonstrates the enormous gravity contained in a galaxy, such as our own Milky Way.

An apology and acknowledgement Ok. This has been a "light weight" description of what's going to happen. It has been simplified to the point where some scholars and scientists could argue about my presentation. But the main facts are true. The date, December 21, 2012, is a special day. It represents the maximum possible influences for solar flares that the universe can provide. Undoubtedly the Mayans, or the civilization that influenced them, somehow knew about these things. Over the last decade, I have written a variety of stories about such things as underground cities and government actions that could only make sense if there were no future. I cannot help but think that maybe they, like the Mayans, know about these things. I'd specifically like to suggest that readers take another look at the underground complex at Yamantau that the Russians are building. * Could this be a haven for surviving a solar blast? * And what about past events? * Did the Hopi go underground to survive a similar event thousands of years earlier? * Should we be going underground also?

It's also important to stress that December 21, 2012 is only the "solar maximum" but that the gravitational effects of the Galaxy have already started to assert their influence on the Sun. The drift towards alignment with the galactic equator is relatively slow and, in truth, has already started. But the precise culmination of this, plus the alignment of Jupiter and Saturn all make 12/21/12 an ominous date. I especially want to thank Dr. Rollin Gillespie, a man with whom I corresponded for ten years and who first developed the idea that planetary multi-body systems could be at play in the causation of solar flares. More of his work can be read on a special page on Viewzone. Please let's have your input on this important issue. It's only six years away. Who knows, perhaps the influences of these disruptions will begin well before the solar and Galactic maximum is reached. We may not have that much time left. Here are some additional links to stories that may help understand the possibilities facing our planet and us.

Magnetic Somersaults - Other possibilities on December 21, 2012 In the first quarter of 2001, the Sun switched magnetic poles. This occurs every eleven years. Prior to this the Sun's north magnetic pole was at the north rotational pole. Now the Sun's north magnetic pole is at its south pole. Since opposite poles attract, the magnetic poles of the Earth and Sun are now at their most stable. Just about the time of 2012 Winter Solstice, the Sun's poles will switch back. During this switch there will be a tendency for the Sun's magnetic field to pull the Earth's field with it. If the Earth's magnetic poles switch, this would put stress on the planet aggravating earthquakes and volcanoes, not to mention destruction of the electrical power distribution grid. And, if the switch happens fast enough don't ever expect your computer to work again. But if you have old tube type equipment, keep it. It should survive just fine. It will work if you can find electricity. Return to 2012

17.

Spanish version November 30, 2009 from PreventDisease Website As the Earths 2012 alignment with the galaxys centre gets closer, we will hear positive and negative messages in the media. Since they love to add drama and hype to sell a story, coverage will most likely be sensational, fearful, and negative.

There is a shift occurring, but that shift is up to us. Hollywood is releasing a film called 2012 this November that capitalizes on the apocalyptic and catastrophic fears around 2012. It will surely frighten the public, since it focuses on Earth calamities.

We can surmise the Earth does survive in this movie, since you can go to the web site and vote for the best post-2012 world leader. Leave it to Tinsel Town! If only Steven Spielberg could do an uplifting movie on this event. To address the media hype around 2012, it will be important for us to hold a positive energy and convey an optimistic message. We really dont need to repeat the fear that Y2K created.

To that end, we would like to share some uplifting messages that we received recently from Spirit on this Great Shift of Ages in our Divine Connections course.

2012 is Here First of all, the galactic energies of 2012 are already here. They started to arrive almost three decades ago. It is a continuum of energy that we are in and it wont just take place on Dec. 21, 2012.

The decreasing magnetics of the planet, along with increased solar flares, have already been impacting our consciousness, global warming, and Earth changes. We have witnessed the dismantling of structures that no longer work such as Wall Street and the Berlin Wall. From a spiritual perspective, 2012 is associated with the co-creation of New Earth which has been happening over the last several years.

There will not be a marked delineation of Old World/New World on the planet, but rather a spectrum of energies. Some countries will carry more Old World energy and others will have more New Earth energy. Some will be more receptive to the infusion of light and some will remain in the dark. Within our cities there will be pockets of light; even within our neighborhoods there will be folks of the Old World and those who carry the 2012 vibrational signature. Within yourself, you will have parts, sub-personalities or archetypes that have ascended to the New Earth, and others which will live in Old World energies. Some aspects of yourself may still be influenced by the negative ego or resist transformation.

These energies will co-exist within you, and for those on a spiritual path the balance will definitely favor the resonances of the New World. In this sense, the microcosm always mirrors the macrocosm. This is not an all-or-nothing event. We are in the process of being reborn as the Sacred Human as we acquire more light.

The esoterics say a gradual transition from Homo Sapien to Homoluminescent will occur.

It can only occur through a deeper intelligence and collective consciousness.

Collective Consciousness Collective consciousness is a mode of awareness that emerges at the first transpersonal stage of consciousness, when our identities expand beyond our egos.

A crucial capacity that accompanies this awareness is the ability to intuitively sense and work with the interactions between our and others energy fields, physically, emotionally, mentally and spiritually.

For example, just as Gene Rodenberry imagined a future where Star Treks Spock could mind meld with others, more of us are now becoming aware of our capacity not only to intuit each others thoughts and emotions, but also to consciously think and create together without communicating through our five senses.

Collective Psychosis C.G. Jung, the great doctor of the soul and one of the most inspired psychologists of the twentieth century, had incredible insight into what is currently playing out, both individually and collectively, in our modern-day world. Jung never tired of warning that the greatest danger that faces humanity is to unwittingly fall into our unconscious en masse such that we become instruments for a psychic epidemic to wreak havoc in the world, just like we see today Jung writes that psychic epidemics, are infinitely more devastating than the worst of natural catastrophes. The supreme danger which threatens individuals as well as whole nations is a psychic danger. We are in the midst of a collective psychosis that has become so normalized that very few people are even talking about it, which is itself an expression of our collective madness. How things actually turn out depends upon how consciousness responds to the situation. During a collective manifestation of the unconscious, the great danger is a mass movement where millions, or even billions of people fall into their unconscious together, igniting a psychic epidemic which spawns an apocalyptic war that ravages life on earth and destroys the biosphere of the planet.

To quote Jung, The unconscious works sometimes with most amazing cunning, arranging certain fatal situations, fatal experiences, which make people wake up. Catastrophe can only be avoided if enough people wake up to what is being revealed to us as we act out the unconscious, and then connect with each other so as to de-activate, assimilate, and transform the potentially deleterious effects of the activated daemon. We can then, under

the guidance of the Self, our intrinsic wholeness, help each other to usher in a new era of sustainable peace, understanding and mutual co-operation.

Our very continued existence as a species on this beautiful planet depends upon this realization.

Blessings in Drag When we become taken over by the unconscious, to quote Jung, the unconscious in large measure ousts and supplants the function of the conscious mind. The unconscious usurps the reality function and substitutes its own reality. Unconscious thoughts manifest themselves in senseless, unshakable judgments upheld in the face of reality. When we find ourselves ignoring factual evidence and holding a magical belief that we rationally know not to be true, we are under a spell, being driven by the unconscious, which is at that point in the drivers seat.

The psychic factors which make possession possible are suggestibility, lack of critical discernment, unwillingness or inability to self-reflect, fearfulness, propensity to superstition and prejudice. The contents that take us over when we are possessed by the unconscious appear as phobias, exaggerated affects, peculiar convictions, idiosyncrasies, stubborn plans, compulsions and obsessions, all of which are not open for discussion or correction. We must realize that every moment of our experience is inseparable from our own consciousness, which is to recognize the fluid, non-objective and thus, dreamlike nature of reality.

Just like figures in a dream, the way we observe the world literally evokes the very world we are observing.

This means that it is through our awareness itself that we can intervene in the underlying matrix of creation and find the leverage point where we can change the waking dream we are having, which is evolution-in-action.

Interestingly, we wouldnt have woken up and had this realization without the antagonistic cooperation of other forces that are secretly allies in disguise, catalysts of consciousness appearing as adversaries, blessings in drag.

Duality to Oneness As we connect to higher realms of consciousness, we move beyond the existence of a polarized world where things are only black or white, good or evil, and instead we experience a continuum of energies.

To transcend our duality, we need to move to a state of unconditional love and non-judgment of our self and others.

For our planet, we will overcome duality with the archetypal blending of the Divine Feminine and Sacred Masculine.

Karma and Ego When we are living in higher dimensional energies, the law of cause-and-effect or karma takes a back seat to the law of attraction.

The magical process of synchronicity guides the art of co-creation and manifestation. If we are creating from a conscious, enlightened part then our results will be magical, and without the burden of unfinished business and painful lessons. We are learning how to manifest from light, love and joy. If we are creating from an unconscious part, then karmic lessons and transforming shadow will be involved. Due to our wounding and the resistance of the negative ego, our lessons may be challenging and painful. But there is a pot of gold at the end of the rainbow. Once we transform our darkness, that aspect moves into light. We are not trying to kill or annihilate the ego. The ego should be the willing servant of our soul. We want to be soul-guided as opposed to ego driven. The egoic selves are transformed through

the process of love, pain and suffering. Love moves us beyond narcissistic self-absorption. The higher purpose of suffering that coincides with difficult lessons is the transmutation of the ego. With the loss of the egoic selves comes a void and emptiness.

Replenish this void with the higher octave emotions such as love, gratitude, joy, and 2012 energies.

Descending Heavenly Energies The 2012 alignment through the process of transformation enables us to bring more sacred, heavenly energies to Earth. They move down to us, allowing us to connect more consistently with Source energy. We dont need to die and go up to experience facets of heaven on Earth. We are meant to rejoice in these divine vibrations, celebrate the rebirth of Paradise within, and create beauty and harmony in our lives. Lets remember this is not a polarized experience, but one that lies on an array of frequencies. We will still have bad days. We can slide up and down this spectrum based on what level of consciousness we are coming from. As messengers of these energies, we dont need to convert others but through role modeling, a ripple effect will occur.

Those who are ready but not there yet will be magnetized to this higher energy through the law of attraction and synchronicity. These are indeed exciting times to be living and at times they are tumultuous.

Remember, this event only happens every 26,000 years. Arent you glad you showed up for it! In conclusion, then, it is of the highest importance for our individual and collective flourishing to appreciate the importance of global consciousness and spirituality in opening deeper access to our encounter with Reality. There is more to Reality than any one cultural, religious or disciplinary narrative. And awakening the global lens, the global heart and mind has been a perennial concern of our great spiritual traditions through the ages.

Our future now depends on making this shift together.

Return to 2012 Return to Ascension

18.

July 11, 2010 from PreventDisease Website Spanish version

Is the future of the world uncertain, chaotic, and filled with despair?

2012 is the subject of much controversy, but what is so important about 2012 , and why is everybody talking about it? Here's a closer look at what really is happening to humanity, and it's not all doom and gloom. The ancient Maya developed a highly advanced calendar that was so advanced that it could predict lunar eclipses thousands of years into the future. The Mayan calendar is even more accurate than our own. The end date of their calendar is December 21, 2012. Many people have speculated as to whether this date will truly be the end of humanity or if it will spell out a new beginning for humanity.

In the 8th century A.D the Mayans predicted that white skinned bearded Gods would arrive from across the seas, on March 5, 1519. On that precise date Cortes and his conquistadors arrived in the new world. Based off their prophecies the Hopi Indian also believe that 2012 would be a pevitle time in human history.

The Hopi Indian believe that the world (human race) has been created and destroyed four times. The Hopi Indian now believe that we will be transitioning into the fifth world, which according to them will not be a world based off materialism and greed, but it will be based off of Spirituality and love. The Hopi Indian do believe that humanity has the power to create it's own future, and the time running up to 2012 will be our decision as to whether we want to destroy ourselves in war or prosper in peace. A man by the name of Terence Mckenna graphed out the Ancient Divination book of the Chinese called the I-Ching (book of changes), and found that the graph spiked up on major events in world history. However in the 21st Century the I-Ching (book of changes) begins to dip downwards, and it dips down into infinity as of December 21st 2012.

Terence Mckenna believed that because of this there will be radical changes here on earth, in terms of consciousness and the way we live life. According to Mckenna, at the 2012 point, events will no longer happen in a linear fashion as before that point. It could be an expansion of consciousness, or new way of thinking, or time travel which destroys linearity etc.

Not necessarily the end of the world but a start of a new paradigm. One of McKenna's ideas is known as novelty theory. It predicts the ebb and flow of novelty in the universe as an inherent quality of time. McKenna developed the theory in the mid-1970s after his experiences in the Amazon led him to closely study the King Wen sequence of the IChing in which he based Timewave zero which calculates the intricacies of his theory Also in more modern times web bot technology, a particular series of programs that were invented in the late 1990's in order to predict possible stock futures was utilized to predict what would happen in 2012. The way it works is that it uses independent mini programs called spider programs or agents and combs the internet for hints of future financial news.

The concept behind the web bot is that massive scans of language will reveal a direct connection to the collective unconscious and a hint of the future.

In August of 2004 a predication was made about earthquakes it was predicated that 300,00 would be dead, and that water would be rising, which turned out to be the tsunami of 2004. It also predicted the anthrax attacks of 2001, the massive east cost power outage of 2003, and the destruction of hurricane Katrina in 2005.

According to the web bot program major changes will be taking place in 2012. The Web Bot ALTA report accurately predicted the BP Gulf of Mexico oil catastrophe before it occurred and is now predicting that the BP Gulf oil catastrophe may one of the largest single human depopulation events in history. A Web-Bot ALTA report dated June 21, 2010 predicts that 1.289+ billion people may die from the catastrophic effects of the April 20, 2010 BP oil spill and related environmental impacts in a period starting mid-July 2010.

The Web-Bot ALTA REPORT states that, The [oil volcano] subset continues to gain support in support of the [ill winds] area, and is still gaining support for those subsets indicating that 1.289+ billion people will perish as a result of the [ill winds] and the [oil volcano]. According to Web Bot, this high death figure may come as a result of interactivity between the impact of the BP oil catastrophe and an expected global nuclear war starting around the period commencing November 8, 2010. Scared yet? What does this all mean? Absolutely nothing until it actually happens.

Since mass consciousness can direct all activity on earth at anytime, all of these events are completely under our control. We are being tested. It is the grand experiment of earth and we are entering into what is truly the Golden Age. A NASA press announcement on December 16, 2008 revealed that a giant breach has been found in the Earth magnetic field. The magnetic field shields the earth from the solar wind which consists of plasma energy transmitted from the sun. For the entire duration of the next solar cycle, especially during its peak, plasma energy will pour in through the breach which is four times larger than the earth.

Each individuals bio-electrical system will become increasingly charged as the sun ramps up its outpouring of plasma for Solar Cycle #24. As bio-electrical systems are charged up, many will feel this most immediately as surges of nervous energy.

If individuals prepare correctly their bodies and nervous systems through increased meditation, clearing of specific negative behaviors and living in the present, the increased plasma energy can lead to a significant enhancement of human abilities.

The real governing powers of nations (the "powers that be" or the one's that think they control humanity) know very well that this time is coming. In their desperate attempts to continue to enslave humanity through incrementalism, they will fail.

A time is coming when all of humanity will see past all the lies, deceit, greed and artificial power structure that has governed the earth for thousands of years. A time when there will be no more secrets and humans will gather and embrace who and what they really are. The universe will assist us in this process. The physiological effect of an increase in solar plasma energy in the Earths electrical environment upon the human nervous system is unknown. Its effect on human relations and society is even less known. It can be predicted, however, that the surge in electrical energy on the planet and human bioelectrical systems will directly influence relations and communications between people.

This arises from the tiny bio-electrical signals that enable the brain neurons to communicate. Brain cycles represent the dominate ways our neurons communicate when organizing sensory data about the world around us.

During waking time, we typically operate using two brain wave states. * Beta is where our brains electrical signals operate between 14-40 cycles per second or Hertz (Hz) and represents a state of high mental activity typically associated with stress. * Alpha brain wave states operate at 7.5-14 cycles per second and represent a relaxed state of mind. Lower brain wave states, Theta (4-7.5 Hz) and Delta (0.5-4) are physically inactive states such as deep meditation and sleep.

The highest recorded brain wave state, Gamma (40+Hz), represents bursts of insight and has been increasingly observed in the use of higher cognitive abilities by children. As the plasma energy pours into the earth, peoples brain wave states will be affected. For some, this might be experienced as communications and interactions becoming more intense as more beta brain wave activity takes place. An analogy would be someone who has lived all

their life in a relaxed small town in the American mid-West, suddenly being transported to a busy New York City.

Alternatively, others may find that their body lacks vitality due to a rapid build up of static electricity in the Earths environment. Those able to express the bodys increased nervous energy in constructive ways, will find it much easier to start and complete projects they previously put on back burner of life. The ability to easily switch between Gamma and Alpha brain wave states will lead to greater creative insight as individuals need to calmly respond to a more challenging socio-economic environment.

The key to benefiting from increased Gamma brain wave activity is to keeping a positive and open mind where new insights are integrated. Once the brains higher cognitive skills come on line, then its vital to be able to calmly integrate new insights into our lives. By keeping an open mind and having a positive outlook individuals are most likely to succeed in dealing with the solar waves pouring through the giant hole of the Earths magnetosphere. They will be prepared for the rapid increase in plasma energy that will increases levels of electricity in the environment, and alters human bioelectric systems and brain wave patterns.

Individuals who adequately prepare themselves will literally become solar wave riders able to ride the waves of incoming solar energy to higher levels of creativity and life fulfillment. The next solar maximum will last for several years with one peak expected to be the year 2012.

The giant breach in the Earths magnetosphere means increased solar activity will directly impact peoples bio-electrical systems and brain wave states. As the current global economic meltdown proceeds with lost jobs and increased uncertainty, this is a good time to explore options in how to best express ones creative energies.

By keeping a calm open mind while being creative in a changing socio-economic environment and integrating information about extraterrestrial life, individuals can become solar wave riders where they creatively deal with waves of solar energy pouring into the planet up to 2012 and beyond. We are right now living through the end of the Mayan Grand cycle which is culmination of a 5125 year wave of history. Many cultures have spoken of this period throughout history and it's

not about what is going to happen in December 2012. It's about looking at our lives right here and now and knowing that every one of us is contributing to the outcome through our vibrations, intentions and actions. Every one of us is an instrument of culture and we are all fitting into the one planetary equation on earth. We need to realize that conscious, harmonious interconnectedness is the only way to solidify our new state and culture as that we can continue to live on this beautiful planet peacefully. Although it may be very difficult to comprehend at this time, we are entering into a Golden Age of global healing.

We must arise as the medicine warriors and each one of us has a contribution. Every single person living on earth has a role that they will play out with their unique abilities, gifts and skills. We all have a purpose and the only way to discover them are by following our passion, inspiration and joy. We can respond with great fear or with great love.

We will no longer have linear minds beyond 2012 so we must prepare our bodies for their new energy. Our hearts hold the key in finding our direct connection to the earth and the universe. A time on earth is soon coming where we will experience such chaos that it will be necessary for agents of calm to act as leaders to help humanity through this phase. All that has been unconscious is becoming conscious. All that has been hidden is being revealed. All the light that is now being exposed will be challenged by darkness. Life is never without the ying and the yang.

Know that this too has a purpose and we are about to receive a huge boost from the universe to help us through 2012 and beyond. We will prosper and the light can no longer be suppressed.

It is our destiny.

Return to 2012 Return to Ascension Return to Genetic Changes

19.

by John Lash from MetaHistory Website

Contents 1. Stars on the end-time Horizon - Real-Sky Observations for 2012 2. Countdown to 2012 - Reflections on Kali Yuga, the Maya end-time, and the Western Narrative Spell 3. The Discovery of the Next World - Reflections Beyond the Maya end-time 4. The Party of Xolotl - Magic and Initiation Among the end-time Tribes

Return to 2012 Return to The Tzolkin Maya

Stars on the end-time Horizon Real-Sky Observations for 2012 5 March 2007 Flanders I guess I began contemplating the 2012 end-time in the early 1970s, inspired by the publication of Mexico Mystique by anthropologist Frank Waters. I had been working with precession for some years, but tools and techniques were quite primitive back in those days.

I had no access to a computer, and there was not yet a lot of fancy calculation in print, either on precession or Mesoamerican calendrics. Anthony Aveni's Skywatchers of Ancient Mexico was not published until six years later. In the next decade, the 1980s, archeo-astronomy took off famously, with many books appearing at once. It was a heady time to be on the trail of ancient skylore. It is worth noting that Waters' book appeared in 1974, the inceptive moment of the 1974-2012 interval centered on the nodal year, 1993. I have suggested that this 38-year interval marks the unique generation that will navigate humanity toward the Maya end-time. 1974 signals the initial conditions for the global perspective to emerge in the minds of that generation. Those who initialized the vision of planetary transformation (or whatever) in the 1970s will transmit it to the younger members of the generation, those who live at the post-millennial end of the interval. I believe that generational continuity is essential to the viability and coherence of endtime visions.

The wave of interest in archeoastronomy, and its legitimization as a scientific genre, falls neatly into the 1974-2012 interval. John Michell's cult classic, The View over Atlantis, went up like a signal flare in 1969, calling attention to sacred landscape and ley-lines. Peter Lancaster Brown's Megaliths, Myths and Men, still the best overview of the subject, came out in 1976. Sky/ground mirroring and the stellar orientation of megalithic sites (e.g. Graham Hancock, Heaven's Mirror) are recurrent topics of the end-time.

From megalithic astronomy we take instruction on the long view of civilization and the millennial parameters of cultural evolution.

The Path of Heart Mexico Mystique was a revelation. I remember reading it in one long summer day and a short night, hunkered down in my little adobe house on La Vereda, just off Palace Avenue in Santa Fe, and trembling with excitement. It was a thrill to see end-time speculation treated seriously by a well-known anthropologist and specialist in the indigenous lore of the Southwest, especially Hopi tradition.

At the time, Frank Waters was the dean of Native American anthropology. He lived not far from me, up north in Taos, about an hour's drive along a spectacular route that (after Pilar) follows the course of the Rio Grande. That summer I visited him at Arroyo Seco. Tall and thin as a beanpole, he was an amiable and elegant man. We discussed the long-range parameters of cultural change and historical upheaval reflected in planetary and sidereal cycles. There are some things in Mexico Mystique that do not stand up today, but much more that still bears consideration. Waters used the subtitle, "The Coming Sixth World of Consciousness," linked closely to the Aquarian Age. Although he worked equally with Maya and Aztec myth and calendrics, Waters emphasized the Aztec Ages or "Suns," and in particular the motif of Ollin, "movement."

He noted that the Fifth Age is not just another age in the sequence because, "the Fifth Sun, or Sun of Movement, held for the Nahuas the added significance of being the unifying center of the four directional suns that preceded it" (p. 121). Citing Aztec Thought and Culture by Miguel Leon-Portilla (a superb book, by the way), he added:

Within the Fifth Sun, world, or era, lay another synthesizing center - the soul of man. Writes Leon-Portilla: "The profound significance of movement to the Nahuas can be deduced from the common Nahuatl root of the words movement, heart, and soul. To the ancient Mexicans, life, symbolized by the heart (y-ollo-tl), was inconceivable without the element which explains it, movement (yolli)." (p. 121) Waters saw in the heart-movement motif our challenge at the end-time: to find the path of heart for humanity, our species. He sensed that we might respond to that challenge by taking instruction from the myth of Quetzalcoatl. In his rendition of this myth, Waters noted that Xolotl was identical with Kukulcan of the Maya, a lightning god associated with Itzamna, the celestial serpent (Milky Way).

Maya and Aztec myth alike see in Xolotl the twin of the Plumed Serpent Quetzalcoatl, whose Mayan name is Gucumatz. Mexico Mystique touches on both the cataclysmic possibilities of the end-time (oddly calculated for 2011), as well as its transformational prospects for our species, but Waters does not elaborate too much on the latter. He deemed it valuable (as do I) to reckon the full duration of the Long Count. To do so, he used the Goodman-Martinez-Thompson (GMT) correlation and a start date of August 12, 3113 BCE.

In his overview of the full 5124-year period, Waters discussed the Hindu Yugas and drew upon the work of siderealist Cyril Fagan, anthroposophist Gunther Wachsmith, Gurdjieffien Rodney Collin, all of whom attempted to construct a coherent model of the Zodiacal ages - alas, without much success.

The problem is, or was at that time, that none of these people had the complete astronomical picture that shows how the pattern of Zodiacal ages is structured according to an extra-Zodiacal factor: the galactic center.

The Galactic View

The solar system (* SS) in the spiral arms or limbs of the galaxy.

The third limb, counting outwards from the center, is called the Orion limb. Distance from the SS to the galactic center (GC), about 24,000 light-years. Full span of limbs, about 30-32,000 LY. The view is foreshortened, making the outer limb look larger. Today we have the advantage of knowing quite a lot about the galactic alignment of the Zodiac.

Many current discussions of 2012 assume this alignment to be the determining factor in the Long Count, considered astronomically, but, for some odd reason, the pattern of Zodiacal Ages is rarely factored into this perspective. The galactic alignment of the Zodiac gets a lot of attention, but the overall pattern of the Zodiacal Ages is ignored - a serious oversight in endtime astronomy.

Yet 2012 has been associated with the Aquarian Age. The Zodiacal Ages (Aries, Pisces, Aquarius, etc) are measured by star-patterns on the ecliptic, a band of thirteen constellations of uneven size and extent. The stars in these constellations lie in relatively close proximity to the earth in the immediate region of the galactic limb we occupy, the third limb of four counting outward from the center. In their totality all the stars visible to us in all directions from the earth comprise about three percent of the stars in the galaxy!

Of this three percent, only a minute selection comprise the massive figures of the Zodiacal constellations. The maximum distance of these stars is not more than 1500 light-years, compared to the distance of 24,000 light-years to the galactic center. The constellations of the entire celestial sphere, including the Ecliptic band of 13 figures and 75 extra-Ecliptic formations, are composed of near, naked-eye stars in the local limb, or arm. Because we are located within the arm, we notice the region of dense star population, the edge of the spiral arm, and on either side of that, constellations spread across less densely populated space. The lateral edge of the spiral arm, seen from within, is the Milky Way.

It intersects the band of Zodiacal constellations at two points, between Taurus and Gemini, and between Scorpio and Sagittarius.

The above map (Erlewine, Astrophysical Directions) shows the Milky Way as the shaded area. The path of the ecliptic where the sun moves through the sky (actually, the orbital plane of the earth) runs from right to left, crossing the Milky Way at an angle of about 65 degrees. Out of the 88 constellations in the celestial sphere surrounding the earth, the ecliptic traverses thirteen distinct star-patterns: Taurus, Gemini, and Cancer are shown here.

The Zodiacal constellations, or ecliptic constellations as they can also be called, stand apart from the extra-Ecliptic constellations, such as Orion seen here beneath Taurus. Orion, with his right arm raised up toward the horns of Taurus, seems to dangle off the Milky Way. The Milky Way intersects the ecliptic at an angle of 65 degrees, as just noted. Erlewine follows astronomical convention and inserts a hypothetical median line or equator in the Milky Way, the so-called galactic equator. It runs from Perseus to Auriga, between Taurus and Gemini, down into Canis Minor and so on around the full celestial sphere. The region where the Milky Way and ecliptic intersect is visually remarkable because the horns of Taurus extend into the dense starstream of the Milky Way, and the feet of twins likewise dip into it. In naked-eye observation, these graphic details create a striking visual impression. So, the entire celestial sphere we see does not comprise the galaxy, but a mere section of the local limb, the third from center counting outwards. All the stars around the earth fit into a "bubble of observability" crisscrossed by two bands, the band of the Milky Way, consisting of eighteen constellations, and the band of the thirteen Zodiacal constellations on the Ecliptic.

Other star-patterns are spread out over the expanse of the celestial sphere in all directions.

The Two Zodiacs The best way to track the Zodiacal Ages is with a flat model that displays all thirteen ecliptic patterns in a circular format. Such models are extremely hard to find, however. Despite all that has been written on the Ages, you will not find a clear, straightforward illustration of the Zodiac in a circular format except, perhaps, among the little-known school of sidereal astrology. I developed the model that I now use at the start of the 1974 - 2012 interval.

The illustration below shows at the center a typical horoscope plotted on the grid of twelve astrological signs, and simultaneously, the real-sky constellations excluded from the horoscope. Although it is difficult to make out the details, the central wheel consists of the twelve zodiacal signs (Aries, Taurus, Gemini) with planets in them on a specific date.

The sign Zodiac of popular astrology uses a division of the ecliptic plane into twelve equal slices, like a pizza. Planetary positions are measured on this uniform grid irrespective of their actual. observable positions relative to the surrounding stars. Beyond the sign Zodiac we see the shape and extent of the real-sky constellations that lie along the rim of the ecliptic; hence I call this model the "Rimsite."

The arrows extending outwards from the starless horoscope show how each planet in the sign Zodiac has another position in the star Zodiac. This is conversion to Star Base, the graphic format of the real-sky constellations. It is perplexing to learn that Sun sign astrology based on uniform ecliptic sectors ignores the stars, but this is an irrefutable fact. I have spilled tons of ink in the effort to sort out the two formats, sign Zodiac and star Zodiac, but that is not the issue here. The above illustration serves to show that the ecliptic plate with the full array of astrological signs - i.e., the horoscopic format - is independent of the surrounding constellations.

Astrologers locate planets in that format (the orbital plane of the earth divided into twelve equal sections of 30 degrees each) and totally ignore the irregular star patterns visible in the night sky. Astrology ignores the stars. We have to look to astronomical resources to work out any patterns of Zodiacal timing that may apply to 2012. To track the Zodiacal Ages, we observe how the ecliptic plate rotates against the surrounding stars. Precession is mapped by a carousel movement: the slow rotation of the ecliptic plate with its array of twelve Sun signs, at the rate of one degree every 72 years against the background of the fixed stars. 72 X 360 = 25,920 years for the full cycle. Precession occurs as the solstices and equinoxes (the four quarters of the starless astrological grid system) shift against the starry background of the constellations. The conventional marker for the Zodiacal Ages is the spring equinox or vernal point, abbreviated VP. This is the first degree of the astrological sign Aries.

It might be equated to the one-hour mark on a clock face. Imagine that the immense ecliptic plate is a clock face numbered 1 to 12 and divided into four quadrants, framed by a graphic display of thirteen mythical figures such as a bull, crab, scorpion, centaur, etc. The clock face rotates so that in one epoch of history the one-hour mark stands in front of the bull (Taurian Age: 4400 - 1850 BCE), but in another epoch, it stands in front of the crab (Cancerian Age: 7800 - 6150 BCE).

Precession, then, is the rotation of the ecliptic sign-carousel relative to the circle of environing real-sky constellations.

Real-Sky Graphics The position of the sun against the background of the Star Zodiac on March 21 of any year shows the Zodiacal Age for that historical epoch. Currently, the VP stands in the constellation of Pisces, the Fishes, at the nine o'clock position in the model above. It is slowly shifting clockwise from under one of the fishes into the next constellation, Aquarius, the Waterbearer. There are two ways to show the real-sky constellations, by composites or dot-to-dot patterns, as seen on astronomical maps: - and by graphics, presenting a visual or imaginary version of the star-pattern: Any astronomical map will show the position of the spring equinox for a given date (VP: 1950), but traditionally, maps used for naked-eye observation depict the constellations graphically, e.g., the two fishes of Pisces in the celestial atlas of Elijah Burritt, 1835, based on the woodcuts of Albrect Durer, 1510. One of the fishes swims up and away from the ecliptic, toward Andromeda, the Chained Woman. The other swims westward along and above the ecliptic toward the neighboring constellation of Aquarius.

The second fish might be imagined to be swimming into currents that stream from the urn held by the Waterbearer. This is one way to visualize the transition from Pisces to Aquarius. However you picture it, the VP has a long, long way to go before it enters the composite stars of Aquarius - at least eight hundred years. This is not a matter of speculation, but a simple astronomical computation.

Beta Piscium, the star that marks the nose of the fish swimming left to right along the ecliptic, has a longitude of 348.59 for the year 2000. This is 11.41 degrees from the VP, the zero point on the ecliptic. 11.41 X 72 = 822 years until the VP reaches that star and leave the Pisces composite. Technically, the VP does enter the composite stars of the constellation of Aquarius until 2822 CE! The Fishes are joined by a thread that provides distinct visual separation from the neighboring constellation, the Ram. The VP coming from the Ram touched that thread around 120 BCE, when the Piscean Age began. Measured strictly in astronomical terms, the duration of the

Piscean Age is about 2900 years. The Zodiacal Ages are uneven in length, because the starpatterns that designate them are irregular in shape and extent.

Unlike other students of cosmic timing, I reject the model of twelve Ages computed in uniform periods of 2160 years. It is far more instructive, I contend, to look at the timing of the Ages in real astronomical terms. Every star in the ecliptic constellations can be precisely dated. The Zodiac is a star clock, a precision instrument for tracking the Ages. The graphic formations used to track precession belong to the observable Star Zodiac and have nothing to do with the starless, non-observable signs. Due to this situation, we require two sets of names to distinguish signs and constellations.

I prefer to the leave the well-known Greco-Latin names (Aries, Taurus, Gemini, etc) to designate the astrological signs, and to adopt pictorial, "story-book" names for the real-sky constellations: Ram, Bull, Twins, etc. Unfortunately, astronomical maps use the astrological names. In the astronomical map above I have supplied the pictorial names, Ram, Fishes, Waterbearer, in place of the usual Latin names. Getting the habit of using the story-book names is not easy, but it helps hugely once it is acquired. We can then refer to sign and constellation simultaneously. Someone born, say, on September 26, has the sun in 4 degrees of the sign Libra on the ecliptic scale, and in the face of the Virgin in the graphic form of the constellations.

The placement in the constellation does not mean that this person, presumed to be a Libra, is really a Virgo. The real-sky placement of the sun, the moon, and planets does not denote personality, and does not yield a stereotype comparable to the Sun sign types in astrology.

It points to another dimension of human experience, the transpersonal realm.

Midnight Hour To return to the question of how 2012 relates to the Zodiacal Ages: we noted that Frank Waters and other scholars were unable to determine this connection because they did not have the extra-Zodiacal factor that identifies the midnight hour of precessional timing. The VP goes around the Zodiac from one Age to the next, precessing against the natural or seasonal order of the constellations.

The Ages run in reverse: * Geminian (6150 - 4400 BCE) * Taurean (4400 - 1820 BCE) * Arien (1820 - 120 BCE) * Piscean (current, began 120 BCE) This is the sequence of the Ages, but it does not reveal their pattern. We only discover the pattern of cosmic timing when we lock the complete cycle of Zodiacal Ages into an extraZodiacal framework so that the zero hour or midnight hour can be determined. The decisive factor outside the Zodiac is the galactic center. The galactic center does not, of course, lie in the local limb where the Zodiacal star-patterns appear. It is situated at the core of the four-armed galactic spiral, about 24,000 light-years from us, eighteen times more distant than any star in the Zodiac. The core itself is not visible to us, but the direction toward it can be seen in the area where one Zodiacal figure, the Archer, comes together with another, the Scorpion. The galactic center, which is far, far beyond the stars of the Zodiac, can be located provisionally within the Zodiacal constellations, thus providing a midnight setting for the cycle of the Ages. The full precessional cycle is called the Kalpa. When the VP aligns to the galactic center, the Kalpa "turns over," and a new precessional cycle commences. Although the vernal point is the hour-hand of the Zodiacal Ages, it is not the alignment of the VP to the galactic center that determines the midnight moment. Calculations of precession, comparison of the World Ages in different traditions, and other details of astro-mythological lore have led most scholars (including myself) to conclude that the zero hour happens when the winter solstice aligns to the galactic center.

Currently, the position of the winter solstice, where the sun stands on December 21 each year, is about three degrees westward from the best estimate for the sightline to the galactic center: that is, 27 degrees of the astrological sign Sagittarius, or ECL 267. The position of the winter solstice is by definition at 270 on the ecliptic scale.

At 72 years per degree, there are three degrees or about 200 years to go before the Zodiac ticks down to the zero hour, the end of one full cycle of 25,920 years and the start of another. According to my studies of the Dendera Zodiac, an ancient artifact that shows graphically how galactic alignment defines the frame of the Zodiacal Ages, the exact date would be 2216 CE.

The start-date for the cycle then ending would be 72 X 360 (the full cycle) less 2216 years = 23,704 BCE. The full duration of the current precessional cycle (Kalpa) is 25,920 years. If you compare this period to a 24-hour day, we are living in the last eleven minutes of that day. Michael's Erlewine's groundbreaking manual, Astrophysical Directions, was published by the Heart Center School of Astrology in Ann Arbor in 1977, three years after Mexico Mystique appeared. It clearly shows the location of the galactic center near the tail of the Scorpion, just above the sting. The neighboring constellation of the Archer appears to aim his arrow directly at this point - one of numerous cosmic directional signals encoded in the Zodiac and extraZodiacal constellations.

(Paul LaViolette, known for his cataclysmic cosmic ray theory, claims to have discovered that the Archer points to the galactic center, but Erlewine's book appeared before his work. In 1977 anyone looking at Michael Erlewine's detailed sky maps could have made the observation. I clearly recall discussing it with astrologer Ray Mardyks in a cafe in Santa Monica in 1978.) Erlewine's map (detail above) clearly shows the galactic center (GC) at 0 on the scale of the galactic equator, an imaginary line running transversely through the local limb. The darkened region is the Milky Way, the lateral edge of the galactic arm we inhabit. We have already seen how the Milky Way intersects the ecliptic constellations of the Twins and the Bull in the northern reaches of the sky. Here, toward the south, it intersects the Scorpion and the Archer (the "story-book" names).

There is a distinct bulge in the Milky Way in this region, suggesting the bulge of the immense star mass at the hub of our galaxy. Toward the Archer we are looking at the hub, but cannot actually see it because, astronomers say, it is shrouded in a thick cloud of black dust. In the constellation of the Archer (astronomical name Sagittarius, not to be confused with the astrological sign of the same name!), the star gamma, shown by the Greek letter resembling a y, marks the tip of the arrow aimed toward the Scorpion. The galactic center (GC) is a little above his line of aim. Close and sustained observation of these immense composites shows that the Archer aims at the star eta in the lower torso of the Scorpion. Yet the close proximity to the GC leaves the impression that his arrow points to that locale as well. It is certainly remarkable that the distinctive pointing gesture of the Archer directs our attention on a sightline on the galactic center. Bear in mind that the Archer visualization is highly improbable, and does not intuitively come to mind. The composite of this constellation is often

drawn dot-to-dot as a teapot, which it roughly resembles. It certainly looks more like a teapot than an archer aiming his bow! I would not claim that this constellation was designed to point out the galactic center, because, obviously, no star-pattern is a human construct.

But I would suggest that from time before reckoning people were taught to visualize the composite stars as an archer aiming his arrow in that way so that their attention would be graphically directed to the galactic center. Almost none of composites of the constellations resemble the graphics attached to them. They are deliberate devices of visualization intended to bring attention to specific astrophysical directions. On the above astronomical map, the ecliptic is the line marked 240 - 250 - 260, running right to left. This is the path of the sun throughout the year. At 270 the sun reaches the winter solstice. With precession, the solstice point shifts west (to the right). Clearly the point of the solstice is close to alignment with the GC, but it has a way to go - around 200 years.

The infrastructure of the Dendera Zodiac confirms this timescale. Detail of the Dendera Zodiac, showing how Axis E points to the sightline for the galactic center, located at the tip the Archer's arrow, above the tail of the Scorpion.

Starry Endowment The constellations shown here, called by their story-book names, Archer and Scorpion, are not the same at the astrological signs, Sagittarius and Scorpio. Likewise for the Fishes, which is a real-sky composite not to be confused with the astrological sign Pisces. If you are a Pisces (February 20 - March 21), you do not have the sun in the star pattern of the Fishes, but in the star pattern of the preceding constellation, the Waterbearer.

Yet this is not exactly the case, either. If you are born in the last 10-12 degrees of the sign Pisces (i.e., after March 10), your natal sun is indeed located in the composite stars of the fish that swims along the ecliptic. Can we say, then, that in some cases a sign or part of a sign will coincide with a constellation? Not really. There is no point-to-point "correspondence" between signs and constellations, and there never was a time when they coincided. The sign Zodiac and the star Zodiac are two distinct formats.

This fact does not invalidate Sun sign astrology, but throws it into an entirely new perspective. I discuss this matter at length in my book, Quest for the Zodiac.

The formidable task of decoding the Star Zodiac reveals what I call stellar phylogenetics. I mention it here because it may turn out that phylogenetic transfer is one of the key revelations of the end-time. Rather than impose this notion as a pet idea of mine, I would like to see how it reveals itself over time, in the immediate future and the years leading up to 2012. In Quest for the Zodiac, I explain that we all have two kinds of inheritance. The first is our universally recognized genetic inheritance from blood relations. This is the component of genetic replication carried in the chromosomes, where about 3 percent of our DNA is configured. The other kind of inheritance is a transfer to the individual from the human species as a whole - genomic, rather than genetic (chromosomal).

The genomic inheritance, which I call the endowment, can be decoded from the array of planets in the graphic constellations, Ram, Twins, Virgin, Scorpion, etc. Unlike the astrological signs, which present a set of twelve psychological types, the constellations of the real-sky Zodiac do not indicate consistent personality traits but transpersonal gifts and faculties inherited by each person from the experience of humanity at large: the genomic endowment of humanity's longrange potential. Phylogenetic transfer is pan-species inheritance, the way humanity transmits its high-end learning assets from one generation to the next. In Maya Cosmogenesis 2012, John Major Jenkins writes: "They [the Maya] used thirteen constellations rather than twelve. This fact would result in a different timing for the anticipated shift in World Ages, one that would not agree with the dawn of the Aquarian Age recognized in Western astrology" (p. xxxvi). Precisely so. The real-sky Zodiac of thirteen irregular constellations is not only the frame of the World Ages but also presents the "cosmic code" of phylogenetic transfer. It shows how the genius of the human species evolves over time by a genomic transfer of peak potential.

Jenkins says, "according to Maya calendric science, the Great Cycle times our collective unfolding as a species, as well as the cycles of culture" (p. 22-23).

The trick is, to understand how long-range changes in the human species come to fruition via self-actualized individuals living in a particular historical epoch.

Sophia's Correction I seem to recall that Jenkins refers somewhere to the genius of the human species. His language for the Maya end-time points to that conception. In many ways Maya Cosmogenesis 2012, which appeared in 1998, is a parallel text to Quest for the Zodiac, published a year later. Jenkins based book on studies of the Maya calendar and cultural mythology of Mesoamerica, and I based mine on the Dendera Zodiac and comparative mythology.

The difference is in the way we each set up expectations for the Next Age. Jenkins asserts that precession is a model of evolution with each Age as a "growth cycle" comprised of particular parameters and lessons (p. 22). He assumes that with the change of the Age or shift to the "Next World," humanity as a whole undergoes a spiritual rebirth: If precession is understood as a collective gestation of the human spirit, it requires a birth moment in which the cumulative achievements of the 26,000-year growth cycle come to fruition. (p. 324) In this moment of fruition or "spiritual embryogenesis" (a notion derived from Oliver Reiser), Jenkins sees the Galactic Center "as the supreme sociopolitical organizing principle" (324), and he anticipates that the connection to the center will produce a massive catalytic effect upon humanity, shifting the attitude, if not the behavior, of our entire species. For my part, I am far less optimistic about a collective shift, and more inclined to see a surge of genius potential in certain individuals. My efforts to decode the real-sky Zodiac have led me to believe that phylogenetic transfer is perpetual, and there is no key moment of collective shift into a higher octave of awareness - although there are sudden cataclysmic moments of collective breakdown.

In the 2012 shift I see a moment when the surge of genius potential in individuals who realize their endowment can play over into collective life, inducing critical changes. To me the most fascinating thing about 2012 is how the surge parlays into a social and collective correction - or IF it does. While Jenkins (and others) anticipate "the transformation of humanity into something completely new (p. xxxv)," I see novelty emerging through gifted individuals all the time, all

through history, but in particular ebbs and flows that can be tracked (as Terence McKenna attempted to do with his timeline based on permutations of the I Ching).

Novelty is a feature of human expression carefully observed and nurtured in the Mysteries, as I explain in Not in His Image. Gnostics identified the singularity of the human species by the Greek word monogenes, which scholars translate as "only-begotten." I protest that "onlybegotten" is a received concept reflecting bogus theological doctrines that have nothing to do with the educational insight of the telestai, the seers who maintained the Mysteries. The singularity of the human species - its capacity to continually express novelty - is a central theme in the Gnostic myth of Sophia.

I propose that novelty emerges as the peak potential realized by certain people in one generation or historical epoch assumes a new configuration in a later generation or epoch. Phylogenetic transfer is ongoing and diachronic, with novelty possible at any moment, although there are certain moments when it surges. 2012 is one of those moments. Both Jenkins and I agree that this date is not the dawn of the Aquarian Age, nor the end of the precessional cycle. I propose that it is the moment when we acquire the navigational skills to get to the end. In this process, which will take about 200 years to unfold, the concept of the Galactic Center is of paramount importance. Jenkins makes this point several times, and I too insist on that emphasis, but with a different spin. Additional to singularity, monogenes, the sacred narrative of the Old World Mysteries carries the themes of self-organization, autogenes, and correction, diorthosis. Self-organization, or autopoesis, is the property innate to all living matter, but according to the sophisticated parapsychology of the gnostikoi, we, the human species, can deviate from what is innate due to our preference for abstraction and model-making. We come to like our ideas about reality more than reality itself.

We cocoon in ideational and technological gimmicky, in models and memes. Doing so, we lose touch with the essential intelligence that informs all life, and we even lose our connection to humanity itself, becoming dehumanized, routinary, banal and predictable (as don Juan remarked to Castaneda in their conversation about alien intrusion by "the flyers"). In some manner that is not entirely clear in what remains of Gnostic writings, the ancient seers understood that our tendency to deviate from our true potential into artificiality was connected with a problem facing Sophia, the goddess who morphed into the earth and who is now the living intelligence of the earth, the planetary entelechy.

They taught that Sophia is involved in a correction by which she becomes aligned to the cosmic source of all organic life in our galaxy: the galactic core or Pleroma. We have seen that knowing the actual physical locality of the core is essential to plotting the cycle of Zodiacal Ages by the determination of a midnight hour based on extra-Zodiacal alignment. Is this alignment, so far stated purely in astronomical terms, somehow related to the correction of Sophia by which she reintegrates herself with the Aeons in the Pleroma?

Exploring this question is, in my view, the leading challenge of the 2012 end-time. I will continue to develop the notion of Sophia's correction in follow-up articles on real-sky lore relating to 2012. For now, I would like to wind up this article with a summary comment: The correction of Sophia, the planetary entelechy, is the single most important factor yet to be integrated into our growing intuition of the 2012 end-time and what lies beyond it. As far as I know, nothing in the current debate refers explicitly or even by implication to the role of the planetary intelligence in the immanent changes facing our species.

There is huge speculation about pole shift and the reversal of the magnetic fields, but these phenomena are not considered in terms of conscious orientation of the Gaian mind. As far as Gaia is concerned, the materialistic paradigm still prevails, and the assumption of blind, unconscious matter pervades the debate.

When do we start talking about the shift of the planetary mind, Sophia's correction, rather than a shift in the collective mind of humanity, and how do we establish the syntax for such a conversation? 2012 brings an opportunity to contemplate the mind of Gaia as the supernatural intelligence that complements human genius and engages singularity rather than the collective psyche or massmind mentality. It may be that Gaia-Sophia favors the gifted, those who fulfil the genomic endowment, and depends on them for her correction.

This is what the Gnostic teachings appear to indicate.

Back to Contents

Countdown to 2012 Reflections on Kali Yuga, the Maya end-time, and the Western Narrative Spell January 2007 Andalucia

With the turn of the new year, I found myself reflecting on the proximity of 2012, the end date of the Maya calendar. Discussion of this timing has been escalating rapidly for a number of years now, and not just in New Age circles.

A great many internet sites and forums are dedicated to it. It is the main subject of Daniel Pinchbeck's book, 2012 The Return of Quetzalcoatl (which I have yet to read), and a dozen other speculative tomes. Currently, John Major Jenkins and Carl Johan Calleman are slugging it out to see who will be the victorious visionary of the 2012 countdown. This may be the apt moment for me to weigh in on this arcane subject. Apart from a tentative essay for phenomenamagazine.com, I've kept mum so far. More and more of late, friends are asking me what I think about the "end-time" and what others like Jenkins and Calleman are saying about it.

Those who know something of my work in astral phylogenetics (Quest for the Zodiac), stellar mythology, the World Ages, and precessional timing (Dendera Decoded), are curious about my views. Having spent a good many years in the practice of skywatching and investigation into the Zodiacal timeframe and various schemes of long-term chronology - Hindu, Egyptian, Tibetan, Maya, Aztec, Persian, Mithraic, Gurdjieffian, theosophical, anthroposophical, and others I forget - I feel almost obliged to comment on this trendy topic. I will dispense with a pungent Lashian overview of the World Ages (he says, barely restraining the urge to salivate heavily). What follows is a short description of the Maya Long Count, with some thoughts about what might be facing us in the countdown to the end-time. Maya fresco thought to depict the Flood, with volcano erupting in the background.

Thirteen Baktuns The Maya calendar is a cultural artifact from the general category of the World Ages. Computing the long-term chronology of the cosmos was a concern in all ancient cultures from China to Peru.

The introduction of calendars to regulate civic life and agricultural planning was a long and complex process. In devising these systems, the calendar-makers did not limit themselves to time in the human scale, but extended their computations to countless thousands of years. In these permutations, they sometimes came up with remarkable figures. The number 4,320,000,000 occurs in Hindu chronology where it is associated with the cosmological motif of the "Days and Nights of Brahma." This number caught the attention of Joseph Campbell, who observed that 4,320,000,000 years, or 4.32 billion years, is intriguingly close to the current estimate for the geological age of the earth, 4.5 billion years. (I apply the Hindu norm rather than the accepted geological estimate in my calculation of the age of Gaia.)

4320 is the base number that generates the four Yugas of Hindu cosmology. It also shows up in the chronology of prediluvian kings compiled by the Babylonian priest, Berossus, and elsewhere. It is an artificial norm (a sacred canonical unit, if you prefer) that also factors into various geological, sidereal, solar, lunar, and planetary time cycles. Like the Hindu timescale, Maya calendrics runs into "nonillions" of years - the range of remote, unimaginable numbers. The mathematician-priests who devised the Maya calendar recorded exact dates of events, down to the day, but they also liked to extrapolate far backward and forward in time. The precision of their planetary, solar, and lunar tables is impressive.

They calculated the cycles of Venus and the Earth as accurately as we do today, down to four decimal points. This mastery of verifiable time-cycles commands respect, and obliges us to look closely at their long-term extrapolations. For the Maya and all other ancient peoples, verifiable and non-verifiable calculations were integral to a single system of sacred calendrics. I see nothing woolly-minded in granting some respect to their long-term timeframe, especially if something can be learned from doing so. According to most experts, the Long Count dates from early in the Classical Maya era, 200 900 CE, although it may be much older in conception (possibly originating among the Olmecs in the 7th C. BCE).

The engravings that record the earliest dates are Chiapas de Corzo, Stela 2, 32 BCE, and Tikal Stela 2, 292 CE. The last date recorded was January 909 CE. The calendar uses a string of five units factored on a 20-base: k'n (1 day), winal (20 days), tun (360 days of 18 winals), katun (7200 days or 20 tuns) and baktun (144,000 days or 20 katuns). The stele or engraved stones with calendric glyphs record dates by hieroglyphs and dot and bar notations, showing the units by position. Scholars notate the dates in five placements, from baktun to k'in, like this: 9.16.0.2.0, equivalent to June 18, 751 AD. December 21, 2012 is written 13.0.0.0.0. There are three standards of correlation and, you bet, a lot of quibbles and fine tuning in Maya chronology. (Stela drawing from Beyond 2012, used by permission. See box below.) Beyond 2012 by Geoff Stray is the source book on the 2012 debate. The author pulls together a staggering array of theory and information and on the end-time, including my discovery of the fifth axis in the Dendera Zodiac.

Stray's book is especially strong on technical information and telluric sciences - for instance, the correlation of fluctuations in the earth's magnetic field to precession (Ch.9). Geoff Stray is the creator and manager of the Diagnosis2012, the premiere database on 2012. The Long Count is backdated to August 13, 3114, and comes ahead to December 21, 2012. This is a total of 5126 years or 1,867,145 days. This interval is close to 13 baktuns of 144,000 days each, so the Maya Long Count is routinely called "thirteen baktuns." Not a terribly long period of time as sacred calculations go, but long enough to frame a vast historical perspective. The Long Count of 5126 years is roughly one-fifth of the full cycle of precession of the equinoxes, 25,920 years. This fits the Long Count into a verifiable frame of astronomical timing, which is impressive. Because the Count is an increment of the full precessional cycle, it can be analyzed in parallel with the Zodiacal frame of precession.

The current debate centers on what is going to happen when the Count expires in December 2012, just five years and eleven months from now. I will be more precise: there was a new moon on the eve of the winter solstice, 21 December, 2006. This is exactly six years to the end of the Long Count. In six years there are 74 new moons (occurring on the synodic cycle of 29.53 days).

We can count down to the end-time by lunar intervals. As I write these words, we are in the 74th moon.

Making It Up Before looking ahead at what the Maya end-time might signify, let's look back at the initial date. So far, this has received far less attention than the end date. But I would argue that outcome of the Count will be reflected, in some manner and some measure, in the initial conditions. If we are expecting something to end in 2012 CE, it might be helpful to know what began, what conditions prevailed, at the start date in 3114 BCE. When scholars first worked out the correlation of the Long Count to the Julian calendar that we use - the Goodman-Martinez-Thompson correlation, lately improved by John Major Jenkins some esotericists loitering on the sidelines noted that the 3114 BCE start date is close to the Hindu date of 3102 BCE, said to mark the beginning of a cosmic cycle, Kali Yuga.

Hindu legend states that Kali Yuga, the age of darkness or decadence in which we now live, began with the death of Krishna on February 16, 3102 BCE. This is perhaps the most famous date in sacred calendrics. Hindu calculations make the length of Kali Yuga hugely longer than the Maya Long Count, but the coincidence of start dates is striking. This is the Hindu-Maya correlation. In Dendera Decoded (unpublished), my study of the sacred calendrics of the Dendera Zodiac, I show that Axis D on the bas-relief at Dendera marks the date 3102 BCE, indicated by alignment of the equinoxes to the star Antares in the Scorpion. (Right now, the planet Jupiter is aligned to that star, the red giant in the heart of the Scorpion, making a lovely predawn spectacle here in Andalucia.)

In Egyptian myth, the date 3102 BCE designates the murder of Osiris, parallel to the death of Krishna. This gives the Hindu-Maya-Egyptian correlation. (For a short summary of my Dendera work, including the discovery of a fifth, hitherto unknown axis, see Colin Wilson, The Atlantis Blueprint, and the website: http://www.diagnosis2012.co.uk/5.htm, and scroll down to item 38.) What to make of the correlation between Kali Yuga and the Maya Long Count?

Buddhist and Hindu sources present quite a lot of material on Kali Yuga. In the Tantra of the Great Liberation, Shiva discourses to his consort Parvati on the deplorable conditions into which humanity will sink at the end of Kali Yuga. Many of the things he describes are now commonplace in our world. The prophecies of Padma Sambhava from Tibetan tradition also present similar predictions, ranging from trivial social customs (people will eat standing up, and

even running) to technological inventions (the metal bird will cross the skies) to spiritual decadence (guides to enlightenment will be sold on street corners). There is no such record of what the Classical Maya thought about the way the world would be at the end of the Long Count, or if they had anything like a prophetic conception of the last days.

Without evidence of what the calendar-makers believed, we are obliged to make up our own minds about the social, spiritual, and psychological aspects of the end-time. I may differ from other scholars in openly admitting that I am making up what I say about signs and prospects of the end-time. Others more qualified than I tend to claim that they draw their interpretations from ancient evidence, or follow what the ancients believed, even though there is no written account to tell us what the Maya believed.

What I make up may or may not be true, or helpful, or even interesting. The fact that I make something up - that is, devise interpretations from my own learning and imagination - may disqualify it as mere invention to some minds. Fine. I prefer to let you know how I operate, keeping my pretences right out in the open.

Take what you like and leave the rest.

Krishna and Osiris The Hindu-Maya-Egyptian correlation provides some mythological clues for profiling the start date of the Long Count. The death of Krishna and the murder of Osiris represent mythogenetic moments (Campbell's term) when our species' intrinsic access to the Sacred was ruptured. Consequently, the cultural reflections and creative expressions of that access began to decay dramatically. Here I do not read Krishna and Osiris as patriarchal icons, but prepatriarchal consorts of the Goddess. Krishna may be pictured as the divine teacher or male-guru-avatar of the Bhagavad Gita, but equally, and more anciently, he was the orgiastic love god who romped with the matron Radha and the gopis, cow-herding girls always ready for a roll in the hay. In this perspective, Krishna is not an empowered patriarch but more like an Asian version of Eros.

This view is consistent with the preponderance of Vaishnava scholarship. (See the anthology, The Divine Consort. Vaishnava is the name for cults dedicated to Krishna worship.) Krishna and Radha, Gita Govinda series, Pahari School, Himadel Pradesh, 18th C Likewise, in the predynastic culture of southern Egypt, Osiris was the consort of Isis who was born at Dendera. The supreme mother goddess of predynastic Egypt was Hathor, to whom the temple of Dendera was dedicated.

Hathor was a female divinity without a male consort, except for her own offspring, Horus, who had no father. Her totemic animal was the vulture, said to be fertilized by the wind. The HathorHorus myth points to the time when men did not rule society and paternity was not the determinative factor in social status or organization. That is, pre-Osirian times. The roof chapels at Dendera present the most complete account in hieroglyphic writing and iconography of the resurrection of Osiris, along with the sole intact model of a working Zodiac that survives from antiquity. Osiris, the grain-god in Hathor's cult, preceded Osiris the divine pharaoh of northern Egypt. In other words, there is a pre-theocratic Osiris in the goddessoriented culture that left us the Dendera temple, a Ptolemaic construction incorporating some extremely ancient motifs.

In the Denderic context, Osiris was an epiphany of the trans-sexual regenerative powers of nature, specifically the phylogenetic code. Osiris represents the "ingrained" language or operating instructions of nature, the linga sharira ("long sheath") in Tantric terms, and Hathor was the ancient matriarchal guardian of his Mysteries. In dynastic times, the priesthood who ran Egyptian theocracy elevated Osiris to status of a divine avatar, and made him the deific model of the theocratic ruler, the pharaoh. Such is a typical theocratic script. With this view of Krishna and Osiris - idiosyncratic perhaps, but based on well-known mythological material and matching the profile of predynastic times - I propose that the start time of the Long Count represents a break from goddess-oriented nature-wisdom, the cooptation of sacred biology for a theocratic agenda, and a consequent loss of contact with the Sacred immanent in the natural world, leading humankind into a dark age when contact with the Sacred is mediated by beliefs dictated by men who claim to speak for God. Although the full historical picture would place its inception somewhat earlier, around 4400 BCE, the Age of Patriarchy can be synchronized with the Count along these lines... Since the dawn of that Age, communion with the intelligence of nature, embodied awareness of the Sacred, and reverence for the Divine Feminine, not to mention mortal woman herself, have all declined drastically.

With this decline, the human species lost its gender balance, its natural moral disposition to goodness and cooperation (widely recognized in Paganism, as I have explained in Not in His Image), and fell under the spell of patriarchal and theocratic narratives such as the Egyptian and Babylonian fables of divine kingship and, of course, the Old Testament tale of the Chosen People.

Nodal Moments How does this interpretation of the start date of the Long Count play against the historical record? Well, here's a little trick: go to the midpoint of the Count by subtracting one-half of 5126 years from 3114 BCE. This comes to 551 BCE. The 6th Century BCE was the moment when the Yahwist narrative of Genesis came into rigid formulation under the reforms of King Josiah (ruled 640 - 609), lauded as the ideal ruler in that brutal manifesto of theocracy, Deuteronomy.

Between 587 and 537 BCE a large part of the Jewish nation was exiled to the city of Babylon. When they returned to Canaan, the Yahwist scribes who were writing the program of the father god merged their racial myth with Persian split-source dualism, a world view that attributes good and evil to the same super-human agency.

This model of cosmic conflict was worked into the Biblical narrative and determined all later variations of divine retribution and apocalyptic violence consistent with the crypto-fascist theocratic agenda, enacted in the global wars of religion that threaten the world today. Obviously, I am not making this part up. I am simply connecting the events at the midpoint of the Long Count with my thematic overview of the significance of the Count. To do so, I use a method of computing nodal moments that I picked up years ago in anthroposophical circles: 3114 BCE > 551 BCE < 2012 CE.

This is as simple as it gets, yet it's amazing what kind of information this tool can generate, once you have a framing concept or heuristic phrase to tell you what to look for. In this case, the heuristic tool is the concept "goddess-based societies overthrown by theocratic agenda" or "nature-wisdom versus revealed religion." The nodal moments reveal pivotal historical events that make sense within the heuristically predefined frame. Want to try another node?

Go to the midway moment between 3114 BCE and 551 BCE. This is 1832 BCE, the period assigned to the patriarch Abraham who was born, by some accounts, around 1812 BCE.

The Code of Hammurabi (b. 1810) is the earliest surviving example of a totalitarian, malemandated social agenda. The transition into patriarchy gained huge momentum during the period when the vernal point shifted from the Bull into the Ram, Taurus to Aries, around 1850 BCE. (No causality implied here, folks: it is simply a matter of synchronal dynamics.)

In eonic studies of history - chronological plotting of events in the frame of the Zodiac and long-range planetary cycles - the Ram indicates the domain of patriarchy. In 551 BCE, the vernal point was transiting the head-stars of the Ram. In the time of Alexander the Great, two centuries later, it still in this region, and had been remarked by skywatchers for some time.

Egyptians called the Ram constellation Amon, and Alexander identified himself with Amon that is, he deified himself. The priests at Siwa, who declared him the "Son of Amon" to appease the lonely boy's narcissistic fixation, disingenuously advised him to have himself pictured with ram's horns on coins. These priests would have been veteran skywatchers who knew that the horn motif matched the current Zodiacal picture. Coming forward in time, midway between 551 BCE (midpoint of the Count) and 2012 CE (end of the Count) is 731 CE. Just at this historical moment the Moors were engaged in massive waves of invasion against Europe and extending into the Russian steppes. The 8th century saw both expansion and defeat of Islamic aggression on several fronts. Quite often, nodal dates are amazingly precise. Note that scholars designate 731 as the exact year when Classical Maya civilization peaked out, and began to decline rapidly.

Here is an example of how a simple time-factoring tool with no connection to the Maya calendar, and far removed from the complex computations usually applied to it, can generate discrete data-points consistent with the historical profile of the Long Count.

Printing Power

In Europe, the Battle of Tours on October 11, 731, marked the defeat of the 90,000-strong Moorish army that had invaded southern France under the command of the Yemenite governor of Spain, Abd-ar-Rahman. 741 saw the death of Byzantine Emperor Leo II who had successfully repelled the Arab invasion, as well as of Charles Martel, the key figure in resisting the Moorish advance into France (Gaul).

With the major power-players shifting, Europe became more vulnerable to Islam, the most virulent form of theocratic fascism on earth. The rise of Islam involved wide scale genocide, often committed by Arabs against other Arabs, as seen today in Iraq. In 750, Abu-Abbas alSafah, a descendant of Mohammed's uncle, founded the Abbasid dynasty that would establish an Islamic empire to last for 350 years.

Doing so, he massacred the Umayyads, the competition surviving from the preceding dynasty. The Moors occupied Spain from the middle of the 8th century until 1492, when they were expelled. The Islamic offensive against Europe was re-inaugurated with the call to return Andalusia to Islam, raised in the wake of the Madrid bombings of March, 2004. Will the 2012 end-time be marked by an intensified replay of the Islamic offensive of 731 CE?

According to the Eurabia theory of Bat Ye'or, an Egyptian-born British historian who specializes in the experience of non-Muslims in Muslim countries, this is precisely the case. (See Wikipedia for an excellent article on this debate.) In While Europe Slept (2006), American ex-pat author Bruce Dawer paints a frightening, thoroughly documented picture of the Islamic subversion of democracy in Europe, especially in Scandinavia. Currently, Islamic imperialism in Europe is rolling like a shock wave across the continent. Moslems demonstrating against what they view as intolerance toward Islam are manifesting the very intolerance they condemn, but they are succeeding in their demands for special exemption of their religion from rational criticism. Islam presents the endgame formula of patriarchy and dominator religion, the stage where it wins or destroys itself trying (the parasite destroys its host).

The initial conditions of the Long Count culminate in the theocratic fascism of Islam with its program for rigid social control, blind submission to revealed authority, menacing intolerance, and sexual apartheid, all founded on a book attributed to the creator god. Looking at historical precedents is one way to sketch out a "predictive" profile of events leading to the end of the Count. In fact, there is no prediction involved: one merely looks at the all-too-obvious consequences of recorded events. This is, however, not the way that 2012 diagnoses are usually conducted.

To summarize: the death of Krishna and Osiris around 3114 BCE indicates a sharp escalation in the agenda of patriarchy. Male domination gained momentum when sacred kings were no longer anointed in rites of sexual congress with daughters of the Goddess.

(I have repeated this point numerous times on this site, and I don't like to repeat myself, but I insist that this is a key historical insight we cannot afford to ignore. Read Merlin Stone, When God Was A Woman.)

The suppression of goddess-oriented society led to the success of patriarchy, the domination of nature, and sexual apartheid - a pattern that can be traced in close historical detail, if one is so inclined. All this was accomplished by force and intimidation, of course, and by operating "by the Book." The factual record of history - one damned thing after another, as Henry Ford remarked - is largely a side-effect of the writing of the patriarchal narrative. Emphasis on the ideological instrument of "the book" (or Holy Writ) fits the heuristic profile I am developing here. Indeed, it supplies a main motif that can be seen reflected in many specific events.

In the 8th century, Islam was spreading globally and Arabs battled with the Tang dynasty for control of central Asia. Moslems remained the dominant force in Transoxiana for 150 years. One consequence of the Arab-Chinese confrontation was the setting up of the first paper mill in the Muslim world. This happened in 751 (20 years off the nodal date) in Samarkand after two Chinese prisoners of war revealed the technique of papermaking to their captors.

Immediately, Muslim scholars began to use the new technology for translations of ancient Greek and Roman writings, but also to produce copies of their revealed scripture, the Koran, of course. So, around the nodal moment 551 BCE, Yahwist scribes buckled down to composing the rigid doctrinal narrative of the Chosen People, the directive script for Judeo-Christian salvationism, and around the nodal moment 731 CE Muslim scribes acquired the paper-based technology to spread their version of the story, inscribed in the Koran.

The Holy Book (of whatever faith) is the main tool of indoctrination and behavioral control for the theocratic agenda of white male supremacy. The fact that Muslim women embrace and adore the Koran is no measure of their compliance, but an indication that they know their lives are at risk were they to do otherwise. If you are a Muslim, the penalty for dissenting from or

renouncing the Faith is, according to the Koran, death. For women in Islamic societies, there are penalties worse than death. The authority of Holy Writ is beyond human critique - quite plainly, Abrahamic religion is incompatible with a civil and democratic society that allows freedom of expression. Today, Moslems in Europe use the freedom of expression granted to them by the democracies in which they live to call for the repeal of that freedom, and no one tells them that's unacceptable. Figure it. The Book is, and has ever been, the sovereign tool of behavior modification, off-planet imperialism, a potent catalyst to ecocide, genocide, and suicide. It is the mass-produced weapon of mass destruction par excellence.

The Narrative Spell So, my expanded definition of Kali Yuga is: the age of darkness (ignorance) and decadence (moral and material derangement), due to the break from Goddess wisdom, the imposition of off-planet morality dictated by a father god, and the cancerous spread of faith-based religion operating on the theocratic authority of The Book (Torah, Bible, Koran).

Over the last 5000 years, the entire human species has fallen under the thrall of The Book. In Not in His Image, I propose the term narrative spell for the uncanny power of the salvationist script that encodes the beliefs of the three Abrahamic religions. The mandate of the male-only creator god has a vast, fixating power based in fear and shaming. Those who adopt the Paternal Lie, or, more often, have it mindlessly imposed on them, live it out as if they are acting under post-hypnotic suggestion.

Those who are forced to believe in the story of revealed religion enact it madly and without critical reflection or restraint. What they have received mindlessly, without consent, they act out mindlessly, disregarding the free choice of others. They behave as they believe. What they are told to believe is inscribed in The Book (Torah, Bible, Koran). The end of the Long Count plunges the entire world into the violent drama of the culmination of such behavior.

Mystic Confidence If the ascent of The Book as a tool of mass-scale ideological programming fits the historical profile of the Long Count, as I have tried to show here, can we bring to the end-time the inspired will to challenge and repel that power? This is my suggestion for thinking constructively about the dangers and prospects of the Maya end-time. Speculation about the meaning of the Maya end-time peaked briefly in August 1987 with the "Harmonic Convergence." In the debate at that time, Jose Arguelles played a central role with his declaration that the end of the Long Count indicated a moment when a beam from the galactic center would sweep across the earth and produce magical effects. If I recall correctly, the period of the beam matched the precessional cycle of 25,920 years.

Hence, Arguelles simply attached a fantastic interpretation to known phenomenon of astronomical timing. In The Mayan Factor, he claimed that Maya civilization disappeared by dematerialization when some of the population were teleported off the earth on that mysterious cosmic beam, and predicted that the same would happen for many people in 2012. His theories won him two minutes of fame on CNN. I am not deeply enough involved in the current debate around 2012 to know if Arguelles's ideas are undergoing a revival, but I sense that others, a younger and more creatively inspired crowd, have taken over the discourse, and morphed it considerably. There may be a reprise of Arguelles' notion of dematerialization in some circles, but I would rather hope not. Calls for escaping the planet will not be tolerated on this site.

I am probably out of touch with the pulsations of the new crowd who are building expectation of 2012, but it looks to me like the best options for the Maya end-time are erupting from the orgiastic imagination of younger people in the counterculture, people who are ignited with all manner of erotic, cosmic, artistic, mantic, mythopoeic, and esoteric inspirations. I have not sensed anything comparable to this excitement since the Psychedelic Revolution of the 1960s. There is true mania in the air, a hint of divine madness, a sense that fantastic things are possible in life and art, that the world itself might be transfigured by acts of imagination. (This is, of course, exactly what the Romantics believed and proposed, a couple of hundred years ago.) A multi-frequency surge of mystical confidence is spreading through some areas of the youth culture. It would be extremely foolish to dismiss that possibility that the huge buzz around 2012 is the reflection of a collective psychic event of some kind. The question is, do the discussions, speculations, and predictions about 2012 point to that event, or do they merely draw attention to themselves? So far, the discourse on 2012 has been dominated by claims about the evolution of consciousness making a huge jump, a paradigm shift. We will realize the noosphere of Teilhard

de Chardin, for instance. I have a gut feeling that this kind of high-toned chatter might be distracting us from the genuine possibilities of the moment ahead.

This type of speculation could be off the mark if it does not offer a message of change that specifically addresses the terminal social and material conditions of the Kali Yuga. It is one thing to claim a quantum leap into cosmic consciousness, and support it with abstruse computations that go back 16 billion years (Calleman), and another, say, to rally against the social menace of revealed religion. The first is a mere hypothesis, glorious or not, the second is a revolutionary stance, involving a call for action and transformation. I, for one, begin to wonder if the promise of a sudden, spectacular shift in the collective mindset may not be deviating or undermining the actual breakthrough that is emergent as the world lurches toward 2012. What if this breakthrough is about facing the human condition, rather than skateboarding at warp speed beyond it? If Sophia relies in some way on humanity to achieve her correction, as the Gnostics taught, the human condition will either contribute to that magnificent possibility, or impede it.

To accomplish the breakthrough, then, would depend on how we view the human condition, regarding both resistance to entering the correction, and the skill and inspiration required to enter it. I sense that expectations of a paradigm shift attached to 2012 are contaminated by two distortions, concerning the scope and the manifestation of the shift. So far, I am not convinced that the notions circulating about 2012 offer a reliable preview either of what can happen, or the scale on which it can happen.

My main criticism of the speculation is that, although it may use historical references, as seen in the close correlation of the "thirteen hells" and "nine heavens" to known events, etc., in Calleman's scheme, this approach does not identify the prevalent pathological motif of Kali Yuga: the narrative spell of revealed religion, enshrined in the authority of The Book.

In fact, it may come down to substituting one lurid totalitarian scheme for another: instead of the apocalypse prescribed in The Book, we get blasted into cosmic consciousness, so says another book. * But what if the breakthrough of 2012 involves breaking the spell of The Book? *

What would it mean to disempower the narrative spell? * What conditions would arise? * What kind of behavior would result? * How would the human condition itself be changed, radically and permanently altered? * The mystic confidence in the air is savory and palpable - but where is the new-born confidence located? * In what do we, the human species, invest our deepest confidence?

Mental Scheming As for the scope of the coming shift, there is talk of a sudden awakening in the mentality of our species, sweeping through a vast segment of the global population. As if millions of people around the world will wake up one day and see life in a totally different way than before. Such predictions of quantity are not helpful, I believe.

They set up false expectations.

Such a mass-scale shift could occur if it were to be triggered by an external event, such as the meltdown of the Greenland ice shelf, but not purely due to internal dynamics. Given a nuclear strike, a biological terrorist attack, or a geological upheaval that devastates a major urban area, the attention of the entire world would be affected, and people would collectively and simultaneously have to adjust their way of life to the new situation. Lacking such events, it is hard to believe that masses of people will suddenly change their minds about how we live on this planet. You don't have to be a shamanic wizard to predict that catastrophic events and more terrorist mayhem will occur in the next six years. It is known that Israel will launch a preemptive strike against Iran in the spring, probably in April. This could escalate into nuclear war in the Middle East, into WW III - something that is bound to happen, sooner or later, if the current concatenation of historical events is not averted. In due time, there will also be another terrorist event in the USA, a biological attack on a major urban center.

All the experts say that it is not a matter of IF, but WHEN, and a large segment of the public are apprehensive, tensed for what is to come. Such tension can be expected to reach excruciating heights in the next six years. What has all this frightful business to do with the Maya Long Count?

These awful events would be happening whether or not the Count was down to its final years. They are not the result of calendric determinism, but the cumulative madness of history. They stem from initial conditions going back some 5000 years. Elaborate breakdowns of the Count the nine heaven periods and thirteen hell periods, for instance - are just exercises in mental scheming, ways to impose a comfortable sense of order on events, but such exercises do not prove the predictive power of the Count. In my view, to use the Count as a tool for prediction is to misuse it. The question, "What's going to happen?" is less helpful than the question "What is the behavior that most urgently needs to be changed in the immediate future, if we are to have a future?" The Count can be an heuristic tool that allows us to frame events and learn something about the compulsive patterns of history, as I've demonstrated above. As such, it need not be taken for a mysterious oracle that has the power to bring about what it foretells. The forces set in motion at the dawn of Kali Yuga are now playing out, * their final stage * the endgame of patriarchy * the global showdown for theocratic fascism It may not all end abruptly in December, 2012. More like than not, it won't die with such elegant brevity.

But in the way we approach the designated moment, mindful of the historical trajectory that brings us to it, something crucial to ending the lethal spell of patriarchy could be achieved.

Against the Book In the first chapter of The End of Faith, Sam Harris makes two outstanding observations: * first, "most of the people in this world believe that the Creator of the universe has written a book" * second, "criticizing a person's faith is currently taboo in every corner of our culture" Of course, these are perfectly obvious facts of modern life.

The force of Harris's argument throughout the book consists in his stating the obvious in such a way that it looks at once novel and alarming. Once it is said, in just so many words, that most people believe God has written a book, the belief looks patently absurd. Yet we know this belief is universal, deep seated, and longstanding. It determines the way a good many of people on this planet behave. Now, if suddenly countless numbers of people who hold this belief and adhere to The Book were to repudiate it, that would be an event worthy of Long Count expectations. That would be a paradigm shift to exceed the wildest prophecies of Jenkins and Calleman. It would also be the shift consistent with the historical profile of Kali Yuga sketched in the above paragraphs.

Recall that we identified two nodal dates, 551 BCE and 731 CE, when the composition of the patriarchal agenda was highlighted. These were key dates in establishing domination by The Book: the Bible in 551 BCE and the Koran in 731 CE. * Does the moment 2012 portend the opportunity to disempower or even reverse those earlier moments? * Are such massive trends in psychosocial behavior reversible? The End of Faith may indicate what can really happen in the end-time better than any number of prophetic tomes that purport to describe what will happen, or what is hoped to happen, such as Jenkins' speculations in his books on galactic alignment. At least it may indicate what could optimally happen to precipitate a radical shift out of the down-spiraling madness of Kali Yuga.

But is this likely to happen? Consider the certainty of world-shattering events, such as terrorist biological attacks and geophysical catastrophes, and what do you conclude?

I would guess that when such events occur, most people are going to go scrambling for The Book, rather than chuck it away. The certainty of frightening events that will disrupt or even destroy social and personal security almost totally precludes the possibility that masses of people will opt to throw off the narrative spell. On the contrary, they are likely to hunker down into it ever more deeply. They will fall on their faith when the system fails. They will die with clenched hearts, believing rather than divested of belief. Yet there will be some spell-breaking in the end-time.

The mass awakening of the human species may be a comforting fantasy to some, but others are perhaps more inspired by a different scenario in which a few people break through the spell that still holds the vast majority of human beings in thrall. Is this an elitist view of the end-time opportunity? No, but it may be a genuine survivalist view. It would be foolish, I think, to expect that between now and December 2012 untold millions around the world will renounce the Torah, the Bible, and the Koran, and liberate themselves from the vicious and irrational beliefs encoded in those texts - but there may be a more reasonable expectation for the end-time.

If the antireligious debate signaled by The End of Faith were to escalate into an open public controversy, we would, I reckon, find ourselves living through an event that truly reflects optimal change for humanity. If the sexual apartheid of Islam were to be openly challenged and condemned in public debate, that would be an earthshaking event and a vast gain for positive change and social healing.

The problem today is, not only that sexual apartheid exists - most blatantly in Islam, but also in the other two Abrahamic religions, not to mention in Indian and Chinese religion - but that it cannot be called into question, due to perceived political incorrectness and fear of offending Muslims. Let's recall Harris's second observation of the obvious: it is absolutely taboo in our society today to challenge or criticize matters of faith. But what if this taboo also were suddenly to be challenged and overridden? Suppose that it became acceptable to confront and even offend people on their beliefs. Suppose the tables were turned, and it was the offended party, not the offending party, who must go on the defensive in the debate over religious beliefs and faithbased principles. That would be a shift in social reality and social syntax consistent with a breakaway from the narrative spell of patriarchy that has dominated Kali Yuga.

It would be a tremendous shift to start offending some people to get them to be accountable for what they believe, and for what is done by blind adherence to their irrational, threatening, and intolerant convictions.

No Exemption A recent court ruling in England established that "offence is not incitement." This legal ruling introduces what could be a radical shift in the rules of discourse on faith issues. Ii changes the syntax of the debate over faith issues. The case concerned the leader of the British National Party, Nick Griffin, who described Islam as a "vicious" religion.

Regardless of the source of the remark, it is true that offence is not incitement. Griffin did not say that Islam is a vicious religion and Muslims ought to be hanged. The latter phrase is surefire incitement. With the privilege of free expression comes the responsibility to use language in a sober, rational, and measured way: to be careful what you say, but not be so cautious that you never challenge or offend. Any sane person of good conscience knows what it is to talk incitement, and what it isn't. The argument that offensive talk leads automatically to incitement is invalid and supports the plea for special exemption that is antithetical to open debate in a free society. Likewise for the argument that offensive talk alienates the offended people from positive dialogue that could lead to social reconciliation and better integration: to take being offended as an excuse to withdraw from open social discourse is just another way to extort special exemption.

The offence response is specious and rejects the creative dissonance that makes democratic society possible. Living in an open society, we are all exposed to a lot of offence, things said and done that offend us for one reason or another. This is a consequence of the free expression offered by such a society. Currently, it is absolutely taboo to offend Jews, Christians, or Muslims by saying anything critical or derogatory about their faith, their beliefs, and their customs, including how they dress, how they treat their children, and how they slaughter animals.

The fear of offending is not a measure of compassion or consideration, although it disguises itself as such. It a concession to the demand for special exemption exerted by members of these religions, who seek the advantage of enforcing their agenda by operating on values and beliefs that cannot, they insist, be questioned, criticized, or ridiculed. But the demand for special

exemption on any issue whatsoever is inconsistent with the principles of an open society (or civic society, as Harris calls it). The demand for special exemption is a disguised tactic for spreading tyranny and totalitarianism, the rule of The Book. There can no special exemptions from open social critique of any subject in a free society, least of all religious beliefs that drive social behavior and religious practices that define social identity. The society that succumbs to this demand is committing moral suicide (which is precisely what's happening, Bruce Bawer argues in While Europe Slept.)

But the West, and especially European society, has become ever more and more compliant with this demand over the last few decades. I submit that the policy of appeasement signals the terminal decadence of Kali Yuga and the end of the long countdown to a planet-wide orgy of righteous self-immolation. Defiance of the taboo against religious offence would be a true paradigm shift with worldwide repercussions for the good. This is the kind of mass behavioral change to look for in social life as the Maya end-time approaches.

This is something worth discussing, not as a mere expectation, but as a challenge for the 2012 moment.

Belief Change My book, Not in His Image, is an attempt to challenge and break the narrative spell of patriarchy. It presents a radical critique of faith in The Book. So do many articles on this site. Metahistory.org proposes belief change as the single most powerful act that can make a difference for human life on this planet today. Some essays on this site exemplify realistic expectations we might hold for a positive grand finale of the Long Count: for instance, The Promise of a Lonely Planet.

People of faith can be as offended as they want to be - that is their problem, and when they make it the problem of others, they act spitefully against the principles of open, democratic society. It is no crime to hurt someone's feelings, nor to discount what they have invested in their identity. In fact, it is a sign of a healthy society that this can be done without fear of reprisal.

But if society at large complies with the demand for special exemption, the faith-based program of patriarchal domination that got rolling into high gear at the start of Kali Yuga will prevail, down to the last man standing. Breaking the narrative spell is only possible if open debate on religious beliefs can unfold without restraint and without fear of reprisal, in a theatre of non-threatening debate, guided by the principle that offence is not incitement. As it stands now, anyone who even jokes about the Prophet can be threatened with death. It is bad enough that Muslims feel this way, but worse that we infidels in the "democratic West" are willing to appease their feelings.

Freed of the threats routinely expressed by outraged Moslems, the antireligious debate would grow to considerable proportions, or at least it would have a chance to grow. Although it is, I believe, unlikely that many people will renounce their beliefs and break away from the spell of The Book, societies around the world would be hugely improved if some people could at least talk openly about what they see as insane and inhumane in religious traditions. (We started to do this on this site back in 2002, with a slim ten-year lead on the endtime.) Many people could then become involved in the debate, and who knows how many might undergo a radical change of heart regarding God, salvation, and survival? To see something like this happening in the next six years would be one of the best outcomes of the Long Count. Breaking the narrative spell by open, non-inciting debate on faith issues is not the only way that the end-time could turn into a healing time for humanity. There is also another major path toward the breakthrough into a future safe for debate and difference...

I will present my ideas on this subject in the companion article, now in development: The Discovery of the Next World. Back to Contents

The Discovery of the Next World Reflections Beyond the Maya end-time 28 January 2007

Andalucia

Additional to the slim chance that a few people with guts and intelligence might stand up to intimidation from the Abrahamic hordes and defy the taboo on critical thinking about faith issues, as suggested in the previous article, what other prospects might we envision for the Maya end-time? Having pondered this matter for quite a few years, I am convinced that some kind of momentous shift is indeed immanent on this planet, although it will not, I believe, transpire in a sudden, spectacular way. In many respects, it is already unfolding, and has been for some time: it involves a progressive transformation, rather than a sudden, once-and-for-all breakthrough.

I believe this is the view held by a good many people now writing and talking about 2012, such as Daniel Pinchbeck, but there is also a building expectation of a particular breakthrough tied to the date December 21, 2012. The progressive transformation underway might be compared to breaking the sound barrier in a jet: a steady acceleration up to the specific moment, BAZOOM, when the barrier is passed.

(I went through the sound barrier twice on the Concorde, which used to level off at a little faster than Mach 2: you don't feel or hear a thing, but the world outside gets seriously bazoomed!) We may well wonder, Since when has the steady acceleration to 2012 been in effect, and detectible?

Temporal Vortex It might be helpful to think of December 2012 as a nodal moment around which events are clustered, before and after. I have found this concept consistently useful in my studies of historical patterns, plotted against stellar and planetary cycles. For instance, 1821 is the nodal moment of the Romantic movement. Constellated around that moment, before and after, are the key events that defined the movement.

A nodal moment signals a vortex in time - a "dissipative structure," to use the odd term proposed by Ilya Prigogine - where the innate evolutionary potential of the human species

undergoes review and reworking. Some potentials (reflected in cultural tendencies, discoveries, currents of thought and behavior) dissolve into the vortex, others emerge, simultaneously.

Patterns of change anchored in the nodal moment can be imagined as event-ripples that spread around the temporal vortex. (Obviously, current ideas of autopoesis, emergence, and fractality enter into this analogy, prompting us to consider how historical patterns might have self-similar and self-ordinating properties.) 1821 is a nodal moment in a pattern of 172-year intervals, following the cycle of the uranusneptune conjunctions. It comes ahead to 1992-3, the last time such a conjunction occurred. (The middle node between 1821 and 1993 is 1907, the vortex moment of Modernism.) From 1993 to 2012 is 19 years. Could this be the period of sensed acceleration? Perhaps, but I propose a further permutation of the nodal dating: make 1993 the nodal year between 2012, which is 19 years ahead in time, and 1974, which is 19 years back in time.

Then we arrive at the interval 1974 - 2012 (with the midpoint at 1992-3, a key pivotal moment) for the acceleration into the Maya end-time. Readers of Not in His Image may recall that in the last chapter I trace the co emergence of Gaia theory, Goddess studies, and the Gnostic revival ahead to today from around 1974. One good thing about this timeframe is that it encompasses just one generation, which is neither too long nor too short an interval. People who were working out their world view in 1974 can relate to people coming into their world view on the approach to 2012. The interval is manageable in terms of generational continuity. The experiential lessons accrued by many people in this period of time can be compared and shared by direct interpersonal communication, one generation interfacing with another, without reliance on books, recordings, or other second-hand sources.

This is a huge advantage for plotting and navigating the slope of the acceleration.

Mythic Orientation The mythical date arrives if a series of circumstances combine to produce the event. Unlike the profane date, the sacred one is not a measure but a living reality, charged with supernatural forces, which is incarnated in determinate places. Octavio Paz, The Bow and the Lyre (1967)

What makes 2012 important is that it has been identified as a sacred date, to be distinguished from mundane calendric time. Arguelles originally pointed out that we are entrained by the linear scheme of the Gregorian calendar - along with the patriarchal salvationist program attached to it, I might add.

Thus he attempted to introduce a 13-moon, 28-day calendar related (he claims) to biological time, as an alternative way to keep track of what we're doing. Arguelles's calendric reform has been dismissed as a distortion of Maya calendrics (true), but it has value by reminding us to reground in lunar and biological timing. A sacred time-keeping device must incorporate both seasonal and (human) somatic rhythms, including, of course, the macro-rhythms of Gaia. Octavio Paz points out that a sacred date is "not a measure but a living reality."

One problem with Maya calendric speculations is that, once 2012 is identified as a sacred date, it is treated as a measure, factored down, permutated, analyzed, etc. I suggested in the previous essay that such computations can draw attention to themselves and away from what we need to discover in the progression to the end-time.

The solution to the Long Count in historical and experiential terms will not be found in the Count itself, i.e., in some grand scheme encoded in it, but in the "living reality" of the eruptions and occlusions of human potential that are right now constellating around the forward nodal moment, 2012. How, then, to read these "eruptions and occlusions of human potential"?

It is tempting to jump imaginatively into a prospective stance and make an inventory of all kinds of events and tendencies that reflect the slope of acceleration. To some extent, this appears to be what I am doing here, but not really... To clarify my approach, I propose a metaphor that locates end-time developments within a single, comprehensive frame of reference.

That way, rather than merely pile up an inventory of supposed end-time developments, we can each place ourselves in the developing wave. The language for this metaphor is: the discovery of Next World, compared to Columbus's discovery of the New World. But with this qualification: Columbus did not merely discover the New World, he discovered the native peoples who inhabited it. Likewise, the discovery of 2012 depends on meeting the natives who inhabit the Next World, the end-time tribes.

Acceleration to the Maya end-time entails discovering the tribes of the Next World, in which human community will survive when civilization as we know it so far has dissolved into the temporal vortex of 2012. The New World was discovered in 1492, so the old story goes. Not such a trustworthy story, we suspect, but there it is. To this sorry old tale let's now add a futurist ending: the Next World will be discovered by 2012. This discovery unfolds as we meet the natives of that world, finding the end-time tribes among us, and ourselves in the tribes.

As a mythologist dedicated to translating received myth into existential terms, I like this formulation because it says concisely and precisely all we know about what the Maya themselves must have thought of their calendar cycle: that in 2012 one world would end and another one would begin. By "world" they understood a world age, a long-term planetary cycle. The end of a world age is not the end of life on this planet, it is the transition to another way of living here. This is the glorious promise of the Maya end-time. Joseph Campbell had a term for the nodal moment or temporal vortex: he called it the mythogenetic moment. On the first page of Creative Mythology, he signaled the12th century as the last great mythogenetic moment in the history of Western civilization.

Campbell felt passionately that the transition into the 21th century could be a mythogenetic moment morally and spiritually equivalent to the 12th century, and possibly even resonant with it. I find a lot of veracity in this view. In Maya-Aztec calendrics, the current world is called Ollin (on left) and designated as the Fifth Age or "Fifth Sun." This is a close equivalent to the Kali Yuga of the Hindus. Not much is said of Ollin except that it will end with "movement," possibly meaning earthquakes, crustal shift of the earth's mantle, collapse of ice sheets, rising of sea levels, etc.

Ollin also means "shift of consciousness, mind movement." Curiously, this glyph recalls intertwining strands of DNA, with the three-prong, four-notch motif suggestive of three-letter codons composed of four bases. Okay, so tell me I'm fabulating, but perhaps not. One of the several mysterious features of DNA is the shifting of histones, the chief proteins in the chromatin that act as spools around which DNA winds, keeping genes in place. In effect, histones lock or seal the genetic code, and when they move, they unseal it.

This biochemical action is the equivalent to the mythological concept of the apocalypse, "the lifting of the seal." The apocalyptic moment when histones shift cannot be determined, because

biologists are uncertain what makes histones shift. Could histone-shift happen massively for the human species at a particular moment - say, due to the traumatic impact of massive lifethreatening events? No one knows, but it cannot be ruled out. Whatever the Aztecs made out of it, I strongly maintain that we today can regard Ollin as an icon of genomic and phylogenetic shift, linked to the 2012 end-time. I will have more to say on this idea in the third article of this sequence. Ollin is a day sign in the Aztec calendar. One of the better websites on MesoAmerican calendars (www.azteccalendar.com) gives this definition: The protector of day Ollin (Movement) is Xolotl. This is an auspicious day for the active principle, a bad day for the passive principle. Ollin is a day of the purified heart, signifying those moments where human beings may perceive what they are becoming. A good day for transmutation, which arrives like an earthquake that leaves in its wake the ruins of rationality, order and the preconceived. Which sounds pretty damn relevant, I'd say. The allusion to Xolotl (Sho-LOW-tul) is telling. He is the twin or double of Quetzalcoatl, the mythological figure most often associated with the Maya end-time. Xolotl is the evening star (Venus, appearing after sunset), the Lord of the West, a shapeshifter - that is to say, a sorcerer and master of occult powers, siddhis.

I will return to this theme at the close of this article. (right, Xolotl from the Codex Borbonicus.) So, we are deep into a mythogenetic moment when human potential is arising in new expressions, simultaneously with the dissolution of old expressions, and this dynamic, two-way escalation, up and down (Ollin), is revealing the outlines of the Next World when the planet earth will be inhabited by the end-time tribes. Mythological figures such as the Gnostic Sophia and the Aztec Xolotl loom over the emergent tribes and in some manner preside over the birth of a transmuted, transmigrant humanity.

Each such mythogenetic moment holds in solution a constellation of powerful choices, but the magic of the moment only becomes real when these choices are actually defined and made, one person at a time.

Following the metaphor I've proposed, the essential choice we each face on the accelerating approach to 2012 could be stated like this: Who do I want to be among in the Next World - Columbus and his crew, dumbfounded before the native tribes, or the tribes themselves?

"The mythical date arrives if a series of circumstances combine to produce the event" (Paz, cited above). If some readers are now on board and find the language in use acceptable, how about we expand the guiding metaphor? To paraphrase Paz, "The mythical date 2012 arrives when a series of discoveries combine to produce the immanent event, i.e., the emergence of the Next World." These discoveries are all of one kind: social, interpersonal, and intimate meetings between people, members of tribes who recognize each other. To foster this recognition, it would be helpful to have a tentative sketch of the tribes.

I characterize them by these names: 1. the Originals 2. the Orgiastics 3. the Sustainers 4. the Evolvers 5. the Visioneers

Originals

Ceremonial dancers, Kamiura tribe, Xingu River, Brazil The Originals are the first peoples of the earth, or what's left of them.

They live in reflective symbiosis with the places where they live, which gives them a special grounding power. At the same time, they are vulnerable to being uprooted and displaced by predatory societies driven by the double ideology of conquest and entitlement.

Members of such societies believe that the planet belongs to them, materially, and they have an entitlement to claim it by force from any peoples who may be inconveniently sitting on resources they would like to possess for themselves. Their sense of entitlement is enforced by the belief that they are made in the image of a paternal deity who gives them permission to breed like lice and dominate the earth. Consider this statistic: in 2006 around 40,000 indigenous people committed suicide.

You don't have to ask yourself why. It is painfully obvious that some people cannot live if their way of life is destroyed. A way of life is not a way to Earn a living," not a matter of holding down a job in the System, the dominant socioeconomic game.

For the Originals, their way of life is rooted in the earth, framed by the stars, linked to plants and animals, nurtured by past generations and consecrated to future ones. Take all that away and some people will choose to die rather than accept the alternatives that "civilization" proposes to them: the San Bushman woman I quote in Tree and Well, for instance. She is an Original. In the acceleration to the Maya end-time, we may be seeing the demise of the last remaining Originals, but there is also a resurgence of that tribe, for those who are still with us have a crucial role to play in the passage into the Next World. The global tour of the 13 Indigenous Grandmothers, for instance, is an end-time project conceived by Originals to alert the world to the healing and guiding power of entheogenic plants. Members of the tribe of Originals include not only the remaining indigenous peoples of the world, but those who embrace their cause and work to protect and support them. Years, ago, when I first spoke at the Marion Institute, I proposed in the spirit of reviving the Mysteries that each person adopt an indigenous tribe and an endangered animal.

The Originals and the animals come together, and they may disappear together. Upon signing a treaty with European settlers in 1854, "Chief Seattle of the Suquamish tribe of the North Pacific is reported to have said that when the last animals have perished 'humans will die of loneliness.' "

Loneliness and Presence by Thomas Berry Parabola Magazine Animals, birds, fishes, and insects, also belong to the tribe of Originals. Most indigenous peoples around the world recognize the four-leggeds, the crawlies, and other species as kin to us, with no less dignity and intelligence, and no less value for the earth. Meeting blue whales, white lions, dolphins, scorpions, spotted owls and Andalucian golden eagles, is essential to discovering the Next World. The recognitions that shape the world ahead will have to be profoundly rooted in the all-species connection.

Those who champion this connection belong to the tribe of the Originals.

Orgiastics

Amber mask of Dionysos, Roman, 1st Century This tribe is a kind of distant reflection of the Originals, or perhaps a forward projection in evolutionary terms. It consists of a huge spectrum of "urban tribes," the diverse community of younger people who share a clan sense of identity and a common spirit of celebration; the followings of Burning Man and the Rainbow Tribe, for instance.

There are thousands of clans within the Orgiastic tribe, some of them consisting of no more than two or three members. Many of them use the Internet to organize their activities and keep communication up and running, yet they stand apart from the cybernetic community as such by their pronounced affinity for the natural world and native-mind peoples, the Originals. It could be said that the next generation of Originals is being recruited from the Orgiastics. Many of this young tribe will be elders in the tribal communities that emerge after 2012. As Dale Pendell (Pharmakopoeia) noted, "There are no plants in cyberspace... nor in the noosphere."

Nothing happens on the Internet, which is an electronic grid dependent on wired-off acres of blinking consoles in featureless concrete warehouses, but it a great medium for announcing things that happen, and even generating the "buzz" that makes them happen.

Many Orgiastics are inclined to chemical highs and the vacant cybernetic ideologies that come with it, but they are essentially organophiles and nature-lovers, and as such, they ought not be confounded with the segment of the younger generation that does not know where eggs come from (which is, according to a recent study in France, sixty percent of the twenty-somethings surveyed). Why Orgiastics?

The Greek orgia means "operation, working." In the Mysteries, orgies were group events like collaborative seminars in which members worked together on certain projects. Sometimes, but not always, orgies had a sexual component. But even when they did, sexual activity was not merely hedonistic. Rather, it was more like a group Tantric session intended to raise and fine tune somatic, emotive, and cognitive intensity.

Members of the Orgiastic tribe share an innate longing to revive this kind of communal synergy, and connect through it to the body of the earth and the cosmos at large. Hence, they are prone to trance and dance, celebrating the Dionysian arts of music and mime, not to mention divine mania.

Even when they do this in an urban setting, surrounded by the blast and blare of electronic gimmickry in total oblivion to natural conditions, their inborn ritual rapture reprises the ecstatic celebrations that were originally enacted free of the electronic setting and the urban venue.

Sustainers

Foundation text for the sustainability movement This tribe shares with the Orgiastics a primary orientation to group effort and the pleasures of the natural world, but they enact it in a more conservative manner. The movement for

sustainable living is the brainchild of the Sustainers. Much of what they do overlaps with the Orgiastics who, like them, look to primitive and indigenous peoples to model the future. Members of the Sustainer tribe tend to be homebodies, attached to creature comforts, focused on self-reliance and socioeconomic independence.

They network a great deal, but for the purpose of implementing specific programs and plans rather than to party. By necessity, Sustainers take an adversarial stance to the System with all its economic and political tyrannies, because they recognize that so much of what is done in the System is nonsustainable. Their overriding desire is less to improve the System, than to come up with alternatives to it. They often tend to live on the borderline, in the System but not of it, driving a hybrid car, for instance, but their preference is to get clear of it entirely, if that were possible.

If you have the spirit and outlook of a Sustainer, it makes no sense to stake your life on something that is unsustainable. This tribe contains the true survivalists whose knowledge of natural ways will be indispensable to founding the end-time communities. The ecomimicry of Jeanine Benyus represents the focal point of the Sustainers' mission, the tip of their visionary arrow. Sustainers have a huge and voracious hunger to learn. They are forever collecting and disseminating information on "alternative lifestyles," organic food, natural healing, edible gardens, solar heating, earth and straw bale bale houses, and proposing innovative ways to create a sustainable society. Their role in the five-tribe world is sober, stable, and generationally based, by contrast to the free-form hedonism and teepee-style living of the Orgiastics.

The Marion Institute, which sponsors this site, exemplifies the mission of the Sustainers, combining visionary and practical elements into a futuristic world view with a focus on "connecting for change." Some of its projects offer service to the Originals, such as Mangari Maathai, winner of the 2004 Nobel Peace Prize, who founded the Greenbelt Movement. Planting trees is a Sustainer ritual - performed, in her case, by an Original.

The Institute's support of Jeremy Narby's Nouvelle Planete, a program to establish the legal claim of the indigenous peoples of the Amazon to their native plants and medicinal knowledge, is another good example of Sustainer-Original crossover.

Evolvers

Nomad, an ecotourist lodge on the south coast of Kenya This tribe shares many of the characteristics of the Sustainers, with one crucial difference: Evolvers work within the System, seeking to improve it rather than create something else, something better than the System. The Natural Capital Institute founded by Paul Hawken, which promulgates methods and models for socially responsible investment, is typical of this tribe.

The Marion Institute also supports the NCI, so TMI is actually a hybrid organization, inspired equally by Sustainer and Evolver incentives. This coordinative or balancing role in end-time projects is reflected in the fact that the Marion Institute was founded in 1992 at the pivotal node of the 1974 - 2012 interval. Coming into the interval in the early 1970s, Fritz Schumacher's manifesto Small is Beautiful (1972) set the trend for Evolver programs fitted to the human scale, and many have followed his lead. More recently, Capitalism 3.0 by Peter Barnes attempts to redefine the operating principles of free market economy. If I am reading the signs correctly, Daniel Pinchbeck's Evolver project is , like the Natural Capital Institute, dedicated to creating and promoting new and progressive forms of commerce within the System.

The operative word here is commerce.

By contrast to this approach, the incentives of the Sustainer tribe do not generally include programs set up to yield capital gains. What is sustainable has merit in the way it sustains itself: it does not have to "grow" economically. There is an ideological divide between the tribes here, for sure, but (let's hope) no cause for intertribal warfare. As long as the current economic system does not fall into total chaos, there will always be opportunities for Evolvers to work out benevolent forms of capitalism and planet-friendly free enterprise. At the same time, in parallel efforts, the Sustainers will be working with other models that do not depend on economic return. The natural food market is a prime example of the profit-making incentive of the end-time tribes. Wild Oats and Whole Foods are shrines to Evolver economics. Ecotourism also exemplifies the kind of commercial services set up by Evolvers for others of like mind as well as consumers in the general public.

In many instances, Originals or their descendents are employed to feed, lodge, guide, and entertain ecotourists, allowing the natives to live a double life, working in the System yet free to maintain their ways of life independent of it as well. Ecotourism is not a perfect thing, but it's a great challenge for Evolvers who believe in benevolent capitalism. Given that the entire economy of certain regions of the planet depends on tourism, it may be the leading edge of the Evolver tribe's global outreach, an optimal place for them to center their efforts. Sustainers, by contrast, are more likely to be stay-at-home types.

Orgiastics, who are unlikely to be able to afford the price of ecotourist package deals, usually manage to make life itself into a grand touristic adventure. Members of the Evolver tribe tend to take a utopian or at least optimistic view of technology, if they are not out-and-out technophiles. The aim of the Evolver project is to promote, "technologies in sustainable food-production, community organizing, alternative energy, complementary currency, shamanic and meditative transformation, etc. Then through the membership organization, we will help people access these tools as quickly and locally as possible. We are counting on an active and engaged membership who will help us to envision, and implement, a new planetary culture" Daniel Pinchbeck cited from the interview with Tim Boucher The new planetary culture so envisioned is not an educational and cultural venture, it is new phase of planetary commerce, far more sophisticated than anything that emerged from the hippie movement of the 1960s. If Evolvers have true entrepreneurial flair, there is a great deal they can do to make the current economic picture more human and innovative, with a reduced ecological footprint. The issue of profit versus non-profit runs through intertribal relations, as I just noted. In some respects, the difference cannot be reconciled. According to the lesson of an old planetary fable (called "the rise of agriculture"), the profit motif spreads tension among the tribes, tension that leads to social division and war.

But all tribes would agree, I believe, that we as a species will view survival (i.e., food, water, clothing and shelter, if you need to be reminded) more wisely, and have a better chance of achieving it, if we do not make it a for-profit venture.

Visioneers

"Elfstar" by Rebekah Bovey-LeBuillou The mark of the Visioneers is, obviously, their visionary capacity, their talent to frame the grand overview and propose models that help all the tribes to navigate the evolutionary bend of the end-time. Originally bring to the modern world various visionary systems of ancient provenance, such as the glorious sky-serpent cosmology of the Desana of the Northwest Amazon.

(See Amazonian Cosmos by Gerardo Reichel-Dolmatoff. I cite this vision in my book on astral phylogenetics, Quest for the Zodiac, explaining how the sky-serpent-brain motif of Desana cosmology triggered a profound insight that allowed me to decode the stellar writing.)

The song-lines of the Australian Aborigines present another example of Visioneer tribe legacy that can enrich our self-knowledge as a species, and assist us to devise our evolutionary niche. Members of this tribe hold the long view of human experience. It would be tempting to try to inventory the grand schemes produced by various Visioneers since 1974, but such a list would be hard to be complete within the limits of this article. First and foremost, of course, is Gaia theory, developed by James Lovelock (atmospheric aspects) and Lynn Margulis (bioevolutionary aspects). It came to definition at the start of the 19742012 period, and is without question the overarching vision of our time, and the end-time.

The interactive model of Gaian planetary symbiosis is far from finished. I would say that we are only at the elementary stage of defining it. As the vision unfolds through the collaboration of many people, we are challenged to become discerning and selective, able to choose wisely among those visionary models that contribute to Gaia theory, perhaps even enhance and deepen it, and those which do not. A well-known example of Visioneer talent is the noosphere concept of Teilhard de Chardin (1881 - 1955), the French Jesuit priest and paleontologist who proposed a teleological scenario in which the culmination of human history at the "Omega Point" would be achieved through "Christogenesis," with the human species somehow completing the mission of Christ. Although Teilhard rejected the literal interpretation of Genesis, he retained the religious belief that Jesus Christ somehow embodied or focalized the fullness of human potential and holds the Omega Point until humanity can advance to it.

This Christocentric view strongly recalls the teachings of Rudolf Steiner (1875 - 1925), the Austrian philosopher and founder of Anthroposophy, who regarded Jesus Christ as the "representative of mankind." The works of Steiner and Teilhard exemplify what I call totalistic male-mind models in which feminine, ecofeminist, or Sophianic aspects of cosmology are downplayed, if not entirely absent.

The vast scope of such visionary scenarios appeals to many people, despite these (to me) serious shortcomings. Some leading voices in the counterculture find in Teilhard's noosphere a prefiguration of the Internet as a global collective mind in cyberspace. In The Seeker's Handbook (1991, coming into the nodal midpoint), I ventured a tentative short list of theories of planetarization: * Teilhard's orthogenesis * Dane Rudhyar's vision of eonics and the shishta, the avant-garde of planetary evolution * McLuhan's Gutenberg galaxy and the global village * Oliver Reiser's cosmic humanism and embryogenesis (lately reprised by John Major Jenkins for 2012 ruminations ) * the evolutionary spiral of Barbara Marx Hubbard * the Aquarian conspiracy of Marilyn Ferguson - this last being a summary of visionary models and programs, rather than a model itself Obviously, the list is paltry. Today it could be expended by a factor of ten. It would have to include everything from Terence McKenna's timewave (also closely linked to 2012 calendrics) to Irving Lazlo's connectivity hypothesis, and on and on. Ken Wilbur, who is by now regarded as the tenured dean of Visioneers, would have to be included. I only include him to admit that I exclude him.

I can't read Ken Wilbur. Nor can I get my head around a great many of these grandiose schemes.

Truth be told, I have a strong aversion to totalistic male-mind models, even when they are produced by women such as Barbara Marx Hubbard. I am also in diametrical disagreement with Hubbard's view, shared by many others, that the human species is the glory-crowned animal at the growing point of millions of years of cosmic evolution. I don't believe that selfconsciousness in our species is a great achievement, toward which all of nature have been laboring for untold eons. I am more inclined to view it as our worst handicap, the ego hang-up of a wounded animal that has lost its way. I am slipping into I-language here because, considering the "Sophianic vision of the Mysteries" developed in this site and in my new book, Not in His Image, I myself might be placed among the Visioneers tribe, perhaps in competition with the names on the marquee. But there is no competition. I do not compete. The Sophianic vision based on the sacred myth of the fallen goddess is not my invention.

It is a legacy I have recovered and restored. I would not place myself in the Visioneer tribe, but among the Sustainers, in the clan of deep ecology. I have not developed a cosmic evolutionary scheme of vast scope and detail. That's not been my calling in this life, although for a long time I thought it was. Because I worked in astrology and naked-eye astronomy, I thought that I was a cosmologist, an originator, but it would be more accurate to say that I am a teacher of cosmology and a consumer advocate of cosmologies. I assess and critique the master schemes, but I do not offer one of my own.

(The system of astral phylogenetics I present in Quest for the Zodiac is not a cosmological scheme, it is a cosmographic method, a way of decoding the endowment of an individual out of the genomic potential of the species.) Bioneers, founded by Kenny Asubel and Nina Simons, is the flagship event of the tribe of Visioneers. At bioneers the five tribes converge, and members of the Visioneer tribe are often invited to give plenary talks, providing a sense of holistic orientation for a vast diversity of projects and programs. Clearing houses such as Esalen, the Noetic Institute, Omega, Hollyhock, also provide platforms for Visioneers to hold the talking stick.

The biomimicry of Jeanine Benyus is an offering from the Sustainers to the Visioneers, a savory evolutionary potlatch. I would probably place Terence McKenna among the Orgiastics, but he is known for his Visioneer-like modeling genius. Members of the Visioneers tribe include not only those who produce the defining visions and cosmic scenarios, but also those who embrace and propagate them. The cosmic model of Brian Swimme, "The Story of the Universe," has spawned an entire movement in which other people spread the evolutionary myth that Swimme initially articulated. So much for a rundown of the five end-time tribes. In the Next World, we will find ourselves living on a five-tribe planet.

People who represent the five tribes and speak of their hopes and fears for emergent communities in the future can be heard on futureprimitive.org, the sister site of metahistory.org, produced and broadcast by Joanna Harcourt Smith. Many other examples could be cited (The Nature Conservancy, for instance.) I have certainly overlooked some of the more obvious and vivid. It would be fun to make an inventory of tribal activities. Any volunteers? The characterization of the tribes is not a game for stereotyping people. It is a loose frame for recognition. Tribal identity is a volunteer process. The Next World will be discovered in the eyes of those who bring it forth.

As Thoreau noted at Walden Pond, the great adventure of each day, which we each share with the sun, is to make the day.

The End of the New Age Time does not end when the defining moment of the end-time comes in 2012, but time is running out for a lot of things humans do. Among the activities that are getting close to their expiration date, I would place new age spirituality.

Many of you who are reading this article to the end might think that new age spirituality, in some respects, at least, points the way to the end-time and what's possible in the coming shift, but I would suggest another view. I sense that much that passes for spirituality today will be shed rapidly as we enter a time when real spiritual trials, formidable tests of intent and imagination, are forced upon us, individually and collectively. With the acceleration toward 2012, the game may be expiring for new age pretensions and empowerment regimes such as come under the catch-all term, "shamanism." This may sound extremely perverse on my part, I realize. But hold on a sec. I have been following the New Age from its inception out of the Psychedelic Revolution of the 1960s. I wrote a critical guidebook to the phenomenon of alternative spirituality, a rather naive work, but useful nonetheless. I do not say casually that new age spirituality is expiring. I say it with a sober view toward how transformation comes out of death, when an impulse is genuine and rooted in the evolutionary potential of humankind.

By this I mean that all that has been so far categorized as new age spirituality may have been, up to now, the mere husk of a deeper, richer fruit. The New Age, fraught with so much pretending and false pretence, so much phoniness and disguised narcissism, will have served its purpose well if now it leads to something truly genuine that transcends it. The discovery of the Next Age will come in part through the end of the New Age as a phenomenon of spiritual naivety uncritically embraced by many who are seeking a genuine commitment to humanity... but this demise might open the way into a deeper path, the way of the double, the shapeshifter, Lord of the Evening Star... Xolotl.

Back to Contents

The Party of Xolotl Magic and Initiation Among the end-time Tribes Andalucia February 2007 In the 73rd moon of the end-time

Dani tribeman drinking iced tea, Irian Jaya, Indonesia, 1997. In Peuples by Pierre de Vollombreuse and Edgar Morin Flammarion, Paris, 2006

Mixing and mingling with the end-time tribes is a strange lot of free-lance wizards on whom one hardly dares to put a name.

Shamans, they are. But shamans of another order, whose lineage extends from the future as much as from the past. These wizards have an imaginative flair, the gift for magical realism (more below).

They can be elusive, but they are strangely, disarmingly direct when it comes to imparting the initiatory secrets of their trade. Exhibiting a paradoxical mix of arrogance and humility, they are fine teachers, although they do not belong to any tradition, school, or educational program. They are generous and ruthless, but also capricious. And in social and spiritual style, they are occasionally brutal. One thing they are not is fashionable, unless you count the occasional personal fetish such as the spiffy mesh tie worn by the gentleman pictured above. But shamanism, let's face it, is pretty fashionable these days. It is the height of trendiness in some circles. The craze has been building for quite a while.

Peter Furst's Flesh of the Gods (published in 1972, right on the far node of the 1972 - 2012 interval) set the standard for anthropological studies that made hallucinogens legitimate, finally overthrowing Eliade's opinion (reconsidered at the end of his life) that the use of psychoactive plants belongs to the decadent phase of shamanism. Since Furst, shamanism has become the central subject of anthropology as well as the sacred pastime of the drug culture.

And beyond the counterculture, it has engendered pop obsessions including everything from ayahuasca tourism to communal drumming in the park.

Serpents of Wisdom Conversation on the Plaza in Santa Fe around 1974: "Hey John, have you heard all this talk about shamanism? Some people are saying it's the oldest religion on earth." "Hmmm. Well, if it's that old, how much longer do they expect it to last?" Shamanism was the radical chic of the 1990s, and coming into the 21th century it seems to be holding strong, but could this be a sunset phenomemon? Do I risk sounding extremely perverse (once again) by posing such a question?

Let me qualify: Could it be that the present ubiquity of the phenomenon - with everybody and his cousin now claiming to be a shaman - might give way to something at once more discreet and more demanding, a shamanic order that does not announce itself as such? This would be

the party of Xolotl. In the spirit of magical realism, I will write of the party as if it already exists. The party of Xolotl is definitely an order, not another tribe among the tribes, but the order encompasses and permeates all tribal activities. Think of the tribes as trees, great manybranched and many-rooted wonders, leafed with countless expressions of personalized creativity and steadied by massive trunks of communal solidarity. The five families of tribal trees - Originals, Orgiastics, Sustainers, Evolvers, and Visioneers - represent the emergent human community of the end-time.

Then the hidden shamanic order, the party of wily and elusive crypto-shamans, would be the bone-white angel-hair mesh of underground mycelium in mycorrhizal relationship with the family trees.

Wasson (in Soma: Divine Mushroom of Immortality): "Since 1885 mycologists have recognized the mycorrhizal relationships between certain species of mushrooms, and certain species of trees..." How convenient that someone noticed. "Be ye wise as serpents and harmless as doves." This adage, attributed to Jesus, may be one of merely three lines in the New Testament that reflect some genuine Gnostic insight.

The other two would be, "Ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free, " and "If thine eye be single, thy whole body shall be full of light." All three lines play on the same theme: the paranormal faculties (siddhis) of those who master the serpent power, kundalini. I have argued extensively that the gnostikoi of the Pagan Mysteries were kundalini adepts. They did not control the serpent power - no one does - but allowed themselves to be supple channels for it. They mastered its effects by achieving states of steady concentration free of hallucinations.

This type of concentration, achieved while standing with eyes open, is requisite for observing the Organic Light. One effect of this sublime encounter is a sense of exquisite tenderness, infinite softness, for the luminosity of Sophia's primary substance body is soft. The Organic

Light has a texture comparable to marshmallow. (I originally considered calling it the Mallow Light, and do call it so in certain writings on Gaian biophysics.) Witnessing the Light makes us "gentle as doves." Another effect is that you see truth, you do not merely understand it. In ancient times when cultural and literary conventions followed the educational lead of the telestai, the Mystery School teachers, the Greek word aletheia used to mean both "truth" and "reality." This is the norm in some Gnostic writings, and the same sense occurs in Plato. What is ultimately true is Reality itself.

Only Truth is real. Beholding the Organic Light, "ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall set you free," because in the omnipresent soft luminosity you see the Suchness, the primordial Void that is Shunyata, not emptiness but a fullness, a self-radiant plenum in which the truth of every possible thought, emotion, and perception reaches pure and paramount ripeness, and reaches it, and reaches it.... "Ripeness is all," Goethe said, he who was used to contemplating nature "intensively" to observe what happens within the senses, rather than merely what the senses present as an external, seemingly finished product. The Organic Light is rich in content: a well of living information, a fountainhead of boundless, self-articulating intelligence.

Asian traditions call the realization it affords sambija samadhi, "perfect concentration with seed," contrasted to nirbija samadha, "concentration without seed." In The Seeker's Handbook (1991), I explained that the first is knowing nothing through knowing everything, and the second is knowing everything through knowing nothing. It's fun to have options.. Such matters would be - will be - routine tradecraft for the party of Xolotl, the technicians of the sacred who move surreptitiously among the end-time tribes. Technicians, they are. But they may often appear as poets, novelists, dancers, musicians, herbalists, body-workers, stoneworkers, animal-keepers, and simple artisans who do not openly disclose their adept status.

There is a harlequin aspect to the dog-headed end-time guides, although some of them are somber, prone to dress in black and wear silver and coral ornaments, like Silvio Manuel. Some of them sit modestly aside, grinning in the dark. Xolotl is dog-headed because in occult jargon that animal represents clairaudience, hearing in the canine frequencies.

The party of Xolotl have various occult faculties, but most notably the capacity to hear subvocally - hear and transmit. Jean Delville's drawing of Parsifal was done around 1885 at the height of the Occult Revival in Europe. Delville was associated with the "20" and the Rose + Croix, artistic movements

permeated with esotericism. In this stylized image, he depicts the secret of the dog-headed clairaudience: the eustacian tubes, columns of air that work like antennae to mediate frequencies beyond the range of normal hearing.

He shows the columns shooting down from Parsifal's ears, and around the head, the horns of clairvoyance, another set of antennae but receptive to light rather than sound, particularly the soft, lunar Organic Light. Delville wanted to depict Parsifal as the example of the trained initiate able to send and receive clairvoyantly and clairaudiently. He could as well have been representing one of Xolotl's crew.

The serpent current in the spine bends like a fiddlehead fern into a three-forked knot of warm fire in the soma chakra, a psychosomatic center beneath the heart, known only to siddhas and excluded from the usual model of the chakras. Delville represents it symbolically by the Hebrew letter Shin, "divine fire." The party of Xolotl may appear cold, aloof and austere, even threatening. But to know these wizards intimately is to touch the secret candor (warmth) they embody, inflected in sexual flair and erotic finesse. The serpents of wisdom move among the end-time tribes like - well, like soft, feathery serpents.

They slither among categories and terms, evading and subverting cultural codes and memes, but they are clear and explicit in their syntax.

Their muse is language itself, the consummate whore and ultimate shapeshifter.

Shock Therapy There is a close parallel between Xolotl and Kali.

Consider the way Kali is depicted in her role of Tripurasundari, destroyer of the three worlds at the end of Kali Yuga, when civilization goes down in fire and flood: naked, adorned with a necklace of severed heads, drinking blood and eating carrion, she dances ecstatically on the body of the inert Shiva, her consort.

This is a mythic image of anesthetic shock, the kind that comes over humanity as it faces extinction by natural catastrophes, as well as by psychological catastrophes, the breakdown of ordinary life, the shattering of paradigms, the loss of all expectations, the immolation of faith, and the end of all hope. Today we are on the verge of witnessing a collective manifestation of what Stan Grof calls "spiritual emergencies."

His recent book, When the Impossible Happens, presents a vivid inventory of such emergencies. Newari style thanka, Katmandu, 1999. Shamanism and Tantra in the Himalayas, Muller-Ebeling, Ratsch et al. In an unparalleled career spanning fifty years, commencing with clinical observation of thousands of LSD sessions, including his own, Grof has shown that traumatic experiences normally dismissed as due to "mental breakdown" or "mental illness" are actually opportunities to break through into non-ordinary reality and acquire paranormal perception.

The 2012 end-time marks a global pandemic of such opportunities. It signals a world gone mad, with millions of crazed and helpless people stunned by the loss of their habits of living and terrified on a daily basis by the scale and severity of geophysical changes. Imagine the look of dumbfounded horror on the faces of people helplessly caught in catastrophic geophyical changes such as the sudden rise of sea levels, earthquakes, and violent storms: this is the expression of Xolotl, blank-eyed and aghast. The red mouth recalls the bloody grin of Kali. The head is a skull, like the face of a shaman who turns magically into a skeleton, and the elaborate ears suggest the dog-like powers of hypertonicity.

On his torso, Xolotl has a kind of armor-plating, an insectoid or armadillo belly, but there are two round holes (for burning incense) in the place of the soma chakra and the solar plexus: heart and guts traumatically pierced by the awesome spectacle of mass-scale destruction. Yet this horrendous trauma has another face, as Grof has taught for so many years: physical and psychosomatic traumas present a shock course in the acquisition of paranormal abilities.

When ordinary reality crumbles before our eyes, non-ordinary reality dawns.

Quetzalcoatl has two brothers. One is the competing shaman, Tezcatlipoca, Lord of the Smoking Mirror. The other is his twin brother, Xolotl. Aztec statuary depicts the two deities Quetzalcoatl and Xolotl back to back, joined into a single, Janus-faced entity. The vast spiritual emergency to be undergone by the human species in ever-increasing numbers, with natural disasters, social violence, and outright madness escalating up to and beyond 2012, will open the seals of paranormal faculties and burst the floodgates of nonordinary reality.

As the world humans have made comes apart in convulsions of fire and flood, a world will arise anew, but first within human perception, because seeing the Next World comes with traumatic extrapolation of the senses toward non-ordinary reality, in the very moment we behold the destruction of the existing world. The 2012 end-time will bring physical destruction on an unimaginable scale - this is not a prophecy but a common sense inference based on observable events and data, such as the meltdown rate of the Greenland ice-shelf (dystropic feedback). It entails a total planetary makeover in parallel with a visionary awakening and plunge into altered states and paranormal perception, a shift into evolutional anomaly and shamanic magic.

The scale of natural law will be reversed: instead of survival depending upon everyone's conformity to consensus reality, it will depend on some individuals entering and navigating the realms of non-ordinary reality. Some evidence of this shift from normal to paranormal can be seen in traces of human activity through previous extinctions. The painted caves of Southern France and the northern coast of Spain, such as Lascaux and Altamira, date from the close of the Upper Paleolithic and deglaciation of Europe around 9,500 BCE.

Archeologists estimate that these extensive paintings range from 22,000-9,000 BCE, indicating that a good deal of this artistic activity (thought to be closely related to shamanic visionary states) occurred while some groups of hardy folk were living through the last Ice Age. But in December 1994, a remarkable discovery was made in the Ardeche region of south central France. The Chauvet Cave displays art work that is not only 15,000 years older than Lascaux and Altamira, it is artistically and esthetically more finished, more sophisticated. This discovery proved that cave painting in more remote times was, both in technique and representation, more evolved than the art that survived from the close of the Paleolithic Era.

It suggests that access to non-ordinary perception, including shamanic rapport with animal powers ubiquitously depicted in those caves, and the gender balance suggested by erotic markings and goddess effigies, declined from a peak that may be identified temporally as the crisis point of extinction going into the last Ice Age. In other words, the few survivors of the last minor extinction event were traumatized into altered states of perception and entered nonordinary reality in ways that allowed them to survive by magical-shamanic practices, evident in the art of these caves.

They survived by practical skills, of course, but I would argue that their practical skills were, for the most part, acquired magically. Learning from the animals how to live, choose food, find water, learning from the moon and stars how to formally order their activities and transmit their generational experience in long-term narratives, and so forth - are not abilities that can be gained through trial and error alone. They require, and reflect, magical enhancement. What if, in the long run, the survival capacity of our species depends on supernatural experiences?

This may be a good question to ponder throughout the 2012 end-time.

Gaian Mercy For those who lived through the Ice Age, practical and magical skills were complementary. But these skills declined slowly over many millennia, and split apart. Hence early Neolithic cave relics and rock art are markedly inferior to what preceded them in the Paleolithic. We did not evolve from grunting, hairy cave people who hacked out stone implements: we evolved from handicapped cave people who themselves were degenerate heirs of far more skilled, sophisticated primitives.

And these skilled, sophisticated primitives were themselves the diaspora of civilizations destroyed by a combination of natural and human-made factors. The mark of such civilizations was high attainment of social order and technological accomplishment at the expense of the dissociation of the magical and practical faculties which, working together, comprise the dual psychosomatic endowment of the human species. We lose our survival sense as access to non-ordinary reality becomes less and less common, and even comes to be rejected entirely. This, I would propose, is a peculiar evolutionary rule of the human species.

Time and time again, Stan Grof brings attention to the baffling yet widely accepted denial of the healing, life-directing value of non-ordinary experience. As we come forward in history, paranormal perception and altered states of cognition are not only dismissed by science (although previously they engendered science) and rejected by religion (although previously they informed religion), they are deemed anathema in society worldwide, if not dismissed as pure silliness. * What is to be made of this situation? * Why in our time in history is it ridiculous and unacceptable to have or confess to having experiences of non-ordinary reality? Ask the party of Xolotl.

They will say this: Behold the face the dark twin of Quetzalcoatl and see there the expression of our own petrified horror as we enter the endgame of civilization. (And hey, did the Aztecs know something about the endgame of civilization!).

See the dumbfounded terror of what's to come, when millions of people realize they cannot face the makeover of the planet because they have denied those very faculties that would equip them for "spiritual emergencies" of the magnitude now beginning to overtake us. But see, also, how you can awaken to the shamanic survival power of human imagination, and access our inborn gifts for magic, mutation, and transmigration. Recall Kali dancing orgiastically astride the inert Shiva.

Here is an image of collective anesthesia, Gaia's merciful way of allowing people en masse to desensitize themselves when the moment for Her cosmetic makeover arrives, so that they will be too stupefied to suffer from horrific death, bodily injury, trauma and loss. Gaia exhibits the same law of mercy throughout the animal kingdom where, for instance, the gazelle brought down by the cheetah does not suffer the horror of being eaten alive, but undergoes a shift of consciousness and bodily sensation due to specific chemicals released by the mortal strike, the lethal bite, chemicals that activate a trance state of blissful anesthesia.

We have all seen this happen with cats and mice, with the mouse clearly in an altered state. Humans who have survived attacks by lions, tigers, and grizzlies report how they are plunged

into a semi-comatose state of bliss. They do not feel the pain of being mauled to near-death, but are caught up in a state of ecstatic anesthesia. The inert Shiva depicts the fate Gaia has prepared for the vast majority of the human species leading into the extinction now underway - but not just that. Shiva is also the autochthonous god of the wilderness, long worshipped by hunters and shamanic tribes in Dravidia, Southern India, the land of the sacred cobra. Shiva is the honored deity of siddha yoga, the tradition in which Stan and Christina Grof were intimately involved for many years. Lord Shiva is the master of animal powers and the patron saint of those who acquire paranormal faculties, siddhis.

His sleeping form represents the "general anesthesia" of humanity, yes, but also the occult or sleeping powers of the self-selecting few who will face the end-time with heightened perception, empowered by a magical intention to survive.

Poor Carlitos The party of Xolotl is the party of the Nahual. So what on earth is the party of the Nahual? Well, it's kind of a motif in a long novel, a serial novel.... Conversation on the Plaza in Santa Fe, circa 1989: "John, did you hear this shit: people are saying that Castaneda invented don Juan. He just made up everything in those books of his." "Hmmm. I wouldn't be surprised if Castaneda did invent don Juan. What I wonder about is, who invented Castaneda?" Poor Carlitos.

Idolized by millions, his books published in twenty languages, his adventures the inspiration for a huge cult movement lasting over 30 years, Castaneda saw his secrecy violated, his personal history smeared in the face of the general public, his human foibles exposed, and his writings dismissed as phony shamanism, the invention of a schizophrenic poseur. Yet no matter what you may think of Castaneda, the magic he sowed in our minds is real.

Poor Carlitos was in the party of Xolotl, a creative genius and genuine end-time seer.

Forum discussion about CC I often wonder why, among all that is said about him, and since his death, predominantly against him, no one has remarked that the ten books he wrote - The Teachings of don Juan, A Separate Reality, Journey to Ixtlan, Tales of Power, The Second Ring of Power, The Eagle's Gift, The Power of Silence, The Art of Dreaming, Magical Passes, The Active Side of Infinity present a serial novel, a unitary masterpiece of magical realism. I am astounded that no one has yet made this observation.

Magical realism is the genre of fiction, mainly from Central and South America, associated with names such as Miguel Angel Asturias, Gabriel Garcia Marquez, and Julio Cortazar, but equally so with European writers such as Hermann Hesse and Italo Calvino. (I exclude the sophomoric mysticism of Brazilian Paolo Coehlo, an obvious stooge of the Catholic Church disguised in Sufi wool.)

Castaneda would not, I think, be unhappy among this company, where he certainly deserves a place. The incomparable genius of Castaneda lies in how he got so many of us involved in his feat of magical realism, as participants and not merely readers, and how his fiction (if such it was) included so much shamanic lore that is durable, testable, and veracious. Magical realism is a guiding device of the party of Xolotl, some of whom write it, while others interpret and instil it. It is not merely a literary genre, it is an occult medium for narrative entrainment. In the hands of able tricksters, the "master narrative" is not a totalitarian scheme with closure, but a grounding and framing device, an heuristic and hermeneutic tool of immense suppleness.

The members of the party are deeply versed in literature and literary trends. Adepts of lucid syntax, they are well-read, critically and eclectically minded alchemists of the Word, like Dale Pendell. Magic realism is their natural mode of discourse. Probably the inceptive work in this genre was Don Quixote by Cervantes. Or was it Don Quixolotl?

Anyway, this novel, generally taken to be disenchanting satire of chivalry, was written right after the Conquest of Mexico, and there is a significant parallel here. Allow me to elaborate. We all know the extraordinary story of Montezuma and Cortez, and the downfall of the Aztecs. What no one knows is how the bloody Aztecs got to be there in the first place. Their arrival in central Mexico around 1250 is one of the more enigmatic events in world history. Something weird happened when this scruffy, bellicose tribe marched into the Valley of the

Moon and overthrew Toltec civilization, only to be overthrown themselves less than 300 years later, at which point in time they were annihilating themselves due to ritual ingestion of toxic doses of the royal addiction, chocolotl; hence their aberrant and psychotic behavior. Now, the curious thing is, the party of the Xolotl descends from the Toltec sorcerers who went into oblivion with the arrival of the Aztecs around 1250 CE. Readers of Castaneda will know that don Juan also attributed his lineage to the Toltecs, but insisted that the new sorcerers be distinguished from their ancient forebears.

The party of Xolotl is the outgrowth of the underground dissemination of the lost Toltec wisdom, raised to a higher octave and transplanted into the present by a retrograde magic operating from the future. This is how the Toltec adepts, past masters of serpent wisdom in MesoAmerica, worked out their survival - their transmigration in time, if you will. An elaborate technique, to say the least. But the old sorcerers were exceedingly intricate in their ways, as don Juan astutely noted. The party of Xolotl associated with the nagual Julian and other preceptors of Castaneda's lineage came out of oblivion sometime around 1740, if I recall correctly. The party of Xolotl who are intimately involved with facing the 2012 end-time emerged somewhat later, around 1850, the time Hermann Melville was writing Moby Dick.

Curiously, Melville is not usually included in the school of magical realism, but he surely ought to be. He may be regarded as the patron saint of the party in literary terms. Mardi is a flawed masterpiece of magical realism in which Melville tried to channel some erotic projections mixed with end-time visions set in Oceania.

The spiritual crisis he underwent while writing Moby Dick is typical of the "spiritual emergencies" recounted by Grof. In Melville's intense psychological trauma, undergone in hermetic solitude, we can see the birth pangs of the party of Xolotl that now move among the end-time tribes in America. Imaginatively speaking, the White Whale could be the Greenland ice-shelf.

Maya Blue Face In The Eagle's Gift, Castaneda presented his vision of the nahual's party, comprised of eight men and eight women, forming a line with arms linked in a DNA-like braid. Imagine a line of dancers in a kundalini conga. Don Juan said this was the form of the Plumed Serpent that allowed the party to transit as a unit to the other side.

To some minds, this image will suggest dematerialization, recalling the claim of Arguelles that in the 2012 end-time some people attuned to the right frequencies of awareness could be swept into another dimension on a cosmic beam emanating from the center of the galaxy. But is this literary image of Castaneda compatible with such a literal notion of off-planet transport? I have been asked on more than on occasion if the cosmic beam theory found in Arguelles' writings, and, in a different version, in the cataclysmic astrophysics of Paul LaViolette, relates to the fall of the Aeon Sophia from the Pleroma, the galactic core. As a mythological motif, the fall of the Goddess is unique and cannot be associated with "the fall of humanity," a notion refuted in Sethian Gnosticism.

Since humanity does not fall from a divine state, there is no need to return to the divine source. Pagan, non- and pre-Christian Gnosis set the aim of realizing divinity here and now on earth, in the realm of the senses, by a direct encounter with the indwelling goddess, Sophia. Wisdom is her name, diversity is her game, and novelty is the key to the importance of humanity in Her Dreaming, the imagination of the earth.

Escape from the planet by dematerialization or miraculous transport is not the option here, but knowing first hand the presence of the Nahual in this world always is. The Nahual is the Unknown, the Otherworld, the other side of what we know via the mind and senses in their ordinary modalities. The nahual, non-capitalized, is the member of the party of Xolotl who on any occasion points to the Unknown, sees it first, divines its effects, or otherwise indicates its presence to the party. (In Pagan Mysteries at Eleusis and elsewhere, the nahual was called the hierophant.)

This person is immediately recognized by the others as the nahual for that occasion. Sometimes the nahual is identified by the oracle of rubbed charcoal. The sound of small cubes of burnt wood grated together gently in the palm signals the hypertonic hearing that points, like a hunting dog, to the looming presence of the Nahual. The Nahual is not exactly the presence of the Aeon Sophia in her primary substance body, the epiphany of the Organic Light. It is the presence of the boundless cosmic reality, the truth of Shunyata, that looms behind the Light.

In that soft wellspring of shadowless luminosity, everything is knowable, but the Unknown looms over the knowable, and within the Unknown looms the Unknowable.

Castaneda carefully made this distinction between the Unknown and the Unknowable, explaining that the former is inexhausible, there being always infinitely more to know, but we cannot even know if the Unknowable is infinite or finite! (Vedanta and Kashmiri Shaivism make similar distinctions.) There is enormous salubrity in the Organic Light. Even a momentary glimpse of it bestows eternal youth and ineffable wisdom: "Never was a man in such pain but from that day he beholds the Stone, he cannot die in the week that follows immediately after. Nor will his complexion ever decline... If that person saw the Stone for two hundred years, his hair would never turn gray. Such power does the Stone bestow that flesh and bone immediately acquire youth." So is the Grail described in Arthurian legend (Parzival, Ch. 9). The Organic Light is a wellspring of healing power. In the 2012 end-time and after, Gaia will heal herself with catastrophic changes, but many other miraculous healings will occur as the geophysical shift unfolds. In the tradition of siddha yoga followed by the Grofs, the appearance of Blue Person is highly auspicious. People see the Person, or sometimes the Blue Pearl, spontaneously in altered states. The traditional depiction of Krishna with blue skin points to this mystical experience. The 2012 end-time may portend sightings of Blue Person on an unprecedented scale. The Nahual associated with the Organic Light is a place one can look into, and go into if you have the adequate stealth, but some entities, including human beings or humanoid forms such as Blue Person, inhabit it permanently. Among these are the Maya Blue Face, a tight clan of diviners and healers who continually "make the rounds" to the galactic center and back.

They are the Lords of Palenque, allies of P. azurescens, the most potent of psilocybin mushrooms (left). Azura: blue face. They are the Asuras of Hindu-Persian mythology, traditionally portrayed as fearsome sorcerers and gorgon-like monsters to veil their true identity and protect their benevolent mission from snoops and sidewinders. The flesh of the Maya Blue Face is like clay, soft and porous, its color fluctuating from greyish blue to rich, dark azure. Their faces show the profile of local royalty depicted in the murals of the Classical Maya: sloped forehead, oval eyes, wide rounded nose like a fat slice of melon, long ears.

Most distinctively, they bear on their cheeks the teardrop marking of the highest shamanic skill, predation, which is also the source of the deepest healing of which humans are capable. Blue

Face shamans are warriors gifted with lethal and baffling abilities, powers for killing and torture, and flesh-eating savvy.

They acquired the supreme skill through a millennial pact with the great predator cats, the jaguar and puma, who also have teardrop markings. Linda Tucker discovered the same symbiotic link between prey and predator among the White Lions of Timbavati.

The Zulu Lion shaman Credo Mutwa explained the link to her, connecting the lion to celestial patterns. The connection is pan-terrestrial, but the Maya Blue Face are special agents of the periodic return to the celestial center.

They know the spidery tracks to the galactic core and out again into the spiraling arms. To see the teardrop markings of the Maya Blue Face is one of the most poignant experiences of planetary mysticism, for the tatooed shapes send a message that is eternally true, at once infinitely sad and infinitely hopeful: only those who know how to kill magically can resurrect the human species from extinction. The Blue Face shamans do not enact predation, but they use the feline savvy of the great predatory species to guide and heal whomever they encounter on their rounds.

Emanating the deliciously feral presence of the big hunting cats, they are benign and serene, the time-honored elders of the party of Xolotl.

Children of Novelty The 2012 end-time is a global event, encompassing the entire planet and all its inhabitants. Geophysically, it seems to have kicked off in Asia, in Iran, Thailand and Sumatra. But the Western world, the Americas, is the place where it will be dramatically defined. There the younger generation are already deeply involved in the next evolutionary breakthrough, because the ground for a forward leap has been prepared in the Americas by the party of Xolotl since the 13th Century when the Toltec adepts went underground.

Many members of the five end-time tribes have party connections. The work of Xolotl adepts depends on their reception by the tribes. They are not self-proclaimed prophets, but sly masters of divination. Not guides, but guardians of the directive gnosis. Not messiahs, but no-nonsense mystics as able to navigate the apocalypse as to row a canoe. The return of Xolotl will come to expression in the West in lavish and outrageous fashion. The Orgiastics are the Dionysion avant garde for this revelation. The 2012 end-time signals a spiritual emergency of the entire human species. The other plant and animal species going extinct by the hundreds each day are preparing us for this, previewing the experience, in some sense preparing us for it. Kali's apocalyptic dance represents the catastrophic situation to which the party of Xolotl will apply their occult skills, but in a highly selective manner. There are only two responses to extinction: anesthetic denial or sudden awakening of non-ordinary states.

The face of Xolotl mirrors both to us, as explained above. Stan Grof's When the Impossible Happens (2006) could be regarded as a survival handbook for the end-time. It contains no prophecy or speculation, but presents a rich inventory of nonordinary experience: * extrasensory perception * telepathy * out-of-body transport * astral projection * precognition * clairvoyance * psychometry * materialization and dematerialization *

near-death experiences * after-death survival and communication with the dead * lucid dreaming * channeling * rebirthing * holotropic states * alien contact * synchronicities * reincarnational memory * peaceful and wrathful deities * naked awareness of the Clear Light of the Void * spontaneous kundalini awakening with kriyas * remote viewing * healing anomalies * conscious access to genetic and phylogenetic codes * visionary teachings and cosmic epiphanies *

verifiable psychic feats such as picturing places one has never been in this life and speaking in unknown tongues Grof writes: It is clear there is no plausible explanation for these phenomena within the conceptual framework of mainstream psychiatry and psychology... They represent a formidable conceptual challenge for traditional science, and they have a paradigm-breaking potential. (When the Impossible Happens, p.165. Emphasis added.) Precisely so: experiences such as these, rather than any amount of social argument or scientific proof or messianic persuasion, will shatter the blind paradigms that bind us to the selfdestructive behavior now escalating toward the 2012 end-time. To Grof's impressive inventory I would add ISP and bilocation (often attained or anticipated in lucid dreaming), involving the plasmic double. ISP, the complement to ESP, is infrasensory perception: seeing in participation what unfolds intensively within the senses, not merely what they reveal in the outer world, seemingly independent of the observer.

Bilocation is physical embodiment in two places at once, fully and simultaneously conscious of both places and both bodies - perhaps the paramount thrill in the cosmos. The hilarious antics of don Genaro illustrate some of the wilder possibilities of bilocation for cosmic clowning. Grof's account of his bilocation ("Temptations in a Non-Local Universe: Failed Experiment in Astral Projection") provides sobering and cautionary insight into the pitfalls and aberrations of this most occult of occult phenomena. All the anomalous experiences Grof describes are relevant to the end-time, but most particularly the NDE (near death experience). The 6th extinction will be a near-death experience for the entire human species. This is Gaia's way to operate the higher mutation codes and affect transpeciation, consistent with her divine purposes.

She is capable of resurrecting any species - on evidence for this claim, investigate the Cambrian explosion - and the Maya Blue Face are uniquely complicit in how she does so. In the NDE (near death experience) people are drawn into a tunnel of the Organic Light via a particular channel that leads to the Treasury of Lights described in the non-NHL Gnostic texts, the Books of Jeu and the Pistis Sophia.

Some will go the entire route and expire, others will return, endowed with transmigratory secrets. Such secrets cannot be applied without intimate parallel knowledge of nature, especially reproduction in the plant kingdom and cultivation of fungal spores. (Amanita witch with her animal familiar, a fox.) In Brahmanical teachings pirated by Madame Blavatsky and upscaled by Dane Rudhyar, members of the end-time tribes who manage transmigration are called the shishta, "seed people."

They are in a literal sense people who preserve and disseminate seeds, like Dominique Guillet, founder of Seeds of Kokopelli. In another sense, the shishta carry forward in time the seeds of culture, mainly symbolic systems, math, music, and languages, insuring their continuity through the precarious passage of extinction. The shishta are the ultimate survivalists and children of novelty. New tricks require new tricksters.

These vital young warrior-lovers are the beneficiaries of magic and initiation in the end-time, the spiritual offspring of impeccable parents, dreamers and stalkers in the party of Xolotl.

Back to Contents

20.

by Brandon Keim April 17, 2009 from WiredScience Website

For scary speculation about the end of civilization in 2012, people usually turn to followers of cryptic Mayan prophecy, not scientists.

But thats exactly what a group of NASA-assembled researchers described in a chilling report issued earlier this year on the destructive potential of solar storms. Entitled "Severe Space Weather Events - Understanding Societal and Economic Impacts," it describes the consequences of solar flares unleashing waves of energy that could disrupt Earths magnetic field, overwhelming high-voltage transformers with vast electrical currents and shortcircuiting energy grids.

Such a catastrophe would cost the United States "$1 trillion to $2 trillion in the first year," concluded the panel, and "full recovery could take 4 to 10 years." That would, of course, be just a fraction of global damages. Good-bye, civilization. Worse yet, the next period of intense solar activity is expected in 2012, and coincides with the presence of an unusually large hole in Earths geomagnetic shield. But the report received relatively little attention, perhaps because of 2012s supernatural connotations. Mayan astronomers supposedly predicted that 2012 would mark the calamitous "birth of a new era." Whether the Mayans were on to something, or this is all just a chilling coincidence, wont be known for several years.

But according to Lawrence Joseph, author of "Apocalypse 2012 - A Scientific Investigation into Civilizations End," "Ive been following this topic for almost five years, and it wasnt until the report came out that this really began to freak me out." Wired.com talked to Joseph:

Wired.com: Do you think its coincidence that the Mayans predicted apocalypse on the exact date when astronomers say the sun will next reach a period of maximum turbulence? Lawrence Joseph: I have enormous respect for Mayan astronomers. It disinclines me to dismiss this as a coincidence. But I recommend people verify that the Mayans prophesied what people say they did. I went to Guatemala and spent a week with two Mayan shamans who spent 20 years talking to other shamans about the prophecies. They confirmed that the Maya do see

2012 as a great turning point. Not the end of the world, not the great off-switch in the sky, but the birth of the fifth age.

Wired.com: Isnt a great off-switch in the sky exactly whats described in the report? Joseph: The chair of the NASA workshop was Dan Baker at the Laboratory for Atmospheric and Space Physics. Some of his comments, and the comments he approved in the report, are very strong about the potential connection between coronal mass ejections and power grids here on Earth. Theres a direct relationship between how technologically sophisticated a society is and how badly it could be hurt. Thats the meta-message of the report. I had the good fortune last week to meet with John Kappenman at MetaTech. He took me through a meticulous two-hour presentation about just how vulnerable the power grid is, and how it becomes more vulnerable as higher voltages are sent across it. He sees it as a big antenna for space weather outbursts.

Wired.com: Why is it so vulnerable? Joseph: Ultra-high voltage transformers become more finicky as energy demands are greater. Around 50 percent already cant handle the current theyre designed for. A little extra current coming in at odd times can slip them over the edge. The ultra-high voltage transformers, the 500,000- and 700,000-kilovolt transformers, are particularly vulnerable. The United States uses more of these than anyone else. China is trying to implement some million-kilovolt transformers, but Im not sure theyre online yet. Kappenman also points out that when the transformers blow, they cant be fixed in the field. They often cant be fixed at all. Right now theres a one- to three-year lag time between placing an order and getting a new one. According to Kappenman, theres an as-yet-untested plan for inserting ground resistors into the power grid. It makes the handling a little more complicated, but apparently isnt anything the operators cant handle. Im not sure hed say these could be in place by 2012, as its difficult to establish standards, and utilities are generally regulated on a state-by-state basis.

Youd have quite a legal thicket. But it still might be possible to get some measure of protection in by the next solar climax.

Wired.com: Why cant we just shut down the grid when we see a storm coming, and start it up again afterwards?

Joseph: Power grid operators now rely on one satellite called ACE, which sits about a million miles out from Earth in whats called the gravity well, the balancing point between sun and earth. It was designed to run for five years. Its 11 years old, is losing steam, and there are no plans to replace it. ACE provides about 15 to 45 minutes of heads-up to power plant operators if somethings coming in. They can shunt loads, or shut different parts of the grid. But to just shut the grid off and restart it is a $10 billion proposition, and there is lots of resistance to doing so. Many times these storms hit at the north pole, and dont move south far enough to hit us. Its a difficult call to make, and false alarms really piss people off. Lots of money is lost and damage incurred.

But in Kappenmans view, and in lots of others, this time burnt could really mean burnt.

Wired.com: Do you live your life differently now? Joseph: Ive been following this topic for almost five years. It wasnt until the report came out that it began to freak me out. Up until this point, I firmly believed that the possibility of 2012 being catastrophic in some way was worth investigating. The report made it a little too real. That document cant be ignored. And it was even written before the THEMIS satellite discovered a gigantic hole in Earths magnetic shield. Ten or twenty times more particles are coming through this crack than expected. And astronomers predict that the way the suns polarity will flip in 2012 will make it point exactly the way we dont want it to in terms of evading Earths magnetic field.

Its an astonishingly bad set of coincidences.

Wired.com: If Barack Obama said, "Lets prepare," and there werent any bureaucratic hurdles, could we still be ready in time? Joseph: I believe so. Id ask the President to slipstream behind stimulus package funds already appropriated for smart grids, which are supposed to improve grid efficiency and help transfer high energies at peak times. Theres a framework there. Working within that, you could carve out some money for the ground resistors program, if those tests work, and have the initial momentum for cutting through the red tape. Itd be a place to start.

Wired.com talked to John Kappenman, CEO of electromagnetic damage consulting company MetaTech, about the possibility of geomagnetic apocalypse and how to stop it. Wired.com: Whats the problem? John Kappenman: Weve got a big, interconnected grid that spans across the country. Over the years, higher and higher operating voltages have been added to it. This has escalated our vulnerability to geomagnetic storms. These are not a new thing. Theyve probably been occurring for as long as the sun has been around.

Its just that weve been unknowingly building an infrastructure thats acting more and more like an antenna for geomagnetic storms. Wired.com: What do you mean by antenna? Kappenman: Large currents circulate in the network, coming up from the earth through ground connections at large transformers. We need these for safety reasons, but ground connections provide entry paths for charges that could disrupt the grid.

Wired.com: Whats your solution? Kappenman: What were proposing is to add some fairly small and inexpensive resistors in the transformers ground connections. The addition of that little bit of resistance would significantly reduce the amount of the geomagnetically induced currents that flow into the grid.

Wired.com: What does it look like? Kappenman: In its simplest form, its something that might be made out of cast iron or stainless steel, about the size of a washing machine.

Wired.com: How much would it cost? Kappenman: Were still at the conceptual design phase, but we think its do-able for $40,000 or less per resistor. Thats less than what you pay for insurance for a transformer.

Wired.com: And less than what youd willingly pay for insurance on civilization.

Kappenman: If youre talking about the United States, there are about 5,000 transformers to consider this for. The Electromagnetic Pulse Commission recommended it in a report they sent to Congress last year. Were talking about $150 million or so. Its pretty small in the grand scheme of things. Big power lines and substations can withstand all the other known environmental challenges. The problem with geomagnetic storms is that we never really understood them as a vulnerability, and had a design code that took them into account.

Wired.com: Can it be done in time? Kappenman: Im not in the camp thats certain a big storm will occur in 2012. But given time, a big storm is certain to occur in the future. They have in the past, and they will again. Theyre about one-in-400-year events. That doesnt mean it will be 2012. Its just as likely that it could occur next week.

Return to 2012 Return to Solar Storms and Earth's Electric Grid

21.

by Brandon Keim April 17, 2009 from WiredScience Website

For scary speculation about the end of civilization in 2012, people usually turn to followers of cryptic Mayan prophecy, not scientists.

But thats exactly what a group of NASA-assembled researchers described in a chilling report issued earlier this year on the destructive potential of solar storms. Entitled "Severe Space Weather Events - Understanding Societal and Economic Impacts," it describes the consequences of solar flares unleashing waves of energy that could disrupt Earths magnetic field, overwhelming high-voltage transformers with vast electrical currents and shortcircuiting energy grids.

Such a catastrophe would cost the United States "$1 trillion to $2 trillion in the first year," concluded the panel, and "full recovery could take 4 to 10 years." That would, of course, be just a fraction of global damages. Good-bye, civilization. Worse yet, the next period of intense solar activity is expected in 2012, and coincides with the presence of an unusually large hole in Earths geomagnetic shield. But the report received relatively little attention, perhaps because of 2012s supernatural connotations. Mayan astronomers supposedly predicted that 2012 would mark the calamitous "birth of a new era." Whether the Mayans were on to something, or this is all just a chilling coincidence, wont be known for several years.

But according to Lawrence Joseph, author of "Apocalypse 2012 - A Scientific Investigation into Civilizations End," "Ive been following this topic for almost five years, and it wasnt until the report came out that this really began to freak me out." Wired.com talked to Joseph:

Wired.com: Do you think its coincidence that the Mayans predicted apocalypse on the exact date when astronomers say the sun will next reach a period of maximum turbulence? Lawrence Joseph: I have enormous respect for Mayan astronomers. It disinclines me to dismiss this as a coincidence. But I recommend people verify that the Mayans prophesied what people say they did. I went to Guatemala and spent a week with two Mayan shamans who spent 20 years talking to other shamans about the prophecies. They confirmed that the Maya do see 2012 as a great turning point. Not the end of the world, not the great off-switch in the sky, but the birth of the fifth age.

Wired.com: Isnt a great off-switch in the sky exactly whats described in the report? Joseph: The chair of the NASA workshop was Dan Baker at the Laboratory for Atmospheric and Space Physics. Some of his comments, and the comments he approved in the report, are very strong about the potential connection between coronal mass ejections and power grids here on Earth. Theres a direct relationship between how technologically sophisticated a society is and how badly it could be hurt. Thats the meta-message of the report. I had the good fortune last week to meet with John Kappenman at MetaTech. He took me through a meticulous two-hour presentation about just how vulnerable the power grid is, and how it becomes more vulnerable as higher voltages are sent across it. He sees it as a big antenna for space weather outbursts.

Wired.com: Why is it so vulnerable? Joseph: Ultra-high voltage transformers become more finicky as energy demands are greater. Around 50 percent already cant handle the current theyre designed for. A little extra current coming in at odd times can slip them over the edge. The ultra-high voltage transformers, the 500,000- and 700,000-kilovolt transformers, are particularly vulnerable. The United States uses more of these than anyone else. China is trying to implement some million-kilovolt transformers, but Im not sure theyre online yet. Kappenman also points out that when the transformers blow, they cant be fixed in the field. They often cant be fixed at all. Right now theres a one- to three-year lag time between placing an order and getting a new one. According to Kappenman, theres an as-yet-untested plan for inserting ground resistors into the power grid. It makes the handling a little more complicated, but apparently isnt anything the operators cant handle. Im not sure hed say these could be in place by 2012, as its difficult to establish standards, and utilities are generally regulated on a state-by-state basis.

Youd have quite a legal thicket. But it still might be possible to get some measure of protection in by the next solar climax.

Wired.com: Why cant we just shut down the grid when we see a storm coming, and start it up again afterwards? Joseph: Power grid operators now rely on one satellite called ACE, which sits about a million miles out from Earth in whats called the gravity well, the balancing point between sun and earth. It was designed to run for five years. Its 11 years old, is losing steam, and there are no plans to replace it.

ACE provides about 15 to 45 minutes of heads-up to power plant operators if somethings coming in. They can shunt loads, or shut different parts of the grid. But to just shut the grid off and restart it is a $10 billion proposition, and there is lots of resistance to doing so. Many times these storms hit at the north pole, and dont move south far enough to hit us. Its a difficult call to make, and false alarms really piss people off. Lots of money is lost and damage incurred.

But in Kappenmans view, and in lots of others, this time burnt could really mean burnt.

Wired.com: Do you live your life differently now? Joseph: Ive been following this topic for almost five years. It wasnt until the report came out that it began to freak me out. Up until this point, I firmly believed that the possibility of 2012 being catastrophic in some way was worth investigating. The report made it a little too real. That document cant be ignored. And it was even written before the THEMIS satellite discovered a gigantic hole in Earths magnetic shield. Ten or twenty times more particles are coming through this crack than expected. And astronomers predict that the way the suns polarity will flip in 2012 will make it point exactly the way we dont want it to in terms of evading Earths magnetic field.

Its an astonishingly bad set of coincidences.

Wired.com: If Barack Obama said, "Lets prepare," and there werent any bureaucratic hurdles, could we still be ready in time? Joseph: I believe so. Id ask the President to slipstream behind stimulus package funds already appropriated for smart grids, which are supposed to improve grid efficiency and help transfer high energies at peak times. Theres a framework there. Working within that, you could carve out some money for the ground resistors program, if those tests work, and have the initial momentum for cutting through the red tape. Itd be a place to start.

Wired.com talked to John Kappenman, CEO of electromagnetic damage consulting company MetaTech, about the possibility of geomagnetic apocalypse and how to stop it. Wired.com: Whats the problem?

John Kappenman: Weve got a big, interconnected grid that spans across the country. Over the years, higher and higher operating voltages have been added to it. This has escalated our vulnerability to geomagnetic storms. These are not a new thing. Theyve probably been occurring for as long as the sun has been around.

Its just that weve been unknowingly building an infrastructure thats acting more and more like an antenna for geomagnetic storms. Wired.com: What do you mean by antenna? Kappenman: Large currents circulate in the network, coming up from the earth through ground connections at large transformers. We need these for safety reasons, but ground connections provide entry paths for charges that could disrupt the grid.

Wired.com: Whats your solution? Kappenman: What were proposing is to add some fairly small and inexpensive resistors in the transformers ground connections. The addition of that little bit of resistance would significantly reduce the amount of the geomagnetically induced currents that flow into the grid.

Wired.com: What does it look like? Kappenman: In its simplest form, its something that might be made out of cast iron or stainless steel, about the size of a washing machine.

Wired.com: How much would it cost? Kappenman: Were still at the conceptual design phase, but we think its do-able for $40,000 or less per resistor. Thats less than what you pay for insurance for a transformer.

Wired.com: And less than what youd willingly pay for insurance on civilization. Kappenman: If youre talking about the United States, there are about 5,000 transformers to consider this for. The Electromagnetic Pulse Commission recommended it in a report they sent to Congress last year. Were talking about $150 million or so. Its pretty small in the grand scheme of things.

Big power lines and substations can withstand all the other known environmental challenges. The problem with geomagnetic storms is that we never really understood them as a vulnerability, and had a design code that took them into account.

Wired.com: Can it be done in time? Kappenman: Im not in the camp thats certain a big storm will occur in 2012. But given time, a big storm is certain to occur in the future. They have in the past, and they will again. Theyre about one-in-400-year events. That doesnt mean it will be 2012. Its just as likely that it could occur next week.

Return to 2012 Return to Solar Storms and Earth's Electric Grid

22.